JP7132412B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

TECHNICAL FIELD The present invention relates to a game machine with big wins and small wins.

Conventionally , there has been a pachinko game machine capable of executing control in an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (see Patent Document 1, for example). The advantageous state of the gaming machine includes a big win game state and a small win game state.

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902

However, in a pachinko game machine with a setting function, the capacity of the main side may be squeezed by the setting function. Furthermore, it is also required to immediately check the settings.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine that enables quick confirmation of settings .

The game machine of means A is
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
setting means capable of setting a set value related to the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state;
setting confirmation control means capable of controlling a setting confirmation state in which the setting value set by the setting means can be confirmed;
interrupt processing execution means for executing interrupt processing capable of executing game-related processing;
variable means for changing between a first state advantageous to the player and a second state disadvantageous to the player;
a predetermined game execution means capable of executing a predetermined game a plurality of times for changing the variable means from the second state to the first state during the advantageous state;
variable timing means for timing a change period for changing the variable means to the first state;
normal variable display means for variably displaying the normal identification information and deriving and displaying the display result based on the passage of the game medium through the predetermined area;
normal variable display timing means for timing a normal variable display period for variable display of normal identification information;
special variable display means capable of variably displaying the special identification information and displaying the result of the variable display;
stop period clocking means for timing a variable display stop period from when the variable display of the special identification information is stopped to when the variable display of the next special identification information is started;
and an external output means capable of outputting a specific signal to the outside of the game machine,
The setting confirmation control means is capable of controlling the setting confirmation state when power supply to the game machine is started and before the interrupt process is executed,
The interrupt processing is executed after the setting confirmation state ends, and after the interrupt processing is executed, the setting confirmation state is not controlled until the power supply to the game machine is stopped,
When the power supply to the game machine is stopped while the change period is being clocked, and then the power supply to the game machine is resumed and the setting confirmation state is controlled, the setting confirmation state ends. The timing of the change period is interrupted until the setting confirmation state ends, and the timing of the change period is restarted;
When the power supply to the game machine is stopped while the normal variable display period is being clocked, and then the power supply to the game machine is resumed and the setting confirmation state is controlled, the setting confirmation state is changed. The timing of the normal variable display period is interrupted until the period ends, and the timing of the normal variable display period is resumed when the setting confirmation state is finished,
When the power supply to the game machine is stopped while the variable display stop period is being clocked, and then the power supply to the game machine is restarted and the setting confirmation state is controlled, the setting confirmation state is changed. The timing of the variable display stop period is interrupted until the end of the variable display stop period, and when the setting confirmation state ends, the time measurement of the variable display stop period is resumed,
The external output means is capable of outputting the specific signal when controlled to the setting confirmation state.
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to suitably perform the setting confirmation work .
The game machine of means 1 is
When a specific display result (for example, a big win pattern) is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, it is possible to control to an advantageous state (for example, a big win game state) for the player, and the specific display result is the display result of the variable display. A gaming machine that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a small winning game state) different from the advantageous state when a special display result (for example, a small winning pattern) different from the display result is derived and displayed,
a reserved storage means (for example, a first reserved storage buffer or a second reserved storage buffer) capable of storing information relating to variable display as reserved storage;
Determination means for determining whether to control to the advantageous state and whether to control to the special state based on the reserved storage (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process shown in FIG. 6);
flag information setting means (for example, CPU 103) for setting predetermined flag information according to the determination result of the determination means;
Execution means (for example, CPU 103) that executes a predetermined process according to the determination result of the determination means;
Pattern information storage means (for example, CPU 103 shown in FIG. 52) stores information on symbols to be derived and displayed as display results of variable display in a common pattern storage area irrespective of the type of pattern based on the determination result by the determination means. A part that executes the processing of step S557G shown),
The flag information setting means sets the flag information indicating that the control is to be in the advantageous state and the flag information that is to be controlled in the special state in a common flag storage area (for example, the CPU 103 a portion that executes the processing of steps S557E, 557F, and 557C shown in ),
The execution means is characterized in that it executes a predetermined process based on the flag information set in the common flag storage area (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the process of step S557G shown in FIG. 52). .
According to this feature, compared with the case where the flag information indicating that the control is performed in an advantageous state and the flag information indicating that the control is performed in a special state are set separately, it is possible to reduce the number of LD instructions and the like. It is possible to reduce the pressure on the capacity on the main side as the control means.
In addition, since the information about the patterns is also stored in the common pattern storage area, it is possible to reduce the number of LD commands and the like as compared with the case where they are stored separately. can be done.

In addition, the game machine of means 2 is
When a specific display result (for example, a big win pattern) is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, it is possible to control to an advantageous state (for example, a big win game state) for the player, and the specific display result is the display result of the variable display. A gaming machine that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a small winning game state) different from the advantageous state when a special display result (for example, a small winning pattern) different from the display result is derived and displayed,
a reserved storage means (for example, a first reserved storage buffer or a second reserved storage buffer) capable of storing information about variable display as reserved storage;
Determination means for determining whether to control to the advantageous state and whether to control to the special state based on the reserved storage (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 6);
Flag information setting means (for example, CPU 103) for setting predetermined flag information according to the determination result of the determination means;
An execution means (for example, CPU 103) that executes a predetermined process according to the determination result of the determination means,
The flag information setting means sets the flag information indicating that the control is to be in the advantageous state and the flag information that is to be controlled in the special state in a common flag storage area (for example, the CPU 103 a portion that executes the processing of steps S557E, 557F, and 557C shown in ),
The execution means is characterized in that it executes a predetermined process based on the flag information set in the common flag storage area (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the process of step S557G shown in FIG. 52). .
According to this feature, compared with the case where the flag information indicating that the control is in an advantageous state and the flag information indicating that the control is in a special state are set separately, the number of LD instructions and the like can be reduced. It is possible to reduce the pressure on the capacity on the main side as the control means.

Further, the gaming machine of means 3 is the gaming machine of means 1 or 2,
The flag information setting means does not simultaneously set the flag information indicating the control to the advantageous state and the flag information indicating the control to the special state (for example, when the CPU 103 sets steps S557E and 557F shown in FIG. 52). , a part that executes the processing of 557C).
According to this feature, since the flag information indicating that the control is in an advantageous state and the flag information indicating that the control is in a special state are set in the same common flag storage area, both are set at the same time. can't happen. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the risk of game machine bugs and cheating.

Further, the gaming machine of means 4 is the gaming machine of any one of means 1 to 3,
Prior to the determination by the determination means, determination means (for example, CPU 103 determines whether to control to the advantageous state and whether to control to the special state based on the reserved storage) a part that executes judgment processing),
The flag information setting means is characterized in that it does not set the flag information based on the judgment result by the judgment means in the common flag storage area.
According to this feature, the flag information based on the determination result (for example, look-ahead result) by the determination means is not set in the common flag storage area, so the risk of bugs and irregularities in the game machine can be reduced.

Further, the gaming machine of means 5 is any gaming machine of means 1 to 4,
The flag information setting means erases the flag information set in the common flag storage area before the decision is made by the decision means (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the processing of step S557A shown in FIG. 52). .
This feature can reduce the risk that an unintended value is set in the common flag storage area.

Further, the gaming machine of means 6 is any gaming machine of means 1 to 5,
The determining means
After determining whether to control to the advantageous state, determine whether to control to the special state,
When it is determined to control to the advantageous state, it is not determined whether to control to the special state (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the processing of steps S557B and 557D shown in FIG. 52).
According to this feature, when it is decided to control to the advantageous state, it is not necessary to decide whether to control to the special state or not, so that the program can be compressed.

In addition, the gaming machine of means 7 is the gaming machine of any one of means 1 to 6,
When the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed, based on the flag information set in the common flag storage area, update means (for example, special symbol stop in step S113 shown in FIG. 6) for updating the state related to the game In the process, the game state is updated based on the determination of whether the result of the variable display is a big hit or a small hit (for example, starting a big hit game or a small hit game, or ending a time saving state or a variable probability state ), but the CPU 103 has a portion) that refers to the common buffer at this time.
According to this feature, using the flag information set in the common flag storage area, it is possible to update the state related to gaming (that is, it can also be used for other processes), so the effect of compressing the main side capacity is enhanced. becomes possible.

In addition, the gaming machine of means 8 is any gaming machine of means 1 to 7,
It is possible to control to the advantageous state by performing a variable display, and control to the advantageous state based on the passage of the game medium through the specific area while being controlled to the special state (for example, 1 type 2 amusement machines with seed specs),
Any one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for the player can be set,
While the ratio of control to the advantageous state as a display result of the variable display differs depending on which set value is set, the ratio of control to the special state is the same regardless of which set value is set. (For example, the big hit probability differs according to the set value, but the small hit probability is the same).
According to this feature, it is possible to maintain the amusement of the game even in a gaming machine with a high possibility that the setting value is disadvantageous (low setting). Also, even if the frequency of being controlled to the special state is high, there is no need to LD (load) a small hit flag separate from the big hit flag each time, so LD instructions etc. can be reduced. Capacity pressure can be alleviated.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a figure which shows a game information display part. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating an effect control command. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number; It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; It is a diagram showing the numerical range of the big hit and the numerical range of the small hit in the variable display of the first special figure in the normal state or the time saving state. It is a diagram showing the numerical range of the big hit and the numerical range of the small hit in the variable display of the first special figure in the variable probability state. It is a figure showing the numerical range of the big hit and the numerical range of the small hit in the variable display of the second special figure in the normal state or the time saving state. It is a diagram showing the numerical range of the big hit and the numerical range of the small hit in the variable display of the second special figure in the variable probability state. It is an explanatory view showing a jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of various jackpots. (A) is an explanatory view showing a big hit variation pattern determination table (for big win A), (B) is an explanatory view showing a big win variation pattern determination table (for big win B and big win C), and (C) is an explanatory diagram showing a small hit variation pattern determination table. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a deviation pattern determination table; It is explanatory drawing which shows the data holding area for game control. (A) is a front view of a display monitor, (B) is a diagram showing a display mode of the display monitor, and (C) is an explanatory diagram of display contents. It is a flow chart which shows game control main processing. (A) is a flowchart showing RAM clear processing, and (B) is a schematic diagram of the RAM. 7 is a flowchart showing setting value change processing; 9 is a flowchart showing setting value confirmation processing; 7 is a flowchart showing power failure detection processing; It is a figure which shows the change of the display mode of a display monitor. (A) is a diagram showing the display mode of the display monitor at the time of cold start, and (B) is a diagram showing the display mode of the display monitor at the time of occurrence of a set value abnormal error or recovery from power failure during setting change. It is a diagram. (A) is a diagram showing changes in the display mode of the special symbol display device, the holding display device, the right-handed lamp, and the round display during the setting change process, and (B) is when a set value abnormal error occurs, or It is a figure which shows the change of the display mode of a special design display apparatus at the time of resetting from the power failure during setting change. It is a flow chart which shows start winning a prize judging processing. It is a flow chart showing a winning random number value determination process. It is a flow chart which shows special design normal processing. 4 is a flow chart showing a variable display result determination module; It is a flow chart which shows game stop start processing. It is a flow chart which shows game stop end processing. It is a figure which shows the numerical range of a big hit in the modification A, and the numerical range of a small hit. It is a figure which shows the numerical range of a big hit in the modification A, and the numerical range of a small hit. It is a figure which shows the numerical range of a big hit in the modification A, and the numerical range of a small hit. It is a figure which shows the numerical range of a big hit in the modification A, and the numerical range of a small hit. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the production|presentation control command in the modification B. FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining processing related to conversion and restoration of the variation pattern determination random number value MR3 in modification B; 14 is a flow chart showing an example of winning-time random number determination processing in Modification B. FIG. 13 is a flow chart showing an example of a look-ahead variation pattern command analysis process in Modification B. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing an example of pre-reading notice setting processing in Modification B. FIG. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol normal processing using a common buffer in the modification C. It is a flow chart showing an example of a game control timer interrupt process for performing a timer update process in the modification D. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing which performs the 2nd zero flag update processing in modification D. 14 is a flowchart showing an example of variation pattern setting processing in Modification D. FIG. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol variation processing based on the second zero flag in the modification D. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design stop processing based on the 2nd zero flag in modification D. It is a front view of the pachinko game machine of the second embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the big-hit probability and small-hit probability for every setting value. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the big-hit probability and small-hit probability for every setting value. It is an explanatory view showing a jackpot type determination table. It is an explanatory view showing a small hit type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern (variation time) of a special design and a decoration design. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern (variation time) of a special design and a decoration design. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern (variation time) of a special design and a decoration design. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the variation pattern table for small hits. It is an explanatory view for explaining the release pattern of the variable winning ball device and the special variable winning ball device in the KT state. It is an explanatory view for explaining the release pattern of the variable winning ball device and the special variable winning ball device in the KT state. It is an explanatory view for explaining the release pattern of the variable winning ball device and the special variable winning ball device in the KT state. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the production|presentation control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the production|presentation control command. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special design normal processing. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st fluctuation pattern setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st special design variation process. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special design stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st gate passage waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st jackpot end process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st jackpot end process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st small hit completion process. It is a flowchart which shows a 2nd special design normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a 2nd special design stop process. It is a flowchart which shows a 2nd gate passage waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows a 2nd jackpot end process. It is a flowchart which shows a 2nd jackpot end process. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd small hit end processing. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining how to transition the game state. It is a flowchart which shows an example of design process processing normally. It is a flowchart which shows normal design normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows normal design stop processing. It is a flow chart showing normal electric accessary product opening pre-processing. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of a setting value suggestion effect determination table; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an effect mode of a setting value suggestion effect; It is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of a small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect determination table. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect of small hit RUSH continuation suggestion production|presentation. It is an explanatory view for explaining a display mode of hitting to the right information. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display start setting processing; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing an example of processing for determining effects during variable display; FIG. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the effect type during variable display; (A) is a diagram showing an effect (prediction of reach) type determination table A, and (B) is a diagram showing an effect (setting suggestion) type determination table B. FIG. (A) to (C) are diagrams showing the flow of effects during variable display. (A) is a diagram showing a ready-to-win announcement (low) presentation mode based on pattern PT-8, and (B) is a diagram showing a ready-to-win announcement (high) presentation mode based on pattern PT-9. (A) is a flowchart showing an example of variable display effect determination processing as Modified Example 1, and (B) is a diagram showing determination ratios of reach notice and setting suggestion when using effect type determination table C. FIG. (A) is a diagram showing an effect period of an effect during variable display as a second embodiment, and (B) is a view showing an effect execution determination table during variable display. (A) is a diagram showing the execution decision ratio of reach notice and setting suggestion in the first period and the second period at set values 1 and 6 with the fluctuation pattern normal reach, (B) is set with the fluctuation pattern super reach It is a figure which shows the execution decision ratio of the reach announcement and setting suggestion in the 1st period and the 2nd period in the value 1 and the setting value 6. FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a determination rate of effect type during variable display in the first period when the variation pattern is normal reach; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a determination rate of effect type during variable display in the second period when the variation pattern is normal reach; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a determination rate of effect type during variable display in the first period when the variation pattern is super reach; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a determination rate of effect type during variable display in the second period when the variation pattern is super reach; (A) is a diagram showing the execution decision ratio of reach notice and setting suggestion in the first period and the second period when the fluctuation pattern is normal reach and the setting value is 1 and setting value 6 in Example 3, and (B) is a fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which shows the execution determination ratio of the reach announcement and setting suggestion in the 1st period and the 2nd period in the setting value 1 and the setting value 6 in super reach. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a determination rate of effect type during variable display in the first period when the variation pattern is normal reach; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a determination rate of effect type during variable display in the second period when the variation pattern is normal reach; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a determination rate of effect type during variable display in the first period when the variation pattern is super reach; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a determination rate of effect type during variable display in the second period when the variation pattern is super reach; FIG. 20 is a diagram showing an effect period of an effect during variable display as Example 4; FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display effect determination processing as a fourth embodiment; FIG. (A) is a diagram showing the execution decision ratio of reach notice and setting suggestion in the first period at set value 1 and set value 6 with the fluctuation pattern common to normal reach and super reach in Example 4, (B) shows the fluctuation pattern A diagram showing the execution decision ratio of reach notice and setting suggestion in the second period at setting values 1 and 6 with normal reach, (C) shows the fluctuation pattern in the second period at setting values 1 and 6 with super reach It is a diagram showing the execution decision ratio of reach notice and setting suggestion. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a determination rate of variable display effect type determination in the first period; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a determination rate of effect type during variable display in the second period when the variation pattern is normal reach; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a determination rate of effect type during variable display in the second period when the variation pattern is super reach; FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an effect period of an effect during variable display as Modified Example 2. FIG. (A) is a diagram showing the execution decision ratio of reach notice and setting suggestion in the first period at set value 1 and set value 6 common to all variation patterns in modification 2, (B) is a variation pattern normal reach super reach A diagram showing the execution decision ratio of reach notice and setting suggestion in the second period at setting values 1 and 6 in common, (C) shows the fluctuation pattern common to normal reach and super reach, setting values 1 and 6 at setting values 1 and 6 It is a figure which shows the execution decision ratio of the reach announcement and setting suggestion in 3 periods. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of execution ratio, appearance rate, and reliability of notice X; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of another execution ratio, appearance rate, and reliability of the notice X; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of the execution ratio and appearance rate of notice Y; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of the execution ratio and appearance rate of advance notice Z; It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko game machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko game machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1, and FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine 1, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 forming a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area. In addition, the game machine frame 3 has a glass door frame 3a having a glass window. The game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a, and the game area can be seen through the glass window when the glass door frame 3a is closed.

In addition, the game machine frame 3 can be opened by inserting a door key owned by a store clerk or the like into a lock (not shown) to unlock it. The door frame 3a cannot be opened.

A game information display unit 200 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (the lower left position of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B for performing variable display (also referred to as a special symbol game) of special symbols (also referred to as a special symbol) are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

The "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, that a plurality of types of special symbols are variably displayed (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include updating display of a plurality of patterns, scrolling display of a plurality of patterns, deformation of one or more patterns, enlargement/reduction of one or more patterns, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols, which will be described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols to be described later). Variable display may be expressed as variable display or variation.

The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also called "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also called "second special symbols". Also, a special game using the first special game is called a "first special game", and a special game using the second special game is called a "second special game". In addition, the number of special symbol display devices that variably display the special symbols may be one.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2 . The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5 .

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronism with the first special game and the second special game, a plurality of types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers) as decoration identification information different from the special patterns. variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, decorative patterns are variably displayed (for example, up and down direction scroll display and update display). In addition, the variable display of the special figure game and the decorative pattern that are executed in synchronism is generically called simply variable display.

A first reserved memory display area 5D and a second reserved memory display area 5U are set at two locations on the left and right of the lower portion of the display area of the image display device 5 . In the first reserved memory display area 5D and the second reserved memory display area 5U, the reserved display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is being reserved is performed. An active display area may be provided for displaying an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. Suspended display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display corresponding display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable representations that are reserved is also referred to as the number of reserved memories. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory count and the second reserved memory count is also referred to as the total reserved memory count.

In addition, the game information display unit 200 is provided with a first suspension display 25A and a second suspension display 25B each including a plurality of LEDs. , displays the number of first reserved memories, and the second reserved display 25B displays the number of second reserved memories according to the number of lit LEDs.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

Winning ball device 6A, for example, forms a first starting winning opening that is kept in a constant open state in which game balls can enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B is provided with, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable winglets. comes close to the winning ball device 6A, and the closed state in which the game balls do not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening being closed). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening (second start It is also said that the prize-winning mouth is open.). When the game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special game can be started. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to a device provided with an electric tulip-shaped accessory.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four positions on the left and right sides of the game area), there are provided general winning holes 10 which are always kept open by predetermined ball receiving members. In this case, when the player enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided below the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 is provided with a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and the special winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for the special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning door closes the big winning door, and the game ball is pushed out. You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize gate. On the other hand, in the special variable prize winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special prize winning port door is in the ON state, the special prize winning port door opens the big prize winning port, making it easier for the game ball to enter the big prize winning port. Become.

When game balls enter the big winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game balls enter the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls enter the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering a game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also called "winning". In particular, winning a prize to a starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

Also, the game information display section 200 is provided with a normal symbol display device 20 . As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9", lighting patterns such as "-", and the like. The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal patterns is also called a normal pattern game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the left side of the image display device 5 . Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, the normal game is executed.

In addition, the game information display unit 200 is provided with a normal pattern holding display 25C. The general pattern suspension display 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal pattern suspension storage number, which is the number of general pattern games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

The surface of the game board 2 is provided with, in addition to the above structure, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, an out port is provided for taking in game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the game machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 for game effects is provided at the periphery of the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 includes an LED.

At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates according to the performance is provided.

A ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward the game area from the ball shooting device is provided at the lower right portion of the game machine frame 3 .

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent from a predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be supplied to the ball shooting device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply plate (upper plate). Below the upper plate, there is provided a batted ball supply plate (lower plate) from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is provided a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting actions (operations, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

In addition, the game information display unit 200 includes the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the first suspension display device 25A, the second suspension display device 25B, the normal symbol display device 20, and the normal symbol display device 20. In addition to the holding display 25C, a round display 131 capable of displaying the number of rounds (jackpot type) of the jackpot game during the jackpot game, a game such as a high base state (time saving state) and a jackpot game state A right hitting lamp 132 that lights up in the game state where the ball is hit toward the right game area 2R, a probability variable lamp 133 that lights up when it is in a probability variable state, and a time saving lamp 134 that lights up in a high base state (time saving state) are provided ( See FIG. 9, which will be described later).

The left side of the image display device 5 on the game board 2 of the pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is formed in a left game area 2L in which game balls can flow down, and the right side of the image display device 5 on the game board 2 is formed in a game area. It is formed in the right game area 2R where the ball can flow down.

The left game area 2L is a game area in which a game ball hit relatively weakly (left-handed) by operating the hitting ball operation handle 30 flows down, and the right game area 2R is the left game area 2L by operating the hitting ball operation handle 30. This is the game area in which a game ball hit (right-handed) stronger than the game ball flowing down passes through the upper path 2C of the image display device 5 and flows down.

In addition, the left game area 2L is provided with a general prize winning port 10, and the right game area 2R is provided with a passage gate 41, a variable winning ball device 6B, a general A winning hole 10 and a special variable winning ball device 7 are arranged. That is, the game ball flowing down the left game area 2L can enter the first start winning opening formed by the general winning opening 10 and the winning ball device 6A, and the game ball flowing down the right game area 2R can be variable. It is possible to win the second start winning hole formed by the winning ball device 6B, the general winning hole 10 and the large winning hole formed by the special variable winning ball device 7, and to pass through the passage gate 41. - 特許庁

As shown in FIG. 1, between the winning ball device 6A, the variable winning ball device 6B, and the special variable winning ball device 7, a plurality of obstacle nails K1 are arranged. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the left game area 2L cannot win the second start winning opening or the big winning opening, and the game ball flowing down the right game area 2R cannot win the first starting winning opening. It's becoming

As shown in FIG. 2, the main board 11 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1 while being housed in a board case 201 configured to be openable by a first member and a second member. The main board 11 also includes a lock switch 51 for switching to a setting value change state in which the setting values of the pachinko game machine 1 can be changed, and a jackpot winning probability (ball output rate), etc., which will be described later in the setting value change state. A setting changeover switch 52 that functions as a setting switch for changing setting values, and an open sensor 90 (see FIG. 3 described later) that detects opening of the gaming machine frame 3 are provided. Although the details will be described later, the setting value change state in the present embodiment is also a state in which the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed by a store clerk or the like (setting value confirmation state).

A setting-switching main body provided with an operation unit that can be operated by a player, such as the lock switch 51 and the setting-switching switch 52, is accommodated in the substrate case 201 together with the main board 11. The lock switch 51 and the setting-switching switch 52 are exposed to the rear side through an opening formed in the rear surface of the substrate case 201 so that it can be operated without opening the substrate case 201 .

Since the board case 201 having the lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 is provided on the back of the pachinko game machine 1, it is extremely difficult to operate when the game machine frame 3 is closed. Operation becomes possible by opening the gaming machine frame 3 using the key. Further, since the lock switch 51 requires operation of a setting key owned by a store clerk or the like of the game arcade, it can be operated only by the store clerk who possesses the setting key. Further, the lock switch 51 is also a switch that can perform switching operation between ON and OFF, which will be described later, by means of a setting key. In this embodiment, the door key and the setting key are separate keys, but one key may be used for both.

Further, as shown in FIG. 2, the substrate case 201 is provided with a display monitor 29 capable of displaying set values and base values, which will be described later. The display monitor 29 is connected to the main board 11 and arranged on the upper part of the board case 201 . That is, the display monitor 29 is arranged in front of the main substrate 11 in the substrate case 201 when visually recognizing it. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized when the game machine frame 3 is not opened, the front when the main board 11 is visually recognized means the back side of the game board 2 when the game machine frame 3 is opened. This is the front when visually recognizing, and is different from the front of the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁However, the front when visually recognizing the main board 11 and the front of the pachinko game machine 1 may be common.

(Overview of Game Progress)
The pachinko game machine 1 of the present embodiment is configured such that the winning probability of the big win changes according to the set value by a setting change operation using operating means such as a predetermined switch by a person on the game hall side (game hall clerk, etc.). It is said that Since the ball output rate (the number of balls output per unit time (the number of prize balls)) changes in accordance with the possibility of changing the winning probability of the big hit in this way, changing the setting value changes the ball output rate. It can be said that

A game ball is shot toward a game area by a player's rotating operation of a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1 . When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display device 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but the normal game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately) , the normal game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this normal pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (normal pattern per pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern per pattern". On the other hand, if a normal pattern (normal pattern lost pattern) other than the normal pattern winning pattern is stop-displayed as the fixed normal pattern, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern lost". When it comes to "normal game", the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period of time and the opening control is performed (the second start winning opening is opened).

When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special game is running, or during the period when it is controlled to the big win game state or the small win game state described later (although the start win has occurred If the special game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (a big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the type of the big hit described below) is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol, it becomes a "big win" and a big winning symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (a small winning symbol, for example, "2") different from the symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Also, if a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big-hit symbol or the small-hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "lost".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game is controlled to a big win game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special game becomes "minor win", it is controlled to the small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the player can get a prize ball by entering the game ball into the big winning hole. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the upper limit period of opening, the more advantageous the player is.

In addition, a jackpot type is set in the "jackpot". For example, a plurality of types of opening modes (number of rounds and upper limit period of opening) of the big winning opening and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time saving state, variable probability state, etc. described later) are prepared, and the jackpot is obtained according to these. type is set. As the jackpot type, there may be provided a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained, and a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls or almost no prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small winning game state, the same opening mode as the big winning game state when some jackpot types etc.), the big prize opening is opened. In addition, you may provide a small-hit classification also in a "small-hit" like a big-hit classification.

After the jackpot game state is finished, depending on the jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time-saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time saving state, the control (time saving control) that shortens the average special figure fluctuation time (period of varying the special figure) than the normal state is executed. In the time-saving state, by shortening the average normal figure fluctuation time (the period during which the normal figure is changed) than in the normal state, and by improving the probability of becoming a "normal figure hit" in the general figure game than in the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. Since the time-saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbols) is improved, it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time-saving control, the variable probability control in which the probability that the display result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The variable probability state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols is improved, and in addition, a "big hit" is likely to occur, so it is a further advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the variable probability state are continued until one of the end conditions such as execution of the special game for a predetermined number of times and start of the next big win game state is established first. The end condition that the special figure game of a predetermined number of times has been executed is also referred to as a number cut (number cut time reduction, number cut probability variable, etc.).

The normal state means a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, a variable probability state, etc., and the display result in the normal game is "normal game". The pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", returns to the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when the system is reset, a predetermined return after power-on) It is the state controlled in the same way as when processing is not executed).

The state in which probability variable control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not executed is also called a low probability state. A state in which time-saving control is performed is also referred to as a high-based state, and a state in which time-saving control is not performed is also referred to as a low-based state. Combining these, the short-time state is also called a low-probability-high base state, the probability-variable state is a high-probability-high base state, and the normal state is a low-probability-low base state. The high probability state and the low base state are also referred to as the high probability low base state.

After the small win game state is over, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small win" is continuously controlled (however, "small win" occurs). If the special game at the time is the special game for the predetermined number of times in the above cut, the game state is naturally changed). In addition, there may not be a "small hit" as a display result of a special figure game.

In addition, the game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, it may be controlled to the probability variable state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects such as notifying the progress of the game and exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. In addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and/or the game effect lamp 9 It may be performed by turning on/off, operation of the movable body 32, or the like.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, the first special game or the second In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also called fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special game or the second special game, a fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative patterns), which is the display result of variable display of decorative patterns, is displayed. ) is also stopped (derived).

During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end of the variable display, the variable display of the decorative design may be in a predetermined ready-to-win state (ready-to-win state is established). Here, the ready-to-win mode means that when the decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination described later, the decorative symbols that are not stopped and displayed are displayed in a variable manner. It is the aspect that is continuing.

Further, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-described ready-to-win mode during the variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern) to the "big win" (also called the "big win reliability" or "big win expectation") depends on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of ready-to-win effects are executed. The ready-to-win performance includes, for example, a normal reach and a super-to-win with higher reliability than the normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration The display result of the variable display of the pattern becomes a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decoration patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stop-displayed together on predetermined effective lines in the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. .

In the case of a ``variable probability big hit'' controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the big win game state, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stopped and displayed together, and the variable probability state is entered after the end of the big win game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, odd-numbered decorative patterns are also called probability variable patterns and even-numbered decorative patterns are also called non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After becoming a ready-to-win mode with non-probability variation symbols, a promotion performance may be executed to finally become a "probability variation big hit".

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", on the screen of the image display device 5, as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, " 1, 3, 5", etc.) are derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "minor hit"). As an example, decoration symbols constituting a chance eye are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special game is a "big hit" of some jackpot types (jackpot types in the same manner as the small win game state), and when it becomes a "minor hit" , a common fixed decoration pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special game is "lost", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not become the ready-to-win mode, and the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" (Also referred to as non-reach lost") may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes "non-reach lost"). In addition, when the display result is "lost", after the mode of variable display of decorative patterns becomes the ready-to-win mode, the display result of variable display of decorative patterns is a predetermined ready-to-win combination ("no reach") that is not a big hit combination. ”) is stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes “reach lost”).

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (suspended display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display during execution and a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended). As the pre-reading advance notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the display corresponding to the variable display (suspended display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

Also, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative patterns, and then the variable display is restarted, so that one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays. A pseudo continuous effect may be executed.

During the big winning game state, the performance during the big winning is executed to report the big winning game state. As the effect during the big win, the effect of notifying the number of rounds or the promotion effect indicating that the value of the big win game state is improved may be executed. Also, during the small-hit game state, an effect during the small-hit game for notifying the small-hit game state is executed. It should be noted that during the small winning game state, some of the jackpot types (jackpot types in the jackpot game state in the same manner as the small hit game state, for example, the jackpot type in the subsequent game state high probability state) jackpot game By executing a common performance in both states, the player may not know whether the current state is a small win game state or a big win game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small winning game state and after the end of the big winning game state, it is made impossible to distinguish whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state. may

Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc., as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1 .

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of suspension), execution of a general-purpose game (including management of suspension), jackpot game state, small hit game state, game state, etc.) has a function to control. The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104 and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105 .

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main substrate 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, effect control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM that retains stored contents for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped in part or in its entirety. All or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be developed in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102 .

The random number circuit 104 counts updatably numerical data representing various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated (updated by software) when the CPU 103 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first reservation It includes an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the normal figure hold indicator 25C, and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals from various switches (gate switch 21, starting switch (first starting switch 22A and second starting switch 22B), count switch 23) for detecting game balls A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering) is captured and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

Solenoid circuit 111, a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82), to the solenoid 81 for normal electric accessories and the solenoid 82 for the big winning entrance door transmit.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as part of the control of the progress of the game, produces a production control command (a command to specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. - 特許庁The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, the display result of the special game (including the jackpot type), the variation pattern used when executing the special game (details will be described later). )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big winning slots, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, game status), commands specifying error occurrence, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the effect control command, and produces effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, power failure recovery notification, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed (including the decision, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected and appropriately indicates the operation content). The controller 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120 .

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120 . The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on/off the game effect lamp 9 . Also, it supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 . Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a driving circuit for driving the movable body 32 .

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signal. do. In this manner, the display control unit 123 controls sound output and lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes voice output, lamp lighting/extinguishing control (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatably numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

I / O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 has an input port for taking in production control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). and an output port of

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko game machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described.

(Major operations of the main substrate 11)
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11. As shown in FIG.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 4, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). Initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device register setting (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), setting to make RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3). The clear switch is mounted, for example, on the power board. When the clear switch is turned on and the power is turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 through the input port. If the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3; Yes), initialization processing (step S8) is executed. In the initialization processing, the CPU 103 performs RAM clear processing for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Moreover, CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates initialization to the production|presentation control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not ON (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power failure), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko game machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stoppage of the power supply. In this process when the power supply is stopped, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. Data protection processing includes adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.) for progressing the game, but also the states of the backup flags and error detection codes. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is ON. If the backup flag is off and backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), an initialization process (step S8) is executed.

If backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the backed up data (using an error detection code) to determine whether the data is normal (step S5). In step S5, for example, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply was stopped, using a parity bit or a checksum. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply was stopped, so initialization processing (step S8) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs recovery processing (step S6) to return the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply was stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). As a result, the game state at the time of stopping the power supply is restored, and when the special symbols are fluctuating, the fluctuation of the special symbols is resumed from the state before restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. will be

And CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates restoration from a power failure to the production|presentation control board 12 (step S7). In accordance with this, an effect control command that specifies the game state before the power outage that is backed up, and if the special game is being executed, the effect control that specifies the display result of the special game that is being executed You may make it transmit a command. These commands can use the same commands as the commands set for transmission in the special symbol process described later. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command specifying the restoration time from the power failure, for example, the image display device 5 notifies that the power failure has been restored or is being restored from the power failure. Display the screen for The effect control CPU 120 may perform appropriate screen display based on the effect control command.

After completing the recovery process or the initialization process and transmitting the effect control command to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and the interrupt is permitted (step S12 ). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots, etc.), start information (start Data such as information indicating the number of wins, etc.), probability change information (information indicating the number of times the odd state has occurred, etc.) is output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process (step S25). CPU103 by executing the special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, management of execution and suspension of the special symbol game, control of the big hit game state and small hit game state, control of the game state, etc. are realized (details later).

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). By the CPU 103 executing normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, management of execution and suspension of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41), It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal game hit". The execution of the normal pattern game is performed by driving the normal pattern display device 20, and the normal pattern reservation number is displayed by lighting the normal pattern reservation display device 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when power failure occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may transmit and set an effect control command in each of the processes described above. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, after permitting the interrupt, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 6 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 5 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, the occurrence of starting winning is detected, and the process of storing the pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 and updating the pending storage number is executed. When a starting prize is generated, a random number value for determining the display result (including the jackpot type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process of prefetching and judging a display result or a variation pattern may be executed. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for designating the determination result such as the generation of the start winning, the number of pending memories, and the prefetch determination to the effect control board 12 is performed. . The effect control command at the time of start winning set to be transmitted in this manner is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. is transmitted to

After executing the starting prize determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small hit", and the type of the big hit in the case of "big hit". is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (any one of a big hit symbol, a small winning symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. In addition, the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also called special figure 2 priority digestion). Also, the winning order of the game balls to the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the condition for starting the special game may be established in the order of winning (also called winning order).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. Other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12 are the same. Various tables are stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 .

The variation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this variation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of variation patterns is selected using random numbers for determining the variation pattern based on the result of pre-determination as to whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit." including the process of determining In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern is the execution time of the special game (special figure fluctuation time) (also the execution time of variable display of decorative patterns), the form of variable display of decorative patterns (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the variable display of decorative patterns. It specifies the content of the production (type of reach production, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation processing includes a process of setting for varying the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure Also, it is determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation processing ends.

The special symbol stop processing of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the variation of the special symbol, and stop display (derivate) the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol. It includes a process to set for Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Moreover, when the display result is "off", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small win" or "losing", when the time saving state or probability variable state is controlled, and when the end of the number cut is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing for making settings for starting the execution of the round in the jackpot game state and opening the jackpot, based on the fact that the display result is "jackpot". is When opening the big winning opening, a process of supplying a solenoid driving signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an upper limit opening period for opening the big winning opening and an upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to the type of the jackpot. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening pretreatment is completed.

The process during jackpot opening of step S115 is performed when the value of a special figure process flag is "5". In this process during the opening of the big win, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning hole, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the big winning hole is counted. It includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the large winning opening to the closed state, after executing processing such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The process during jackpot opening is terminated.

The jackpot opening post-processing of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening post-processing includes processing for determining whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit number of executions, and processing for judging whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit number of executions. It includes processing to make settings for terminating . Then, when the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round reaches the upper limit number of executions, the special process flag The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot end processing includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending production is executed as a production operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time saving control. When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

Small hit opening pretreatment of step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small hit opening pre-processing includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit opening preprocessing ends.

Small hit during opening processing of step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". In this process during opening of the small prize, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning opening, and the timing of returning the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing for determining whether or not When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small winning game state comes, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the small winning open processing is ended.

Small hit end processing of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small-hit end processing includes processing of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period in which the performance operation for informing the end of the small-hit game state is executed elapses. Here, when the small winning game state ends, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before entering the small winning game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has passed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning end processing ends.

(Major operations of production control board 12)
Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and the effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 7 is executed. When the production control main processing shown in FIG. Perform register setting of the mounted CTC (counter/timer circuit). Also, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial motion control process, control for initial motion of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined motion, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to ON every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeated and waits.

Also, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs each time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is an interrupt generated when, for example, the effect control INT signal from the main substrate 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt prohibition, but when using a CPU that does not automatically enter an interrupt prohibition state, interrupt It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interruption caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port for receiving the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I/O 125 . The effect control command taken in at this time is stored in the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt process after setting the interrupt permission.

If the timer interrupt flag is ON at step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands that are transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control command Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 so that the content specified by the production control command can be confirmed by the production control process processing or the like. It turns on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32 Control to operate various production devices such as driving operation of is performed. Further, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed according to the effect control command and the like transmitted from the main substrate 11 regarding the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices.

Random number update processing for production|presentation is performed following the production|presentation control process processing of step S76 (step S77), and at least one part of the random number for production|presentation used by the production|presentation control board 12 side is updated by software. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be performed before returning to the processing of step S73.

FIG. 8 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 7 as the effect control process. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 8, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main substrate 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed. Also, a process for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S170 to S177 as described below according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command designating the start of variable display has been received from the main substrate 11. and so on. When it is determined to start the variable display of the decoration pattern on the image display device 5, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the form of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the ready-to-win effect, and various other Whether or not to execute various effects such as advance notice effects, its mode, execution start timing, etc. are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decorative design in response to an instruction to start execution of variable display of the decorative design.

The effect process during variable display in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32, outputting voices and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals) to the voice control board 13, and outputting commands (illumination signals) to the lamp control board 14. Various effects are controlled during the variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/blinking the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating to stop display of the fixed decorative pattern is received from the main board 11. Corresponding to the fact that the player has done so, the fixed decoration pattern which becomes the display result of the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decoration pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the production process during variable display ends.

The special figure per waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received from the main substrate 11 . Then, when receiving the production control command designating the start of the jackpot game state or the small hit game state, if the command designates the start of the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6". ”. On the other hand, if the command designates the start of the small-hit game state, the value of the production process flag is updated to "4", which is the value corresponding to the small-hit production process. Also, when the waiting time for receiving the command has passed without receiving a command designating the start of the big win game state or the small win game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game was "lost". Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value. When the value of the production process flag is updated, the special figure per waiting process is terminated.

The production process during the small hit of step S174 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "4". In this small-hit mid-performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the small-hit game state, and executes various performance controls in the small-hit game state based on the set content. . Further, in the small-hit middle production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the small-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small-hit end production. It is updated to a certain "5", and the effect processing during the small hit is ended.

The small hit end production process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "5". In this small hit end effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small win game state, etc., and various effect control at the end of the small win game state based on the setting content. to run. After that, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small winning end production process is ended.

The effect process during the big hit in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this big-hit production process, the production control CPU 120 sets, for example, production control patterns corresponding to the production contents in the big-hit game state, and executes various production controls in the big-hit game state based on the set contents. Also, in the big-hit production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the big-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the ending production process. 7", and the effect processing during the big hit is terminated.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the big win game state, etc., and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the big win game state based on the setting contents. Run. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Various display devices in the game information display section)
Next, various display devices provided in the game information display section 200 will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 9, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are each composed of 8-segment LEDs. Further, in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, when the variable display result of the special symbol is a loss or a small hit, the variable display result can be derived and displayed by a common combination. ing.

In the variable display of the first special symbol, when the variable display result is a big hit, the first special symbol display device 4A uses two types of big win symbols (combination of lit LEDs) for each big win type as the variable display result. Derivation display is possible. In addition, when the variable display result of the variable display of the second special symbol becomes a big hit, the second special symbol display device 4B variably displays two kinds of big win symbols (a combination of lit LEDs) for each big win type. Results and derivations can be displayed.

In this embodiment, the jackpot symbols that can be derived and displayed are all different between the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, but the jackpot symbols that can be derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A. At least a part of the symbols and the jackpot symbols that can be derived and displayed by the second special symbol display device 4B may overlap.

As shown in FIG. 9, each of the first suspension display 25A and the second suspension display 25B has 4-segment LEDs arranged side by side in the horizontal direction. In these first pending display 25A and second pending display 25B, if the number of pending memories is 1, only the LED at the left end lights up, and as the number of pending memories increases, the second from the left, The third LED from the left and the fourth LED from the left light up in sequence. Then, each time the variable display is executed, the reserve memory is reduced (consumed), so that the LED in the reserve display corresponding to the variable display is shifted in a predetermined shift direction (to the left in this embodiment). ).

In this embodiment, when both the first special figure pending memory and the second special figure pending memory exist, the variable display based on the second special figure pending memory is preferentially executed. . For this reason, for example, when there is one first special figure pending memory and two second special figure pending memories exist (only the LED at the left end of the first pending indicator 25A is lit, and the second When the left two LEDs of the holding indicator 25B are lit), after the second special figure holding storage becomes 0 by executing the variable display based on the second special figure holding storage, the first special figure Variable display based on reserved storage is performed.

Also, as shown in FIG. 9, the round indicator 131 is composed of five segments (LEDs). Incidentally, as the jackpot types in this embodiment, a total of three jackpot types are provided: a jackpot A that is a 5-round jackpot, a jackpot B that is a 10-round jackpot, and a jackpot C that is a 15-round jackpot. Which segment among the segments constituting the round indicator 131 is lit differs depending on the state.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the scope of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the game media are enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the relevant pattern. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but medals are inserted to set a predetermined number of bets. A slot machine capable of executing a game (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as a slot machine equipped with one or more bonuses, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to being distributed/provided on a detachable recording medium to a computer device or the like included in the pachinko game machine 1. It may be distributed by being installed in a storage device possessed by the software. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from another device on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing programs and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. Alternatively, it may be directly executed using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of effects (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”) indicate that one is a ratio of “0%”. may contain. For example, the ratio of one is "0%" and the other is "100%" or less than "100%".

(First embodiment)
First, the first embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine 1 explained in the basic explanation will be explained. In the first embodiment, in a pachinko game machine 1 having a setting function capable of setting a set value, the capacity of the main board 11 (main side control board) due to the provision of the setting function is reduced. Features etc. will be explained.

FIG. 10(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the effect control command used in the first embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, where the first byte indicates MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The leading bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "1", and the leading bit of EXT data is set to "0". Note that the command form shown in FIG. 10A is an example, and other command forms may be used. Also, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals that make up the control command may be one, or three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 10(A), the command 8001H is a first variable display start command that designates the start of variable display in the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A. Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that designates the start of variable display in the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special design in the special game. It is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time) such as a pattern. Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value that is arbitrarily set according to the contents of instructions by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data are set according to the specified variation pattern.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command, and is an effect control command that designates variable display results such as special symbols and decorative symbols. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. , Different EXT data are set according to the determination result (jackpot type determination result) as to which of a plurality of types the jackpot type should be when the variable display result is "big hit".

In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 10B, the command 8C00H is the first variable display result specifying command indicating the predetermined result that the variable display result is "no". The command 8C01H is a second variable display result specification command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot A" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot B" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot C" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result specification command for notifying a pre-determined result that the variable display result will be a "minor win".

The command 8F00H is a pattern confirmation command for designating the stoppage (confirmation) of the decorative patterns in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of the image display device 5 . The command 95XXH is a game state designation command that designates the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. In the game state designation command, different EXT data are set according to the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, the command 9500H is the first game state designation command corresponding to the game state (low base state, normal state) in which the time saving control is not performed, and the command 9501H is the game state in which the time saving control is performed (high base state , time-saving state) is the second game state designation command.

The command 96XXH is an error (abnormality) designation command for designating the type of error (abnormality) that has occurred and the error (abnormality) that has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1 . In the error (abnormality) specification command, for example, by setting EXT data corresponding to each error (abnormality), it is specified which error (abnormality) occurrence has been determined on the production control board 12 side. The occurrence of the specified error (abnormality) is notified by error notification processing, which will be described later.

The command A0XXH is a win start designation command (also referred to as "fanfare command") for designating the display of an effect image indicating the start of the big win game state or the small win game state. The command A1XXH is a large winning opening open notification command for notifying that the large winning opening is in the open state in the big winning game state or the small winning game state. The command A2XXH is a post-opening notification command for a large winning opening that notifies that the large winning opening changes from the open state to the closed state in the big winning game state or the small winning game state. The command A3XXH is a winning end designation command for designating the display of the performance image at the end of the big winning game state or the small winning game state.

In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result notification command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result or the jackpot type determination result. . Alternatively, in the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result notification command. . In the notification command during the opening of the big winning opening and the notification command after opening the big winning opening, different EXT data is set according to the number of rounds executed in the big winning game state or the small winning game state (for example, "1" to "15"). be done.

The command B100H is based on the fact that a game ball that has passed through (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and a starting winning (first starting winning) has occurred. It is a first start winning designation command for notifying that the first starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball passing through (entering) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) occurs. , It is a second starting opening winning designation command for notifying that the second starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

Command C1XXH is a first reserved storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved storage number, in order to display the number of special figure reserved storage so that it can be specified on the image display device 5 or the like. Command C2XXH is a second pending storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure pending storage number, in order to display the number of special figure pending storage so as to be identifiable on the image display device 5 or the like. The first pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied, when the first starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . The second pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied, when the second starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . In addition, the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command are used when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of reserved memories decreases), the special game It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution or the like.

Instead of the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command, a total reserved storage number notification command for notifying the total reserved storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total pending storage number notification command may be used to report an increase (or decrease) in the total pending storage number.

The command D0XXH is a set value designation command for designating a newly set set value from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (the effect control CPU 120). The command E101H is a hot start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started without clearing the contents of the RAM 102 (that power has been restored, also called hot start). The command E102H is a cold start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started after clearing the contents of the RAM 102 (cold start). The command E103H is a setting value change start notification command for notifying that a setting value change operation has started in the pachinko game machine 1 (that the pachinko game machine 1 has been started in the setting value change state). The command E104H is a setting value change end notification command for notifying that the setting value change operation in the pachinko gaming machine 1 has ended. The command E105H is a setting value confirmation start notification command for notifying that the pachinko game machine 1 has started the setting value confirmation operation (the pachinko game machine 1 has been started in the setting value confirmation state). The command E106H is a setting value change end notification command for notifying that the confirmation operation of the setting values of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has ended.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing game control programs, fixed data, etc., and a game control work. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes a game control program and performs control operations, and a numerical data that indicates a random value is updated independently of the CPU 103. A random number circuit 104, an I/O (Input/Output port) 105, and a real-time clock (RTC) 106 capable of outputting time information.

As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101, thereby executing processing for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. At this time, the CPU 103 reads out fixed data from the ROM 101, and the CPU 103 writes various variable data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores them in the variable data write operation. Variation data reading operation to read out, CPU 103 receives input of various signals from the outside of game control microcomputer 100 via I / O 105, CPU 103 to the outside of game control microcomputer 100 via I / O 105 and a transmission operation for outputting various signals.

FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 11, in the first embodiment, on the side of the main board 11, in addition to the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and the random number for variation pattern determination Numerical data indicating each of MR3, random number MR4 for judging the result of normal map display, and random number MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 is controlled so as to be countable. It should be noted that random numbers other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. These random numbers MR1 to MR5 may be counted by software update using different random counters in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. FIG. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100 or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100 . Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

In this embodiment, the random numbers MR1 to MR5 are used as values within the range shown in FIG. 11, but the present invention is not limited to this. may be varied according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

FIG. 12 shows variation patterns in the first embodiment. In the first embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is "loss", corresponding to each of the cases where the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "non-reach" and "reach", A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance so as to correspond to cases such as when the variable display result is a "big hit". In addition, one variation pattern is prepared in advance in response to a case where the variable display result is a "minor hit". In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "miss" and the variable display mode of the decoration pattern is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach loss variation pattern"), A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss" and the variable display mode of the decoration pattern is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach loss variation pattern"). Also, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the loss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss". A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "big hit" is called a big hit variation pattern. A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "small hit" is called a small hit variation pattern.

The jackpot variation pattern and the reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a normal reach reach performance is executed, and a super reach variation pattern in which a super reach performance such as super reach α and super reach β is executed. In the first embodiment, only one type of normal reach fluctuation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and like super reach, normal reach α, normal reach β, . , a plurality of normal reach fluctuation patterns may be provided. Also, as for the super reach variation patterns, three or more super reach variation patterns such as super reach α, super reach β, and super reach γ may be provided.

As shown in FIG. 12, the special figure fluctuation time of the normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach in the first embodiment is executed is set shorter than the super reach α and super reach β which are the super reach fluctuation patterns. ing. In addition, for the special figure fluctuation time of the super reach variation pattern in which the reach effect of super reach such as super reach α and super reach β in the first embodiment is performed, the variation pattern in which the super reach effect of super reach β is performed Toku-zu fluctuation time is set longer than the fluctuation pattern in which super reach production of super reach α is executed.

In addition, in the first embodiment, as described above, the variable display result is set in order of super reach β, super reach α, and normal reach so that the degree of expectation for the big hit becomes higher, so the normal reach variation pattern And in the super reach variation pattern, the longer the variation time, the higher the expectation of a big hit.

In the first embodiment, as will be described later, these fluctuation patterns, for example, non-reach type, normal reach type, super reach type, etc., are determined first. Then, instead of determining the variation pattern to be executed from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type, only the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, in addition to the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random number for determining the type of variation pattern is provided, and these determination of the type of variation pattern The type of variation pattern may be first determined from the random number value for use, and then the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type.

Further, in the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 12, the form in which the content of variation (content of presentation) is determined in advance for each variation pattern is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, even if the variation pattern is the same, the content of variation (content of presentation) may differ according to the set value. For example, in the case of the normal reach loss variation pattern PA2-1, if the set value is 1, the normal reach variation pattern will be lost, and if the set value is 2, a pseudo-continuous effect will be performed. If the set value is 3 as a variation pattern that results in non-reach loss by executing twice, a variation pattern that results in super reach loss by executing pseudo-continuous effect three times, and so on may be used.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101 and uses the RAM 102 as a work area to execute various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, the CPU 103 can generate all of various random numbers used on the main substrate 11 side by executing a random number generating program.

The ROM 101 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data used for controlling the progress of the game in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables shown in FIGS. In addition, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main substrate 11, and the variation mode of each symbol in variable display such as special symbols and normal symbols. A variation pattern table storing a plurality of types of variation patterns is stored.

The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, a first special figure display result determination table (set value 1) shown in FIG. 13(A) and a second special figure display result determination table (set value value 2), the first special figure display result determination table (setting value 2) shown in FIG. 14 (A), the second special figure display result determination table (setting value 2) shown in FIG. 14 (B), FIG. The first special figure display result determination table (setting value 3) shown in (A), the second special figure display result determination table (setting value 3) shown in FIG. 15 (B), the second shown in FIG. 1 special figure display result determination table (setting value 4), second special figure display result determination table (setting value 4) shown in FIG. 16 (B), first special figure display result shown in FIG. 17 (A) Judgment table (setting value 5), second special figure display result judgment table (setting value 5) shown in FIG. 17 (B), first special figure display result judgment table (setting value 6 ), the second special figure display result determination table (set value 6) shown in FIG. 18B, the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) shown in FIG. In addition to the jackpot type determination table (for the second special pattern), the jackpot variation pattern determination table, the small hit variation pattern determination table, the deviation variation pattern determination table, the general pattern display result determination table (not shown), the general pattern variation pattern determination table (not shown).

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment is configured such that the probability of winning a big hit (ball output rate) changes according to the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing to be described later, by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the winning probability of the big hit (ball output rate) is changed. . The setting value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, and 6 is the highest ball payout rate, and the smaller the value is in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the ball payout rate is. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage for the player is the highest, and the lower the value is in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the advantage is. In other words, the set value is such that 6, which is the largest value, is the most unfavorable value for the game hall side, and 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1 are values that are advantageous to the game hall side as the values become smaller in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. Become.

FIGS. 13A to 18B are explanatory diagrams showing display result determination tables corresponding to each set value. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which hit determination values to be compared with MR1 are set. In the first embodiment, as the display result determination table, separate display result determination tables are used for the first special figure and the second special figure, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first A common display result determination table may be used for the special figure and the second special figure.

As shown in FIG. 13 (A), in the first special figure display result determination table (set value 1) used when the setting value is 1 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, the game state is normal If it is a state or a time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1237 are "jackpots ”, 32767 to 33094 are assigned to “minor win”, and other numerical ranges are assigned to “loss”. In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 13(B), in the second special figure display result determination table (set value 1) used when the setting value is 1 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the game state is normal. If it is a state or a time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1237 are "jackpots ”, 32767 to 33421 are assigned to “minor win”, and other numerical ranges are assigned to “loss”. In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 14 (A), in the first special figure display result determination table (set value 2) used when the setting value is 2 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, the game state is normal If it is a state or a time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535. ”, 32767 to 33094 are assigned to “minor win”, and other numerical ranges are assigned to “loss”. In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1383 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 14(B), in the second special figure display result determination table (setting value 2) used when the setting value is 2 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the game state is normal. If it is a state or a time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535. ”, 32767 to 33421 are assigned to “minor win”, and other numerical ranges are assigned to “loss”. In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1383 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 15 (A), in the first special figure display result determination table (set value 3) used when the setting value is 3 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, the game state is normal If it is a state or a time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535. ”, 32767 to 33094 are assigned to “minor win”, and other numerical ranges are assigned to “loss”. In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1429 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 15(B), in the second special figure display result determination table (setting value 3) used when the setting value is 3 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the game state is normal. If it is a state or a time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535. ”, 32767 to 33421 are assigned to “minor win”, and other numerical ranges are assigned to “loss”. In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1429 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 16(A), in the first special figure display result determination table (set value 4) used when the setting value is 4 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, the game state is normal. If it is a state or a time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535. ”, 32767 to 33094 are assigned to “minor win”, and other numerical ranges are assigned to “loss”. In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1487 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 16(B), in the second special figure display result determination table (setting value 4) used when the setting value is 4 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the game state is normal. If it is a state or a time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535. ”, 32767 to 33421 are assigned to “minor win”, and other numerical ranges are assigned to “loss”. In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1487 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 17(A), in the first special figure display result determination table (set value 4) used when the setting value is 5 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, the game state is normal. If it is a state or a time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535. ”, 32767 to 33094 are assigned to “minor win”, and other numerical ranges are assigned to “loss”. In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1556 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 17 (B), in the second special figure display result determination table (setting value 5) used when the setting value is 5 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the game state is normal. If it is a state or a time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535. ”, 32767 to 33421 are assigned to “minor win”, and other numerical ranges are assigned to “loss”. In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1556 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 18(A), in the first special figure display result determination table (setting value 6) used when the setting value is 6 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, the game state is normal. If it is a state or a time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535. ”, 32767 to 33094 are assigned to “minor win”, and other numerical ranges are assigned to “loss”. In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1674 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 18(B), in the second special figure display result determination table (set value 4) used when the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the game state is normal. If it is a state or a time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535. ”, 32767 to 33421 are assigned to “minor win”, and other numerical ranges are assigned to “loss”. In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1674 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As described above, in each display result determination table, when the gaming state is a variable probability state (high probability state), more determination values than when the normal state or time saving state (low probability state), " It is assigned to the special figure display result of "jackpot". As a result, in the variable probability state (high probability state) where the variable probability control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, when the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state), the special figure display result is set as "big hit" and controlled to the big hit game state. Then, the determined probability (in the first embodiment, 1/300 when the set value is 1, 1/280 when the set value is 2, 1/260 when the set value is 3, and 4 In the case of 1/240, 1/220 when the set value is 5, and 1/200 when the set value is 6), it is determined to control the special figure display result as "jackpot" to the jackpot game state. (In the first embodiment, 1/200 when the set value is 1, 1/180 when the set value is 2, 1/160 when the set value is 3, and 4 1/140 for , 1/120 for a set value of 5, and 1/100 for a set value of 6). That is, in each display result determination table, when the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 is the probability variable state (high probability state), the probability that it is determined to control to the jackpot game state compared to the normal state or time-saving state. is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control to the jackpot game state.

In the first embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 13 to 18, the magnification of the jackpot probability in the variable probability state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time saving state varies depending on each setting value (for example, the set value 1 If it is, the multiplier of the jackpot probability in the variable state to the jackpot probability in the normal state and the time-saving state is 1.5 times, and if the setting value is 2, the jackpot probability in the variable state to the jackpot probability in the normal state and the time-saving state It is about 1.56 times, and if the set value is 3, the multiplier of the jackpot probability in the variable probability state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state and the time saving state is 1.625 times). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the magnification of the jackpot probability in the variable probability state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state and the time-saving state at each set value may be set to a constant value (for example, 5 times). .

In addition, in each first special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or set value, the probability that the special figure display result is set to "small win" and controlled to the small win game state is the same value. A judgment value is assigned as follows. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 13(A), 14(A), 15(A), 16(A), 17(A), and 18(A), In the display result determination table, regardless of the game state and setting value, the probability of determining that the special figure display result is "small hit" and controlled to the small hit game state is set to 1/200.

On the other hand, in each second special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or set value, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state as "small hit" is the first special figure. Determination values are assigned so as to be the same values different from those in the graphic display result determination table. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 13(B), 14(B), 15(B), 16(B), 17(B), and 18(B), In the display result determination table, regardless of the game state and setting value, the probability that the special figure display result is set to "small hit" and controlled to the small hit game state is set to 1/100.

It should be noted that, in the first embodiment, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state as "small hit" regardless of the setting value is exemplified with the same probability, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may vary the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be controlled to a small hit game state as a "small hit" according to the set value. Furthermore, in the first embodiment, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state as "small hit" according to the fluctuation special figure is exemplified. The probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as "small hit" to the small hit game state regardless of the fluctuation special figure may be the same probability.

Here, focusing on the numerical range of the hit determination value assigned to the "big hit" and "small hit" in each display result determination table, as shown in FIG. In the first special figure display result determination table, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values is set as the common numerical range of the jackpot determination values for determining the big win regardless of the setting value.

In addition, when the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 In the case of set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot determination value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range from 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range from 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range from 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the first embodiment, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, when the setting value is 1, the value can be in the range of 0 to 65535 Of the hit judgment values, only numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, the common numerical range A number within the range plus the non-common number range is assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases from 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the probability of a big hit increases as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the judgment value of the big hit (jackpot reference value). go.

In addition, in the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values determines the small hit regardless of the set value It is set to the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6 here, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, while the small hit determination value The hit determination value is a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value (1020 to 1346) in the case of the set value 6, with 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value) for the small hit determination value, 32767 to 33094 Since it is set within the range, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the big hit determination value which changes according to each set value.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20, in the first special figure display result determination table in the case where the gaming state is the variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values is a big hit regardless of the set value. It is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for judging.

In addition, when the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 In the case of set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1347 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot determination value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the setting value 3, the range 1347 to 1487 for the setting value 4, and the range 1347 to 1556 for the setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively.

That is, in the first embodiment, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is a variable probability state, if the set value is 1, the hit determination value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 Among them, only the numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot determination values, non-common numerical values in the common numerical range A number within the range plus the range is assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases with 1347 as the reference as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability is set to 1020 as a reference value (jackpot reference value) for the jackpot determination value, and as the set value increases, the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases, thereby increasing the probability. go.

In addition, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the variable probability state, the same as the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, hit determination value Among them, the range from 32767 to 33094 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for judging the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6 here, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1674 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, while the small hit determination value The hit determination value is a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value in the case of the set value 6 (1020 to 1674), with 32767 as a reference value for the small hit determination value (small hit reference value), 32767 to 33094 Since it is set within the range, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the big hit determination value which changes according to each set value.

As shown in FIG. 21, in the second special figure display result determination table in the case where the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values is a big hit regardless of the set value. It is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for judging.

In addition, when the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 In the case of set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot determination value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range from 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range from 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range from 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the first embodiment, in the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, when the setting value is 1, the value can be in the range of 0 to 65535 Of the hit judgment values, only numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, the common numerical range Numbers within the range plus the non-common number range are assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases from 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the probability of a big hit increases as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the judgment value of the big hit (jackpot reference value). go.

In addition, in the second special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values determines the small hit regardless of the set value It is set to the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6 here, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, while the small hit determination value The hit determination value is a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value in the case of the set value 6 (1020 to 1346), with 32767 as the reference value of the small hit determination value (small hit reference value), 32767 to 33421 Since it is set within the range, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the big hit determination value which changes according to each set value.

Next, as shown in FIG. 22, in the second special figure display result determination table in the case where the gaming state is the variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values is a big hit regardless of the set value. It is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for judging.

In addition, when the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (up to 1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 In the case of set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1347 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the setting value 3, the range 1347 to 1487 for the setting value 4, and the range 1347 to 1556 for the setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively.

That is, in the first embodiment, in the display result determination table for FIG. Among them, only the numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "jackpot", and if the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, the common numerical range is the non-common numerical range are assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases with 1347 as the reference as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability is set to 1020 as a reference value (jackpot reference value) for the jackpot determination value, and as the set value increases, the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases, thereby increasing the probability. go.

In addition, in the second special figure display result determination table in the case where the gaming state is the variable probability state, the same as the second special figure display result determination table in the case where the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, hit determination value Among them, the range from 32767 to 33421 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for judging the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6 here, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1674 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, while the small hit determination value The hit determination value is a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value in the case of the set value 6 (1020 to 1674). Since it is set within the range, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the big hit determination value which changes according to each set value.

As described above, in the first embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 19 to 22, in each display result determination table, regardless of the game state and setting value, the common numerical value range or common numerical value The judgment value included in one continuous numerical range consisting of the range and the non-common numerical range is set as the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, and regardless of the game state and the setting value, the hit judgment value of 32767 is continuous as a reference. The variable display result is determined by using the determination value included in the numerical range (common numerical range) of 1 as the numerical range of the small hit determination value.

Furthermore, in each of these display result determination tables, if the variation special figure is the same, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is the same regardless of the game state (the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is identical). In addition, depending on whether the variable special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value differs (small value in the display result judgment table for the first special figure) The number of determination values included in the numerical range of the hit determination value is 328, while the number of determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value in the second special figure display result determination table is about 655. 2 times) On the other hand, the numerical range itself of the small hit determination value is set to 32767 as a reference value (small hit reference value).

Furthermore, as described above, in each game state, when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the probability that the special figure display result is set to "big win" and controlled to the big win game state is determined. Judgment values are assigned so that the higher the value of the set value is, the higher the probability that the special figure display result will be determined to be a "jackpot" and the control to the jackpot game state will be higher (jackpot probability: set value 6 > set value 5>setting value 4>setting value 3>setting value 2>setting value 1).

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and if the value of MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the big hit, the big hit (big hit) with respect to the special symbol. It is determined to be A to big hit C). Also, when MR1 coincides with one of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hit, it is determined that the special symbol is a small hit. That is, the winning of the big win and the small win is determined with a probability corresponding to the set value. The "probability" shown in FIGS. 13A and 18B indicates the probability (percentage) of a big hit and the probability (percentage) of a small hit. Determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to control to the big win game state. It is also to decide whether or not to make it a big hit pattern. Also, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to control to a small winning game state, but the stop in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B It is also to determine whether or not the design is to be a small winning design.

In the first embodiment, a total of six set values 1 to 6 are provided as set values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko game The number of setting values that can be set in the machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more.

23(A) and 23(B) are explanatory diagrams showing a jackpot type determination table (for first special symbol) and a jackpot type determination table (for second special symbol) stored in ROM 101. FIG. Of these, FIG. 23(A) uses the reservation memory based on the game ball winning the first start winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed) When determining the jackpot type is a table of In addition, FIG. 23(B) shows the case of determining the jackpot type using the reserved memory based on the game ball winning the second start winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed). is a table.

The jackpot type determination table selects a jackpot type from jackpot A to jackpot C based on a random number (MR2) for hit type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot pattern. This table is referenced to determine

Here, the jackpot types in the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the first embodiment, as the jackpot type, only time-saving control is executed after the end of the jackpot game state, and a jackpot A (also referred to as a non-probability variable jackpot) that shifts to a low-probability high base state, and after the jackpot game A high-probability control and a time-saving control are executed to shift to a high-probability-high base state, and a jackpot B or a jackpot C (also called a probability variable jackpot) are set.

The jackpot game state by the "jackpot A" is a normal open jackpot in which five rounds (so-called five rounds) are repeated to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player. B" is a normal open big win in which 10 rounds (so-called 10 rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated. Furthermore, the jackpot game state by "jackpot C" is a normal open jackpot in which 15 rounds (so-called 15 rounds) for changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated.

The time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot game state by "jackpot A" is that a predetermined number of special game games (100 times in the first embodiment) are executed, or the predetermined number of special game games are executed. The game ends when a jackpot game state is reached before execution.

On the other hand, the high-precision control and time-saving control executed after the end of the big win game state of the big win B or the big win C are continuously executed until the big win occurs again after the big win game state ends. Therefore, when the reoccurring big win is the big win B or the big win C, the high accuracy control and the short-time control are executed again after the big win game state ends, so that the big win game state is continuous without going through the normal state. It is a so-called continuous state that occurs in

In the first embodiment, three types of jackpot A to jackpot C are provided as jackpot types, but the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, four or more types may be provided.

Also, as shown in FIG. 23(A), in the big hit type determination table (for the first special symbol), when the set value is "1", 0 out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, 100 to 249 are assigned to the jackpot B, and 250 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. Further, when the set value is "2", 0 to 99 in the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 229 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 200 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. Further, when the set value is "3", 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 209 are assigned to the jackpot B in the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2. , 150 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. Further, when the set value is "4", 0 to 99 in the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 189 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 190 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. Further, when the set value is "5", 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 169 are assigned to the jackpot B in the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2. , 170 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. Further, when the set value is "6", 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 149 are assigned to the jackpot B in the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2. , 150 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C.

In this way, when a big hit occurs in the special game of the first special symbol, only time-saving control is executed after the big-hit game ends. and variable probability control are executed, the ratio of determining the big win C becomes lower in the order of set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2 and 1. - 特許庁That is, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, the ball output rate is the highest when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, and the setting values are 5, 4, 3, 2, The smaller the number of 1, the lower the ball output rate.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 23(B), in the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol), when the setting value is "1", the range of 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, 100 to 199 are assigned to the jackpot B, and 200 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. Further, when the set value is "2", 0 to 99 in the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 179 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 180 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. Further, when the set value is "3", 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 159 are assigned to the jackpot B in the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2. , 160 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. Further, when the set value is "4", 0 to 99 in the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 139 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 140 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. Further, when the set value is "5", 0 to 99 in the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 119 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 120 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. Further, when the set value is "6", 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C in the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2. (No decision value is assigned to jackpot B).

In this way, when a big hit occurs in the special game of the second special symbol, only time-saving control is executed after the big-hit game ends. and variable probability control are executed, the ratio of determining the big win C becomes lower in the order of set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2 and 1. - 特許庁That is, when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, the ball output rate is highest when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, and the setting values are 5, 4, 3, 2, The smaller the number of 1, the lower the ball output rate.

In the first embodiment, when the variable special figure is the second special figure and the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 6, the type of the big win is not determined to be the big win B. Illustrative, that is, the fact that the decision ratio of the jackpot type differs according to the set value includes that none of the jackpot types is decided (the decision ratio is 0%). However, even when the variable special figure is the second special figure and the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 6, a case may be provided in which the big win type is determined to be the big win B.

As described above, in the first embodiment, since the determination ratio of the jackpot type when the variable display result is a jackpot differs depending on the set value, the game interest can be improved. there is

In the first embodiment, the jackpot type is determined using MR2, which is a random number value for judging the jackpot type. It may be determined using MR1, which is a random value for result determination.

In addition, in the first embodiment, the larger the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player (increase in the probability of a big win, the easier determination of a big win C as a kind of big win, etc.). Although the form is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the smaller the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player.

Further, in the first embodiment, while the jackpot probability changes according to the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the game property itself does not change, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the game characteristics may be changed according to the setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加

For example, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variable state loops at a rate of 65% (so-called variable loop type). When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the game ball is set in the special variable winning ball device 7 during the jackpot game. While controlling the game state after the end of the big hit game to a variable probability state based on passing through, the game ball has a different rate of passing through the predetermined switch during the big hit game according to the variation special figure (so-called V variable probability type), and when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the probability of a big hit is 1/320 and the probability of a small hit is 1/50, and the game is played during high base (during time reduction control). A game property (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type) that controls to a big hit game state based on the ball passing through a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 may be used. Furthermore, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 1 to 3, the game performance is the same, but the jackpot probability and A setting may be provided in which the probability of a small win is high and the number of prize balls that can be obtained during a big win game is small (for example, the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6). .

Furthermore, in such a case where the game characteristics are changed according to the setting values, common switches may be used for different purposes. Specifically, in the above example, when the set value is 1 to 3, the predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is switched to the effect switch (every time the game ball passes through the predetermined area A switch for executing a predetermined effect), and when the set value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch is a game switch (a game state is changed to a variable state or a variable state based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch). It may be used as a switch for controlling the jackpot game state.

In addition, the ROM 101 also stores a variation pattern determination table for determining a variation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern. Determine one of the fluctuation patterns.

Specifically, as the variation pattern determination table, the variation pattern determination table for big hits used when it is decided in advance that the variable display result will be a "big hit", and the variable display result will be a "small hit". A big hit variation pattern determination table used when it is determined in advance and a variation pattern determination table for loss used when it is determined in advance that the variable display result will be "loss" are prepared in advance. ing.

In the jackpot variation pattern determination table, each variation pattern of the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3) On the other hand, a predetermined random number within the range that the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take is assigned as the determination value.

As shown in FIGS. 25(A) and 25(B), the big-hit variation pattern determination table includes a big-hit variation pattern determination table (for big-hit A) used when the big-hit type is big-hit A, The big win variation pattern determination table (for big win B and big win C) used when the big win types are for big win B and big win C are prepared in advance, and these big win variation pattern determination tables (for big win A) are prepared in advance. The variation pattern determination table for the jackpot (for jackpot B and jackpot C) includes the variation pattern for the normal reach jackpot (PB1-1), the variation pattern for the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and the variation pattern for the super reach β jackpot (PB1 -3), a predetermined random number within the possible range of the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is assigned as a determination value to each variation pattern.

As shown in FIG. 25(A), in the big hit variation pattern determination table (for big win A), when the setting value is "1", 1 to 400 out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), 401 to 850 are assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 851 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot. are assigned to the fluctuation patterns (PB1-3) of Also, when the set value is "2", 1 to 380 out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), and 381 to 835 is assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 836 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). Also, when the set value is "3", 1 to 360 in the range of 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), and 361 to 820 is assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 821 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). In addition, when the set value is "4", 1 to 340 out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), and 341 to 805 is assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 806 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). Also, when the set value is "5", 1 to 320 out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), and 321 to 790 is assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 791 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). Also, when the set value is "6", 1 to 300 in the range of 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), and 301 to 775 is assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 776 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3).

As shown in FIG. 25(B), in the big-hit variation pattern determination table (for big-hit B and big-hit C), when the setting value is "1", 1 Up to 200 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), 201 to 550 are assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 551 to 997 are assigned to the super reach It is assigned to the β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). Also, if the set value is "2", 1 to 180 out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), and 181 to 510 It is assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 511 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). Also, if the set value is "3", 1 to 160 out of the range of 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), and 161 to 470 It is assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 471 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). Also, if the set value is "4", 1 to 140 out of the range of 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), and 141 to 430 It is assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 431 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). In addition, when the setting value is "5", 1 to 120 out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), and 121 to 390 It is assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 391 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). Also, if the set value is "6", 1 to 100 out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), and 101 to 350 It is assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 351 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3).

In this way, when the jackpot A is won in the special game, the ratio of determining the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2) is the ratio of determining the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). and lower in the order of set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. Further, when the jackpot B or jackpot C is won in the special game, the ratio for determining the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3) determines the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2). It is higher than the ratio and lower in the order of set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1.

That is, in the first embodiment, super reach β is likely to be determined when the type of jackpot is "jackpot B" or "jackpot C", and when the type of jackpot is "jackpot A". In some cases, the super reach α is assigned so as to be easily determined, so that when the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β is executed, it is a game that may result in a "jackpot B" or a "jackpot C". It can raise people's expectations.

Further, in the small hit variation pattern determination table, for the variation pattern of the small hit variation pattern (PC1-1), a predetermined random value out of the range that the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take is the determination value. assigned as. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 25 (C), in the small hit variation pattern determination table, even if the setting value is any of 1 to 6, out of the range 0 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, 0 to 997 are assigned to small hit variation patterns (PC1-1). In addition, although only PC1-1 is provided as a small hit variation pattern in this embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more variation patterns are provided as a small hit variation pattern, Variation patterns for small hits with set values 1 to 6 may be determined at different rates from a plurality of variation patterns.

In addition, in the variation pattern determination table for loss, the variation pattern determination table A for loss used when the number of pending memories is 1 or less in the low base state where the time saving control is not performed, and the low base Loss variation pattern determination table B used when the total number of reserved memories is 2 to 4 in the state, and loss variation used when the total number of reserved memories is 5 to 8 in the low base state A pattern determination table C and a loss variation pattern determination table D used when the game state is a high base state in which time reduction control is performed are prepared in advance.

In the variation pattern determination table for loss A, the variation pattern of non-reach loss without shortening (PA1-1), the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), the super A predetermined random number is assigned as a judgment value to the variation pattern (PA2-3) of the reach β deviation within the range of the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern.

As shown in FIG. 26(A), in the variation pattern determination table A for loss (for the low base medium total pending storage number of 1 or less), when the set value is "1", the range of the determination value of MR3 is 1 Of ~ 997, 1 to 450 are assigned to the non-reach variation pattern (PA1-1), and 451 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 ~ Up to 900 are assigned to the super reach α deviation variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β deviation variation pattern (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "2", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 430 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and 431 to 700 is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β. (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "3", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 410 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and 411 to 700 is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β. (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "4", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 390 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and up to 391 to 700 is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β. (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "5", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 370 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and up to 371 to 700 is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β. (PA2-3). In addition, when the set value is "6", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 350 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and 351 to 700 is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β. (PA2-3).

In addition, in the variation pattern determination table for loss B, the variation pattern of shortened non-reach loss corresponding to the total number of retained memories of 2 to 4 (PA1-2), the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), super A predetermined random value is assigned as a judgment value from the range that the random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern judgment can take for the fluctuation pattern of reach α deviation (PA2-2) and the fluctuation pattern of super reach β deviation (PA2-3). It is

As shown in FIG. 26(B), in the variation pattern determination table B for loss (for 2 to 4 total pending storage numbers in low base), when the set value is "1", the range of the determination value of MR3 Of 1 to 997, 1 to 500 are assigned to the non-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), and 501 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 Up to 900 are assigned to the super reach α deviation variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β deviation variation pattern (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "2", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 480 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), and up to 481 to 700 is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β. (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "3", 1 to 460 out of the range 0 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), and up to 461 to 700 is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β. (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "4", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 440 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), and up to 441 to 700 is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β. (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "5", out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, 1 to 420 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), and up to 421 to 700 is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β. (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "6", 1 to 400 out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), and up to 401 to 700 is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β. (PA2-3).

In addition, in the variation pattern determination table for loss C, the variation pattern of shortened non-reach loss corresponding to the total number of retained memories of 5 to 8 (PA1-3), the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), super A predetermined random value is assigned as a judgment value from the range that the random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern judgment can take for the fluctuation pattern of reach α deviation (PA2-2) and the fluctuation pattern of super reach β deviation (PA2-3). It is

As shown in FIG. 26(C), in the deviation variation pattern determination table C (for the low base medium total pending storage number of 5 or more), when the setting value is "1", the range of the determination value of MR3 is 1 Of ~ 997, 1 to 550 are assigned to the non-reach variation pattern (PA1-3), and 551 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 ~ Up to 900 are assigned to the super reach α deviation variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β deviation variation pattern (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "2", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 530 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), and 531 to 700 is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β. (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "3", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 510 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), and 511 to 700 is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β. (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "4", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 490 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), and up to 491 to 700 is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β. (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "5", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 470 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), and up to 471 to 700 is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β. (PA2-3). In addition, when the set value is "6", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 450 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), and 451 to 700 is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β. (PA2-3).

In addition, in the deviation pattern determination table D, the variation pattern of the shortened non-reach deviation corresponding to the time saving control (PA1-4), the variation pattern of the normal reach deviation (PA2-1), and the super reach α variation pattern of deviation (PA2-2), a predetermined random number within the possible range of the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is assigned as the determination value to the variation pattern (PA2-3) that is out of super reach β.

As shown in FIG. 26(D), in the deviation variation pattern determination table D (for high base medium), when the set value is “1”, 1 to Up to 550 is assigned to the non-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), 551 to 700 is assigned to the normal reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 900 is super reach α. , and 901 to 997 are assigned to the deviation pattern (PA2-3) of Super Reach β. In addition, when the set value is "2", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 530 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), and 531 to 700 is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β. (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "3", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 510 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), and 511 to 700 is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β. (PA2-3). In addition, when the set value is "4", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 490 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), and 491 to 700 is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β. (PA2-3). In addition, when the set value is "5", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 470 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), and 471 to 700 is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β. (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "6", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 450 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), and up to 451 to 700 is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β. (PA2-3).

In this way, when using the fluctuation pattern determination tables A to D for loss, the ratio of determining the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the normal reach fluctuation pattern is higher than the ratio of deciding the super reach fluctuation pattern, and the ratio of deciding the normal reach fluctuation pattern are set to decrease in the order of set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. Also, when using the fluctuation pattern determination table A to D for deviation, 701 to 900 of the judgment values are super reach α deviation fluctuation patterns, and 901 to 997 are super reach β deviation, regardless of the fluctuation pattern determination table. Each is assigned to a variation pattern, that is, if the variable display result is out, the variation pattern of super reach is determined by a common determination ratio regardless of the set value, so the variation pattern of super reach It is possible to prevent the production effect from being lowered due to the variable display by not being executed.

In the first embodiment, the ratio of determination of the variation pattern for loss of super reach α and the percentage of determination of the variation pattern of loss of super reach β as the variation pattern for loss are completely the same between the set values. Although it is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the determination ratio of the variation pattern of super reach α and the determination ratio of the variation pattern of super reach β have a slight difference between each set value ( For example, it may differ by about 1%).

It should be noted that, in the first embodiment, when the variable display result is lost, regardless of the setting value that is set, the determination ratio of the super reach variation pattern is the same, but the present invention is not limited to this, and if the variable display result is out, regardless of the set value, even if the determination ratio of all fluctuation patterns of non-reach, normal reach, and super reach is the same Alternatively, only the determination ratio of the variation pattern between non-reach and normal reach may be the same.

Further, in the first embodiment, when the variable display result is a loss, regardless of the set value that is set, the determination ratio of the variation pattern of super reach α and the determination ratio of the variation pattern of super reach β are different. Both are the same regardless of the set values, but the present invention is not limited to this, and if the variable display result is a deviation, the super reach α is a variation of the deviation. The determination ratio of the pattern and the super reach β may be the same regardless of the set value in which only one of the determination ratios of the deviation variation pattern is set.

Further, in the first embodiment, when the variable display result is a loss, regardless of the set value that is set, the determination ratio of the variation pattern of super reach α and the determination ratio of the variation pattern of super reach β are different. Although both are the same regardless of the set value, the present invention is not limited to this, and even if the variable display result is a big hit, the set setting Regardless of the value, it may be the same regardless of the set value in which the determination ratio of the variation pattern of the super reach jackpot is set.

It should be noted that, in the first embodiment, when the variable display result is a miss, the determination ratio of the variation pattern of non-reach and normal reach varies depending on the set value. Depending on the setting value, there may be one or more undetermined variation patterns among the non-reach variation pattern and the normal reach variation pattern. In other words, if the determination ratio of the variation pattern differs according to the set value, it is possible to not determine any variation pattern (the determination ratio is 0%) or to set a specific variation pattern to 100% It also includes determining the ratio of

The variation pattern (PA1-2) of non-reach deviation is shorter than the variation pattern (PA1-1) of non-reach deviation without shortening, and the fluctuation time is shorter than the fluctuation pattern (PA1-2). The deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-3) has a shorter fluctuation time (see FIG. 12). Therefore, when the number of retained memories increases, a non-reach variation pattern with a short variation time is determined, making it easier to digest the retained memories, and the number of retained memories reaches the upper limit number of 4. By starting winning when there is no reserve memory, it becomes difficult to generate useless starting prizes that are not stored, and when the number of pending memories is reduced, the fluctuation time is long. Determining the pattern (PA1-1) lengthens the variable display time, thereby preventing the loss of interest in the game due to the non-execution of the variable display.

In addition, in the first embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 26A to 26C, an example of determining a variation pattern using a different variation pattern determination table for loss according to the total pending storage number However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the reserved memory number in the special symbol to be changed (for example, when executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the reserved memory number of the first special symbol, When executing the variable display of the second special symbol, the variation pattern may be determined using a different variation pattern determination table for losing according to the number of pending memories of the second special symbol.

Further, in each losing variation pattern determination table of the first embodiment, even if the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any numerical value from 1 to 6, the super reach losing variation pattern (PA2 -2 and PA2-3) have the same range of random numbers. However, since the jackpot probability and the probability of losing differ depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the variable display to be actually executed in the variation pattern of losing the super reach (the probability of losing the super reach) Appearance rate of variation pattern) is different according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 . In addition, in the first embodiment, according to the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the variable display to be executed in the super reach out variation pattern is exemplified, but the present invention. is not limited to this, considering the jackpot probability and the probability of losing for each set value, the variable display at the same rate regardless of the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be executed in

The RAM 102 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 3 may be a backup RAM partially or wholly backed up by a backup power supply created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped, the contents of part or all of the RAM 102 are preserved for a predetermined period (until the capacitor serving as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply becomes unable to supply power). be. In particular, at least data (such as a special process flag) corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be saved in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the game is restored after a power failure or the like. Data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress of the game.

Such RAM 102 is provided with a game control data holding area 150 shown in FIG. The game control data holding area 150 includes a first special figure reservation storage unit 151A, a second special figure reservation storage unit 151B, a normal figure reservation storage unit 151C, a game control flag setting unit 152, and a game control timer setting unit. 153 , a game control counter setting section 154 and a game control buffer setting section 155 .

The first special figure reservation storage unit 151A is a special feature that has not yet started although the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A and the start winning (first starting winning) has occurred. The pending data of the figure game (the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A is associated with the reservation number in the order of winning to the first start winning opening (the order of detection of the game ball), and the first start condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball Numerical data indicating random number MR1 for variable display result determination, random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, random number MR3 for variation pattern determination, etc. extracted from random number circuit 104 etc. by CPU 103 based on establishment are held data. , until the stored number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The suspension data stored in the first special figure suspension storage unit 151A in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended, and the variable display result in this special figure game (special figure display (result)), which makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit.

In the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B, although the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and the start winning (second starting winning) has occurred, it has not started yet. It stores the pending data of the special symbol game (the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B). As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B is associated with the reservation number in the order of winning to the second start winning opening (the order of detection of the game ball), the second start condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball Numerical data indicating random number MR1 for variable display result determination, random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, random number MR3 for variation pattern determination, etc. extracted from random number circuit 104 etc. by CPU 103 based on establishment are held data. , until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The suspension data stored in the second special figure suspension storage unit 151B in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended, and the variable display result in this special figure game (special figure display (result)), which makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit.

In addition, hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first start condition due to the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning hole, and the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning hole The suspension information (second suspension information) based on the establishment of the second starting prize by chance may be stored in association with the suspension number in the common suspension storage unit. In this case, the starting opening data indicating which of the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening the game ball passed through (entered) should be included in the holding information and stored in association with the holding number. .

The normal pattern reservation storage unit 151C stores the reservation information of the normal pattern game which is not yet started by the normal pattern display device 20 even though the game ball passing through the passage gate is detected by the gate switch 21.例文帳に追加For example, the general pattern reservation storage unit 151C is associated with the reservation number in the order in which the game ball passed through the passage gate, and is used for determining the general pattern display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game ball. is stored as reserved data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit 152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose states can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 and the like. For example, the game control flag setting unit 152 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an ON state or an OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit 153 is provided with various timers used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 . For example, the game control timer setting unit 153 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 . For example, the game control counter setting unit 154 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 154 may be provided with a random counter for counting part or all of the game random numbers so that the CPU 103 can update it by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154, a random number that is not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data representing the random numbers MR1 to MR4 is stored as a random count value, and according to the execution of the software by the CPU 103, Numerical data representing each random number is updated regularly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be software for updating the random count value separately from the numeric data update operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be software extracted from the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data.

The game control buffer setting unit 155 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 . For example, the game control buffer setting unit 155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

Next, display on the display monitor 29 in the first embodiment will be described.

As shown in FIG. 28A, the display monitor 29 has a first display section 29A, a second display section 29B, a third display section 29C, and a fourth display section 29D. Each of the first display portion 29A to the fifth display portion 29E is composed of 7 segments composed of 7 segments that draw the figure "8" and dots arranged on the lower right side of the 7 segments. These first display section 29A to fifth display section 29E are capable of lighting and blinking in various colors such as red, blue, green, yellow, and white. It is also possible to display different colors or a so-called rainbow while changing these colors in an extremely short period.

In addition, the display control of the display monitor 29 in the first embodiment is executed using the non-test area in the entire area of the ROM 101 and the RAM 102 when the pachinko game machine 1 is tested.

On the display monitor 29, as shown in FIGS. 28(B) and 28(C), the base value (measured Real-time value) base L, the base value calculated in the normal state (low-probability base state) every 6000 balls in the first out in all gaming states, and the second out in all gaming states Base 2, which is the base value calculated in the normal state (low-probability/low base state) every 6000 balls, and the normal state (low-probability/low base state) of the third out every 6000 balls in all game states Base 3, which is a base value, can be displayed. Base L, Base 1, Base 2, and Base 3 are displayed on display monitor 29 as percentages.

When the base L is actually displayed on the display monitor 29, "b" is displayed on the first display section 29A and "L. is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values from "00" to "99") are displayed in the third display section 29C and the fourth display section 29D. When displaying the base 1 on the display monitor 29, "b" is displayed on the first display section 29A and "1." is displayed on the second display section 29B to display the abbreviation "b1." is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values from "00" to "99") are displayed in the third display section 29C and the fourth display section 29D. When displaying the base 2 on the display monitor 29, "b" is displayed on the first display section 29A and "2." is displayed on the second display section 29B to display the abbreviation "b2." is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values from "00" to "99") are displayed in the third display section 29C and the fourth display section 29D. When displaying the base 3 on the display monitor 29, "b" is displayed on the first display section 29A and "3." is displayed on the second display section 29B in order to display the abbreviation "b3." is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values from "00" to "99") are displayed in the third display section 29C and the fourth display section 29D.

In the display monitor 29 of the first embodiment, the main board 11 (CPU 103) controls the base L, the base 1, the base 2, and the base 3 to sequentially display them. For example, as shown in FIG. 8-29, the main board 11 performs control to switch the display on the display monitor 29 in the order of base L→base 1→base 2→base 3 at intervals of 5 seconds. The base values displayed on the display monitor 29 are displayed in different colors according to the set values set in the pachinko game machine 1. FIG. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-28, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is "1", each base value on the display monitor 29 is displayed in white, and the pachinko game machine When the setting value set to 1 is "2", each base value is displayed in blue on the display monitor 29, and when the setting value set to the pachinko game machine 1 is "3", it is displayed. Each base value on the monitor 29 is displayed in yellow, and when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is "4", each base value in the display monitor 29 is displayed in green, and the pachinko game machine 1 is set to "5", each base value is displayed in red on the display monitor 29, and when the set value set to the pachinko game machine 1 is "6", the display monitor Each base value in 29 is displayed in purple. Therefore, the game parlor clerk or the like can identify the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 only by checking the display color of the display monitor 29 without executing the setting value change processing described later by the CPU 103. ing.

Next, game control main processing in the first embodiment will be described. FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 . In the game control main process, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step Sa001). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step Sa002). Initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device register setting (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), setting to make RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, CPU 103 determines whether backup data is stored in RAM 102 (step Sa003) and whether RAM 102 (backup RAM) is normal (step Sa004). If the backup data is not stored (step Sa003; N) or if the RAM 102 is not normal (step Sa004; N), the process proceeds to step Sa017, and if the backup data is stored and the RAM 102 is normal (step Sa003; Y, step Sa004; Y) determines whether the set value stored in the RAM 102 is any one of 1 to 6, that is, whether the RAM 102 stores a normal set value. (step Sa005).

If the setting value stored in RAM 102 is not one of 1 to 6 (step Sa005; N), proceed to step Sa017, and if the setting value stored in RAM 102 is any one of 1 to 6 ( In step Sa005; Y), a set value changing flag is set to indicate that the set value changing process (to be described later) was being executed before the power interruption (the power interruption occurred during execution of the set value changing process). (step Sa006). If the setting value changing flag is set (step Sa006; Y), the process proceeds to step Sa017, and if the setting value changing flag is not set, the RAM is cleared indicating that the RAM clear processing described later has been executed. If the flag is set, the RAM clear flag is cleared (step Sa007), and whether or not the clear switch is ON, that is, whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started while the clear switch is being operated. is determined (step Sa008).

If the clear switch is ON (step Sa008; Y), set the RAM clear flag and proceed to step Sa011 (step Sa010); if the clear switch is OFF (step Sa008; N), execute step Sa010. Without doing so, the process proceeds to step Sa011.

At step Sa011, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch 51 is ON (step Sa011). If the lock switch 51 is ON (step Sa011; Y), it is further determined whether the open sensor 90 is ON (step Sa012). When the open sensor 90 is ON, that is, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started in a state where the lock switch 51 is ON and the game machine frame 3 is open (step Sa012; Y), the RAM clear flag is set. It is determined whether or not it is set (step Sa013a).

If the RAM clear flag is set (step Sa013a; Y), set value change processing (step Sa013b) for changing the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed, and the process proceeds to step Sa013d, If the RAM clear flag is not set (step Sa013a; N), set value confirmation processing (step Sa013c) for confirming the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is executed, and the process proceeds to step Sa013d.

If the lock switch 51 is OFF (step Sa011; N) or if the open sensor is OFF (step Sa012; N), the process proceeds to step Sa013d without executing steps Sa013a to Sa013c.

In step Sa013d, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the RAM clear flag is set, that is, whether or not the RAM 102 is cleared when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started this time (RAM clear processing (step Sa009) is executed). (Step Sa013d). If the RAM clear flag is set (step Sa013d; Y), the RAM clear process (step Sa013e) is executed, and then the process proceeds to step Sa014. If the RAM clear flag is not set (step Sa013d; N), the RAM is cleared. The process proceeds to step Sa014 without executing the process (step Sa013e).

At step Sa014, the CPU 103 determines again whether or not the RAM clear flag is set (step Sa014). If the RAM clear flag is set (step Sa014; Y), the process proceeds to step Sa022, and if the RAM clear flag is not set (step Sa014; Disconnection) Perform recovery processing to return to the state at the time (step Sa015).

In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). As a result, the game state at the time of stopping the power supply is restored, and when the special symbols are fluctuating, the fluctuation of the special symbols is resumed from the state before restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. will be Then, the CPU 103 assumes that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been restored in the state before the power failure (activated by hot start), and transmits a command for restoration including a hot start notification command to the effect control board 12, and proceeds to step Sa028. Proceed (step Sa016).

Further, at step Sa017, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the clear switch is ON, that is, whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been started while the clear switch is being operated (step Sa017). If the clear switch is ON (step Sa017; Y), it is further determined whether the lock switch 51 is ON (step Sa018) and whether the open sensor 90 is ON (step Sa019).

If the lock switch 51 is ON (step Sa018; Y) and the open sensor 90 is ON, that is, there is no backup data in the RAM 102, the RAM 102 is not normal, or normal setting values are set. However, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started according to a formal procedure by the operation of an employee of the game hall (the game machine frame 3 is opened, the lock switch 51 is turned on, and the clear switch is operated, the pachinko When the gaming machine 1 is started), the setting value stored in the RAM 102 is cleared (step Sa020), and if the setting value changing flag is set, the setting value changing flag is cleared (step Sa021 ). Then, the processing of steps Sa009 to Sa016 described above is executed.

When the clear switch is OFF (step Sa017; N), when the lock switch 51 is OFF (step Sa018; N), and when the open sensor 90 is OFF (step Sa019; N), the process proceeds to step Sa031. move on.

Moreover, in step Sa022, the CPU 103 transmits a recovery command including a cold start notification command to the effect control board 12 assuming that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been started by cold start (step Sa022). Then, a cold start notification timer corresponding to the period for notifying the cold start of the pachinko game machine 1 is set (step Sa023), and as shown in FIG. (step Sa024).

After executing step Sa024, CPU 103 decrements the value of the cold start notification timer by 1 (step Sa025), and determines whether or not the cold start notification timer has timed out (step Sa026). When the cold start notification timer has not timed out (step Sa026; N), the processing of step Sa025 and step Sa026 is repeatedly executed, and when the cold start notification timer has timed out (step Sa026; Y), the display monitor 29 ends blinking of all segments (step Sa027), and proceeds to step Sa028.

In the first embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cold-started, all the segments that make up the display monitor 29 are flashed over the period of the cold-start notification timer (for example, 5 seconds). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the pachinko game machine 1 is cold-started, only a part of all the segments constituting the display monitor 29 may be blinked, or the display At least some of all the segments forming the monitor 29 may be lit.

Then, in step Sa028, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process (step Sa028) for initializing the random number circuit 104, and the microcomputer for game control so that a timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms). 100 is set (step Sa029), and the interrupt is permitted (step Sa030). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

In addition, in step Sa031, the CPU 103 is based on the fact that an abnormal set value is stored in the RAM 102 (set value abnormal error), or the recovery from the power interruption during the setting change described later. In response, an error designation command corresponding to the abnormality of the set value is transmitted (step Sa031). Furthermore, an error notification execution waiting timer is set (step Sa032). Then, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the error notification execution waiting timer by 1 (step Sa033), and determines whether or not the error notification execution waiting timer has timed out (step Sa034). If the error notification execution waiting timer has not timed out (step Sa034; N), the processes of steps Sa033 and Sa034 are repeatedly executed, and if the error notification execution waiting timer has timed out (step Sa034; Y), As shown in FIG. 35B, a first display section 29A and a second display section 29A constituting the display monitor 29 are used as notification (error notification) of the occurrence of an abnormal set value error or recovery from a power failure during setting change. "E." is displayed on each of the portion 29B, the third display portion 29C, and the fourth display portion 29D (step Sa035).

Further, as shown in FIG. 36(B), the CPU 103 blinks all the LEDs constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B (step Sa036), and the pachinko game machine 1 A security signal is output to a management device such as a management computer of the game arcade via a provided terminal board (not shown), and the process proceeds to step Sa032 (step Sa037). Thereafter, the CPU 103 repeats the processing of steps Sa032 to Sa037 until power failure occurs in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off by the operation of a store clerk, etc.). The monitor 29, the first special symbol display device 4A, and the second special symbol display device 4B report the occurrence of an error.

Thus, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the first embodiment, when an abnormal setting value is set or when the power failure during changing the setting value is restored, the display monitor 29 displays the first special symbol. Since the device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B notify the occurrence of an error, the game hall clerk or the like can check the occurrence of the error or change of the setting value from both the front side and the back side of the pachinko game machine 1. It is possible to recognize that it has recovered from a power failure. In addition, the occurrence of an error in the pachinko game machine 1 and recovery from a power failure during the change of the set value can be recognized even in the management device of the game hall, so that the security of the pachinko game machine 1 can be improved. It's becoming

It should be noted that in the game control main process of the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 29, when it is determined that the clear switch is ON in step Sa008 (step Sa008; Y) or in step Sa021 the set value changing flag Although a mode of executing RAM clear processing (step Sa009) after clearing is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, and the RAM clear processing is , when it is determined that the clear switch is ON in step Sa008 (step Sa008; Y), or when it is determined that the RAM clear flag is set in step Sa014, not after clearing the setting value changing flag in step Sa021. (step Sa014; Y).

FIG. 30A is a flowchart showing RAM clear processing (step Sa009) executed by the CPU 103 in the game control surface processing. In the RAM clearing process, the CPU 103 first designates the second address from the top in the RAM 102 (step Sa041). Next, "00H" is set (stored) in the designated address (step Sa042). Then, it is determined whether or not the specified address is the last address (FXXX, which will be described later) of the RAM 102 (step Sa043). If the specified address is not the last address in RAM 102 (step Sa043; N), the next address in RAM 102 is specified (step Sa044), and the specified address is the address where the RAM clear flag is stored (F002). (step Sa45).

If the specified address is not the address storing the RAM clear flag (step Sa045; N), proceed to step Sa042; if the specified address is the address storing the RAM clear flag (step Sa045; N), Then, the next address is specified and the process proceeds to step Sa042 (step Sa046). If the specified address is the last address of RAM 102 (step Sa043; Y), the RAM clearing process is terminated.

In the RAM 102 according to the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 30B, addresses (F000 to FXXX) are assigned to each storage area. Among these storage areas, the first address (F000) of the RAM 102 stores the set values set in the pachinko game machine 1, and the second address (F001) from the top of the RAM 102 stores Temporary setting values are stored. Furthermore, a RAM clear flag is stored at the third address (F002). Other addresses (F003 onwards) include special figure reservation memory, general figure reservation memory, various counter values, various timers, various flags, game information including error information that occurred in the pachinko game machine 1, and the previous special symbol and a set value read out for setting the display result determination table when determining the variable display result in normal processing (determination used set value) are stored. Note that the backup data (including the backup flag) is stored in a specific backup data storage area among the areas where other information is stored. In addition, a value (for example, set value “0”) indicating the factory shipment state is set at the top address (F000) of the RAM 102 at the time of shipment from the factory. It should be noted that when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a state in which a value indicating the factory shipping state is set to the top address (F000) of the RAM 102, the setting change processing may be always executed, or the image A display on the display device 5 or the like may prompt the user to restart the pachinko gaming machine 1 for executing the setting change process.

That is, the RAM clear processing in the first embodiment is processing for clearing data other than the set values and the RAM clear flag by storing "00H" in addresses other than the set values.

In addition, in the first embodiment, the form of clearing data other than the set value in the RAM clearing process is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated by cold start. In this case, only game information stored at a predetermined address of RAM 102 (in the first embodiment, after address F003) may be cleared.

In addition, in the first embodiment, the form of storing the RAM clear flag in the RAM 102 is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. (For example, an accumulator that is the center of the operation, a flag register that stores the state of the accumulator, or a general-purpose register). You may enable it to reduce a load. In addition, when storing the RAM clear flag in the RAM 102, since the degree of freedom of the register can be improved compared to the case of storing the RAM clear flag in the register of the game control microcomputer 100, the RAM clear flag is processed by the CPU 103. It is possible to prevent the information (data) from being overwritten.

FIG. 31 is a flow chart showing set value change processing (step Sa013b) executed by the CPU 103 in the game control main processing. In the set value change process, the CPU 103 first executes a game stop start process (step Sb001). Details of the game stop start process will be described later.

Next, the CPU 103 starts lighting all the segments that make up the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B (step Sa051), the right-handed lamp 132 and the first reservation indicator 25A, the second The hold indicator 25B starts flashing (step Sa052, see FIG. 36A). Further, the CPU 103 starts lighting only one of the segments forming the round indicator 131 as a mode according to the set value change process (step Sa052a).

In addition, the CPU 103 transmits a set value change start notification command to the effect control board 12 (step Sa053), and determines whether any value of 1 to 6 is stored as a set value in the address F000 of the RAM 102. Determine (step Sa053a). If a setting value other than 1 to 6 is stored in RAM 102, or if no setting value is stored in RAM 102 (when the setting value is cleared in step Sa020), address F000 in RAM 102 is set. The value is set to "1" (set value is reset to "1"), and the process proceeds to step Sa054 (step Sa053b). If any value from 1 to 6 is stored in the RAM 102 as the setting value (step Sa053a; Y), the process proceeds to step Sa054 without executing the process of step Sa053b.

In step Sa054, the CPU 103 sets a timer for waiting for the execution of the power failure detection process to wait until the power failure detection process is executed. Then, the value of the timer for waiting to start execution of the power interruption detection process is decremented by 1 (step Sa055), and it is determined whether or not the timer for waiting to start execution of the power interruption detection process has timed out (step Sa056). If the timer for waiting for the start of power-off detection processing execution has not timed out (step Sa056; N), the processing of steps Sa055 and Sa056 is repeated, and if the timer for waiting for the start of power-off detection processing has timed out (step Sa056; N) Sa056; Y) executes a power-off detection process (step Sa057).

After executing the power-off detection process, the CPU 103 starts displaying the setting value stored at the address F000 in the RAM 102 on the display monitor 29 (step Sa058), Then, a security signal is output to a management device such as a management computer of the game arcade (step Sa059).

Then, the CPU 103 sets a set value changing flag (step Sa061), and determines whether or not the setting switch 52 has been operated (step Sa062). If the setting changeover switch 52 is not operated (step Sa062; N), the process proceeds to step Sa065. The content of address F001 is updated (step Sa063).

Specifically, when the set value displayed on the display monitor 29 is "1", the set value "2", which is one step more advantageous for the player than "1", is set as the provisional set value. When the set value stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 and displayed on the display monitor 29 is "2", the set value "3", which is one step more advantageous to the player than "2", is provisionally set. For example, a value one larger than the set value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored at address F001 of RAM 102 as a set value as a borrow setting. If the set value displayed on the display monitor 29 is "6", "1" may be stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 as a provisional set value.

Then, the CPU 103 displays the setting value (temporary setting value) stored at the address F001 in the RAM 102 on the display monitor 29 (step Sa064), and determines whether or not the lock switch 51 is ON (step Sa065). .

If the lock switch 51 is ON (step Sa065; Y), the CPU 103 repeats the processing of steps Sa062 to Sa065 to store a new provisional set value in the address F001 of the RAM 102, , the setting values stored in the display monitor 29 are displayed.

Further, when the lock switch 51 is OFF at step Sa065 (step Sa065; N), the CPU 103 clears the set value changing flag (step Sa066), and then executes game stop end processing ( Step Sb002). Details of the game stop end processing will be described later.

Next, the CPU 103 terminates the display of the set value (or provisional set value) on the display monitor 29 (step Sa067), and turns off all the segments that constitute the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. (Step Sa067a). Furthermore, the CPU 103 ends the blinking of the right-handed lamp 132, the first reservation indicator 25A and the second reservation indicator 25B, and the lighting of the segments forming the round indicator 131 (step Sa068, step Sa068a).

Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not a provisional set value is stored at the address F001 in the RAM 102 (step Sa069). If the provisional setting value is not stored at address F001 in RAM 102 (step Sa069; N), the process proceeds to step Sa072. Further, it is determined whether or not the setting value stored at address F000 in RAM 102 is different from the provisional setting value stored at address F001 (step Sa070).

If the set value stored at address F000 in RAM 102 and the provisional set value stored at address F001 are the same (step Sa070; N), the process advances to step Sa072, where If the stored set value is different from the provisional set value stored at address F001 (step Sa070; Y), the provisional set value stored at address F001 in RAM 102 is changed. Store at address F000 (step Sa071), and proceed to step Sa072. In other words, in the process of step Sa071, the temporary setting value is updated and stored in the RAM 102 as the actual setting value.

Moreover, CPU103 transmits the notification command of the completion|finish of setting value change with respect to the production|presentation control board 12 (step Sa073), and complete|finishes setting value change processing.

FIG. 32 is a flow chart showing set value confirmation processing (step Sa013c) executed by the CPU 103 in the game control main processing. In the setting value confirmation process, the CPU 103 first executes a game stop start process (step Sb001). Although details of the game stop start process will be described later, this game stop start process is common to the game stop start process shown in FIG.

Next, the CPU 103 starts lighting all the segments that make up the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B (step Sa101), the right-handed lamp 132 and the first reservation indicator 25A, the second The hold indicator 25B starts flashing (step Sa102, see FIG. 36(A)). Further, the CPU 103 starts lighting only one of the segments forming the round indicator 131 as a mode according to the set value confirmation process (step Sa103).

In addition, the CPU 103 transmits a set value check start notification command to the effect control board 12 (step Sa104), and sets a timer for waiting for the start of the power failure detection process to wait until the power failure detection process is performed ( Step Sa105). Then, the value of the timer for waiting to start execution of the power interruption detection process is decremented by 1 (step Sa106), and it is determined whether or not the timer for waiting to start execution of the power interruption detection process has timed out (step Sa107). If the timer for waiting to start execution of the power failure detection process has not timed out (step Sa107; N), the processes of steps Sa106 and Sa107 are repeatedly executed, and if the timer to wait for the start of power failure detection process has timed out (step Sa107; N) Sa107; Y) executes a power-off detection process (step Sa108). This power-off detection process (step Sa108) is the same as the power-off detection process (step Sa057) of the setting value change process described above.

After executing the power-off detection process, the CPU 103 starts displaying the setting value stored at the address F000 in the RAM 102 on the display monitor 29 (step Sa109), Then, a security signal is output to a management device such as a management computer of the game arcade (step Sa110).

Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch 51 is ON (step Sa111). If the lock switch 51 is ON (step Sa111; Y), the CPU 103 waits until the lock switch 51 is turned OFF by repeatedly executing the process of step Sa111. Further, when the lock switch 51 is OFF at step Sa111 (step Sa111; N), game stop end processing is executed (step Sb002). Although details of the game stop end process will be described later, this game stop end process is common to the game stop end process of FIG.

Next, the CPU 103 ends the display of the set values on the display monitor 29 (step Sa112), and turns off all the segments constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B (step Sa112a). Further, the CPU 103 ends the blinking of the right-handed lamp 132, the first reservation indicator 25A and the second reservation indicator 25B, and the lighting of the segments forming the round indicator 131 (step Sa113, step Sa114).

Then, the CPU 103 transmits a setting value confirmation end notification command to the effect control board 12 (step Sa115), and ends the setting value confirmation process.

Thus, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B and the lighting of the round indicator 131 from the start of the set value change process and the set value confirmation process, the first reservation indicator 25A, the second By starting the blinking of the holding indicator 25B and the right-handed lamp 232, the player or the store clerk of the game hall can see from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changing the set value or that the set value is being changed. is being confirmed.

In the first embodiment, at the start of the set value change process or the set value confirmation process, the LED of one of the segments constituting the round indicator 131 is changed to correspond to the set value change process or the set value confirmation process. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the lighting pattern of the segments constituting the round indicator 131 corresponds to any of the big win A, big win B, and big win C. The lighting mode is not particularly limited as long as it is a mode in which no light is emitted.

Further, in the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 36(A), at the start of the set value change process or the set value confirmation process, the round indicator 131 are illuminated in the same manner, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be illuminated in a different manner from when the setting value confirmation process is started.

As described above, in the first embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is restarted after being turned off (power off), the lock switch 51 is cleared while the gaming machine frame 3 is open. By turning ON the switch, the set value changing process is executed.

At this time, on the display monitor 29, as shown in FIGS. 34(A) to 34(E), by turning off the pachinko game machine 1, the first display section 29A, the second display section 29B, the third display section 29B, and the third display section 29B are displayed. The display using the display section 29C and the fourth display section 29D (display of the base value shown in FIG. 28) ends. That is, the display monitor 29 in this embodiment uses a different number of display units depending on whether the set value changing process is executed at startup or when the base value is displayed after startup is completed.

Next, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is restarted and the CPU 103 starts the setting value changing process, the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 start to be displayed on the fourth display section 29D. When the setting changeover switch 52 is operated while the setting values are displayed on the fourth display section 29D, the display on the fourth display section 29D is updated. When the lock switch 51 is turned off in this state, the numerical value displayed on the fourth display section 29D is set as a new set value.

Further, in the first embodiment, when the pachinko game machine 1 is restarted after being turned off (power off), the lock switch 51 is turned on (clear switch) while the game machine frame 3 is open. is OFF), the set value confirmation process is executed.

At this time, on the display monitor 29, as shown in FIGS. 34(A), 34(B) and 34(E), by turning off the power of the pachinko game machine 1, the first display section 29A and the second display section 29A are displayed. The display using the display section 29B, the third display section 29C, and the fourth display section 29D (display of the base value shown in FIG. 28) ends. That is, the display monitor 29 in the first embodiment uses a different number of displays depending on whether the set value confirmation process is executed at startup or when the base value is displayed after startup.

Next, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is restarted and the CPU 103 starts the setting value confirmation process, the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are started to be displayed on the fourth display section 29D. The display of the set value on the fourth display section 29D ends when the lock switch 51 is turned off, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes ready for playing.

FIG. 33 is a flow chart showing the power failure detection process (step Sa013c) executed by the CPU 103 in the set value change process and the set value confirmation process. In the setting value confirmation process, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not there is an input of a power-off signal indicating that the power supply voltage from the power supply board (not shown) has dropped below a predetermined value (step S081). If no power-off signal is input (step S081; N), the process is terminated. is specified (step S082), and the specified backup data is stored in the backup data storage area provided in the RAM 122 (step S083). After creating check data to be used when restoring the backup data and storing it in the backup data storage area (step S084), the process proceeds to loop processing in which no processing is executed until the pachinko game machine 1 is powered off.

In addition, in the game control timer interrupt process (see FIG. 5) in the first embodiment, the CPU 103 executes the same power interruption detection process (step S200) as the steps Sa057 and step Sa108 described above, and then steps S21 to S27. may be executed.

Next, the starting winning determination process according to the first embodiment executed in step S101 of FIG. 6 will be described based on FIG. In the starting winning determination process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting opening switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. (step S501a). At this time, if the first starting port switch 22A is on (step S501a; Y), the number of first special figure reserved storage, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure, is a predetermined upper limit. (For example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) is determined (step S502). CPU103, for example by reading the 1st reservation memory number count value which is the storage value of the 1st reservation memory number counter provided in game control counter setting section 154, it should be able to identify the number of the 1st special figure reservation memory. When the number of first special figure reservation storage is not the upper limit value in step S502 (step S502; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is set to "1" ( step S503).

When the first starting port switch 22A is off in step S501a (step S501a; N), when the number of first special figure pending storage has reached the upper limit in step S502 (step S502; Y), variable Based on the detection signal from the second starting opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6B, it is determined whether the second starting opening switch 22B is on (step S501b). At this time, if the second starting port switch 22B is on (step S501b; Y), the second special figure pending memory number, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the second special figure, is a predetermined upper limit. (For example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) is determined (step S505). CPU103, for example by reading the second reservation memory number count value which is the stored value of the second reservation memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154, may be able to specify the number of second special figure reservation memory. When the second special figure reservation storage number is not the upper limit value in step S505 (step S505; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is set to "2" ( step S506).

After executing either of the processes of step S503 and step S506, the number of special figure pending storage corresponding to the starting opening buffer value, which is the stored value of the starting opening buffer, is updated so as to add 1 (step S507). For example, when the starting buffer value is "1", the first reserved storage number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting buffer value is "2", the second reserved storage number count value is incremented by 1. In this way, the first reserved memory number count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is established. Updated to increase. In addition, the second reserved memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is established. Updated to increase. At this time, the total reserved storage number is also updated by adding 1 (step S508). For example, the total pending memory number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154, may be updated so as to add 1.

After executing the process of step S508, the CPU 103 selects the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination and the jackpot type determination from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154. Numerical data indicating the random number MR2 for use and the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern are extracted and specified (step S509). Numerical data indicating each random number extracted in this manner is stored by being set as suspension information at the beginning of the empty entry in the special figure suspension storage unit corresponding to the starting opening buffer value (step S510). For example, when the start buffer value is "1", numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 are stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A, while when the start buffer value is "2", Numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 are stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B.

The numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for judging the result of the special figure display and the random number MR2 for judging the type of the big hit determine whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is to be a "big hit", and whether or not the variable display result is determined. It is used to determine the jackpot type in the case of "jackpot". The random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern including the variable display time of the special symbols and decorative symbols. By executing the process of step S509, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data representing all of the random numbers used for determining the variable display mode including the result of variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols and the variable display time. It is specified to determine the variable display result in a variable display result determination module (step S525), which will be described later.

Following the processing of step S510, the transmission setting of the starting opening winning designation command according to the starting opening buffer value is performed (step S511). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", by storing the storage address of the first starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, the effect control board 12 for transmitting the first starting entry winning designation command. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer. Make settings for sending the second start winning designation command. The start opening winning designation command set in this manner is sent from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. transmitted.

Following the process of step S511, a winning random number determination process is executed (step S512). After that, for example, by storing the storage address of the pending storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, the pending storage number notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 settings are made (step S513). The reserved memory number notification command set in this way is, for example, after the special symbol process process is completed, by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. transmitted.

After executing the processing of step S513, it is determined whether or not the starting port buffer value is "1" (step S514). At this time, if the start buffer value is "1" (step S514; Y), the start buffer is cleared and the stored value is initialized to "0" (step S515). move on. On the other hand, when the start buffer value is "2" (step S514; N), after clearing the start buffer and initializing the stored value to "0" (step S516), End the process. Thus, even when both the first starter switch 22A and the second starter switch 22B simultaneously detect valid starting winnings of game balls, processing based on the detection of both valid starting winnings can be reliably completed.

FIG. 38(A) is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S512 of FIG. 37 as the winning random number determination process. In the first embodiment, when the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is started, the special symbol normal processing (step S22 in FIG. 6, FIG. 39), which will be described later, special symbol display result (special symbol variable display result ) is determined as "big hit" and whether or not to be controlled to the big hit game state and the special figure display result is determined as "small hit" and whether to be controlled to the small hit game state is determined. On the other hand, apart from these determinations, at the timing when the game ball is detected at the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening or second starting winning opening), the CPU 103 executes the random value determination process at the time of winning in step S512. By doing so, it is determined whether or not it is determined to stop display the big hit pattern or the small hit pattern as a special figure display result, and whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes a predetermined display mode with super reach. I do. As a result, before the start of the variable display of the special symbols and decorative symbols based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the starting winning hole, that is, at the start of the variable display, it is determined whether a big win or a small win is to be made. Prior to that, it is determined whether the special figure display result is "big hit" or "small hit", and which category the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is the variable display mode, and based on this determination result Then, the effect control CPU 120 or the like executes a pre-reading notice effect such as a pending display notice effect, as will be described later.

In the random number determination process at the time of winning shown in FIG. to specify the current gaming state (step S521). The CPU 103 specifies that it is in a variable probability state when the variable probability flag is on, specifies that it is in a short time state when the variable probability flag is off and the time saving flag is on, and both the variable probability flag and the short time flag are off. Sometimes it is sufficient to specify that it is in a normal state.

Following the processing of step S521, the CPU 103 refers to the top address in the RAM 102 (see FIG. 30(B)) and identifies the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (step S522). Next, a special figure display result determination table corresponding to the current game state, the starting opening buffer value and the set value is selected and set (step S524). After that, in the variable display result determination module (step S525) shown in FIG. 40, a process of determining whether the special figure display result is "big hit", "small hit", or "loss" is performed.

As shown in FIG. 40, in the variable display result determination module, the CPU 103 includes numerical data indicating the numerical range of the jackpot determination value in the set special figure display result determination table and the specified random number MR1 for special figure display result determination. are compared (step S571), and it is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for special figure display result determination is within a predetermined jackpot determination range (step S572). At this time, by determining that the random number MR1 is within the jackpot determination range, it can be determined that the variable display result based on the reserved data including the random number MR1 is determined to be a "big hit".

If it is determined at step S572 that it is within the jackpot determination range (step S572; Y), it is determined that the variable display is a jackpot (step S576). On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not within the jackpot determination range in step S572, that is, if it is determined that the variable display does not hit the jackpot (step S572; N), the set special figure display result determination table The numerical value range of the hit judgment value is compared with the numerical data indicating the specified random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment (step S573), and the random for special figure display result judgment extracted in step S509 of FIG. It is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the numerical value MR1 is within a predetermined small hit determination range (step S574).

If it is determined that the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 is within the predetermined small hit determination range (step S574; Y), it is determined that the variable display will result in a small hit (step S577). On the other hand, if it is determined in step S574 that it is not within the small hit determination range, that is, if it is determined that the variable display will not result in a small hit (step S574; N), it is determined that the variable display will result in a loss. (Step S575).

Returning to FIG. 38(A), it is checked whether or not it is determined to be a big hit in the variable display at step S575 (step S526). It is checked whether or not it is determined to be a small hit in the display (step S527), and when it is determined not to be a small hit, that is, when it is determined to be a loss in the variable display (step S526; N), variable display Execute the transmission setting of the first symbol designation command, which is the symbol designation command corresponding to the result being "lost" (step S527a), and whether or not the time saving flag is set, that is, the current game state is time saving It is determined whether or not it is in the state (step S528).

When it is determined at step S526 that the variable display will result in a big hit (step S526; Y), the big hit type is determined based on the big hit type determination random number MR2 and the big hit type determination table (step S533). At this time, the CPU 103, according to the variable special figure ("first special figure" corresponding to "1" or "second special figure" corresponding to "2") specified corresponding to the start buffer value , select table data for big hit type determination from the table data constituting the big hit type determination table. Then, by referring to the selected table data for judging big hit types, it is judged which of the plurality of types the big hit type is judged to be.

Also, a pattern designation command corresponding to the determined big hit type, that is, a second pattern designation command in the case of a big hit A, a third design designation command in the case of a big hit B, and a fourth pattern designation command in the case of a big hit C. The transmission setting of the symbol designation command is executed (step S534), after that, as a table for judging the big hit variation pattern, the big hit variation pattern determination table corresponding to the big win type is selected and set (step S535), The process proceeds to step S536.

Also, when it is determined in step S527 that the variable display results in a small hit (step S527; Y), the sixth symbol designation command, which is a symbol designation command corresponding to the variable display result becoming a "small hit", is executed. Execute transmission setting (step S531), select and set a small hit variation pattern determination table (step S532), and proceed to step S536.

Also, if the time saving flag is not set in step S528 (step S528; N), select and set the fluctuation pattern determination table A for loss (step S529), and if the time saving flag is set ( Step S528; Y), Select and set the deviation pattern determination table D (Step S530). Note that the deviation variation pattern determination table A is a deviation variation pattern determination table that is used when the number of pending memories is two or less. In addition, the variation pattern determination table for loss D is a variation pattern determination table for loss that is used when the game state is the high base state in which the time reduction control is executed.

Incidentally, in addition to these variation pattern determination table A for loss and variation pattern determination table D for loss, variation pattern determination table B for loss used when the total pending storage number is 2 to 4, A loss variation pattern determination table C used when the total pending storage number is 5 or more is prepared in advance, but as shown in FIG. For the fluctuation pattern, within the range that the random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern judgment can take, 1 to 450 when the setting value 1 is 1, 1 to 430 when the setting value is 2, and 3 when the setting value is 3 is 1 to 410, 1 to 390 when the set value is 4, 1 to 370 when the set value is 5, and 1 to 350 when the set value is 6.

In addition, in the fluctuation pattern determination table for loss B, if the set value is 1, the set value is 1 to 500, and the set value is 1 to 480 if the set value is 2, 1 to 460 if the set value is 3, 1 to 440 if the set value is 4, 1 to 420 if the set value is 5, 1 to 420 if the set value is 6 400 are assigned to each.

In addition, in the variation pattern determination table for loss C and the variation pattern determination table for loss D, when the set value is 1 within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take for the non-reach variation pattern 1 to 550, 1 to 530 when the set value is 2, 1 to 510 when the set value is 3, 1 to 490 when the set value is 4, 1 to 470 when the set value is 5, and set If the value is 6, 1 to 450 are assigned respectively.

On the other hand, in any of the fluctuation pattern determination tables for loss, 701 to 997 are assigned regardless of the set value, out of the possible range of the random number MR3 for determining the dynamic pattern for the super reach variation pattern. there is

Therefore, in step S529, by determining the variation pattern using the variation pattern determination table A for loss or the variation pattern determination table D for loss, the determination of non-reach and super reach is performed after the determination. Even if it is, it will always be a non-reach or super reach variation pattern, so in the determination at the time of starting winning, the variation pattern is determined using the variation pattern determination table A for loss or the variation pattern determination table D for loss. there is

After executing any of the processes of step S529, step S530, step S532, and step S535, each variation pattern determination table set in each of these steps and the numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination is used to determine a variation category according to the range of determination values that include the random number MR3 (step S536). Then, as shown in FIG. 38(B), at least when the variable display result is "loss", regardless of the total number of retained memories, a variable category with a variable display mode of "non-reach" in common, and " A variable category that is a variable display mode of "super reach" and a variable category of "other" that is a variable display mode other than "non-reach" and "super reach" (for example, normal reach and small hit) are provided, and a random value MR3 Based on, it is sufficient if it can be determined whether or not to be determined to such a variation category.

After that, after performing the setting for transmitting the variable category designation command according to the determination result of the process of step S536 to the effect control board 12 (step S537), the random value determination process at the time of winning is ended.

It should be noted that the symbol designation command and the variation category designation command are transmitted by the CPU 103 executing command control processing.

FIG. 39 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S110 of FIG. 6 as the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 39, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the second special symbol pending storage number is "0" (step S541). The number of second special symbol pending storage is the number of pending storage of the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the process of step S541, it is sufficient to read the second reserved storage number count value stored in the game control counter setting unit 154 and determine whether or not the read value is "0".

When the second special figure suspension storage number is other than "0" in step S541 (step S541; N), the suspension stored corresponding to the suspension number "1" in the second special figure suspension storage unit 151B As data, the numerical data representing the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for big hit type determination, and the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination are read out and specified (step S542). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored in, for example, a variable random number buffer.

Following the process of step S542, by subtracting 1 from the second special figure reserved memory number count value and the total reserved memory number count value and updating it, subtract 1 from the second special figure reserved memory number and the total reserved memory number While updating so as to allow, update the data of the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B. Specifically, the random numbers MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the reservation number "1" in the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B (for example, the entries corresponding to the reservation numbers "2" to "4") The indicated pending data is shifted upward one entry at a time (step S543).

Then, after updating the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value which is the storage value of the fluctuation special figure designation buffer to "2" (step S544), it moves to step S549.

On the other hand, when the second special figure pending storage number is "0" in step S541 (step S541; Y), it is determined whether or not the first special figure pending storage number is "0" (step S545) . The number of first special figure reserved storage is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. For example, in the process of step S545, read the first reservation memory number count value stored in the first reservation memory number counter in the game control counter setting unit 154, it is determined whether the read value is "0". Just do it. Thus, the process of step S545 is executed when it is determined that the second special figure pending storage number is "0" in step S541, and the first special figure pending storage number is "0". Determine whether or not As a result, the special figure game using the second special figure is started to be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure.

In addition, the special game using the second special is not limited to being executed with priority over the special game using the first special, for example, the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening Execution of the special figure game may be started in the order in which the game ball enters (passes) and the starting prize is generated. In this case, a table is provided for storing data capable of specifying the order in which the starting prizes are generated, and execution of the special figure game using either the first special figure or the second special figure is started from the stored data. It should be possible to determine whether

When the first special figure pending storage number is other than "0" at step S545 (step S545; N), the hold stored corresponding to the holding number "1" in the first special figure pending storage unit 151A As data, the numerical data representing the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for big hit type determination, and the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination are read out and specified (step S546). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored in, for example, a variable random number buffer.

Following the process of step S546, by subtracting 1 from the 1st special figure pending memory number count value and the total pending memory number count value and updating, etc., 1 subtraction from the 1st special figure pending memory number and the total pending memory number While updating so as to allow, update the data of the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A. Specifically, the random numbers MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the reservation number "1" (for example, the entries corresponding to the reservation numbers "2" to "4") in the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A The indicated reserved data is shifted upward one entry at a time (step S547).

Then, after updating the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value which is the storage value of the fluctuation special figure designation buffer to "1" (step S548), it moves to step S549.

In step S549, the current game state in the pachinko game machine 1 is identified by, for example, confirming the states of the time saving flag and probability variation flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 (step S549). The CPU 103 specifies that it is in a variable probability state when the variable probability flag is on, specifies that it is in a short time state when the variable probability flag is off and the time saving flag is on, and both the variable probability flag and the short time flag are off. Sometimes it is sufficient to specify that it is in a normal state.

Following the processing of step S549, the CPU 103 refers to the top address of the RAM 102 (see FIG. 30(B)) and identifies the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (step S550).

Next, the CPU 103 refers to the game information (see FIG. 30B) stored in the RAM 102, and determines whether or not there is a determination used set value stored (step S551). If it is determined that the determined used set value is stored (step S551: Y), the set value specified in step S550 is compared with the stored determined used set value (step S552), and the specified It is determined whether or not the set value obtained is the same as the stored determined used set value (step S553).

In step S553, if it is determined that the specified setting value and the stored judgment used setting value are not the same (step S553: N), error designation corresponding to the abnormality of the setting value for the effect control board 12 Along with performing settings for sending commands (step S554), a security signal is output to a management device such as a management computer of the game hall via a terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko game machine 1 (step S554). S555), a loop process is entered. After that, the CPU 103 does not execute any other processing, so that the pachinko gaming machine becomes unplayable (unplayable state) by the loop processing. Note that the error designation command is transmitted by the CPU 103 executing command control processing.

In this way, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the first embodiment has the set value (determined used set value) referred to when executing the previous variable display and the set value currently stored at the top address of the RAM 102. are different, the management device of the game hall can recognize that the determined used set value and the set value currently stored at the top address of the RAM 102 are different. Security can be improved.

In the first embodiment, the CPU 103 executes a loop process and does not execute other processes, thereby controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 to a non-playable state. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the CPU 103 executes processing such as restricting the shooting of game balls, and not performing payout of prize balls or variable display of special symbols even if game balls to each winning hole win. You may control the pachinko game machine 1 to a game impossible state by .

In addition, in the special symbol normal processing of the first embodiment, a difference between the determined used set value and the set value currently stored at the top address of the RAM 102 is treated as an abnormality, and the abnormality is detected by the management device of the gaming facility. , but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the display monitor 29, the first special symbol display device 4A, and the second special symbol display device 4B are shown in FIG. ) or a display mode (lighting mode) as shown in FIG.

Also, in the special symbol normal processing of the first embodiment, if the set value stored in the head address of the current RAM 102 is different from the set value used for determination, transmission of an error designation command to the effect control board 12 and Although the security signal is output only once to the management device of the game arcade, the present invention is not limited to this. The output may be repeatedly executed at predetermined intervals in the above-described unplayable state.

In addition, in the special symbol normal processing of the first embodiment, when the set value for determination and the set value currently stored at the top address of the RAM 102 are different, the CPU 103 puts the pachinko gaming machine 1 into a game-disabled state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the determined used set value and the set value currently stored at the top address of the RAM 102 are different, the CPU 103 controls the pachinko It is not necessary to control the game machine 1 to be in a non-playable state.

Furthermore, if the CPU 103 does not control the pachinko gaming machine 1 to be in a non-playable state when the determined used set value is different from the set value currently stored at the head address of the RAM 102, for example, a game hall Only the output of the security signal to the management device may be executed, or the setting value stored at the top address of the RAM 102 may be reset and specified. When resetting the set value stored at the head address of the RAM 102, for example, the determined used set value may be stored at the head address of the RAM 102. In one embodiment, by setting 1), the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be prevented from becoming excessively advantageous to the player against the intention of the gaming facility.

If it is determined in step S551 that the used set value is not stored, that is, if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cold-started and the first variable display is executed (step S551: N), or specified in step S553 If it is determined that the set value and the stored determination used set value are the same (step S553: Y), the current game state, the start opening buffer value and the special figure display result determination according to the set value A table is selected and set (step S556). After that, the same processing as that executed by the variable display result determination module in step S525 shown in FIG. 38A, that is, the processing of steps S571 to S577 shown in FIG. 40 is performed (step S557).

Subsequently, in step S557, it is checked whether or not it is determined that the variable display will result in a big hit (step S558), and if it is determined that it will not result in a big hit (step S558; N), it is determined in step S557 that the variable display will result in a small hit. It is checked whether or not it has been done (step S559).

When it is determined at step S558 that the variable display will result in a big hit (step S558; Y), the big hit flag provided in the game control flag setting section 152 is set to the ON state (step S561). At this time, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIGS. 23A and 23B is selected and set as a use table for determining one of a plurality of jackpot types (step S562). By referring to the jackpot type determination table set in this way, numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination stored in the variable random number buffer, and "jackpot A" and "jackpot B" in the jackpot type determination table. , "jackpot C", which of the judgment values assigned to each jackpot type matches (step S563).

By determining the jackpot type in the process of step S563, the game state after the end of the jackpot game state is either a time saving state or a probability variable state having a higher advantage for the player than the time saving state. It is determined before deriving the fixed special symbol as a result of variable display whether to control to . Corresponding to the determined jackpot type, for example, by setting the jackpot type buffer value, which is the stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 (step S564), the determined jackpot type memorize For example, if the jackpot type is "jackpot A", then "1", if "jackpot B", then "2", and if "jackpot C", then "3".

On the other hand, when it is determined at step S559 that it will be a small hit in the variable display (step S559; Y), the process proceeds to step S560, and the small hit flag provided in the game control flag setting section 152 is set to the ON state. (Step S560).

On the other hand, if it is not determined in step S559 that the variable display results in a small hit, that is, if the variable display results in a loss (step S559; N), the process proceeds to step S565.

In step S565, whether or not to control to the big hit game state (whether the big hit flag is set) as a result of pre-determination, whether to control to the small hit game state (whether or not the big hit flag is set) ), furthermore, in response to the determination result of the jackpot type in the case of setting the jackpot game state, a fixed special symbol is set. As an example, in response to the pre-determined result that the special figure display result is to be "missed", a special symbol indicating a sign of "-", which is a lost symbol, is set as a fixed special symbol. Also, when the special figure display result is determined to be "big hit" at step S558, when the big hit type at step S563 is "big hit A", the special symbol showing the number "1" is determined. Set as a special pattern. In addition, when the jackpot type is "jackpot B", the special symbol indicating the number "3" is set as the fixed special symbol. Also, when it is determined that the special figure display result is "small hit" at step S559 (when the small hit flag is set at step S560), the effect that the special figure display result is "small hit" A special symbol showing the symbol "2", which is a small winning symbol, is set as a fixed special symbol corresponding to the predetermined result of . In addition, these fixed special designs are examples, and fixed special designs other than these may be set, and a plurality of types of designs may be set as fixed special designs.

After setting the fixed special symbol in step S565, after updating and storing the setting value specified in step S553 in the RAM 102 as the determined used setting value (step S566), the value of the special figure process flag is changed to the variation pattern setting process. After updating to "1" which is the corresponding value (step S567), the special symbol normal process is terminated.

It should be noted that when the reserved memory number of the special game using the first special figure in step S545 is "0" (step S545; Y), after performing a predetermined demonstration display setting (step S568), End the special symbol normal process. In this demonstration display setting, for example, an effect control command (customer waiting demo designation command) for designating a demonstration display (demonstration screen display) by displaying a predetermined effect image on the image display device 5 is transmitted from the main board 11 to effect control. It is determined whether or not the transmission to the substrate 12 has been completed. At this time, if the customer waiting demonstration specifying command has already been transmitted, the demonstration display setting is terminated. On the other hand, if it has not been transmitted, the setting for transmitting the customer waiting demonstration specifying command is performed, and then the demonstration display setting is completed.

In addition, in the first embodiment, since the judgment used setting value is stored in the RAM 102 as one of the game information (see FIG. 30(B)), when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by cold start, exemplifies a form in which the determined used set value does not exist when the first variable display is performed, but the present invention is not limited to this. By storing in an area that has not been cleared by the clearing process, even when the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a cold start, when executing the first variable display, the determined used set value and the head address of the RAM 102 The stored set values (set values set in the pachinko game machine 1) may be compared.

In the first embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 38 and 39, the variable display result is determined using the variable display result determination module that executes common processing. The variable display result determination module includes processing for comparing the set value specified by the CPU 103 (the set value stored at the top address of the RAM 102) and the determined used set value (see FIG. 39). Steps S551 to S553 shown) and processing for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the game stop state when the set value specified by the CPU 103 as the processing result and the determined used set value do not match (step S554 to step S555) and the like may be included. By doing so, even when executing the random value determination process at the time of winning, the process of comparing the set value specified by the CPU 103 and the used determination set value, or the set value specified by the CPU 103 and the determination use value as the result of the process Since the process of controlling the pachinko game machine 1 to the game stop state can be executed when the set value does not match the finished set value, the security of the pachinko game machine 1 can be further improved.

(Regarding various timers)
Next, game stop start processing will be described. During the game, a plurality of timers measure the time and period of the game. When the game is stopped, the CPU 103 stops clocking by these timers. These timers will be described in order. The attacker opening time timer is a timer for timing the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening. The CPU 103 uses an attacker opening time timer to measure the time from when the big winning door is opened to when it is closed. The inter-round interval period timer is a timer for timing the interval period between rounds during the jackpot gaming state. The CPU 103 measures the time from the end of a round to the start of the next round by using the inter-round interval period timer.

The V lid opening time timer is a V-variable game machine that controls the game state after the jackpot game is over based on passing through a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7. It is a timer for measuring the opening time of the V lid that is controlled to the open state and the closed state provided in front of the sensor that detects the V probability change. In the V probability variable gaming machine, the V cover is in an open state in a predetermined round among a plurality of rounds. Such a region where the V lid is open is called a V winning region. The CPU 103 measures the time from when the V lid is opened to when it is closed by using the V lid open time timer. The V passage waiting time timer is a timer for measuring the time of V winning to determine that a game ball passing through a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is valid. The CPU 103 controls the game ball that has passed through the predetermined switch after the special variable winning ball device 7 has changed from the open state to the closed state. A game ball that has passed through the switch) is also determined as a V prize within the effective period. The CPU 103 counts the validity period of the V prize during which the V prize is determined to be valid by the V passage waiting time timer.

The electric chew opening time timer is a timer that measures the opening time when the electric tulip type accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, which is the variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory), is controlled in an open state. . The variable winning ball device 6B changes between a closed state and an open state, but the CPU 103 measures the time from when the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state to when it is in the closed state by an electric chew opening time timer. .

The special figure fluctuation time timer is a timer for timing the execution time of variable display of special symbols. The CPU 103 measures the time from the start of the variable display of the special symbol to the end of the variable display of the special symbol by the special symbol variation time timer. The normal pattern fluctuation time timer is a timer for timing the execution time of the variable display of normal patterns. The CPU 103 measures the time from the start of the variable display of the normal symbols to the end of the variable display of the normal symbols by the normal fluctuation time timer.

The fanfare time timer is a timer for measuring a period during which a fanfare effect is executed, which is a period for notifying that a big win is controlled at the start of a big win. The fanfare period is a period in which a fanfare performance is executed as a performance operation for announcing the start of the big win game state after the big win symbols are stopped and displayed. The CPU 103 measures the time from the start of the fanfare effect to the end of the fanfare effect by the fanfare time timer.

The ending time timer is a timer for measuring a period during which an ending effect is executed, which is a period for reporting the end of the big win when the big win ends. The ending period is a period during which the jackpot end process is executed, and is a period during which the ending effect as a effect operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed. The CPU 103 measures the time from the start of the ending effect to the end of the ending effect by the ending time timer.

The CPU 103 has a special figure fluctuation stop period timer, a normal figure fluctuation stop period timer, etc. as timers other than the timers described above. The special symbol fluctuation stop period timer is a timer that measures the time (for example, 0.5 seconds) from when the variable display of the special symbol is derived and displayed until the next variable display of the special symbol is started. The CPU 103 measures the time from when the variable display of the special symbol is derived and displayed until the variable display of the next special symbol is started by the special symbol variation stop period timer. The normal pattern fluctuation stop period timer is a timer that measures the time (for example, 0.4 seconds) from when the variable display of the normal pattern is derived and displayed until the variable display of the next normal pattern is started. The CPU 103 measures the time from when the variable display of the normal symbol is derived and displayed until the next variable display of the normal symbol is started by the normal symbol fluctuation stop period timer.

(Game stop start process)
Next, the game stop start processing (processing of step Sb001) in FIGS. 31 and 32 will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing game stop start processing. First, in the game stop start process, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the attacker release time timer is in operation (step Sb010). In step Sb010, if the attacker release time timer is operating (step Sb010; Y), the attacker release time timer in operation is stopped (step Sb020), and the process is terminated. If the attacker release time timer is not operating (step Sb010; N), it is determined whether or not the inter-round interval period timer is operating (step Sb011). In step Sb011, if the inter-round interval period timer is in operation (step Sb011; Y), the inter-round interval period timer in operation is stopped (step Sb020), and the process ends.

If the inter-round interval period timer is not operating (step Sb011; N), it is determined whether or not the V lid open time timer is operating (step Sb012). In step Sb012, if the V lid open time timer is in operation (step Sb012; Y), the V lid open time timer in operation is stopped (step Sb020), and the process ends. If the V lid opening time timer is not operating (step Sb012; N), it is determined whether or not the V passage waiting time timer is operating (step Sb013). At step Sb013, if the V passage waiting time timer is in operation (step Sb013; Y), the V passage waiting time timer in operation is stopped (step Sb020), and the process is terminated.

If the V passage waiting time timer is not in operation (step Sb013; N), it is determined whether or not the electric chew opening time timer is in operation (step Sb014). In step Sb014, if the electric chew opening time timer is in operation (step Sb014; Y), the electric chew opening time timer in operation is stopped (step Sb020), and the process ends. If the electric chew opening time timer is not in operation (step Sb014; N), it is determined whether or not the special figure fluctuation time timer is in operation (step Sb015). In step Sb015, if the special figure fluctuation time timer is in operation (step Sb015; Y), the special figure fluctuation time timer in operation is stopped (step Sb020), and the process ends.

If the special figure fluctuation time timer is not in operation (step Sb015; N), it is determined whether the normal figure fluctuation time timer is in operation (step Sb016). In step Sb016, if the normal pattern fluctuation time timer is in operation (step Sb016; Y), the normal pattern fluctuation time timer in operation is stopped (step Sb020), and the process ends. If the normal pattern fluctuation time timer is not in operation (step Sb016; N), it is determined whether the fanfare time timer is in operation (step Sb017). In step Sb017, if the fanfare time timer is in operation (step Sb017; Y), the fanfare time timer in operation is stopped (step Sb020), and the process ends.

If the fanfare time timer is not operating (step Sb017; N), it is determined whether the ending time timer is operating (step Sb018). In step Sb018, if the ending time timer is in operation (step Sb018; Y), the ending time timer in operation is stopped (step Sb020), and the process ends. If the ending time timer is not in operation (step Sb018; N), it is determined whether a timer such as a special figure fluctuation stop period timer is in operation (step Sb019). At step Sb019, if other timers are in operation (step Sb019; Y), the other timers in operation are stopped (step Sb020), and the process ends. If other timers are not operating (step Sb019; N), other processing (step Sb021) is executed, and then the processing ends.

Here, the other processing (step Sb021) includes the following processing. For example, a process of disabling the firing of the batting operation handle 30, a process of disabling various sensors provided in the starting gate, the general winning gate 10, the out gate, and the passage gate 41, a processing of disabling the detection of various errors, This includes processing for invalidating the payout of prize balls. Various processes are invalidated by other processes (step Sb021), and the game is not normally executed.

(Game stop end processing)
Next, the game stop end processing (step Sb002) in FIGS. 31 and 32 will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing game stop end processing. CPU 103 first determines whether or not the attacker release time timer is stopped in the game stop end process (step Sb030). In step Sb030, if the attacker release time timer is stopped (step Sb030; Y), the stopped attacker release time timer is activated (step Sb040), and the process ends. If the attacker release time timer is not stopped (step Sb030; N), it is determined whether or not the inter-round interval period timer is stopped (step Sb031). In step Sb031, if the inter-round interval period timer is stopped (step Sb031; Y), the stopped inter-round interval period timer is activated (step Sb040), and the process ends.

If the inter-round interval period timer is not stopped (step Sb031; N), it is determined whether or not the V lid open time timer is stopped (step Sb032). In step Sb032, if the V lid open time timer is stopped (step Sb032; Y), the V lid open time timer that is stopped is activated (step Sb040), and the process is terminated. If the V lid open time timer is not stopped (step Sb032; N), it is determined whether or not the V passage waiting time timer is stopped (step Sb033). In step Sb033, if the V passage waiting time timer is stopped (step Sb033; Y), the stopped V passage waiting time timer is activated (step Sb040), and the process is terminated.

If the V passage waiting time timer is not stopped (step Sb033; N), it is determined whether or not the electric chew open time timer is stopped (step Sb034). In step Sb034, if the electric chew opening time timer is stopped (step Sb034; Y), the electric chew opening time timer in operation is activated (step Sb040), and the process ends. If the electric chew open time timer is not stopped (step Sb034; N), it is determined whether the special figure fluctuation time timer is stopped (step Sb035). In step Sb035, if the special figure fluctuation time timer is stopped (step Sb035; Y), the special figure fluctuation time timer being stopped is operated (step Sb040), and the process is terminated.

If the special figure fluctuation time timer is not stopped (step Sb035; N), it is determined whether the normal figure fluctuation time timer is being stopped (step Sb036). In step Sb036, if the normal pattern fluctuation time timer is stopped (step Sb036; Y), the stopped normal pattern fluctuation time timer is operated (step Sb040), and the process is terminated. If the regular pattern fluctuation time timer is not stopped (step Sb036; N), it is determined whether the fanfare time timer is stopped (step Sb037). In step Sb037, if the fanfare time timer is stopped (step Sb037; Y), the stopped fanfare time timer is activated (step Sb040), and the process ends.

If the fanfare time timer is not stopped (step Sb037; N), it is determined whether the ending time timer is stopped (step Sb038). In step Sb038, if the ending time timer is stopped (step Sb038; Y), the stopped ending time timer is activated (step Sb040), and the process ends. If the ending time timer is not stopped (step Sb038; N), it is determined whether the other timers such as the special figure fluctuation stop period timer are stopped (step Sb039). In step Sb039, if other timers are stopped (step Sb039; Y), the other stopped timers are activated (step Sb040), and the process ends. If other timers are not stopped (step Sb039; N), other processing (step Sb041) is executed, and then the processing ends.

Here, the other processing (step Sb041) includes the following processing. For example, processing to enable firing of the batting operation handle 30, processing to enable various sensors provided in the starting port, general winning port 10, out port, and passage gate 41, processing to enable detection of various errors, This includes processing for validating the payout of prize balls. Various processes are validated by other processes (step Sb041), and the game is normally executed.

(Effects of game stop start processing and game stop end processing, etc.)
As described above, as shown in FIGS. 31 to 42, the CPU 103 sets the attacker opening time timer based on the control to the setting confirmation state when the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the open state. The timing of the period is stopped, and based on the end of the setting confirmation state, the timing of the period of the attacker release time timer is restarted. In this way, the setting confirmation can be performed immediately, and the period during which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the open state is subtracted in the setting confirmation state, and the game progresses. can be prevented from becoming disadvantageous.

As shown in FIGS. 31 to 42, the CPU 103 stops timing of the period of the inter-round interval period timer on the basis of being controlled to the setting confirmation state during the inter-round interval period, and when the setting confirmation state ends. Based on this, the inter-round interval period timer is restarted. In this way, the setting confirmation can be performed immediately, and the player is prevented from being disadvantaged by the progress of the game due to the subtraction of the inter-round interval period in the setting confirmation state. can be done.

As shown in FIGS. 31 to 42, the CPU 103 stops the counting of the effective period of the V passage waiting time timer based on the control to the setting confirmation state during the effective period of the V prize, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on this, the counting of the effective period of the V passage waiting time timer is restarted. In this way, the setting confirmation can be performed immediately, and the player is prevented from being disadvantaged due to the fact that the effective period of the V prize is subtracted in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. be able to.

As shown in FIGS. 31 to 42, the CPU 103 stops counting the valid period of the electric chew opening time timer based on the control to the setting confirmation state when the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state. Then, based on the completion of the setting confirmation state, the timer is restarted to count the effective period of the electric chew opening time timer. In this way, the setting confirmation can be performed immediately, and the game progresses when the variable winning ball device 6B is ready to enter in the setting confirmation state, which is disadvantageous to the player. You can prevent it from being lost.

As shown in FIGS. 31 to 42, the CPU 103 stops the counting of the effective period of the special figure fluctuation time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the special symbols is executed, Based on the end of the setting confirmation state, restart the counting of the effective period of the special figure fluctuation time timer. In this way, the setting confirmation can be performed immediately, and the player is prevented from being disadvantaged by the execution of the variable display of the special symbols in the setting confirmation state and the progress of the game. be able to.

As shown in FIGS. 31 to 42, the CPU 103 stops the counting of the valid period of the normal pattern fluctuation time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the normal pattern is executed, Based on the end of the setting confirmation state, restart the clocking of the valid period of the normal pattern fluctuation time timer. In this way, the setting confirmation can be immediately performed, and the player is prevented from being disadvantaged due to the execution of the variable display of the normal symbols in the setting confirmation state and the progress of the game. be able to.

As shown in FIGS. 31 to 42, the CPU 103 stops the effective period of the fanfare time timer on the basis of control to the setting confirmation state while the fanfare effect is being executed, and the setting confirmation state is changed. Based on the termination, the fanfare time timer is restarted to count the effective period. In this way, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting, and prevent the player from being disadvantaged by the execution of the fanfare effect and the progress of the game in the setting confirmation state. .

As shown in FIGS. 31 to 42, the CPU 103 stops the counting of the effective period of the ending time timer based on the control to the setting confirmation state while the ending effect is being executed, and the setting confirmation state is changed. Based on the termination, the counting of the effective period of the ending time timer is restarted. In this way, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting, and it is possible to prevent the player from being at a disadvantage due to the execution of the ending effect in the setting confirmation state and the progress of the game. .

As shown in FIGS. 31 to 42, the CPU 103 is controlled to the setting confirmation state after the variable display of the special symbol is stopped until the next variable display is started. The timing of the period is stopped, and the timing of the period of the special figure fluctuation stop period timer is restarted based on the end of the setting confirmation state. In this way, the setting confirmation can be performed immediately, and the game progresses by subtracting the period in which the next variable display is started after the variable display of the special symbol is stopped in the setting confirmation state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

In addition, in the first embodiment, a gaming machine (so-called first type gaming machine) that shifts to a big hit game state based on the variable display result of special symbols and decorative symbols has been described. A game machine that shifts to a jackpot game state based on a game ball winning (V winning) in a special winning opening (V winning opening) in a variable winning ball device (so-called accessory) (so-called type 2 gaming machine) Alternatively, it may be applied to a game machine that combines the first type and the second type (one type two type mixing machine). When the starting winning to the second starting winning port is detected, the big hit determination is executed, and when the determination result of the big win is obtained, the variation display of the second special figure is executed and the result of the big win display becomes the big win game. The same game control as the big hit based on the start winning to the first start winning opening is executed, such as being controlled to the state. On the other hand, when the determination result is not a big hit, the small hit determination is executed, and when the determination result is a small hit, the variation display of the second special figure is executed and the small hit display result becomes a small hit game. A special variable winning ball device for a small hit is controlled to be open for a predetermined time. When a game ball is received by a special variable winning ball device for small winning in a small winning game state and the game ball enters a special winning opening (V area) and is detected by a predetermined switch, variable for big winning. The CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 executes the second-type jackpot game control in which the winning ball device is opened for a predetermined number of rounds in a jackpot game state.

In such a one-two-kind mixing machine, a small winning time timer may be provided for measuring the effective period for determining that the game ball that has entered the special winning opening (V area) is valid. The CPU 103 determines that a game ball passing through a predetermined switch with a delay even after the special variable winning ball device is changed from the open state to the closed state by the small winning time timer is a winning within the effective period. The CPU 103 measures the period during which the winning to the special winning opening is effectively determined by the small winning time timer. Then, the CPU 103 stops the counting of the effective period of the small hit time timer based on the control to the setting confirmation state when the small winning game state is set, and based on the end of the setting confirmation state. , You may make it resume time-measurement of the effective period of a small hit time timer. In this way, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting, and it is possible to prevent the player from being at a disadvantage due to the progress of the game due to the execution of the control in the small winning game state in the setting confirmation state. can be prevented.

In the first embodiment described above, various controls are executed in the setting confirmation state, but as shown in FIGS. 31 to 42, the same control may be executed in the setting change state. . For example, the CPU 103 stops timing of various timers based on control to the setting change state when the state is advantageous to the player, and stops various timers based on the termination of the setting change state. may be restarted.

The control of the timer may be changed depending on whether the variable display of the special symbols results in a big win display result or a loss display result. Specifically, when the variable display of the special design results in a big hit display, the timing of the special figure fluctuation time timer is stopped based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state, and the setting confirmation state is completed Based on the When the timing of the special figure fluctuation time timer is restarted and the variable display of the special pattern is displaced and the display result is displayed, even if it is controlled to the setting confirmation state, the timing of the special figure fluctuation time timer may not be stopped. . In this manner, the timer is stopped in order to give a disadvantage to the player with respect to the big win display result that is in an advantageous state for the player, but the timer is stopped in order not to disadvantage the player with respect to the loss display result. You can prevent it from stopping. As a control method, it may be determined whether the current game state is a big win display result or a losing display result before the game stop start process accompanying the set value confirmation process is executed. Then, if the setting confirmation is executed during the execution of the variable display of the loss display result, during the execution of the variable display of the loss, the pattern stop period was reached without stopping the timing of the special figure fluctuation time timer. Sometimes, it may be made to stop the special figure fluctuation stop period timer.

The control of the timer may be changed depending on whether the set value is advantageous to the player or the set value is disadvantageous to the player. For example, when the setting value is advantageous to the player and the setting confirmation state is reached, the various timers are stopped, but when the setting value is disadvantageous to the player and the setting confirmation state is reached, the various timers are started. You may choose not to stop.

(Effects of the first embodiment, etc.)
As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, as shown in FIGS. Among them, the range from 1020 to 1237 is set as the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. Then, if the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 2 to 6 (if the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is other than 1), from 1238 according to each setting value The range up to the value is set as a non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. That is, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 2 to 6, the hit determination value 1020 is set as the big hit reference value, and the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value are Since it is set so as to have a continuous numerical range, when determining whether or not to be controlled to the jackpot game state, the value of the random number MR1 is set to a non-common numerical range from 1020 according to each set value. Since it is only necessary to determine whether or not the value is within the numerical range up to the maximum value, the processing load of determining whether or not the CPU 103 should control to an advantageous state can be reduced.

In particular, in the first embodiment, since the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is set at one place with 1020 as the reference value within the range of 0 to 65535, a plurality of numerical ranges of the advantageous state judgment value are provided. Compared to the case where the value of the random number MR1 is within the numerical range of the jackpot determination value (whether or not to control to the jackpot game state), there is no need to execute the determination multiple times. It is possible to reduce the processing load of the CPU 103 for determining whether or not to control to an advantageous state.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 19 to 22, in the display result determination table, regardless of whether the game state is a normal state, a time saving state, or a probability variable state, the hit determination value 1020 described above is used as a big hit standard. The value is set so that the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value are continuous numerical ranges, so when determining whether or not to be controlled to the jackpot game state, random numbers Whether the value of MR1 is within the numerical range from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range according to the normal state or time saving state, and from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range according to the variable state Since it suffices to determine whether or not it is within the range, it is possible to reduce the processing load of determining whether or not the CPU 103 should control to the big hit game state.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 19 to 22, in the display result determination table, it is included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value depending on whether the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure The number of determination values is different (the number of determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value in the first special figure display result determination table is 328, whereas the number of The number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the hit judgment value is 655, which is about double). . Therefore, when determining whether or not to be controlled to the small hit gaming state, the value of the random number MR1 is a numerical range from 32767 to the maximum value of the numerical range of the small hit determination value according to the fluctuation special figure It is possible to reduce the processing load of determining whether or not the CPU 103 controls to the small winning game state.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 19 to 22, the numerical range of the small hit determination value in the display result determination table is set in the pachinko game machine 1 regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1. Since it is set to a numerical range (32767 to 33094 or 32767 to 33421) different from the numerical range of the judgment value of the big hit when the set value is 6, it is determined whether or not it is controlled to the big hit game state When performing, it is sufficient to determine whether or not the random number MR1 is within the numerical range from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range according to each set value, and whether or not to be controlled to the small winning game state. When performing the determination, it may be determined whether or not the random number MR1 is within the range from 32767 to the maximum value of the numerical range of the small hit determination value according to the fluctuation special figure, so the CPU 103 is in the big hit game state It is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control to a small hit game state and the processing load for determining whether or not to control to a small hit game state.

Also, the RAM 102 in the first embodiment is capable of storing setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 . Then, as shown in FIG. 39, the CPU 103 in the first embodiment reads the set values stored in the RAM 102 each time the variable display is started (every time the variable display result of the variable display to be started is determined). Also, set the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value corresponding to the read set value (set the display result determination table according to the set value), and whether to control to the big hit game state judgment is made. That is, the CPU 103 reads out the setting values from the RAM 102 each time the variable display is executed, and sets the display result determination table according to the read setting values. It is possible to prevent the display result from being judged.

In the first embodiment, setting values are read from the RAM 102 each time variable display is executed, and a display result determination table is set according to the read setting values. For example, the CPU 103 may read the setting values from the RAM 102 when the pachinko game machine 1 is started, and set the display result determination table according to the read setting values. When the display result determination table is set according to the setting values read from the RAM 102 when the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the setting is performed during the period until the power failure occurs in the pachinko game machine 1. All variable display results may be determined using the display result determination table.

Further, the CPU 103 reads out the set values stored in the RAM 102 each time the variable display is started (every time the variable display result of the variable display to be started is determined), and stores the read set values and the previous variable display result. The set value read out from the RAM 102 for determination (used set value for determination) is compared with the set value read out from the RAM 102 as a result of the comparison. An error designation command is transmitted to the control board 12, and the effect control CPU 120, based on the reception of the error designation command from the CPU 103, performs an error notification indicating that the set value information is abnormal (for example, an image A notification image corresponding to the error may be displayed on the display device 5). By executing the error notification in this way, it is possible to prevent an inappropriate variable display result from being determined due to reading of an inappropriate set value. Furthermore, not only can it be possible to more accurately identify that an inappropriate set value is set in the RAM 102, but it is also possible to make people around the gaming machine recognize that the set value set in the RAM 102 is abnormal. As a result, game parlor staff and the like can quickly deal with abnormal set values.

In the first embodiment, the set value stored in the RAM 102 is compared with the determined used set value each time the variable display is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, the set value stored in the RAM 102 and the determined used set value may be set based on the execution of the variable display a predetermined number of times or the elapse of a predetermined time.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 38 to 40, the CPU 103 determines the variable display result using a variable display result determination module common to when executing the winning random number value determination and when performing the special symbol normal processing. Therefore, a part of the processing can be shared between when the winning random number determination is performed and when the special symbol normal processing is performed, and the processing load of the CPU 103 can be suppressed.

Further, in the first embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 19 to 22, if the fluctuation special figures are the same, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is the same regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1. However, the CPU 103 sets the numerical range of the small hit determination value according to the setting value read from the RAM 102 when executing the variable display (the display result determination table according to the setting value read from the RAM 102 is set. set), so the CPU 103 can reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control to the small hit game state, furthermore, like the first embodiment, the big hit determination according to the setting value read from the RAM 102 When setting the numerical range of the value and the numerical range of the small hit judgment value, the processing for setting the display result judgment table corresponding to the setting value read from the RAM 102 can be shared, so the capacity of the processing program can be reduced. can be reduced.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 19 to 22, when 1 (the set value with the lowest jackpot probability) is set as the set value in the pachinko game machine 1, a non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set. Therefore, when 1 is set as the set value in the pachinko game machine 1, it is sufficient to determine whether or not to control to the jackpot game state by targeting only the common numerical range as the numerical range of the jackpot determination value. It is possible to reduce the processing load of determining whether or not the CPU 103 should control to the jackpot gaming state.

In the first embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 19 to 22, the jackpot reference value is set to the minimum value of the common numerical range of the jackpot determination values. It is not limited, and the jackpot reference value may be set to the maximum value of the common numerical range of the jackpot determination values. That is, in the first embodiment, the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set so as to be continuous from the maximum value of the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, but the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination values may be set so as to be continuous from the minimum value of the common numerical range of the big hit determination values.

In addition, in the first embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 19 to 22, the form of setting the small hit reference value to the lowest value of the common numerical range of the small hit determination value is exemplified, but the present invention It is not limited to this, and the small hit reference value may be set to the maximum value of the common numerical range of the small hit determination value.

Although the first embodiment has been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these examples, and any changes or additions within the scope of the present invention are included in the present invention. be

For example, in the first embodiment, the game information display unit 200 includes the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the first suspension display device 25A, the second suspension display device 25B, and the normal symbol display device. 20, normal figure holding display 25C, round display 131, right hitting lamp 132, variable probability lamp 133, shortening lamp 134, but the present invention is not limited to this, game information display The section 200 may include at least the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B.

Further, in the first embodiment, the first special symbol in the case where the CPU 103 is executing the setting value change process (setting value change state) and the setting value confirmation process is being executed (set value confirmation state) Although the display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are exemplified in the form of lighting in the same manner, the present invention is not limited to this, and the CPU 103 is executing the set value change process. The first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B may be lit or blinked in different modes depending on whether the set value confirmation process is being executed. By doing so, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in either the set value change state or the set value confirmation state depending on the lighting mode or flashing mode of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. You can easily tell if there is one or not.

Further, in the first embodiment, in the setting value change state and the setting value confirmation state, by lighting all segments constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, the first special symbol The display mode (lighting mode) of the display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B is made different from the display mode when the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B derives and displays the variable display result. , but the present invention is not limited to this, the display mode (lighting mode) of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B in the setting value change state and the setting value confirmation state , If the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are different from the display mode when the variable display result is derived and displayed, these first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B It is not necessary to illuminate some of all the segments that make up the .

Also, in the first embodiment, in the setting value change state and the setting value confirmation state, all the segments and the round indicator 131 that constitute the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B Although the lighting of the segment and the flashing of all the segments constituting the right-handed lamp 132 and the first reservation indicator 25A and the second reservation indicator 25B are illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, In the setting value change state and the setting value confirmation state, lighting of one segment constituting the round indicator 131, blinking of the right-handed lamp 132, all segments constituting the first suspension indicator 25A and the second suspension indicator 25B blinking may not be executed or may be partially executed.

In addition, in the first embodiment, in the setting value change state and the setting value confirmation state, only one segment among the segments constituting the round indicator 131 is lit. It is not limited, and if it is a combination that does not correspond to any of jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C, the number of segments that constitute the round indicator 131 in the setting value change state or the setting value confirmation state can be plural. There may be.

In addition, in the first embodiment, the form of executing the notification of the set value abnormal error using the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B was illustrated, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, for example, the pachinko game machine 1 may be individually provided with an error notification LED, and the occurrence of the setting value abnormality error may be notified by lighting or blinking the LED.

Further, in the first embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with the display monitor 29 for displaying the base value, but the present invention is not limited to this. may not include the display monitor 29. If the pachinko game machine 1 is not provided with the display monitor 29 as described above, it is sufficient to newly provide display means for displaying the setting values (or provisional setting values) in the setting value change state or the setting value confirmation state. .

Further, in the first embodiment, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the first suspension display device 25A, the second suspension display device 25B, and the round display device that constitute the game information display unit 200 131, right-handed lamp 132, etc. have been exemplified as a mode for notifying that the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting value change state or the setting value confirmation state by making a mode different from that during the game, but the present invention is based on this. 1st special symbol display device 4A, 2nd special symbol display device 4B, 1st suspension display 25A, 2nd suspension display 25B, round display 131, The right hitting lamp 132 and the like may be displayed (lighted or blinked) during the game if it is possible to notify that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting value change state or the setting value confirmation state.

Further, in the first embodiment, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the first suspension display device 25A, the second suspension display device 25B, and the round display device that constitute the game information display unit 200 131, right-handed lamp 132, etc. have been exemplified as a mode for notifying that the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting value change state or the setting value confirmation state by making a mode different from that during the game, but the present invention is based on this. It is not limited to this, and the "mode different from that during play" may include different blinking cycles, different brightness, different light emitting colors of the segments, and the like.

Further, in the first embodiment, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the first suspension display device 25A, the second suspension display device 25B, and the round display device, which constitute the game information display unit 200, 131, the right strike lamp 132 is lit or blinked to notify that the pachinko machine 1 is in the setting value change state or the setting value confirmation state, but the present invention is not limited to this. , when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting value change state or the setting value confirmation state, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the first suspension display device 25A, the second suspension display device 25B, the round An explanation that lighting or blinking of the indicator 131 and the right-handed lamp 132 is executed may be provided at a predetermined location of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, a location near the game information display section 200). By doing so, a game hall clerk or the like who is not familiar with the pachinko game machine 1 can use the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the first reservation display 25A, the second reservation. It is possible to prevent the lighting or flashing of the display device 25B, the round display device 131, and the right-handed lamp 132 from being misunderstood as a malfunction of the pachinko game machine 1 or the like.

It should be noted that in the game control main process of the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 29, when it is determined that the clear switch is ON in step Sa008 (step Sa008; Y) or in step Sa021 the set value changing flag Although a mode of executing RAM clear processing (step Sa009) after clearing is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, and the RAM clear processing is , when it is determined that the clear switch is ON in step Sa008 (step Sa008; Y), or when it is determined that the RAM clear flag is set in step Sa014, not after clearing the setting value changing flag in step Sa021. (step Sa014; Y).

(Modification A: Variation regarding numerical range of big hit judgment value and small hit judgment value)
In addition, in the first embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 19 to 22, regardless of the game state or setting value, the numerical range of the small hit determination value (common numerical range of the small hit determination value) is set to the big hit determination value. Although the range is set to be different from the numerical range, the present invention is not limited to this. Modification A regarding numerical ranges of the big hit determination value and the small hit determination value in the first embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS. 43 and 44. FIG.

In the modification A, as shown in FIGS. 43(A) and 43(B), the numerical range of the big hit determination value and the numerical range of the small hit determination value are continuously provided regardless of the game state or set value. good too.

It should be noted that when the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value and the numerical range of the small hit judgment value (common numerical range of the small hit judgment value) are provided continuously in this way, the increase in the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value By shifting the reference value of the small hit determination value accordingly, the numerical range of the small hit determination value may be changed while maintaining the number of determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value.

Specifically, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, as shown in FIG. At the same time, the common numerical range of the small hit determination value is set to 1238 to 1565 (1238 is the reference value of the small hit determination value) so as to be continuous with the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. Also, if the set value is 2, set the non-common numerical value range of the big hit judgment value to 1238 to 1253 so as to be continuous with the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value (1020 to 1237), and set the small hit judgment value The common numerical range is set to 1254 to 1581 (1254 is the reference value of the small hit judgment value) so as to be continuous with the non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value. Also, if the set value is 3, set the non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value to 1238 to 1272 so as to be continuous with the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value (1020 to 1237), and set the small hit judgment value The common numerical range is set to 1273 to 1600 (1273 is the reference value of the small hit judgment value) so as to be continuous with the non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value. Henceforth, even when the set value is 4 to 6, the common numerical range of the small hit determination value may be similarly set.

When the gaming state is a probability variable state, as shown in FIG. 43(B), when the setting value is 1, the common numerical range of the big hit determination value is set to 1020 to 1346, and the small hit determination value The common numerical range is shifted by the amount that the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value has increased from the normal state or the time saving state, and is continuous with the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value 1347 to 1674 (1347 is the standard for the small hit judgment value value). Also, if the set value is 2, set the non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value to 1347 to 1383 so as to be continuous with the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value (1020 to 1346), and set the small hit judgment value The common numerical range is set to 1384 to 1711 (1384 is the reference value of the small hit judgment value) so as to be continuous with the non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value. Also, if the set value is 3, set the non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value to 1347 to 1429 so as to be continuous with the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value (1020 to 1346), and set the small hit judgment value The common numerical range is set to 1430 to 1757 (1430 is the reference value of the small hit judgment value) so as to be continuous with the non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value. Henceforth, even when the set value is 4 to 6, the common numerical range of the small hit determination value may be similarly set.

In addition, as a form in which the numerical range of the big hit determination value and the numerical range of the small hit determination value (common numerical range of the small hit determination value) are set continuously in this way, as shown in FIG. Set the numerical range of the judgment value to the range of 65308 to 65535 (the range of the rear end of the numerical value that the hit judgment value can take), and the common numerical value of the big hit judgment value so that it is continuous with the numerical range of the small hit judgment value A range (64990 to 65207) may be set. Furthermore, in this case, the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination values is set so as to be continuous with the common numerical range of the jackpot determination values, and the minimum value of the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination values is varied according to the set value. It is sufficient to vary the jackpot probability according to the set value.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 44, when setting the numerical range of the big hit determination value and the numerical range of the small hit determination value, when judging the variable display result, first, the CPU 103 determines that the value of the random number MR1 is the big hit. It is determined whether or not the minimum value of the determination value (in the example shown in FIG. 44, 64990 for the setting value 1, 64974 for the setting value 2, and 64954 for the setting value 3), and the value of the random value MR1 is equal to or greater than the minimum value of the big hit determination value, the variable display result is a big hit by determining whether or not the random number MR1 is equal to or greater than 65208, which is the reference value of the small hit determination value. It is only necessary to determine whether it is a small hit or not. By judging the variable display in this way, the variable display result is judged without executing both the judgment of whether the variable display result is a big hit or the judgment of whether the variable display result is a small hit. Therefore, the processing load of the CPU 103 for determining the result of variable display can be reduced.

As described above, in FIGS. 43 and 44, the numerical range of the big hit judgment value and the numerical range of the small hit judgment value (if 1 is set as the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1, the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value and common numerical range of small hit judgment value, common numerical range of big hit judgment value and common numerical range of non-common numerical range and small hit judgment value when 2 to 6 are set as set values in pachinko game machine 1) is set as a continuous numerical range from 1020, which is the reference value of the big hit determination value, and the numerical range of the small hit determination value is the numerical range of the big hit determination value regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is set to include the same number of judgment values in a continuous range from . For this reason, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the random number MR1 is within the range between 1020 and the maximum value of the numerical range of the small hit determination value according to the set value. It is possible to determine whether to control to Furthermore, when it is determined to control to the big win game state or the small win game state, the big win game is played by judging whether or not the random number MR1 is equal to or greater than the minimum value of the numerical range of the small win determination value according to the set value. Since it is possible to determine whether to control to either the state or the small hitting game state, the CPU 103 determines whether to control the processing load to determine whether to control to the big hitting game state and the determination of whether to control to the small hitting game state It is possible to reduce the processing load for performing

Further, as shown in FIG. 43, when the game state is controlled to the probability variable state by the CPU 103, the big hit determination value increases as a continuous numerical range from 1020 which is the big hit reference value, and the increased value of the big hit determination value Since the numerical range of the small hit determination value shifts according to the range, the CPU 103 determines whether or not to control to the big hit game state within the numerical range in which the number of big hit determination values increases, and controls to the small hit game state. Since it is sufficient to determine whether or not, the processing load for determining whether to control to the big hit game state by the CPU 103 and the processing load for determining whether to control to the small hit game state can be reduced. can.

Also in the form shown in FIGS. 43 and 44, when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is not set, so the CPU 103 Since it is sufficient to determine whether or not to control to the big hit game state only for the common numerical range of the determination value, the processing load of determining whether or not to control to the big hit game state by the CPU 103 can be reduced. .

In the form shown in FIGS. 43 and 44, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is set so as to be continuous with the maximum value of the numerical range of the big hit determination value, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the numerical range of the small hit determination value may be set so as to be continuous with the minimum value of the numerical range of the big hit determination value.

Further, in the first embodiment, the form in which the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value are continuously set was exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and FIG. As shown in 46, the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination values may be set to different numerical ranges.

In addition, when the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value are set to different numerical ranges in this way, as shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, the numerical range of the small hit determination value (small hit determination value The common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value) is a numerical range different from the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, and the non-common numerical range when the set value of the jackpot judgment value is 6 (the number of judgment values included in the non-common numerical range is the largest In a numerical range different from the numerical range), the numerical range continuous from the reference value of the small hit judgment value (32767 to 33094 in FIG. 45, 32767 to 33421 in FIG. 46, in any case the reference value of the small hit judgment value 32767).

In the form shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, the reference value of the small hit determination value is common according to the variation special figure, but the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is different. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the reference value of the small hit judgment value and the small hit judgment value is the same regardless of the fluctuation special figure. There may be.

(Effects of modification A, etc.)
As described above, in the form shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set to the range of 1020 to 1237 with 1020 as the reference value regardless of the set value. In addition, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2 to 6, a numerical value different from the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value and the numerical range of the small hit judgment value (common numerical range of the small hit judgment value) In the range, the range according to the setting value with 60000 as the standard value (60000 to 60016 for setting value 2, 60000 to 60035 for setting value 3 ... 60000 to 60109 for setting value 6) is a big hit It is set as a non-common numerical range of judgment values. Therefore, in the development environment of the pachinko game machine 1, the jackpot probability can be changed only by changing the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value according to the change of the set value. load can be reduced. Furthermore, it is possible to reduce the processing load of determining whether or not to control to the big hit game state by the CPU 103 and to determine whether or not to control to the small hit game state.

In particular, the CPU 103 can determine whether or not to control the jackpot game state with 60000, which is the same value regardless of the setting value, as the reference value for the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. It is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control the game state.

45 and 46, when 1 is set as the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1, the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is not set. Since it suffices to determine whether or not to control to the big hit game state by targeting only the common numerical value range, the processing load of determining whether to control to the big win game state by the CPU 103 can be reduced.

In addition, in the form shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, the numerical range of the small hit determination value (common numerical range of the small hit determination value) is a common numerical range of the big hit determination value or a non-common numerical value regardless of the set value In a numerical range different from the range, it is set to be a continuous numerical range (32767 to 33094) with 32767 as a reference value (small hit reference value). That is, since the numerical range of the small hit determination value includes the same number of setting values regardless of the setting values, the CPU 103 is the same value regardless of the setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1. Since it can be determined whether or not to control to the small winning game state with 32767 as the small winning reference value, the processing load of determining whether to control to the small winning game state of the CPU 103 can be reduced.

In the form shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, regardless of the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set. When 1 is set as the value, the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is not set, and when a value of 2 or more is set as the set value in the pachinko game machine 1, the jackpot determination value is set according to each set value. Although an example of setting a non-common numerical value range has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. May be set. Even when 1 is set as the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this way, when setting the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, for example, 1238 which is the reference value as in FIGS. 45 and 46 A range up to a value corresponding to each setting value may be set as a non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. Then, the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set to be the smallest when 1 is set as the set value in the pachinko game machine 1, and the jackpot determination value increases as the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 increases. By expanding the non-common numerical range of , the probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state may be varied according to the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 .

Furthermore, in the form shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, if the variation special figure is the first special figure, the range of 32767 to 33094 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value, When the variation special figure is the second special figure, the range of 32767 to 33421 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value. That is, since the numerical range of the small hit determination value is set as a continuous numerical range based on the same value although the number of determination values included is different according to the variation special figure, the CPU 103 determines that the variation special figure is the second Since it is possible to determine whether or not to control to the small winning game state by using the same value 32767 as the reference value in the case of the 1 special figure and the case of the 2nd special figure, whether to control to the small winning game state by the CPU 103 It is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not.

In the form shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, the reference value of the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set as the lowest value of the non-common numerical range, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the reference value of the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value may be set as the maximum value of the non-common numerical range.

Further, in the first embodiment, the CPU 103 determines that the value of the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 is within the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value or within the non-common numerical range It is determined whether or not to control to the big hit game state based on whether or not the value of the random number MR1 is within the common numerical range of the small hit determination value Although the mode for determining whether or not to control to the small hit game state is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the CPU 103 enters the big hit game state by a method other than that shown in the first embodiment. It may be determined whether or not to control or whether to control to a small hit game state. For example, a calculation may be performed on the value of the random number MR1, and it may be determined whether or not to control to the big win game state or the small win game state based on the value of the calculation result. Furthermore, a calculation is performed on the value of the random number MR1, and the value of the calculation result exceeds a predetermined value (for example, 65535, which is the maximum value of the hit determination value). It may be determined whether or not to control to the state.

(Modification B: Modification concerning restoration of numerical data of random values)
Next, Modification B relating to restoration of numerical data of random numbers in the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 to 51. FIG. In the modification B, based on the numerical data of the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern extracted by the CPU 103 on the game control side (also referred to as the main side), the effect control CPU 120 on the effect control side (also referred to as the sub side) is variable. When the display can be executed, the CPU 103 outputs a specific command obtained by processing the numerical data of the random number MR3 to the effect control CPU 120, and the effect control CPU 120 restores the numerical data of the random number MR3 from the received specific command. An example of controlling effects corresponding to variable display based on the numerical data of the restored random number MR3 will be mainly described.

On the side of the main board 11, the random numbers used by the CPU 103 for game control include a random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, a random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, a random number MR3 for variation pattern determination, and a normal figure display. The random number MR4 for result determination, the random number MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4, etc. are controlled so as to be countable. The random numbers MR1 to MR5 may be counted by software update using different random counters by the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104 as a counter. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100 or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100 . Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

The CPU 103, at the timing when the start winning to the first start winning opening is detected and the timing when the starting winning to the second start winning opening is detected, numerical data of the random number MR1 for judging the result of the special figure display. Extracted from the counter and based on the extracted numerical data, it is possible to judge the success of big hits, small hits, etc. be. The CPU 103, at the timing when the start winning to the first start winning opening is detected and the timing when the starting winning to the second start winning opening is detected, outputs the numerical data of the random number MR2 for judging the jackpot type from the counter. Based on the extracted numerical data, it is possible to perform jackpot type determination (including determination of stop symbols for each jackpot type) for selecting and determining the jackpot type from a plurality of jackpot types. The CPU 103 extracts the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern from the counter at the timing when the starting winning to the first starting winning opening is detected and the timing when the starting winning to the second starting winning opening is detected, It is possible to process the extracted random number value MR3 and transmit it to the effect control CPU 120 .

The random number MR1, the random number MR2, and the random number MR3 extracted at the timing when the start winning is detected are reserved and stored in the RAM 102 as reserved information (reserved data). Then, in the CPU 103, each of the winning judgment by the random number value MR1 and the jackpot type judgment by the random number value MR2 is performed for the performance control CPU 120 for execution of the performance such as the reserved look-ahead notice performance. executed in time. The CPU 103 does not execute the variation pattern determination by the random number MR3 at the timing when the start winning is detected, but the effect control CPU 120 restores the processed random number MR3 and executes it. After that, at the start timing of the variable display, based on the reserved information of the random number MR1, the random number MR2, and the random number MR3, in order to execute the variable display, the determination of winning or not, the judgment of the type of big hit, etc. And, variation pattern determination is executed.

In modification B, when it is determined to be a big hit, a setting will be described as an example in which the jackpot type is selected and determined to be either a "non-probability change" (normal jackpot) or a "probability change" (probability change big hit). do.

In the case of a normal jackpot, after the jackpot game state is completed, a time-saving state (high base state) is set until variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) in a low probability state (non-probability variable state). . Such a game state is called a low probability high base state. After such a time-saving state is completed, it is controlled to a low-probability state (non-probability-variable state) and a low-base state (a control state in which it is difficult for game balls to enter the second start winning opening). Such a game state is called a low probability low base state. The state at the beginning of activation when the power of the pachinko game machine 1 is turned on is basically a low-probability-low base state.

In the case of variable probability big win, after the end of the big win game state, it becomes a high probability state (variable probability state) and a short time state (high base state) until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times). Such a game state is called a high probability high base state. After such a high probability high base state is completed, it is controlled to a low probability low base state. In the case of a small win, the game state does not change before and after the small win game state ends.

FIG. 47 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the effect control command in modification B. FIG. In modification B, command C3XXH, command F0XX, command F1XX, command F2XX, and command F3XX are added to the contents of the effect control commands described with reference to FIG. 10(A).

The command C3XXH is a symbol designating command indicating whether or not a big win will occur and the judgment result of the type of the big win among the results of determination at the time of winning.

Command F0XX, command F1XX, command F2XX, and command F3XX are random value transmission commands 1 to 4 for notifying (transmitting) random value information of random value MR3 for variation pattern determination at the time of starting winning. The random number transmission commands 1 to 4 are used to divide the numerical data of the random number MR3 into four and transmit them. The command F4XX is a variation pattern distribution state specification command (a division command that can specify the division of the variable display pattern) that designates the distribution state of the variation pattern (variable display pattern) at the time of starting winning.

48A and 48B are diagrams for explaining processing related to conversion and restoration of the variation pattern determination random number value MR3 in Modification B. FIG. In the modification B, in the main processing by the CPU 103, the conversion processing of the fluctuation pattern determination random number value MR3 is executed. A plurality of commands are transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the conversion process by the CPU 103 . Then, in the sub-side processing by the effect control CPU 120, restoration processing of the random number value MR3 is executed from a plurality of commands. Specific examples of these processes will be described below.

As shown in FIG. 48, it is assumed that "60000" is extracted as the fluctuation pattern determination random number MR3 (ranging from 0 to 65535). In such a case, the CPU 103 converts the decimal value from (60000)D to (EA60)H into a hexadecimal number in the main processing. After conversion to hexadecimal, each digit of the random number MR3, which has become 4-digit numerical data (EA60)H, is divided into a plurality (4) and sent as commands 1 to 4 for sending random numbers. do. For example, by processing each digit of the random number MR3, which has become four-digit numerical data (EA60)H, into F0-00h, F1-06h, F2-0Ah, and F3-0Eh, a plurality of (four ) are divided into random value transmission commands 1 to 4 and transmitted.

On the sub-side that has received a plurality of random value transmission commands 1 to 4, the effect control CPU 120 takes out the lower bits (underlined part in FIG. 48) and determines (EA60)H as (60000)D. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 48, 0×160+6×161+A×162+E×163=0×1+6×16+10×256+14×4096=60000 from the numerical values of the extracted lower bits, and random number transmission commands 1 to 4 The random value MR3 is restored as 60000 from the Thus, the random number MR3 is restored by analyzing the plurality of random number transmission commands 1 to 4 in a predetermined order.

When executing the pre-reading notice, the information on the detailed fluctuation pattern makes it possible to execute more types of pre-reading notice than the rough information of only the fluctuation pattern type. However, if detailed information for determining the variation pattern is determined on the main side, the capacity of the main side, which has a smaller capacity than that of the sub side, will be squeezed and the processing load will increase. Therefore, the extracted random number for determining the fluctuation pattern is converted on the main side and then sent to the sub side, and after restoring the random number for determining the fluctuation pattern on the sub side, the pre-reading notice is executed to reduce the pressure on the capacity of the main side. can be mitigated.

A variation pattern command is a command for specifying a variation pattern (variable display pattern). Therefore, since the sub-side can specify the variation pattern command, it is possible to reduce the pressure on the main-side capacity.

Further, the extracted random number value MR3 for determining a variation pattern is converted from a decimal number to a hexadecimal number, and the converted value is divided into a plurality of random number transmission commands 1-4. Then, a plurality of random value transmission commands 1 to 4 are collectively output from the main side to the sub side. As a result, the sub-side can specify the variation pattern command, so that the pressure on the main-side capacity can be reduced.

FIG. 49 is a flow chart showing an example of a process executed as the winning random number determination process (step S512) shown in FIG. 37 in modification B. FIG. In the random number value determination process at the time of winning of the modified example B shown in FIG. A game state is specified (step Sc021). The CPU 103 may specify that it is in the variable probability state when the variable probability flag is on.

Following the process of step Sc021, the process of specifying the variation pattern distribution state is executed (step Sc022). The variation pattern distribution state refers to a state in which the distribution of the variation pattern as described below is selected.

When the CPU 103 executes the variable display, it uses a variation pattern table in which the numerical data of the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is assigned corresponding to each of a plurality of types of variation patterns, and is extracted at the time of starting winning and stored as pending data. Then, the variation pattern corresponding to the numerical data of MR3 read at the start of the variable display is selected and determined as the variation pattern to be executed.

Regarding the fluctuation pattern table, a plurality of tables with different data contents (selectable fluctuation pattern types and fluctuation pattern selection allocation, etc.) are stored in RAM 102 based on predetermined table selection conditions such as variable display results and the number of pending memories. provided in a memorized manner. For example, as a variation pattern table, a probability variation jackpot time table used when determining a jackpot and determining a probability variation, a non-probability variation jack table used when determining a big hit and not determining a probability variation, and a small number of pending memories when determining a loss (for example, special figure 1 or 1 to 3 pending data of Toku-zu 2), table for use at the time of pending small number of losses, when determining the loss and when the number of pending memories is large (for example, 4 pending data of Toku-zu 1 or Toku-zu 2) It includes a time table, a basic losing time table used regardless of the small number of retained memories when determining losing, and a small winning time table used when determining a small winning.

Such a variation pattern table is classified into a plurality of categories and stored in the RAM 102 according to game states such as the state of the jackpot probability, the state of the base, and the progress state of the time saving control. For example, the categories of the fluctuation pattern table include the first low probability base category, the second low probability base category, the first low probability height base category, the second low probability height base category, the first high probability height base category, And, a second high-term certain-height base category is provided.

The first low probability low base category is when the number of variable display times executed during the period in which the low probability low base state continues (the period initialized when a jackpot occurs) is less than a predetermined number (eg 200 times) This is the category of the fluctuation pattern table used for The second low-probability low-base category is when the number of variable displays executed during the period in which the low-probability low-base state continues (the period initialized when a jackpot occurs) is a predetermined number (for example, 200 times) or more This is the category of the fluctuation pattern table used for

The first low-probability-high base category is a category of the variation pattern table used when the low-probability-high base state (time-saving state after non-probability-variable jackpot) is less than a predetermined number of times (eg, 50 times). The second low-probability-high base category is a category of the variation pattern table used when the low-probability-high base state (time-saving state after the non-probability-variable jackpot) is a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) or more.

The first high-probability-high base category is a category of the variation pattern table used when the high-probability-high base state (probability-variable state and time-saving state after the probability-variable jackpot) is less than a predetermined number of times (eg, 50 times). The second high-probability-high base category is a category of the variation pattern table used when the high-probability-high base state (probability-variable state and time-saving state after the probability-variable jackpot) is a predetermined number of times (eg, 50 times) or more.

In modification B, an example in which the various variation pattern tables described above are set as selectable tables for the low-base state (non-time-saving state) and the high-base state (time-saving state) will be described. In addition, the table set as a selectable table may be the same in the low-based state (non-time-saving state) and the high-based state (time-saving state).

Each of the first low-probability low base category and the second low-probability low base category is a combination of a table at the time of a probability variable jackpot, a table at the time of a non-probability variable jackpot, a table at the time of a pending minority loss, and a table at the time of a small hit. A table used for determining the variation pattern is selected according to the game state.

Each of the 1st low probability height base category, 2nd low probability height base category, 1st high probability height base category, and 2nd high probability height base category is a table at probability variable jackpot, table at non-variability jackpot, basic loss A time table and a small winning time table are combined, and the table used for determining the variation pattern is selected according to the game state.

As described above, the variation pattern table used for selecting and determining the variation pattern when executing the variable display is provided for each category corresponding to the game state. Therefore, in order to select and determine a variation pattern when executing the variable display, a variation pattern table according to the game state classified (divided) as described above is based on the game state when the variable display is executed. identify the category of Then, from among a plurality of variation pattern tables stored corresponding to the specified category, a variation pattern corresponding to the game state including the big win determination result, the big win type determination result, the small win determination result, and the number of pending memories. A table is selected, and using the selected variation pattern table, a variation pattern to be used for variable display is determined based on the numerical data of the variation pattern determination random number value MR3 read from the reserved data.

In step Sc022, as a process of specifying the variation pattern distribution state, based on the data of the game state included in the current game state specified in step Sc021 and used to specify the category of the variation pattern table, A process of identifying the category of the variation pattern table is performed.

Next, in order to specify the category of the variation pattern table as the variation pattern distribution state specified in step Sc022, the setting for transmitting the variation pattern distribution state designation command to the effect control board 12 is performed (step Sc023). By receiving the variation pattern distribution state designation command at the start winning, the effect control CPU 120 recognizes the category of the variation pattern determination random number value MR3 included in the pending data corresponding to the start winning at the time of the start winning. can do.

Next, from the table data constituting the first special figure display result determination table or the second special figure display result determination table, special Select the special figure display result determination table data used to determine the figure display result (step Sc024). The first special figure display result determination table sets the variable display result as a "jackpot" before deriving and displaying a fixed special symbol that is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure, and puts the variable display result in a big win game state. A table referred to for determining whether to control or whether to control the variable display result to a small hit game state as a "small hit" based on the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result be. The second special figure display result determination table sets the variable display result as a "big win" before deriving and displaying the fixed special symbol as the variable display result in the special figure game using the second special figure, and enters the big win game state. A table referred to for determining whether to control or whether to control the variable display result to a small hit game state as a "small hit" based on the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result be.

In each of the first special figure display result determination table and the second special figure display result determination table, a numerical value (determination value) are assigned to the special figure display results of "big win", "minor win", and "losing".

In each of the first special figure display result determination table and the second special figure display result determination table, when the game state is a variable probability state (high probability state), more than when it is a normal state (low probability state) A determined value is assigned to the "jackpot" special figure display result. Thereby, in the variable probability state, the probability that the special figure display result is set as "big hit" and controlled to the big hit game state becomes higher than when it is in the normal state.

It is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 extracted in step S509 of FIG. 37 is within the range of determination of a big hit (within the range of determination of a big hit) (step Sc025). As a result, it is determined whether or not to make a "big hit" based on the variable display based on the reserved data.

If it is determined that it is not within the big hit determination range in step Sc025 (step Sc025; No), the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 extracted in step S509 of FIG. It is determined whether it is within the hit determination range) (step Sc026). As a result, it is determined whether or not to make a "small hit" based on the variable display based on the reserved data.

When the random number MR1 is not within the small hit determination range in step Sc026 (step Sc026; No), a symbol designation command corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "losing" is transmitted to the effect control board 12. The setting is made to do so (step Sc027). As an example, the CPU 103 may set a command table or the like for setting the EXT data in the design designation command to "00H". The symbol designation command is based on the judgment result of the judgment such as the big hit judgment and the small hit judgment at the time of the start winning, in addition to the judgment result of the judgment result of the big hit, the small hit, and the loss, as well as the judgment result of the big hit type is a command that can indicate

When the random number MR1 is within the small hit determination range in step Sc026 (step Sc026; Yes), a symbol designation command corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "small hit" is sent to the effect control board 12. The setting for transmission is performed (step Sc006). As an example, the CPU 103 may set a command table or the like for setting the EXT data in the design designation command to "03H".

If it is a big hit at step Sc025 (step Sc025; Yes), the big hit type is determined based on the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type (step Sc028). At this time, the CPU 103 corresponds to the starting opening buffer value, which is data capable of distinguishing between the "first special figure" and the "second special figure" when the pending data at the time of starting winning is stored. Depending on the variable special figure (“first special figure” corresponding to “1” or “second special figure” corresponding to “2”) specified by Select the table data for big hit type determination corresponding to the special figure. The jackpot type determination table is a table that is referred to for determining the jackpot type as one of a plurality of types such as "non-variable probability" and "variable probability" based on the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type. Table data corresponding to "1 special figure" and table data corresponding to "second special figure" are provided, and variable special figures (variable display special figures) specified corresponding to "starting buffer value ), one of the data tables is selected and used for judging the jackpot type.

Next, the setting for transmitting the design designation|designated command according to the determination result by the process of step Sc028 with respect to the production|presentation control board 12 is performed (step Sc029). As an example, when it is determined in step Sc028 that the jackpot type is determined to be a "probability variation" jackpot, the EXT data in the symbol designation command is set to "01H", and the jackpot type is determined to be a "non-probability variation" jackpot. If it is determined that , the EXT data in the design designation command should be set to "02H".

After executing any of the processes of steps Sc027, Sc030, and Sc029, numerical data representing the random number MR3 is read out from the reserved data extracted in step S509 of FIG. converts the numeric data from decimal to hexadecimal, and divides the value of each digit of the converted hexadecimal numeric data into multiple random number transmission commands 1 to 4 (processing to process the numeric data) (Step Sc031). Then, the random value transmission commands 1 to 4 divided in step Sc031 are set to collectively transmit to the effect control board 12 (step Sc032). As a result, random number transmission commands 1 to 4 processed from the numerical data of MR3 are transmitted by the command control process of step S27 in FIG.

FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing an example of the prefetch variation pattern command analysis process executed when a specific condition relating to the prefetch effect is established as the command analysis process (step S75) shown in FIG. 7 in Modification B. Effect control CPU120, in the look-ahead variation pattern command analysis process, CPU103 performs the process of analyzing the random number transmission commands 1 to 4 transmitted in step Sc032 of FIG.

The specific condition regarding the look-ahead effect for executing the look-ahead variation pattern command analysis process is the following condition. When the starting winning a prize occurs, among the effect control commands shown in FIG. 47, the first starting winning opening winning designation command or the second starting winning opening winning designation command, the pattern designation command, the variation pattern distribution state designation command, the first pending storage A plurality of types of commands, namely, the number notification command, the second reserved storage number notification command, and random value transmission commands 1 to 4, are transmitted at the same time. In the effect control CPU 120, in the command analysis process of step S75 in FIG. On the condition that it is confirmed based on the command data stored in the command reception buffer, the look-ahead variation pattern command analysis process of FIG. 50 is executed. In this way, the look-ahead variation pattern command analysis process is an analysis process that is executed at the time when the start winning has occurred.

In the look-ahead variation pattern command analysis process, by checking the data of the command stored in the effect control command reception buffer, all commands for the random value transmission commands 1 to 4 transmitted collectively at step Sc032 has been received (step Sc041). When it is determined that all the random number transmission commands 1 to 4 have been received, the random number analysis restores the variation pattern commands divided and transmitted by the random number transmission commands 1 to 4 in a predetermined order. A module (subroutine) is executed (step Sc042). In the random number analysis module, by executing the restoration process described as the process of restoring the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern on the sub side in FIG. The random number value MR3 for pattern determination can be restored.

Next, the random number analysis module (step Sc042) determines whether or not the random number value MR3 is normally restored (step Sc043). In step Sc043, for example, when the numerical data of the restored random number MR3 is numerical data within a predetermined numerical range (0 to 65535) that the random number MR3 can take, it is determined that the numerical value MR3 has been successfully restored. be judged. In other words, when the numerical value of the abnormal mode is outside the predetermined range of possible numerical values, it is determined that there is an abnormality.

When it is determined in step Sc043 that the random number MR3 has been restored normally, by checking the data of the command stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the variation pattern distribution set for transmission in step Sc023 of FIG. It is determined whether or not a state designation command has been received (step Sc044). When it is determined in step Sc044 that the variation pattern distribution state designation command has been received, the category of the variation pattern table designated by the received variation pattern distribution state designation command is identified (step Sc045). Thereby, the categories of the variation pattern table stored in the RAM 122 (first low probability low base category, second low probability low base category, first low probability high base category, second low probability high base category, first high probability The category of the variation pattern table used for selecting and determining the variation pattern for the look-ahead effect is selected from among the high base category and the second high term probability high base category).

Next, by confirming the command data stored in the performance control command reception buffer, it is determined whether or not the symbol designation command to be transmitted from the main board 11 in response to the occurrence of the start winning has been received. (Step Sc046). When it is determined in step Sc046 that the design designation command has been received, the number of pending memories that have been transmitted is confirmed, and from among the variation pattern tables within the category of the variation pattern table specified in step Sc045, variation related to the look-ahead effect A variation pattern table to be used for pattern selection determination is selected.

Next, using the variation pattern table specified in step Sc046, based on the numerical data of the random number value MR3 restored by the random number analysis module (step Sc042), the variation pattern related to the look-ahead effect is selected and specified. (Step Sc047). Then, the variation pattern specified in step Sc047 is set by storing the look-ahead variation command in the look-ahead variation command storage area of the RAM 122 as a command to be specified for the effect control CPU 120 as a variation pattern related to the look-ahead effect (step Sc048), the process ends.

Also, when it is determined in step Sc041 that at least one of the random value transmission commands 1 to 4 has not been received (when only some commands are received, when none of the commands are received, etc.) (Step Sc041), when it is determined in step Sc043 that the random number MR3 has not been restored normally, and when it is determined in step Sc046 that the design designation command has not been received, the start winning Since it is a case where an abnormality occurs in the performance control command transmitted at the time, the prefetching variation error command is stored in the prefetching variation error command storage area of the RAM 122 as a command to specify to the performance control CPU 120 that the abnormality has occurred. (step Sc049), and the process ends.

FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed as the pre-reading notice setting processing (step S161) shown in FIG. 8 in modification B. As shown in FIG. In the look-ahead advance notice setting process shown in FIG. 51, the effect control CPU 120 first checks the command in the storage area of the RAM 122 set in the look-ahead variation pattern command analysis process (step Sc061). Then, the storage area set this time and the entire storage area of the RAM 122 are checked to determine whether or not there is a prefetch variation error command (step Sc062). The read-ahead variation error command is a command that is set in step Sc049 of FIG. 50, and is a command that is set when a command cannot be received normally or when a random number value cannot be restored normally. If there is a pre-reading variation error command in the storage area of the RAM 122 (step Sc062; Y), the pre-reading notice is set not to be executed until the variable display corresponding to the stored information of the pre-reading notice error command is completed (step Sc067), the process ends.

In addition, when the pre-reading notice error command is stored, even if the stored information generated after the stored information is normal, the pre-reading notice is not displayed until the variable display corresponding to the stored information of the pre-reading notice error command is completed. should be set not to run. Then, the pre-reading notice may be permitted by receiving a normal command after the end of the variable display corresponding to the stored information of the pre-reading notice error command. Further, instead of checking the entire storage area of the RAM 122, it may be determined whether or not the command set this time is an error. Even in such a case, pre-reading notice may be restricted until the variable display corresponding to the stored information of the command causing the error is completed.

In step Sc062, if there is no prefetching variation error command (step Sc062; N), it is determined whether prefetching notice can be executed (step Sc063). For example, the storage area of the RAM 122 is checked, and if the pre-reading notice effect has already been executed or the game is in the jackpot game state, it is determined that the pre-reading notice is not executable. Note that the pre-reading announcement effect may be executed in these cases as well. In step Sc063, if pre-reading notice cannot be executed, in step Sc067 setting is made so that pre-reading notice is not executed, and the process ends.

If it is determined in step Sc063 that the pre-reading notice can be executed (step Sc063; Y), the pre-reading notice is drawn by lottery based on the pre-reading variation command set by the pre-reading variation pattern command analysis process described in FIG. (Step Sc064). For example, whether or not the pre-reading notice is to be executed by the pre-reading variation command, and if the pre-reading notice is to be executed, the details of the effect contents of the pre-reading notice effect are determined.

Next, in the processing of step Sc065, it is determined whether or not it is determined that the pre-reading notice is to be executed. When it is determined in step Sc065 that the pre-reading notice is not executed (step Sc065; N), the process ends. If it is determined in step Sc065 that the pre-reading notice is to be executed (step Sc065; Y), the determined pre-reading notice is executed (step Sc066), and the process ends. As a result, the effect control corresponding to the variable display is executed based on the random value MR3 restored in step Sc042 from the random value transmission commands 1 to 4 obtained by processing the random value MR3 for judging the variation pattern. Note that step Sc066 includes executing the determined pre-reading notice not immediately but at a predetermined timing (for example, timing at the start of fluctuation or timing during fluctuation).

In addition, when there is a pre-reading fluctuation error command in the storage area of the RAM 122 (step Sc062; Y), the case where the pre-reading notice is set not to be executed has been described. It may be determined whether or not there is a variation error command, and if there is a prefetch variation error command, it may be set to limit the execution of the prefetch notice determined by lottery.

(Effects of modification B, etc.)
As described above, the random number transmission commands 1 to 4 processed from the numerical data of the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern in step Sc031 of FIG. Sent by processing. Then, in step Sc042 of FIG. 50, the random value MR3 is restored from the random value transmission commands 1 to 4 obtained by processing MR3, and in step Sc066 of FIG. Corresponding production control is executed. As a result, pressure on the capacity of the main side as game control means such as the CPU 103 can be reduced.

49 by the CPU 103 and then transmitted, restored by the effect control CPU 120 in step Sc042 of FIG. Commands 1 to 4 are commands that can specify a variation pattern. As a result, pressure on the capacity of the main side as game control means such as the CPU 103 can be reduced.

As shown in FIG. 48, random number transmission commands 1 to 4 are commands in which the extracted random number M3 is converted from decimal to hexadecimal and the converted values are divided into a plurality of commands. A plurality of commands are collectively output by step Sc032 in FIG. 49 and step S27 in FIG. In this way, by outputting a plurality of commands at once, the variable display pattern is specified on the sub side as the effect control means such as the effect control CPU 120, so the pressure on the capacity of the main side such as the CPU 103 is reduced. can do.

Also, as shown in FIG. 48, the random value MR3 is restored by analyzing a plurality of random value transmission commands 1 to 4 in a predetermined order in step Sc043 of FIG. Then, as shown in step Sc048 of FIG. 50, a look-ahead variation command corresponding to the variation pattern command based on the restored random number value MR3 is stored. As a result, since the variable display pattern is specified on the sub side using the variable display pattern command based on the random number MR3 restored on the sub side such as the effect control CPU 120, the capacity of the main side such as the CPU 103 is reduced. It can relieve pressure.

49, and step S27 in FIG. 5, the main side such as the CPU 103 designates a variation pattern distribution state capable of specifying a classification of variable display patterns such as a category of a variation pattern table. A command is output to a sub side such as the effect control CPU 120. - 特許庁As a result, a variable display pattern is specified on the sub side by outputting a command that can specify the category (division of the variable display pattern) of the variation pattern table, so the pressure on the capacity of the main side can be reduced. .

Further, as shown in steps Sc027, Sc029, and Sc030 in FIG. 49, the main side such as the CPU 103 can determine whether or not to control to an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player. The designated command is output as a separate command from the variation pattern distribution state designation command. As a result, information about the most important win/fail results (big win determination results, small win determination results) is specified by the main side such as the CPU 103 and output to the sub side such as the performance control CPU 120, so that safety is enhanced. can be done. In addition, since the variable display pattern is specified on the sub side by transmitting the pattern designation command, it is possible to reduce the pressure on the capacity of the main side.

Further, in the effect control CPU 120, as shown in step Sc045 and step Sc047 of FIG. As shown in step Sc048 in FIG. 50 and step Sc066 in FIG. 51, an effect corresponding to the variable display is controlled based on the specified table and the restored random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern. As a result, the performance corresponding to the variable display is controlled from the table set based on the variation pattern distribution state designation command and the pattern designation command and the restored random number MR3, so the pressure on the capacity of the main side is reduced. can do.

In addition, as shown in step Sc066 of FIG. 51, the effect control CPU 120 executes, as an effect corresponding to the variable display, a prefetch effect related to the variable display that triggered the transmission of the variation pattern distribution state designation command. As a result, since the variable display pattern is specified on the sub side such as the CPU 120 for controlling the performance and the read-ahead performance regarding the variable display is executed, the pressure on the capacity of the main side such as the CPU 103 can be reduced.

In modification B, the case where random number transmission commands 1 to 4 are collectively transmitted in step Sc032 of FIG. 49 has been described. However, the random value transmission commands 1 to 4 may be transmitted one by one instead of being transmitted all at once. Also, if some kind of abnormality occurs during transmission and all commands cannot be transmitted, a command related to error information may be transmitted, or the game may be stopped.

Further, in modification B, it has been explained that the prefetch variation command is set in step Sc048 of FIG. 50 and the prefetch variation error command is set in step Sc049. However, by transmitting a look-ahead variation command based on a variation pattern analyzed by one device to another device, execution of a look-ahead notice may be determined in the transmitted device.

Further, in the modified example B, the case of determining whether or not the pre-reading notice can be executed in step Sc063 of FIG. 51 has been described. However, in step Sc063, if the hold information stored before the determination includes the hold information of the variable display that becomes the reach, it may be determined not to execute the pre-reading notice. Further, even when the pending information of the variable display that becomes the reach is stored, the pre-reading notice may be executed depending on the kind of the pre-reading notice to be executed. For example, if the pre-reading notice to be executed is based on hold change, the pre-reading notice by hold change may be executed even when hold information of variable display that becomes reach is stored.

Further, in the modification B, a plurality of processing methods for the fluctuation pattern determination random number value MR3 may be provided. Then, MR3 may be restored by transmitting information on the processing method of the fluctuation pattern determination random number value MR3 from the main side to the sub side.

Further, in the modification B, the fluctuation pattern determination random number MR3 is set in the range of 0-65535. However, the range of the fluctuation pattern determination random number value MR3 may be smaller or larger than this range.

In addition, in the modified example B, during the special symbol normal processing, the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is processed in the same way as at the time of the start winning, the main side transmits the random number transmission commands 1 to 4, and the sub side A variation pattern may be identified by performing random number restoration processing.

(Modification C: Modification in which the big hit flag and the small hit flag are stored in the common storage area)
In addition, in the first embodiment, the game control flag setting unit 152, the big hit flag and the small hit flag are set separately (that is, the big hit flag and the small hit flag are set in separate storage areas ), but the present invention is not limited to this. Specifically, the big win flag and the small win flag may not be set in separate storage areas, but may be set in a common storage area to reduce the pressure on the capacity of the main side (main board 11). . An example in which the big-hit flag and the small-hit flag are stored in a common storage area will be described below as modification C of the first embodiment with reference to FIG.

FIG. 52 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol normal processing in Modification C. As shown in FIG. In addition, in FIG. 52, a different portion from the special symbol normal processing of the first embodiment explained in FIG. 39 will be extracted and explained. In addition, in the modification C, when the big hit flag is set and when the small hit flag is set, it is set in the common storage area of the game control flag setting unit 152, but this common storage area is called a common buffer, and a flag (big hit flag or small hit flag) set in the common buffer is called a common flag. In modification C, it is determined whether it is a big hit flag or a small hit flag depending on the value of the common flag ("1" or "2") set in the common buffer.

After executing the process of step S557 described above with reference to FIG. 39, the CPU 103 resets (deletes) the storage contents of the common buffer (step S557A). Specifically, the value of the common flag set in the common buffer is overwritten with a value indicating "0". As will be described later, the value "0" of the common flag is also a value indicating "missing".

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not it is determined that the variable display will result in a big hit in the process of step S557 (step S557B), and if it determines that a big hit will occur (step S557B; Y), the CPU 103 is set in the common buffer. The value of the common flag is overwritten with a value indicating "1" (step S557C). Therefore, the value of the common flag of "1" indicates a "big win", and it can be said that the common flag of "1" is the big win flag.

When it is determined not to be a big hit (step S557B; N), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not it is determined to be a small hit in the variable display in the process of step S557 (step S557D), and determines to be a small hit. If so (step S557D; Y), the value of the common flag set in the common buffer is overwritten with a value indicating "2" (step S557E). Therefore, the fact that the value of the common flag is "2" indicates the "small hit", and it can be said that the common flag "2" is the small hit flag.

When it is determined that it is not a small hit (step S557D; N), the CPU 103 overwrites the value of the common flag set in the common buffer with a value indicating "0" (step S557F). Therefore, a value of "0" in the common flag indicates "missing". Since the value of the common flag is set to "0" by resetting the common buffer in step S557A, "0" may not be set again (that is, the process of step S557F may not be executed). .

After executing the process of step S557E, after executing the process of step S557F, or after executing the process of step S557C and then executing the processes of steps S562 to S564 described above with reference to FIG. A fixed special symbol is stored in a predetermined storage area in the game control buffer setting section 155 (step S557G). At this time, when the value of the common flag stored in the common buffer is "0", the CPU 103 stores the information of "lost design" as the fixed special design, and the value of the common flag stored in the common buffer is "1". , the information of the ``big win pattern'' is stored as the fixed special pattern, and when the value of the common flag stored in the common buffer is ``2'', the information of the ``small win pattern'' is stored as the fixed special pattern. In any case, the information of one of the confirmed special symbols is stored in the common storage area (the same area) in the game control buffer setting section 155. In addition, the information of the fixed special pattern is not limited to the pattern type information such as "losing pattern", "big hit pattern", and "small hit pattern", but may be information of random numbers of patterns, or lottery results based on random numbers of patterns. or a random number for display used for segment display (display on the game information display unit 200).

After executing the process of step S557G, the CPU 103 executes the processes of steps S566 and S567 described above with reference to FIG. 39, and ends the special symbol normal process.

(Effects of Modification C, etc.)
As described above, in the modification C, the big hit flag and the small hit flag are discriminated by the value of the common flag and stored in the common buffer. It is possible to reduce the pressure on the capacity on the main side rather than storing. In addition, since LD instructions can be reduced compared to LD (loading) separate big win flags and small win flags, pressure on the capacity of the main side can be reduced. In particular, in the pachinko game machine 1 having the setting function described in the first embodiment, the capacity of the main side (main board 11) is squeezed by the provision of the setting function. Therefore, the modification C becomes more effective by applying it to the pachinko game machine 1 having such a setting function.

In addition, in modification C, the big hit flag (common flag "1") and the small hit flag (common flag "2") are determined by the value of the common flag and stored in the common buffer, so both are set at the same time. can't happen. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the risk of game machine bugs and cheating.

In addition, in the modification C, as shown in the process of step S557G, the information of the finalized special symbol is also stored in the common storage area, so compared to the case where it is stored separately, the capacity of the main side is reduced. can be mitigated.

In addition, in the modification C, in the special symbol normal process, depending on whether the result of the variable display is a big hit or a small hit, the common buffer big hit flag (common flag "1") or the small hit flag (common flag " 2”) is set, but in the case of executing the process of prefetching the result of the variable display (prefetching judgment process) in the start winning judgment process of step S101 shown in FIG. It may be one that is not stored in the buffer. In other words, in the look-ahead determination process, even if the result of the variable display is determined in advance, the common flag (big hit flag, small hit flag, etc.) based on the determination result is not set in the common buffer, and the information of the look-ahead determination result is directed. It may be transmitted to the substrate 12 (sub side). By doing so, the risk of common flags being mixedly set in the special symbol normal process and the look-ahead determination process is reduced, so the risk of bugs and irregularities can be reduced.

Further, in the modification C, as shown in step S557A, before the value of the common flag is set based on the determination whether the result of the variable display is a big hit or a small hit, it is stored in the common buffer. The value of the common flag is reset (reset to the value "0" indicating deviation). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the risk that an unintended value is set in the common buffer.

Further, in the modification C, as shown in steps S557B and S557D, it is first determined whether or not a big hit will occur. Therefore, it is possible to compress the program by omitting useless processing. In the modified example C, it is determined whether or not a big hit will occur first, and if it is determined that a big hit will occur, it is not determined whether or not a small hit will occur. If it is determined that a small hit will occur, it may not be determined whether or not a big hit will occur.

In addition, in the modification C, the common flag stored in the common buffer (the value "1" indicating the big hit, the value "2" indicating the small hit, or the value "0" indicating the loss) is used in the special symbol normal processing. (For example, it is used when determining the type of finalized special symbol in step S557G), but it can also be used for other processes. For example, the variation pattern setting process in step S111 shown in FIG. 6 includes a process of determining one of a plurality of variation patterns based on the determination of whether the result of the variable display is a big hit or a small hit. However, the common buffer may be referred to during this determination. Similarly, in the special symbol stop process of step S113 shown in FIG. 6, the game state is updated based on the determination of whether the result of the variable display becomes a big hit or a small hit (for example, a big hit game or a small hit game or to end the time saving state and probability variable state) processing is included, but the common buffer should be referred to during this determination. In this way, the information of the common flag set in the common buffer can be used in a plurality of processes, so it is possible to further enhance the effect of compressing the capacity on the main side.

Although the pachinko game machine 1 has a setting function capable of setting a set value as described in the first embodiment, the configuration is such that a setting function is added to a so-called 1-type 2-type spec game machine. may be In addition, a game machine with specs of 1 type and 2 types is a jackpot (so-called first hit) as a result of the first special game in the normal state (low base state), so that after the jackpot game ends, the time saving state (high base state), and in the time saving state, the second special game results in a small win, and in the small win game state, the game ball passes through a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7. It is a game machine with a game property that can be a big hit (so-called consecutive game). Also, at this time, while the probability of winning a big hit in the special game (the first special game and the second special game) is changed according to the set value, the special game (at least the second special game) regardless of the set value The winning probabilities of the small hits in the game shown in the figure) may be the same. In this way, at the time of the first hit, the difference in the set value affects the probability of winning a big hit, but since the winning probability of the small win is the same regardless of the set value, in the case of consecutive games, the difference in the set value will result in a big win. There is no effect on the probability of becoming (passing through a predetermined switch during a small hit). Therefore, even if there is a high possibility that the pachinko game machine 1 with the setting function is set to a low setting, the effect of the difference in setting values can be reduced, and the interest in the game can be maintained. In addition, in a gaming machine having such a setting function and specs of 1 type and 2 types, the occurrence frequency of small wins increases in the time-saving state after the first win. For this reason, by applying the modification C to such a gaming machine with one type and two types of specifications, even if the frequency of small wins is high, each time a small win flag different from the big win flag is set to LD ( Since there is no need to load, the number of LD instructions, etc., can be reduced, and the pressure on the capacity of the main side can be alleviated.

Although Modification C is applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the first embodiment, it may be applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of Modification A or Modification B. Moreover, it can also be applied to the pachinko game machine 1 in the second embodiment described later.

(Modification D: Modification for standardizing timer update processing)
Further, in the first embodiment, the game control timer setting unit 153 stores data indicating a plurality of types of timer values. may be executed as a common process so that it can be used in the process of . An example in which timer update processing is made common will be described below as modification D of the first embodiment with reference to FIGS. 53 to 57. FIG.

53 is a flowchart showing an example of game control timer interrupt processing in Modification D. FIG. In addition, in FIG. 53, a part different from the game control timer interrupt process explained in FIG. 5 will be extracted and explained.

After executing the processing of steps S21 to S24 described above with reference to FIG. 5, the CPU 103 executes timer update processing for subtracting the set timer value (step S25A). In addition, the data indicating the timer value is set in each process described later (for example, variation pattern setting process, special symbol variation process and special symbol stop process), so that a plurality of types of timer values are set by the game control timer setting unit 153. However, the timer update process for subtracting the timer value is executed in common by the timer update process in step S25A regardless of the timer value. After executing the process of step S25A, the CPU 103 executes the processes of steps S25 to S27 described above with reference to FIG. 5, and ends the game control timer interrupt process.

FIG. 54 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol process processing in modification D. FIG. In addition, in FIG. 54, a part different from the special symbol process process explained in FIG. 6 will be extracted and explained.

As shown in FIG. 54, the CPU 103 executes the second zero flag update process before executing the process of step S101 described with reference to FIG. 6 (step S100). Specifically, CPU 103 updates the second zero flag by reading the timer value updated in the timer update process (step S25A) of FIG. Here, the second zero flag is a flag that is updated to "1" when the read value (data) is "0". The contents are retained even when returning to the original processing. Therefore, the second zero flag is updated to "1" when the timer value updated (decremented) in the timer update process becomes "0". In modification D, reading the timer value updates not the zero flag but the second zero flag, for the following reasons. That is, since the zero flag indicates whether the operation result is "0" or not, the operation for updating the zero flag requires more code than the LD (load) instruction for updating the second zero flag. Therefore, in modification D, processing is compressed by updating the second zero flag instead of the zero flag. Although the compression effect is reduced, instead of updating the second zero flag by reading the timer value, the zero flag may be updated by calculation.

FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern setting process (see step S111 in FIG. 6) in modification D. FIG.

In the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 103 first confirms whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S1111). When the big hit flag is set (step S1111; Y), the CPU 103 determines the big hit variation pattern using the big hit variation pattern determination table (step S1112).

When the big hit flag is not set (step S1111; N), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S1113). When the small-hit flag is set (step S1113; Y), the CPU 103 uses the small-hit variation pattern determination table to determine the small-hit variation pattern (step S1114). When the small hit flag is not set (step S1113; N), the CPU 103 uses the variation pattern determination table for loss to determine the variation pattern for loss (step S1115).

After the processing of step S1112, S1114, or S1115, the CPU 103 issues a symbol variation designation command (effect control command) indicating that the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is started. 12 (step S1116).

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a variation pattern designation command (production control command) specifying the variation pattern (variation time) determined in the processing of steps S1112, S1114, or S1115 to the production control board 12 (step S1117 ).

And, CPU103 sets fluctuation time as the data which shows the timer value of the special figure fluctuation time timer (step S1118). Then, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2" (step S1119), which is a value corresponding to the special symbol variation process (see step S112 in FIG. 6), and the variation pattern setting process is terminated.

FIG. 56 is a flow chart showing the special symbol variation process (see step S112 in FIG. 6) in Modification D. As shown in FIG.

In the special symbol variation process, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the second zero flag is 1 (step S1121). As for the second zero flag, as described above, when the timer value updated in the timer update process (step S25A in FIG. 53) becomes "0", the second zero flag update process (step S100 in FIG. 54) is executed. is updated to "1" by Therefore, when the value of the second zero flag is "1", it means that the timer value has reached "0" (timed out).

In addition, the timer value for determining whether or not it has become "0" (timed out) in the processing of step S1121 of the special symbol variation processing is the processing before shifting to the special symbol variation processing (the special symbol process flag is 2 This is the timer value (variation time) set in the variation pattern setting process (see FIG. 55) which is the process before updating to (see step S1118). However, this timer value (fluctuation time) is updated (subtracted) by executing the timer update process (see step S25A) in the game control timer interrupt process (see FIG. 53) instead of the special symbol change process. . Therefore, regardless of whether the timer value is used in any process (for example, special symbol variation process) (that is, the type of timer), the timer value can be updated by the common timer update process. Also, the second zero flag update process (see step S100) for updating the second zero flag is executed in the special symbol process process (see FIGS. 6 and 54) that can call the special symbol variation process as a subroutine. For this reason, it is possible to compress the processing rather than updating the second zero flag in each subroutine (for example, special symbol variation processing) called in the special symbol process processing.

When the second zero flag is 1 (that is, when the timer value (variation time) times out (step S1121; Y)), the CPU 103 terminates the variation of the special symbol, the first special symbol display device 4A or the second Control is performed to derive and display the stop symbol on the special symbol display device 4B (step S1122), and if the second zero flag is not 1 (that is, if the timer value (fluctuation time) has not timed out (step S1121; N)), The CPU 103 ends the special symbol variation process.

After the processing of step S1122, the CPU 103 controls to transmit a symbol confirmation designation command (effect control command) indicating that the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is stopped to the effect control board 12. (step S1123).

Then, the CPU 103 sets the symbol determination time (for example, 0.5 seconds) as data indicating the timer value of the special figure fluctuation stop time timer (step S1124). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3" (step S1125) corresponding to the special symbol stop processing (see step S113 in FIG. 6), and the special symbol variation processing is terminated.

FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the special symbol stop processing (see step S113 in FIG. 6) in modification D. FIG.

In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the second zero flag is 1 (step S1131). As for the second zero flag, as described above, when the timer value updated in the timer update process (step S25A in FIG. 53) becomes "0", the second zero flag update process (step S100 in FIG. 54) is executed. is updated to "1" by Therefore, when the value of the second zero flag is "1", it means that the timer value has reached "0" (timed out).

In addition, the timer value for determining whether or not it has become "0" (timed out) in the process of step S1131 of the special symbol stop process is the process before moving to the special symbol stop process (the special symbol process flag is 3 It is a timer value (symbol confirmation time) set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 56) which is the process before being updated (see step S1124). However, this timer value (symbol fixed time) is updated (subtracted) by executing the timer update process (see step S25A) in the game control timer interrupt process (see FIG. 53) instead of the special symbol stop process. be. Therefore, regardless of whether the timer value is used in any process (for example, special symbol stop process) (that is, the type of timer), the timer value can be updated by the common timer update process. Also, the second zero flag update process (see step S100) for updating the second zero flag is executed in the special symbol process process (see FIGS. 6 and 54) capable of calling the special symbol stop process as a subroutine. For this reason, it is possible to compress the processing more than updating the second zero flag in each subroutine (for example, special symbol stop processing) called in the special symbol process processing.

When the second zero flag is 1 (that is, when the timer value (fluctuation time) times out (step S1131; Y)), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S1132). When the 2 zero flag is not 1 (that is, when the timer value (fluctuation time) has not timed out (step S1131; N)), the CPU 103 terminates the special symbol stop processing.

If the jackpot flag is set (step S1132; Y), the CPU103 is whether the probability variable flag indicating that it is a variable probability state and the time saving flag indicating that it is a time saving state (high base state) are set. , the flag is reset (step S1133), and control is performed to transmit a hit start designation command (performance control command) designating the start of the big hit game state to the performance control board 12 (step S1134).

After the process of S1134, the CPU 103 sets the time for performing the fanfare effect as data indicating the timer value of the fanfare time timer (step S1135). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4" (step S1136) corresponding to the big hit opening preprocessing (see step S114 in FIG. 6), and the special symbol stop processing is terminated.

If the big hit flag is not set (step S1132; N), the CPU 103 checks whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S1137), and if the small hit flag is set (step S1137 In ;Y), the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a small winning start designation command (production control command) designating the start of the small winning game state to the production control board 12 (step S1138).

After the processing of S1138, the CPU 103 sets the time for executing the fanfare effect of the small winning game as data indicating the timer value of the fanfare time timer of the small winning game (step S1139). Then, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8" (step S1140), which is a value corresponding to the small hit opening pretreatment (see step S118 in FIG. 6), and the special symbol stop process is terminated.

If the small hit flag is not set (step S1137; N), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the variable probability flag indicating the variable probability state is set (step S1141). If the probability variation flag is set (step S1141; Y), the process proceeds to step S1147, and if the probability variation flag is not set (step S1141; N), the CPU 103 indicates that the time saving state It is checked whether or not the time saving flag shown is set (step S1142). When the time saving flag is not set (step S1142; N), the process proceeds to step S1147, and when the time saving flag is set (step S1142; Y), the number of possible fluctuations of the special symbol in the time saving state The value of the time saving number counter indicating is -1 (step S1143). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the time saving number counter has reached 0 (step S1144), and when the value of the time saving number counter has not reached 0 (step S1144; N), the process proceeds to step S1147. When the value of the time saving number counter becomes 0 (step S1144; Y), the time saving flag is reset (step S1145), and the game state (low base state, normal state) in which the time saving control is not performed Control is performed to transmit the corresponding first game state designation command (effect control command) to the effect control board 12 (step S1146). Then, in the process of step S1147, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "0" corresponding to the special symbol normal process (see step S110 in FIG. 6), and the special symbol stop process is terminated.

(Effects of modification D, etc.)
As described above, in the modification D, in a plurality of processes different from the special symbol variation process and the special symbol stop process, all of the processes are executed based on the second zero flag, and the second zero flag is updated. The timer values are different for each of the multiple processes, but all of them are updated by a common timer update process executed prior to the multiple processes. That is, in modification D, the timer value used in a plurality of processes can be updated by one common process (timer update process in FIG. 53), so the process can be compressed, and the main side (main board 11 ) capacity can be relieved.

In addition, in the modification D, the timer value updated by the shared timer update process (or the second zero flag updated based on the timer value) is used as a plurality of processes, special symbol variation process and special Although an example of the pattern stop processing has been described, it is not limited to this, and may be used in the big hit opening pre-processing (S114) shown in FIG. Also in this case, similarly to the modification D, the timer value for determining whether or not it has become "0" (timed out) in each process is the process before moving to each process (for example, before opening the jackpot If it is a process, it is set in the special symbol stop process), and each process is executed based on the timer value being updated by one common process (timer update process in FIG. 53).

In addition, in the modification D, as the timer value to be updated by the timer update process of FIG. 53, the special figure fluctuation time timer, the special figure stop time timer, etc. were mentioned, but it is not limited to this. Specifically, a normal pattern fluctuation time timer for timing the execution time of the variable display of normal symbols, a security signal output timer for timing the output time of the security signal, a timer for payout control communication, and a constant drive A plurality of types of timer values, such as a monitoring timer for a motor to be used, may be updated by a common timer update process. In this way, by updating multiple types of timer values in a common timer update process, the updated multiple types of timer values can be used in multiple processes. It is possible to reduce the pressure on the capacity of the side (main board 11).

In addition, in the modification D, in the special symbol process processing (see FIGS. 6 and 54), the special symbol variation processing and the special symbol stop processing can be called as subroutines respectively. By reading the timer value, the second zero flag is updated (the second zero flag update processing in FIG. 54 is executed), and different processing (for example, special In the symbol variation process, the stop symbol is derived and displayed, and the process is looped (standby)). In this way, instead of updating the second zero flag in each process (special symbol variation process and special symbol stop process) called by the subroutine, the caller process (special symbol process process) updates the second zero flag, Since the information of the updated second zero flag is used in a plurality of processes called by the subroutine, the processes can be compressed and the pressure on the capacity of the main side (main board 11) can be reduced.

It should be noted that modification D may be applied to a gaming machine with specifications of one type and two types. As described above, in a gaming machine with specs of 1 type and 2 types, the frequency of occurrence of small hits increases in the time saving state after the first hit, so subroutines related to small hits in special symbol process processing (small hit opening pre-processing, The frequency of calling small hit open processing, small hit end processing) is increased (see FIG. 6). Therefore, by applying the modification D to such a gaming machine with one type and two types of specs, even if the frequency of calling subroutines related to small wins is high, the timer value used in the subroutines is one. Since it is updated by the timer update process, the compression efficiency of the process is improved, and the pressure on the capacity of the main side can be reduced.

Although Modification C is applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the first embodiment, it may be applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of Modification A or Modification B. Moreover, it can also be applied to the pachinko game machine 1 in the second embodiment described later.

(Second embodiment)
Next, a second embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine 1 explained in the above basic explanation will be explained. In the second embodiment, a pachinko game machine 1 having a setting function capable of setting a set value and capable of being controlled to a KT state (so-called small winning time) in which a small winning is more likely to occur than in a normal state will be described.

First, the configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 58-1. The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment differs from the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the basic description described above with reference to FIG. , in that a special variable winning ball device 17 is provided. The different points will be described below.

In the pachinko game machine 1 of the second embodiment, below the passage gate 41, a special variable winning ball device 7 forming a big winning hole is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 extends in the left-right direction in a slightly inclined state, and is formed as the bottom surface of the flow path through which the game balls flow down. A large winning hole positioned below the member is changed between an open state (also called an open state) in which game balls can win and a closed state (also called closed state) in which game balls cannot win. The special variable winning ball device 7 moves the bottom member forward in a jackpot game state that occurs when a specific display result (jackpot pattern) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. The bottom member is moved backward from the closed state in which it is forwardly moved toward, and the opening control is executed to open the big winning opening serving as the winning area.

Below the special variable winning ball device 7, there are provided a special variable winning ball device 17 forming a special winning hole for a small hit, and a variable winning ball device 6B having a second starting winning hole. As shown in -1, the special variable winning ball device 17 is arranged on the left side, and the variable winning ball device 6B is arranged so as to be adjacent to it on the right side. These special variable winning ball device 17 and variable winning ball device 6B extend in the left-right direction in a slightly inclined state, and the plate-shaped bottom member formed as the bottom surface of the flow path through which game balls flow down is extended in the front-rear direction. By moving back and forth, the special winning port located below the bottom member and the second start winning port can be opened (also called an open state) in which game balls can win and a closed state (also called closed state) in which game balls cannot win. change to The special variable winning ball device 17 is a bottom member in a small winning game state that occurs when a predetermined display result (small winning symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. The bottom member is moved backward from the closed state in which it is forwardly moved, and the opening control is executed to open the special prize winning opening serving as the prize winning area. Further, the variable winning ball device 6B moves the bottom member backward from the closed state in which the bottom member is forwardly moved when the symbol is drawn out and displayed by hitting the normal symbol display device 20, The opening control is executed to open the second start winning opening which is the winning area.

In this example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17, and the variable winning ball device 6B are formed to have the same structure. In addition, as shown in FIG. 58-1, the bottom member of the special variable winning ball device 7 is formed in a manner in which the bottom member is slightly inclined from the upper left to the lower right. When the special variable winning ball device 7 is closed, the ball moves from the upper left to the lower right on the special variable winning ball device 7 and falls on the variable winning ball device 6B therebelow.

Also, in this example, the special variable winning ball device 17 is slightly larger than the variable winning ball device 6B. Further, as shown in FIG. 58-1, the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B are formed so that the bottom member is slightly inclined from the upper right to the lower left, so that the special variable winning ball device 17 and the game ball on the variable winning ball device 6B, if the special variable winning ball device 17 or the variable winning ball device 6B is closed, the special variable winning ball device 17 or the variable winning ball device 6B is directed from the upper right to the lower left. move and go Further, as shown in FIG. 58-1, since the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B are arranged adjacent to each other, the variable winning ball device does not win the special variable winning ball device 7. If the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 6B is moved backward and the second starting winning opening is in an open state, the game ball dropped onto the 6B enters the second starting winning opening and is specially variable. The game ball does not flow toward the winning ball device 17.例文帳に追加On the other hand, if the second starting winning hole is not in an open state, the game ball moves on the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 6B and is guided toward the special variable winning ball device 17. - 特許庁At this time, if the bottom member of the special variable winning ball device 17 is moved backward to open the special winning hole, the game ball enters the special winning hole. Furthermore, if the special winning opening is not in an open state, the game ball moves on the bottom member of the special variable winning ball device 17 and falls toward the out opening as it is.

Also, in this example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B are formed with a plurality of regulation pieces for reducing the flow speed of the game balls flowing down on the bottom member. there is In this example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17, and the variable winning ball device 6B are provided with regulation pieces, so that the game flows from the upper left to the lower right direction or from the upper right to the lower left direction. The flowing direction of the game ball is changed so that the ball meanders with the motion of the forward/backward direction component, and the time required for the flowing down is delayed as compared with the case without the control piece.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 58-1, the special variable winning ball device 17 is arranged on the left side, and the variable winning ball device 6B is arranged on the right side. The bottom member of the variable winning ball device 6B is formed so as to gently incline from the upper right to the lower left, and when the bottom member is not retracted and is in a closed state, the variable winning ball device 6B special variable winning. Since the game balls are configured to flow toward the ball device 17, in this sense, the variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the upstream side, and the special variable winning ball device 17 is provided on the downstream side. It can be said that it is established.

A switch capable of detecting a game ball that has entered the big winning opening is provided in the big winning opening. When game balls are detected by the switch, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information. Therefore, when the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to open and the big winning opening is opened, the state is advantageous for the player. On the other hand, if the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to be closed and the big winning hole is closed, the game ball cannot pass through (enter) the big winning hole to get a prize ball. be at a disadvantage.

A switch capable of detecting a game ball that has entered the special winning opening is provided in the special winning opening. When game balls are detected by the switch, a predetermined number (for example 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information. Here, when the game balls pass through (enter) the special winning opening opened in the special variable winning ball device 17, the number of winning balls is smaller than when the game balls enter the big winning opening. For example, more prize balls are paid out than when game balls pass (enter) other winning openings such as the first starting winning opening 1 and the second starting winning opening. Therefore, when the special variable winning ball device 17 is controlled to open and the special winning opening is opened, the state is advantageous for the player. On the other hand, if the special variable winning ball device 17 is controlled to be closed and the special winning hole is closed, the game ball cannot pass through (enter) the special winning hole to obtain a prize ball. be at a disadvantage.

Next, a game state in the second embodiment will be explained. The game state in the second embodiment includes a normal state (low probability/non-KT state) and a KT state (so-called small win time) in which a small win is more likely to occur than in the normal state. Furthermore, there are two types of KT states, the first KT state and the second KT state, and the game state is a low probability state and a non-KT state (low probability/non-KT state: normal state). , a case of being controlled to a low probability and first KT state (low probability/first KT state), a case of being controlled to a high probability and first KT state (high probability/first KT state), and a case of being controlled to a high probability and second KT state (high probability/first KT state) It may be controlled to a state (high probability/second KT state).

In the first KT state among the KT states, as will be described later, although a small hit is likely to occur and the special variable winning ball device 17 is likely to be in an open state, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B on the upstream side is extremely long, and a small hit occurs. Even if this occurs, there are very few cases where the game ball wins the special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side (for example, about 1 ball per 100 fluctuations). Specifically, in the first KT state, the control is performed so that small hits are likely to occur and the high base state is controlled so that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is lengthened. In addition, in the second KT state among the KT states, as will be described later, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B on the upstream side is short, and when a small hit occurs, the game ball is delivered to the special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side. Easy to win. Specifically, in the second KT state, the control is performed so that small hits are likely to occur and the base state is controlled so that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is shortened.

Also, the KT state is a game state in which a small win is more likely to occur than in the normal state (low probability/non-KT state). Specifically, in the second embodiment, the probability that the variable winning ball device 6B will be in the open state in the normal game is higher in the KT state than in the normal state. And, while the ratio of determining a small hit is low when the first special symbol fluctuates, the ratio of determining a small hit when the second special symbol fluctuates is high (however, it will be described later) Therefore, the KT state is a game state in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state. As a result, in the KT state, small hits are frequently generated mainly by causing variations in the second special symbols, and the game state is advantageous to the player.

In addition, the configuration for making the KT state into a game state in which a small win is more likely to occur than in the normal state is not limited to this. For example, even in the KT state, the probability that the variable winning ball device 6B will be in the open state as a normal hit is the same as in the normal state (for example, 10% or 100%), but when the second special symbol changes By configuring the variation time of the selected variation pattern to be shorter in the KT state than in the normal state, the ratio of the number of times of variation in the KT state to a certain time is higher than in the normal state, and the KT state is changed to the normal state. It may be a game state in which a small hit is more likely to occur.

Further, in the second embodiment, the time required for the game ball to reach the variable winning ball device 6B after passing through the passage gate 41 is set to 0.6 seconds or longer. Specifically, the installation positions of the passage gate 41 and the variable winning ball device 6B, and the nail group forming the downflow path of the game ball are adjusted. Although details will be described later, the variable winning ball device 6B can be controlled to an open state based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41. In the first KT state described later, the game ball does not pass through the passage gate 41. After that, the time from when the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state is 0.5 seconds, and the required time from when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 until it reaches the variable winning ball device 6B. is shorter than 0.6 seconds, when one game ball passes through the passage gate 41 in the first KT state and the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state, the one game ball remains as it is. A prize can be won by the variable prize ball device 6B.

(big hit probability, small hit probability)
FIGS. 58-2 and 58-3 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the big-hit probability and the small-hit probability for each set value. Among them, FIG. 58-2 shows the big hit probability and the small hit probability when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed. Also, FIG. 58-3 shows the big hit probability and the small hit probability when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed. Also, as shown in FIGS. 58-2 and 58-3, this example shows a case where the setting can be changed in six stages from setting values "1" to "6". It should be noted that the configuration is not limited to the case where the setting can be changed in 6 steps, and for example, the configuration may be such that the setting can be changed in 2 to 5 steps, or the setting can be changed in 7 or more steps.

First, with reference to FIG. 58-2, the big hit probability and the small hit probability when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed will be explained. In the example shown in FIG. 58-2 (A), in the non-variable state (low probability state), the set value "1" is the lowest jackpot probability "205/65536", which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. ing. Then, the set value "2", the set value "3", the set value "4", and the set value "5" increase in order, and the set value "6" has the highest hit probability "247/65536". It is high and is the most advantageous setting for the player. In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 58-2 (B), in the variable probability state (high probability state), compared to the non-variable probability state (low probability state), the winning probability of the big hit is 10 times as a whole, and the setting The value "1" has the lowest jackpot probability of "2050/65536", which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. Then, the set value "2", the set value "3", the set value "4", and the set value "5" increase in order, and the set value "6" has the highest hit probability "2470/65536". It is high and is the most advantageous setting for the player.

On the other hand, with respect to small hits, as shown in FIGS. state) and probability variable state (high probability state), the small hit probability is constant at "6298/65536". That is, in this example, the determination value for small hit determination is common regardless of the setting value, and is common in the non-variable probability state and the variable probability state. In this way, even if the big hit probability is changed according to the setting value, the small hit probability is constant, as shown in FIGS. 58-2 (A) and (B), the probability are set to different values from "1" to "6" so that the number of determination values for each set value is matched.

Next, with reference to FIG. 58-3, the big hit probability and the small hit probability when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 58-3 (A), in the non-variable state (low probability state), the set value "1" is the lowest jackpot probability "205/65536", which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. ing. Then, the set value "2", the set value "3", the set value "4", and the set value "5" increase in order, and the set value "6" has the highest hit probability "247/65536". It is high and is the most advantageous setting for the player. In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 58-3 (B), in the variable probability state (high probability state), the overall winning probability of the jackpot is 10 times compared to the non-variable state (low probability state), and the setting The value "1" has the lowest jackpot probability of "2050/65536", which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. Then, the set value "2", the set value "3", the set value "4", and the set value "5" increase in order, and the set value "6" has the highest hit probability "2470/65536". It is high and is the most advantageous setting for the player.

On the other hand, with respect to small hits, as shown in FIGS. 58-3 (A) and (B), regardless of the set value "1" to "6" state) and probability variable state (high probability state), the small hit probability is constant at "62986/65536". That is, in this example, the determination value for small hit determination is common regardless of the setting value, and is common in the non-variable probability state and the variable probability state. However, in this example, in the case of the variable display of the second special symbol (see FIG. 58-3), compared with the case of executing the variable display of the first special symbol (see FIG. 58-2), the small hit The winning probability is about 10 times (that is, the number of judgment values for small hit determination when performing the variable display of the second special symbol is the small hit when performing the variable display of the first special symbol greater than the number of decision values for the decision). In this way, even if the big hit probability is changed according to the set value, the small hit probability is constant, as shown in FIGS. 58-3 (A) and (B), the probability are set to different values from "1" to "6" so that the number of determination values for each set value is matched.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 58-2 and 58-3, the determination values corresponding to deviation are included in the determination values corresponding to all set values "1" to "6" (FIG. 58-3). -2 and as shown in FIG. 58-3, there is no set value for which the probability of deviation is 0). The determination value corresponding to the deviation differs depending on the setting value (as shown in FIGS. 58-2 and 58-3, depending on which setting value is "1" to "6" , with different outlier probabilities).

It should be noted that, without being limited to the aspect shown in this example, for example, it may be configured such that there is a case where the deviation probability is 0 (that is, a set value that does not include a determination value corresponding to deviation). For example, at the set value "6", which has the highest degree of advantage (highest jackpot probability), the odds of losing are 0, and the decision value corresponding to losing may not be included.

In addition, not limited to the aspect shown in this example, for example, it may be configured so that there is a case where the small hit probability is 0 (that is, the judgment value does not include the judgment value corresponding to the small hit). For example, when executing the variable display of the first special symbol (Fig. 58-2), the small hit probability may be uniformly set to 0, and the judgment value for the small hit may not be included. good.

In addition, in FIGS. 58-2 (A), (B) and FIGS. 58-3 (A), (B), the probability of small hits is matched between the probability variation state (high probability state) and the non-probability variation state (low probability state) The odds of losing are different, but in the probability state (high probability state), the jackpot probability has increased for the non-probability state (low probability state), so the probability of a small hit is higher than the non-probability state (low probability state). It may be lowered to match the out-of-probability. Furthermore, even if the set values are different values such as "1" and "2", the big hit probability and the small hit probability may be matched. As a result, in a gaming machine having substantially less than 6 levels of settable levels or a gaming machine with no difference in the degree of advantage due to the setting change function, a game machine of a type having a setting change function of 6 levels and a hardware/software configuration are provided. can be shared, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

(Jackpot type determination table)
58-4 (A) and (B) are explanatory diagrams showing the big hit type determination table stored in the ROM 101. FIG. In the jackpot type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result should be a jackpot pattern, the types of jackpots are determined as ``2R normal jackpot'', ``2R probability variable jackpot'', and `` This is a table referred to for determining any one of the 6R normal jackpot, the 6R probability variable jackpot, the 9R probability variable jackpot, and the 16R probability variable jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 58-4 (A), in the second embodiment, regardless of which of the set values "1" to "6", when executing the variable display of the first special symbol , a ``16R probability variable jackpot'' is determined with a probability of 9%, a ``6R probability variable jackpot'' is determined with a probability of 56%, and a ``6R normal jackpot'' is determined with a probability of 35%. Further, as shown in FIG. 58-4(B), in the second embodiment, regardless of which of the set values "1" to "6", when executing the variable display of the second special symbol , with a probability of 10% determined as "16R variable jackpot", with a probability of 50% determined as "9R variable jackpot", with a probability of 5% determined as "2R variable jackpot", with a probability of 35% It is determined as "2R normal jackpot".

"16R probability variable jackpot" is a jackpot that controls to a jackpot game state of 16 rounds and shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot game state ends. Also, "9R probability variable jackpot" is a jackpot that controls to a jackpot game state of 9 rounds and shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot game state ends. In addition, "6R probability variable jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot game state of 6 rounds and shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot game state ends. In addition, "2R probability variable jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot game state of two rounds and transitions to a high probability state after the jackpot game state ends.

"6R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that controls to a jackpot game state of 6 rounds and shifts to a low probability state after the jackpot game state is completed. A "2R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a two-round jackpot game state and controlled to a low-probability state after the jackpot game state ends.

In the second embodiment, in the case of "16R probability variable jackpot", "9R probability variable jackpot", "6R probability variable jackpot", and "6R normal jackpot", a predetermined period (in this example , 30 seconds) or until a predetermined number (in this example, 10) of game balls wins, the large winning opening is controlled to be open, and up to 10 large winning openings can be won in each round. It is possible. On the other hand, in the case of the ``2R probability variable jackpot'' and the ``2R normal jackpot'', the big prize opening is controlled to be open only for a short period of time (1.8 seconds in this example) in each round of the jackpot game. The number of prizes that can be won in each round is about 2 to 3.

In addition, in the second embodiment, when the big win game is finished, it is controlled to the first KT state, the second KT state or the non-KT state according to the game state before the big win game and the kind of the big win. , How the game state transitions after the jackpot game will be described later (see FIGS. 58-29).

(Small hit type determination table)
58-5 (A) and (B) are explanatory diagrams showing a small hit type determination table stored in the ROM 101. FIG. In the small hit type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result should be a small win pattern, the types of the small wins are set to "small hit A" and "small hit B" based on the random number for the hit type determination. ” or “small win C”.

As shown in FIG. 58-5(A), in the second embodiment, regardless of which of the set values "1" to "6", when performing the variable display of the first special symbol , is determined as "small hit A" with a probability of 100%. Further, as shown in FIG. 58-5(B), in the second embodiment, regardless of which of the setting values "1" to "6", when executing the variable display of the second special symbol , it is determined as "small win B" with a probability of 70% and "small win C" with a probability of 30%.

In this example, as will be described later, in the case of "small hit A", the special winning opening is opened only for a very short 0.2 seconds during the small win game (see FIG. 58-10), and the small win game is played. You can hardly expect the game ball to enter the special winning hole inside. In addition, in the case of "small win B", the special winning opening is opened for 0.8 seconds during the small winning game (see Fig. 58-11), and the game ball enters the special winning opening during the small winning game. can be expected to some extent. In addition, in the case of "small win C", the special winning hole is opened for 1.8 seconds during the small winning game (see Fig. 58-12), and the game ball enters the special winning hole during the small winning game. can be most expected.

(Variation pattern table)
FIGS. 58-6 to 58-8 are explanatory diagrams showing variation patterns (variation times) of special symbols and decorative symbols used in the second embodiment. EXT shown in FIGS. 58-6 to 58-8 is the second byte data of the effect control command (2-byte configuration) corresponding to each variation pattern.

In the example shown in FIGS. 58-6 to 58-8, nine types of the first variation patterns #01 to #09 for the first special design and the decorative design, and the second variation pattern for the second special design and the decorative design 34 types #01 to #34 are used. Hereinafter, for example, fluctuation pattern #n (n=01 to 09 or 01 to 34) means both the first fluctuation pattern #n and the second fluctuation pattern #n.

When executing the variation display of the first special symbol, if it is in the non-KT state (low probability/non-KT state), the first special symbol variation pattern for non-KT time shown in FIG. 58-6 (A) A table is selected to determine the variation pattern. As shown in FIG. 58-6(A), when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, one of the first variation patterns #01 to #06 is determined.

When executing the variable display of the first special symbol, in the case of the KT state (low probability / 1st KT state, high probability / 1st KT state, high probability / 2nd KT state), in FIG. 58-6 (B) The first special symbol variation pattern table for KT shown is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 58-6(B), when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in the KT state, one of the first variation patterns #07 to #09 is determined.

When executing the variation display of the second special symbol, if it is in the non-KT state (low probability/non-KT state), the second special symbol variation pattern for non-KT time shown in FIG. 58-7 (C) A table is selected to determine the variation pattern. As shown in FIG. 58-7(C), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, one of the second variation patterns #01 to #03 is determined. Specifically, when it is determined that it is lost, the second variation pattern #01 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed over a long period of 15 minutes. Also, when determining a small hit, the second variation pattern #02 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed over a long period of 15 minutes. Also, when determining a big hit, the second variation pattern #03 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for a relatively long period of 5 minutes.

In the second embodiment, even in the non-KT state, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed and a small hit is achieved, there is a situation in which a certain amount of prize balls can be expected by winning the game balls into the special winning opening. occur. Therefore, in the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 58-7(C), even if the variable display of the second special symbol is executed during the non-KT state, the variable time is extremely lengthened and the variable display is executed. By lowering the frequency, the occurrence frequency of small hits is rather lowered, thereby preventing a situation in which an attempt is made to obtain a prize ball by a small hit even though the player is in the non-KT state. In the second embodiment, the "occurrence frequency of small hits" is, for example, the rate of occurrence of small hits per unit time (for example, 1 minute). The hit rate is higher than normal.

In addition, in the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 58-7(C), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed during the non-KT state, even if a big hit is achieved, variation By making the time relatively long as 5 minutes, it is possible to prevent the act of aiming at a prize ball by winning a prize in the special prize winning opening unfairly during the non-KT state. However, in the case of a big win, it is not necessary to digest the first reserved memory longer than in the case of a small win, so the variation time is set to be shorter than in the case of a small win. there is

When executing the variable display of the second special symbol, in the case of the low-probability/first KT state, the jackpot game based on the 6R normal jackpot or the 2R normal jackpot that triggered the low-probability/first KT state is ended. A variation pattern table is selected according to the number of variations since. In this case, if the variation display of the first variation is to be executed, the second special symbol variation pattern table for the low probability/first KT and the first variation shown in FIG. 58-7 (D) is selected and varied. A pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 58-7 (D), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the first variation in the low probability/first KT state, any of the second variation patterns #04 to #06 is determined by

In addition, as shown in FIG. 58-7 (D), when it is determined that the first variation in the low probability/first KT state is lost, the variation time is 5 seconds and the shortened variation is the second variation pattern # 04. It is determined. Also, when determining a small hit as the first variation in the low probability / 1st KT state, the second variation pattern # 05 (second start winning opening open Preparatory fluctuation pattern) is determined. In the second embodiment, as already explained, when controlled to the first KT state, although the frequency of small hits increases, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is lengthened. A special winning hole in the winning ball device 17 is set so as to rarely win a prize. However, in the state immediately after shifting to the low probability/first KT state, there is a possibility that a certain amount of game balls are accumulated on the bottom surface member of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17, and the special variable winning ball is immediate. If the device 17 is controlled to be open, there is a possibility that a considerable number of game balls will enter the special prize winning opening. Therefore, in the second embodiment, in the first variation of the 1KT state, by ensuring a variation time of at least 7 seconds, the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 are controlled before the transition to the 1KT state. By controlling the special variable prize winning ball device 17 to the open state after a sufficient time has passed until all the game balls accumulated on the bottom member of the are dropped, This prevents a situation in which more prize balls than expected are obtained in the first KT state. Also, when it is determined that the first variation in the low probability/first KT state is a big hit, the second variation pattern #06 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for 2 minutes.

Also, if the 2nd to 49th variation display is to be executed after finishing the jackpot game based on the 6R normal jackpot or the 2R normal jackpot that triggered the low probability/1st KT state, FIG. 58-7 ( The second special symbol variation pattern table for the low probability/first KT shown in E) and for the 2nd to 49th variation is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 58-7 (E), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the 2nd to 49th variation of the low probability / 1st KT state, the second variation pattern #07 to #13 Either is decided. Also, as shown in FIG. 58-7 (E), when it is determined that the 2nd to 49th fluctuations of the low probability / 1st KT state are missed, the fluctuation time is 5 seconds and the short fluctuation second fluctuation pattern # 07, or the second variation pattern #08, which is a shortened variation with a shorter variation time of 1 second. On the other hand, when it is determined that the 2nd to 49th variations of the low probability/first KT state are missed, the second variation pattern #09 with reach may be determined. In addition, when determining a small hit as the 2nd to 49th variations of the low probability/1st KT state, the second variation pattern #10 with a shortened variation with a short variation time of 5 seconds, or a shorter variation time of 1 second. It may be determined to be the second variation pattern #11 of shortening variation. On the other hand, when determining a small hit as the 2nd to 49th variations in the low probability/1st KT state, the second variation pattern #12 with reach may be determined. The second variation patterns #07 and #10 are variation patterns that can be selected only when the second reserved memory is not stored, and the second variation patterns #08 and #11 are those in which one or more second reserved memories are stored. This is a variation pattern that can be selected only when As a result, the storage of the reserved memory is expedited and the operating rate is increased. Also, when determining a big hit as the 2nd to 49th variations in the low probability/1st KT state, the second variation pattern #13 with reach is determined.

In addition, after finishing the jackpot game based on the 6R normal jackpot or 2R normal jackpot that triggered the low probability/1KT state, the 50th change display (that is, the final change in the low probability/1KT state) is executed. If so, the second special symbol variation pattern table for low probability/first KT and 50th variation shown in FIG. 58-7(F) is selected to determine the variation pattern. As shown in FIG. 58-7 (F), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the 50th variation of the low probability / 1st KT state, any of the second variation patterns #14 to #16 is determined by

In the second embodiment, when the low-probability/first KT state is controlled, for example, the image display device 5 displays characters such as "in chance time". As shown in FIG. 58-7(F), when the 50th variation in the low probability/1st KT state is determined to be a loss or a small hit, the image display device 5 displays characters such as "Chance time is over!" is determined to be the second variation pattern #14 or the second variation pattern #15 accompanied by the end display of performing Further, as shown in FIG. 58-7(F), when determining a big hit as the 50th variation in the low probability/1st KT state, the image display device 5 displays characters such as "Chance time is over!" The second variation pattern #16 with a predetermined resurrection display after the end display to be performed is determined.

In addition, in the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 58-6, when a big hit is achieved by the variation display of the first special symbol during the KT state, the first variation pattern #07 with a variation time of 10 seconds is configured to determine This is a case in which a big hit occurs immediately after the transition to the second KT state due to the fluctuation display of the first special symbol. Since the variation of the second special symbol executed during the big hit variation of the first special symbol is a forced loss, the forced failure occurs frequently and the player wins a small win despite being in the second KT state. You will not receive any benefit from Therefore, in the second embodiment, by setting the fluctuation time of the big hit fluctuation of the first special symbol to a short fluctuation time, the transition to the big hit game state based on the fluctuation of the first special symbol is made before the frequent forced outage occurs. is configured to

In addition, unlike the second embodiment, even when the variation of the second special symbol is started during the big hit variation of the first special symbol, the configuration that does not force the variation of the second special symbol (for example, the second When the second special symbol is fluctuating when the first special symbol is stopped and the second special symbol is fluctuating, if the game machine has a structure in which the second special symbol is forcibly removed), the fluctuation of the first special symbol jackpot during the KT state. The time may be a long variable time (eg, 1 minute). This is a case in which a big hit occurs immediately after shifting to the second KT state due to the variation display of the first special symbol, and if the variation time of the big win is set to the same short variation time as the loss, the player will not be able to win. You will not be able to receive any profits from small wins. Therefore, if the fluctuation time of the first special symbol jackpot in the KT state is set to a long fluctuation time (for example, 1 minute), even in such a case, there is enough time to generate at least multiple small hits. (eg, 1 minute).

When executing the variable display of the second special symbol, in the case of the high probability/first KT state, the jackpot game based on the 6R probability variable big hit or the 9R probability variable big hit that triggered the high probability/first KT state is ended. A variation pattern table is selected according to the number of variations since. In this case, if the variation display of the first variation is to be executed, the second special symbol variation pattern table for the high probability/first KT and the first variation shown in FIG. 58-8 (G) is selected and varied. A pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 58-8 (G), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the first variation in the high probability/first KT state, any of the second variation patterns #17 to #21 is determined by

As with the first variation in the low-probability/1st KT state, as shown in FIG. There is a case where the second variation pattern #17, which is short variation of 5 seconds, is determined. On the other hand, even if it is determined to be a loss as the first variation in the high probability/first KT state, the second variation pattern #18 with reach may be determined. In addition, even when it is determined to be a small hit as the first variation in the high probability/first KT state, the variation pattern (second variation pattern #19) for preparing for opening the second start winning opening may be determined. On the other hand, even when a small hit is determined as the first variation in the high probability/first KT state, the second variation pattern #20 with reach may be determined. Also, as shown in FIG. 58-8(G), when determining a big hit as the first variation in the high probability/first KT state, the second variation pattern #21 with reach is determined.

In addition, if it is a case of executing the variation display after the second variation after finishing the jackpot game based on the 6R probability variation jackpot or the 9R probability variation jackpot that triggered the high probability / 1st KT state, FIG. 58-8 (H ), the second special symbol variation pattern table for the high probability/first KT and for the second and subsequent variations is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 58-8 (H), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed after the second variation in the high probability/first KT state, any of the second variation patterns #22 to #28 determined by

As with the 2nd to 49th fluctuations of the low probability/1st KT state, as shown in FIG. A second variation pattern #22 of shortened variation with a short variation time of 5 seconds or a second variation pattern #23 of shortened variation with an even shorter variation time of 1 second may be determined. On the other hand, if it is determined to be a miss as the second and subsequent fluctuations in the high probability/first KT state, the second fluctuation pattern #24 with reach may be determined. In addition, when determining a small hit as the second and subsequent variations of the high probability/first KT state, the second variation pattern #25 with a shortened variation with a short variation time of 5 seconds or a shortened variation with an even shorter variation time of 1 second The second variation pattern #26 of variation may be determined. On the other hand, when it is determined as a small hit as the second and subsequent variations in the high probability/first KT state, the second variation pattern #27 with reach may be determined. The second variation patterns #22 and #25 are variation patterns that can be selected only when the second reserved memory is not stored, and the second variation patterns #23 and #26 are those in which one or more second reserved memories are stored. This is a variation pattern that can be selected only when As a result, the storage of the reserved memory is expedited and the operating rate is increased. Also, when determining a big hit as the second and subsequent variations in the high-probability/first KT state, the second variation pattern #28 with reach is determined.

When executing the variation display of the second special symbol, in the case of the high probability/second KT state, the second special symbol variation pattern table for the high probability/second KT time shown in FIG. 58-8 (I) is A variation pattern is determined upon selection. As shown in FIG. 58-8 (I), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability/second KT state, any one of the second variation patterns #29 to #34 is determined. .

In addition, as shown in FIG. 58-8 (I), when it is determined to be a failure in the high probability/second KT state, the second variation pattern #29 with a shortened variation with a short variation time of 1.5 seconds is determined. In other cases, the second variation pattern #30 of normal variation with a variation time of 5 seconds may be determined. On the other hand, when it is determined to be a miss in the high probability/second KT state, the second variation pattern #31 with reach may be determined. Also, when it is determined to be a small hit in the high probability/second KT state, the second variation pattern # 32 with a short variation time of 1.5 seconds or a normal variation time of 5 seconds The second variation pattern #33 of variation may be determined. Also, when determining a big hit in the high probability/second KT state, the second variation pattern #34 with reach is determined.

In the case of determining the variation pattern, more specifically, whether the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is executed, the current game state, and the result of the variable display are determined. Using the variation pattern table, lottery processing is performed based on the random number for determining the variation pattern, and which variation pattern is determined. FIG. 58-9 is for determining the variation pattern when the variable display result is a small hit in the second special symbol variation pattern table for high probability/second KT shown in FIG. 58-8 (I) It is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a small hit variation pattern table.

As shown in FIG. 58-9, in the second embodiment, in the case of performing the variation display of the second special symbol during the high probability/second KT state, when performing the variation display of the small hit is determined to be the second variation pattern #32 with a probability of 70%, and determined to be the second variation pattern #33 with a probability of 30%, regardless of which of the set values ``1'' to ``6''. . Therefore, in this example, in the case of the second KT state, there is a high probability that the variation pattern of shortened variation of 1.5 seconds will be selected.

In addition, in FIG. 58-9, as an example, the variation pattern table in the case of executing the small hit variation of the second special symbol during the high probability/second KT state is shown, but in FIGS. 58-6 to 58-8 The other variation pattern tables shown are similarly configured, and each variation pattern is determined with the same probability regardless of which of the set values "1" to "6".

In addition, in the examples shown in FIGS. 58-7 to 58-9, a shortening variation of 5 seconds or 1 second is performed in the case of the 1st KT state, and a shortening variation of 1.5 seconds is performed in the case of the 2nd KT state with a high probability , but the configuration is not limited to such a configuration. For example, it may be configured such that a shortening variation of 5 seconds or 1 second is performed in the case of a low probability state, and a shortening variation of 1.5 seconds is performed in the case of a high probability state.

Next, the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the KT state will be described. 58-10 to 58-12 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the release patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the KT state. Among them, FIG. 58-10 shows the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the case of a small hit A. FIG. Also, FIG. 58-11 shows the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the case of a small hit B. FIG. 58-12 shows the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the case of a small hit C. FIG. 58-10(1) to 58-12(1) respectively show the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the 1KT state, and FIG. 58-10(2). 58-12(2) respectively show the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the second KT state.

First, the release patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the 1KT state will be described with reference to FIGS. 58-10(1) to 58-12(1). As shown in FIGS. 58-10 (1) to 58-12 (1), when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 and is detected by the gate switch 21, the normal symbol display 20 normally Variation display of the pattern is executed, and when it is determined to be a normal pattern hit, the winning pattern is derived and displayed on the normal pattern display device 20, and when it is determined to be a loss, the lost pattern is derived and displayed on the normal pattern display device 20.例文帳に追加be done. In the second embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 58-10 (1) to 58-12 (1), the variation time of normal symbols is set to 0.2 seconds, and winning symbols and losing symbols are derived and displayed. The settling time is set to 0.2 seconds. Then, when the winning pattern is derived and displayed, as shown in FIGS. 58-10 (1) to 58-12 (1), after the pattern fixing time 0.2 seconds has passed, the second start winning opening is opened. After 0.1 second of the pre-processing time has passed, the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for 5.5 seconds, and the game ball can be won in the second starting winning hole.

When a game ball wins in the second starting prize opening while the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, and when it is determined to be a small hit, A small winning symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B. When the small winning symbols are derived and displayed, if the small winning is A, the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 0.2 seconds as shown in FIG. 58-10 (1). , in the case of a small hit B, the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 0.8 seconds as shown in FIG. 58-11 (1); As shown in -12 (1), the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 1.8 seconds, and a game ball can enter the special winning hole (however, in the case of a small hit A, , Since the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened only for a very short period of 0.2 seconds, winning can hardly be expected). However, in the 1KT state, as shown in FIG. 58-10(1), the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side is as short as 0.2 seconds, 0.8 seconds or 1.8 seconds. On the other hand, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B on the upstream side is as long as 5.5 seconds. Therefore, in the first KT state, although small hits are likely to occur, it is extremely rare for a game ball to enter the special winning hole (for example, about one ball per 100 fluctuation displays).

In the 1KT state, as shown in FIGS. 58-10(1) to 58-12(1), after finishing the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B, the next variable winning ball device 6B can be opened. After at least 0.5 seconds, which is the total of the next normal symbol fluctuation time 0.2 seconds, the symbol determination time 0.2 seconds, and the second start winning opening pre-processing time 0.1 seconds, has passed. be. Therefore, in the second embodiment, in the first KT state, a closed period of at least 0.5 seconds is provided as an interval period after the variable winning ball device 6B is opened.

Further, in the second embodiment, in the first KT state, after the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 in a state where the normal symbols are not changed, the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state. , After 0.5 seconds, which is the total of 0.2 seconds of normal symbol fluctuation time, 0.2 seconds of symbol determination time, and 0.1 seconds of second start winning opening pre-processing time, and the game ball It takes about 0.6 seconds from passing through the passage gate 41 to reaching the variable winning ball device 6B. As described above, in the first KT state, the time from when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 in the state where the normal symbols are not changed to when the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to be in the open state is more The variable winning ball device 6B is already opened because the time from the game ball passing through the passage gate 41 to the arrival of the game ball at the variable winning ball device 6B is shorter than the time when the game ball normally does not change the pattern. The game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B when it is controlled to the state. Therefore, in the 1KT state, a game ball that has passed through the passage gate 41 in a state in which the normal symbols are not changed easily wins the variable winning ball device 6B.

Next, the release patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the second KT state will be described with reference to FIGS. 58-10(2) to 58-12(2). As shown in FIGS. 58-10 (2) to 58-12 (2), when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 and is detected by the gate switch 21, the normal symbol display 20 normally Variation display of the pattern is executed, and when it is determined to be a normal pattern hit, the winning pattern is derived and displayed on the normal pattern display device 20, and when it is determined to be a loss, the lost pattern is derived and displayed on the normal pattern display device 20.例文帳に追加be done. In the second embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 58-10(2) to 58-12(2), the variation time of normal symbols is set to 1.0 seconds, and winning symbols and losing symbols are derived and displayed. The settling time is set to 0.2 seconds. Then, when the winning pattern is derived and displayed, as shown in FIGS. 58-10 (2) to 58-12 (2), after the pattern fixing time 0.2 seconds has passed, the second start winning opening is opened. After the pre-processing time of 2.6 seconds has elapsed, the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for 0.2 seconds, and the game ball can enter the second starting winning hole.

When a game ball wins in the second starting prize opening while the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, and when it is determined to be a small hit, A small winning symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B. When the small winning symbols are derived and displayed, if the small winning is A, the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 0.2 seconds as shown in FIG. 58-10 (2). , in the case of a small hit B, as shown in FIG. 58-11 (2), the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 0.8 seconds, and in the case of a small hit C, FIG. As shown in -12 (2), the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 1.8 seconds, and a game ball can enter the special winning hole.

In the second KT state, unlike the first KT state, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is as short as 0.2 seconds. Further, in the second embodiment, in the second KT state, the interval period (closing period) after the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B is at least 3.8 seconds (ordinary design fluctuation time 1.0 seconds + design determination time A relatively long period of 0.2 seconds + 2.6 seconds before the second start winning opening opening process) is ensured. Therefore, in the second KT state, as shown in FIGS. 58-10(2) to 58-12(2), the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B on the upstream side is short and the interval period (closing period) is long. , Compared to the 1KT state, the game ball is more likely to enter the special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side, and the game ball is more likely to enter the special winning hole. However, in the case of the small hit A, the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened only for a very short period of 0.2 seconds, so even in the 2KT state, the winning of game balls into the special winning opening can hardly be expected.

In addition, in the second KT state, game balls are likely to enter the special winning hole and prize balls are easily obtained. ” is displayed.

In addition, in this example, the case where the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning opening) is changed according to which of the small winning types A to C is shown, but such a mode is shown. not limited to For example, the number of times the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened may be varied depending on which of the small wins A to C the type of the small win is. In this case, for example, in the case of the small win A, the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened only once during the small win game, whereas in the case of the small win B or the small win C, the small win B or C occurs during the small win game. The special variable winning ball device 17 may be configured to be opened 2 to 11 times. Further, for example, even if the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 17 is short to some extent, by executing the opening of the special variable winning ball device 17 for 0.4 seconds four times, the special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning ball device 17 (special winning hole) ) may be configured to provide a small hit type in which a game ball can win a prize to some extent, and various modes are conceivable. In addition, in this example, the case where there are three types of small wins A to C was shown, but this is not limited to such an aspect, and for example, it is configured to provide four or more types of small wins. good too.

Further, in the second embodiment, in the second KT state, after the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 in a state where the normal symbols are not changed, the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state. , After 3.8 seconds, which is the total of 1.0 seconds of normal symbol fluctuation time, 0.2 seconds of symbol fixing time, and 2.6 seconds of second start winning opening pre-processing time, and the game ball is configured to take about 0.6 seconds from passing through the passage gate 41 to reaching the variable winning ball device 6B. Thus, in the second KT state, the time from when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 in the state where the normal symbol is not changed to when the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state is The variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state because it is longer than the time from when the game ball passes through the pass gate 41 to when the game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B in a state where the normal pattern is not changed. The game ball reaches the variable prize winning ball device 6B before being controlled to . Therefore, in the second KT state, it is difficult for a game ball that has passed through the passage gate 41 in a state in which the normal symbols are not changed to win the variable winning ball device 6B.

It should be noted that, in the second embodiment, the process of executing the variable display of normal symbols and controlling the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B is performed by the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103). This is done by executing the process (see step S26). In addition, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the game state is a variable probability state (high probability state) in the normal symbol process processing of step S26, and whether or not the non-KT state, the first KT state or the second KT state. Or, regardless of whether it is in the jackpot game state or not, the same probability (for example, 10% or 100%) is used to determine whether or not to hit the regular pattern.

In the second embodiment, the normal symbol fluctuation time and the symbol fixing time are the same in the 1st KT state and the 2nd KT state, each being 0.2 seconds each. A case was shown in which the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 6B is varied by shortening it to 0.1 seconds in the first KT state and lengthening it to 2.6 seconds in the second KT state. I can't limit it. For example, by making the variation time and the symbol fixing time different between the first KT state and the second KT state, the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 6B may be made different. Further, for example, the time after the second starting winning hole opening process after closing the variable winning ball device 6B is configured to be controllable, and the time after the second starting winning hole opening process is different between the first KT state and the second KT state. The closed period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 6B may be varied by changing the variable winning ball device 6B. In particular, by shortening the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 6B in the first KT state by any of the above methods, it is possible to suppress the winning of prizes in the special winning openings in the first KT state. .

In the second embodiment, as will be described later, in the first KT state, by setting a high base flag indicating the high base state to control to the high base state, FIGS. As shown in FIG. 58-12(1), control is performed to lengthen the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B. Also, in the second KT state, by controlling to the low base state without setting the high base flag, as shown in FIGS. It is controlled to shorten the time.

In addition, for example, a special flag (open extension flag) indicating that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is extended is provided, and if the special flag is set, FIGS. Control with the first opening pattern (long opening) to open the variable winning ball device 6B as shown in 12 (1) for a long time, if the special flag is not set Figure 58-10 (2) ~ Figure 58-12 The variable winning ball device 6B shown in (2) may be configured to be controlled by a second opening pattern (short opening) that opens for a short period of time. That is, the special flag may be set only in the 1KT state, and the special flag may not be set in other states including the jackpot game state.

Further, even in the first KT state, when executing the last variable display in the low probability/first KT state, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B may be shortened. For example, the above-mentioned special flag may be erased according to the 49th special symbol variation stop in the 50 special symbol shortened variation periods in the low probability/first KT state. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the variable winning ball device 6B being open for a long time when the left-hand shot is notified after the low probability/first KT state is finished. be able to.

As described above, when the variable winning ball device 6B is configured using the flag (special flag) for controlling the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B, the flag for shortening the variable display of the special symbol is used. In this case, the special flag and the shortening variation flag may be separately managed and controlled.

Also, the variable winning ball device 6B may be short-circuited during the low probability/non-KT state. With such a configuration, in the case of the low probability/non-KT state (left-handed state), when the variable winning ball device 6B is configured to have a high opening probability, only a few game balls are shot. , it is possible to prevent the variable winning ball device 6B from winning, and it is possible to prevent the right-handed operation from being performed during the low-probability/non-KT state.

In addition, in the second embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 58-10 to 58-12, the variation time of normal symbols is set to a short time of 0.2 seconds. For example, when the variable display of the second special symbol having a relatively long variation time is executed in the first KT state, the variable winning balls are variable winning balls in a state where the normal symbols are stopped from varying and there is no reserved memory of the normal symbols. This is because the device 6B is in a closed state, and it is possible to capture aiming at the timing of stopping the fluctuation of the second special symbol (when it becomes a small hit, if the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is long, the passing gate The variable winning ball device 6B does not open until the game ball passing through 41 reaches the variable winning ball device 6B or the special variable winning ball device 17, and the winning of the special winning hole becomes possible). On the other hand, in the second embodiment, by shortening the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the variable winning ball device 6B is activated before the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 and reaches the variable winning ball device 6B. Since it is set to start opening, it is possible to eliminate capture elements by a shooting operation aimed at the timing of occurrence of a small hit based on the variable display of the second special symbol in the first KT state.

FIGS. 58-13 and 58-14 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the content of the effect control commands used in the second embodiment. In the example shown in FIG. 58-13, commands 8000 (H) to 8009 (H) and 8011 (H) to 8032 (H) are ornaments variably displayed on the image display device 5 corresponding to variable display of special symbols. It is an effect control command (variation pattern command) that specifies the variation pattern of the symbol. It should be noted that the effect control command specifying the variation pattern is also a command for specifying the start of variation. Therefore, when the effect control CPU 120 receives any of the commands 8000 (H) to 8009 (H) and 8011 (H) to 8032 (H), the image display device 5 starts variable display of the decoration pattern. Control.

Command 9001 (H) is an effect control command (display result 1 designation command) (loss designation command) that designates that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern designated by the variation pattern command is to be lost. Command 9002 (H) is an effect control command (display result 2 specification command (16R probability variation big hit specification command) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variation pattern command is a 16R probability variation jackpot). . Command 9003 (H) is an effect control command (display result 3 designation command (9R probability variable jackpot designation command)) that designates that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variation pattern command is a 9R probability variable jackpot. . Command 9004 (H) is an effect control command (display result 4 designation command (6R probability variable jackpot designation command) that designates that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern designated by the variation pattern command is a 6R probability variable jackpot. . The command 9005 (H) is an effect control command (display result 5 designation command (6R normal jackpot designation command) that designates that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern designated by the variation pattern command is a 6R normal jackpot. . Command 9006 (H) is an effect control command (display result 6 designation command (2R probability variable jackpot designation command)) that designates that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern designated by the variation pattern command is a 2R probability variable jackpot. . The command 9007 (H) is an effect control command (display result 7 designation command (2R normal jackpot designation command) that designates that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern designated by the variation pattern command is a 2R normal jackpot. . Command 9008 (H) is an effect control command (display result 8 designation command (small hit designation command)) that designates that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern designated by the variation pattern command is a small hit.

Hereinafter, the display result 1 designation command to the display result 8 designation command may be referred to as display result designation commands. In the second embodiment, since the game control microcomputer 100 transmits the display result designation command immediately before the variation pattern command, the display result designation command received immediately before the first variation pattern command by the effect control CPU 120 can be determined to be the display result designation command for the first special symbol, and the display result designation command received immediately before the second variation pattern command can be determined to be the display result designation command for the second special symbol, so the display The result specifying command can be used for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but the display result specifying command for the first special symbol and the display result specifying command for the second special symbol may be separate.

In addition, instead of the game control microcomputer 100 transmitting the display result designation command, 15R probability variable big win/9R probability variable big win/6R probability variable big win/6R normal big win/2R probability variable big win/2R normal big win/minor win/losing , and the effect control CPU 120 may determine the stop pattern of the decoration pattern based on the received variation pattern command.

Command 9C00 (H) is an effect control command (right-handed lighting end designation command) that designates that lighting of the right-handed lamp 132 is finished. The command 9C01 (H) is an effect control command (right-handed lighting start designation command) that designates that the right-handed lamp 132 has started lighting.

Command A000 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol determination designation command) capable of specifying stop of variable display of the first special symbol. Command A001 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol confirmation designation command) capable of specifying the stop of the variable display of the second special symbol.

The command A002 (H) is an effect control command (first forced symbol confirmation designation command) capable of specifying that the variable display of the first special symbol is forcibly stopped. Command A003 (H) is an effect control command (second compulsory design determination designation command) capable of specifying that the variable display of the second special design is forcibly stopped.

Command BXXX(H) (X=arbitrary hexadecimal number) is an effect control command sent from the start of the big win game to the end of the big win game. Among them, B000 (H) is an effect control command (first jackpot start designation command: first fanfare designation command) for designating the start of the first jackpot game. B001(H) is an effect control command (first jackpot end designation command: first ending designation command) for designating the end of the first jackpot game. B002(H) is an effect control command (second jackpot start designation command: second fanfare designation command) for designating the start of the second jackpot game. B003(H) is an effect control command (second jackpot end designation command: second ending designation command) for designating the end of the second jackpot game. B004 (H) is an effect control command (small hit start designation command) for designating the start of a small hit game. B005 (H) is an effect control command (small hit end designation command) for designating the end of the small hit game.

The command B1XX(H) is an effect control command (large winning opening open display command) that designates display during the round during the big win game. The number of rounds to be displayed in "XX" is set. Command B2XX(H) is an effect control command (post-opening big winning opening display command) that designates a post-round display (display of an interval between rounds) during a big win game.

The command B400 (H) is an effect control command (large winning opening designation command) that designates that a game ball has entered a large winning opening. Command B401 (H) is an effect control command (special winning opening designation command) that designates that a game ball has won a special winning opening.

Command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first effective start winning designation command) indicating that a game ball has won in the first start winning opening while the number of first reserved memories has not reached 4. The command C001 (H) is an effect control command (second effective start winning designation command) indicating that the game ball has won the second start winning opening while the second reserved memory number has not reached 4. A command indicating the number of reserved memories may be transmitted as the first effective start winning prize designation command, and a command indicating the second reserved memory count may be transmitted as the second effective start winning prize designation command. In the form, the first effective starting winning designation command and the second effective starting winning designation command are commands indicating that there is a starting winning prize.

The command C801 (H) is an effect control command (gate passage designation command) that designates that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41 .

Command D000 (H) is a production control command (first customer waiting demo display designation command). Command D001 (H) is a production control command (second customer waiting demo display designation command). The first customer waiting demo display designation command may be a command that can be transmitted only in the normal state. Also, the second customer waiting demo display designation command may be a command that can be transmitted only in the KT state.

Command E000 (H) is an effect control command (low probability/non-KT background designation command) for designating background display when the game state is low probability/non-KT state. Command E001 (H) is an effect control command (low probability/first KT background designation command) for designating background display when the game state is low probability/first KT state. Command E002 (H) is an effect control command (high probability/first KT background designation command) for designating background display when the game state is high probability/first KT state. The command E003 (H) is an effect control command (high probability/second KT background designation command) for designating the background display when the game state is the high probability/second KT state.

Command E1XX (H) is an effect control command (setting value command) that designates the currently set setting value. Note that the setting value is set to "XX". For example, when the setting value is set to "1", command E101(H) is transmitted as the setting value command. Further, for example, when the setting value is set to "6", command E106(H) is transmitted as the setting value command.

The effect control CPU 120 (specifically, the effect control CPU 120) mounted on the effect control board 12 receives the above-described effect control command from the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11. The display state of the image display device 5 is changed according to the contents shown in 58-13 and FIG. Incidentally, the effect control commands other than the effect control commands shown in FIGS. 58-13 and 58-14 are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. FIG. For example, a more detailed production control command related to the jackpot game and a production control command indicating a game state (for example, a production control command indicating an initialization command) are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 .

Next, special symbol process processing in the second embodiment will be described. In the special symbol process of the second embodiment, in addition to each process in the special symbol process described above with reference to FIG. 6, a gate passage waiting process is provided. In this gate passage waiting process, control for waiting for the game ball to pass through the passage gate 41 is performed, the details of which will be described later. In the second embodiment, as an explanation of the special symbol process, the first special symbol process related to the first special symbol and the second special symbol process related to the second special symbol will be distinguished and explained. . Therefore, each processing in the special symbol process processing (for example, special symbol normal processing, etc.) will also be described by distinguishing between the processing relating to the first special symbol and the processing relating to the second special symbol. In the following description, the first processing refers to processing relating to the first special symbol, and the second processing refers to processing relating to the second special symbol.

FIG. 58-15 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol normal process in the first special symbol process process. The state in which the first special symbol normal process is executed is when the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the first special symbol normal process. In addition, when the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the first special symbol normal processing, the first special symbol is not displayed in the first special symbol display device 4A. In addition, it is neither during the first jackpot game (opening the special variable winning ball device 7 a predetermined number of times) nor during the small winning game (opening the special variable winning ball device 17).

In the first special symbol normal process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first confirms the value of the first reserved memory number (step S51A). Specifically, the count value of the first reserved storage number counter is checked.

If the first pending memory number is 0, a first customer waiting demo display designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step S52A).

If the first reserved memory number is not 0, the game control microcomputer 100 reads each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved memory number=1 in the first reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 102, (step S53A), decrement the value of the first reserved storage number by 1 (subtract 1 from the count value of the first reserved storage number counter), and shift the contents of each storage area (step S54A). That is, each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number=n (n=2, 3, 4) in the first reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 102 is changed to the first reserved memory number=n− Store in the storage area corresponding to 1. Therefore, the order in which each random number stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved memory number is extracted always matches the order of the first reserved memory number = 1, 2, 3, 4. It's like That is, in this example, the contents of each storage area are shifted each time the variable display start condition is satisfied, so the order in which each random number value is extracted can be specified. In this example, each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number and each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number are The order of extraction is also identifiably preserved.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 performs control to transmit a set value command indicating the set value set in the RAM 102 to the effect control board 12 (step S55A). In this example, the setting value command is transmitted each time the variable display is started by executing the processing of step S55A. A set value command is also sent when

The timing of transmitting the set value command is not limited to that shown in this example. It may be configured to

Thereafter, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a background designation command corresponding to the current game state to the effect control CPU 120 (step S56A). Specifically, when the probability variation flag and the high base flag are off, it is determined that the low probability / non-KT state is set, and the low probability / non-KT background designation command is issued. If there is, it is determined to be in the low probability/first KT state and a low probability/first KT background designation command is issued. Determine the high probability/first KT background designation command, and if the probability variable flag is on and the high base flag is off, determine that it is in the high probability/second KT state and execute the high probability/second KT background designation command, Send.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the second special symbol is in the midst of a big hit variation (step S57A). Concretely, when the second big win flag indicating that the big win will be made is set based on the variation display of the second special symbol, it is determined that the second special symbol is in the middle of the big win variation. When it is determined that the second special symbol is in the middle of the big hit fluctuation, the process proceeds to step S69A without performing the processing after step S58A. As a result, when the variation of the first special pattern is started during the big hit variation of the second special pattern, it is forcibly lost regardless of whether or not the big hit determination value is stored.

It should be noted that the method of forcibly detaching is not limited to the one described above. For example, in step S57A, when the second special symbol is in the midst of a big hit change, a process of setting a random value (fixed value) as a hit determination random number is performed, and by moving to step S59A, at the time of starting winning A win may be forcibly determined regardless of which hit determination random number has been acquired.

Further, for example, when the second special symbol is in the midst of a big hit fluctuation in step S57A, without performing the processing of steps S58A to S63A, a random number value (fixed value) is set as a hit determination random number and a small value is set. By performing the hit determination, it may be forcibly lost regardless of which random number for the hit determination was acquired at the time of the start winning.

If the second special symbol is not in the middle of the big hit variation, the game control microcomputer 100 reads the hit determination random number from the first random number storage buffer (step S58A), and executes the big hit determination module (step S59A). The big-hit determination module is a program that determines that a big-hit will be made when the hit-judgment random number matches a predetermined big-hit determination value. When it is determined to be a big win (step S60A), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a first big win flag indicating that a big win will be made based on the variable display of the first special symbol (step S61A). . Based on the hit type determination random number, it is determined whether the jackpot type is a 16R probability variable jackpot, a 6R probability variable jackpot, or a 6R normal jackpot (step S62A), the jackpot type is stored (step S63A), and step S69A. Move to

Further, when the game control microcomputer 100 does not make a big hit in step S60A, the game control microcomputer 100 executes a small hit determination module (step S64A). The small-hit determination module is a program that determines a small-hit if the random number for the hit determination (random number for the small-hit determination may be used) matches a predetermined small-hit determination value. When it is determined to be a small hit (step S65A), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a first small hit flag indicating that a small hit will be made based on the variable display of the first special symbol ( step S66A). Further, the game control microcomputer 100 determines a small hit type based on the hit type determination random number (step S67A), and stores the small hit type (step S68A). In addition, in this example, when executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the small hit A is determined as the small hit type (see FIG. 58-5 (A)). Then, the process proceeds to step S69A.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the value of the high base number counter indicating the number of remaining high base states is "0" (step S69A), and if it is "0", step S75A. Move to If the value of the high base number counter is not "0", that is, if it is in the low probability/first KT state, the game control microcomputer 100 subtracts "1" from the value of the high base number counter (step S70A), It is determined whether or not it has become "0" (step S71A). If the value of the high base number counter does not become "0", the process proceeds to step S75A. When the value of the high base count counter becomes "0", the game control microcomputer 100 resets the high base flag indicating the high base state (step S72A), and shortens the variable display of the special symbols. The special figure time saving flag indicating that it is under control is reset (step S73A). In addition, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a lighting extension flag (state extension flag) indicating that lighting of the right-handed lamp 132 is extended until the end of variation (step S74A). Then, the process proceeds to step S75A.

In the second embodiment, as will be described later, the high base flag is set and the number of executions of the variable display in the high base state is managed at the end of the jackpot game based on the 6R normal jackpot or the 2R normal jackpot. This is the case where the variable display is performed 50 times under control to the probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state). In the case of the low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state), when starting the 50th variation display, it is determined as Y in steps S71A and S71B, and the high base flag is set in steps S72A and S72B. Along with being reset, the special figure time saving flag is also reset in steps S73A and S73B, and it will shift to a low probability/low base state (normal state (non-KT state)).

In addition, the lighting extension flag (state extension flag) continues the right-handed notification and continues the right-handed state, and although the high base state has ended as a game state, the fluctuation reduction common to the first KT state This is a flag for setting the effect background in common with the first KT state while maintaining the state.

Then, in step S75A, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the first variation pattern setting process (step S75A). Although not shown, the symbols to be stopped are determined immediately before step S75A.

In step S59A, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit by using either the non-probability-variable big-hit determination table or the probability-variable big-hit determination table in consideration of the gaming state.

FIG. 58-16 is a flow chart showing the first variation pattern setting process in the first special symbol process process. In the first variation pattern setting process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first determines whether or not the special figure time saving flag indicating that the variation display of the special symbol is being shortened is set. (step S1700A). In addition, in this example, the special symbol time saving flag is set and the shortening control of the variable display of the special symbol is performed, so that it is more advantageous to execute the variable display of the second special symbol (Fig. 58-6 (see FIG. 58-8), it becomes a state in which small hits are likely to occur, so the state is controlled to the KT state. If the special figure time saving flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 100 is a variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern, non-shown in FIG. 58-6 (A) Select the first special symbol variation pattern table for KT (step S1701A). If the special figure time saving flag is set (that is, if the KT state), the game control microcomputer 100 is a variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern, KT shown in FIG. 58-6 (B) Select the first special symbol variation pattern table for time (step S1702A).

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 is based on the variation pattern table determined to be used in steps S1701A and S1702A and the variation pattern determination random number stored in the first special symbol determination buffer, Which of the variation patterns shown in FIG. 58-6 is to be used is determined (step S1703A). In this example, the variation time of the first special symbol is determined by determining the variation pattern. Further, after determining the variation time, the variation pattern for which the determined variation time is set may be selected from a plurality of variation patterns.

When the variation pattern is determined, the game control microcomputer 100 performs control to transmit a variation pattern command indicating the determined variation pattern to the effect control CPU 120 (step S1704A).

Further, when the variation time (variation pattern) of the first special symbol is determined in step S1703A, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the variation time data indicating the determined variation time to the first variation time timer, and sets the variation time. (Step S1705A), start the variable display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A (Step S1706A). And the game control microcomputer 100 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol variation process (step S1707A).

FIG. 58-17 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol variation process in the first special symbol process process. In the first special symbol variation process, first, if the CPU 103 has not yet transmitted, based on the determination result of whether or not to be a big hit and the determination result of the big hit type, any display result designation command (display result 1 designation command, display result 2 designation command, display result 4 designation command, display result 5 designation command) is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step S1120A).

Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the first variable time timer (step S1121A), and when the first variable time timer times out (step S1122A), it controls the transmission of the first symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 ( step S1123A). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop processing (step S1127A).

When the first variable time timer has not timed out, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the second special symbol display device 4B is deriving and displaying the jackpot symbol (step S1124A). Whether or not the second special symbol display device 4B derives and displays the big hit symbol is, for example, the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop processing, It can be determined by confirming whether or not a second big hit flag indicating that a big hit will be made based on the variable display of the second special symbol is set.

If the second special symbol display device 4B does not derive and display the big hit symbol, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the second special symbol display device 4B derives and displays the small winning symbol (step S1125A). Whether or not the small winning symbol is derived and displayed by the second special symbol display device 4B is, for example, the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop processing. , It can be determined by confirming whether or not a second small hit flag indicating a small hit is set based on the variable display of the second special symbol.

If the second special symbol display device 4B derives and displays the big hit design (Y of step S1124A), or if it derives and displays the small winning design (Y of step S1125A), the CPU 103 controls the effect control CPU 120. to transmit the first compulsory pattern confirmation designation command (step S1126A). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop processing (step S1127A).

By executing the processing of steps S1124A and S1125A, in the second embodiment, if the variation display of the second special symbol becomes a big hit or a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the first special symbol, the first special The variable display of the symbols is forcibly stopped to prevent the occurrence of a big win or a small win at the same time with the first special symbols and the second special symbols. In this case, on the effect control CPU 120 side, when the variable display of the first special symbol is forced out, based on the display result 1 specification command transmitted in step S1124A, the variable display result of the decorative symbol. , to forcibly stop and display the missing symbols.

If neither the big-hit symbol nor the small-hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (N of step S1124A, N of step S1125A), the process is terminated as it is.

FIG. 58-18 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol stop process in the first special symbol process process. In the first special symbol stop process, first, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the lighting extension flag is set (step S2010A). If the lighting extension flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the set lighting extension flag (step S2011A). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to end lighting of the right-handed lamp 132 (step S2012A), and performs control to transmit a right-handed lighting end designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step S2013A).

In this example, since the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning hole) is provided on the right side of the game area, when the game state is controlled to the KT state, the person who performed the right-handed operation is advantageous to the player, and the right hitting lamp 132 is lit. Therefore, in this example, the right-handed lamp 132 is lit during the low-probability/first KT state, but the 50th variable display is started by executing the processing of steps S69A to S74A and S69B to S74B. When the low-probability/first KT state is ended and the normal state (non-KT state) is entered, the processing of steps S2010A to S2013A and S2010B to S2013B is executed, thereby ending the 50th fluctuation display. When the right strike lamp 132 is turned off.

Next, the CPU 103 causes the first special symbol display device 4A to derive and display the stop symbol of the first special symbol (step S2014A). Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the first big hit flag is set (step S2015A). When the first jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103 indicates to externally output a jackpot signal 1 (signal indicating that the jackpot game is in progress) and a jackpot signal 2 (signal indicating that the jackpot game is in progress). A jackpot signal output flag is set (step S2017A). In the second embodiment, information output processing (step S23) is executed based on the fact that the jackpot signal output flag is set in step S2017A, external output of the jackpot signal 1 to the hall computer is started, and jackpot signal 2 external output is not in progress, the external output of the jackpot signal 2 to the hall computer is started.

Next, the CPU 103 sets a timer before opening the big winning opening (step S2018A), sets opening pattern data for round 1 according to the jackpot type (step S2019A), and sets the round number counter indicating the number of rounds of the jackpot to "1". ” is set (step S2020A).

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to start lighting the right-handed lamp 132 (step S2021A), and performs control to transmit a right-handed lighting start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step S2022A).

And CPU103 sets the value of a 1st special figure process flag to the value corresponding to a 1st gate passage waiting process (step S2023A).

By executing the processes of steps S2021A and S2022A, in this example, lighting of the right-handed lamp 132 is started when a big hit is achieved in the variation display of the first special symbol. That is, in this example, since the special variable winning ball device 7 (big winning hole) is provided on the right side of the game area, it is more advantageous for the player to perform the right-handed operation during the big win game. The strike lamp 132 is lit.

In this example, after the big-hit symbol is derived and displayed, the big-hit game is started based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, so the right-hand shot is made at the timing when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41. It may be configured to start lighting the lamp 132 .

When the first big hit flag is not set (N of step S2015A), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the first small hit flag is set (step S2024A). When the 1st small hit flag is set, control which transmits the small hit start designation command vis-a-vis production control CPU120 is done (step S2025A). Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the first special figure process flag to a value corresponding to the first small hit opening preprocessing (step S2029A).

In this example, since the special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning hole) is provided on the right side of the game area, it is originally advantageous for the player to perform the right-handed operation during the small winning game. However, as already explained, when a small win is obtained in the variable display of the first special symbol, the type of the small win is only a small win A, and winning of the game ball into the special winning hole can hardly be expected. Therefore, in this example, when a small hit is obtained in the variable display of the first special symbol, the right-handed lamp 132 is not lit and the right-handed lighting start designation command is not transmitted.

If the first small hit flag is not set (N of step S2024A), the CPU 103 sets the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol normal process (step S2030A).

In this example, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed with the first special symbol, it is configured to be able to execute a right-handed notification prompting the player to shoot the game ball to the right of the game area. there is In addition, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed with the first special symbol, it is configured to be able to execute a launch promotion notification that prompts the player to shoot the game ball aiming at the passage gate 41 as a right hitting notification. may be

In addition, when the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed in the second special pattern, the right hitting notification and the launch promotion notice are not executed, and when the game ball wins in the first start winning hole in that state, the right hitting notice and the launch promotion notice are issued. (In this case, since it is in the state of waiting for passage through the gate, even if the game ball wins in the first start winning hole, the first special symbol variable display will not be started immediately, and will be the first reserved memory) can be configured to

Conversely, when the passage of the game ball through the passage gate 41 is detected in the normal state (low probability/non-KT state), the degree of recognition is low (for example, sound output at a low volume or small screen display). may be configured to perform a left-handed notification prompting the player to shoot the game ball to the left of the game area. On the other hand, in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state), when the winning of the game ball to the second start winning opening or the special winning opening is detected, the degree of recognition is high (for example, loud sound output, (Large screen display) may be configured to notify left-handed players. With such a configuration, it is possible to accurately perform the launch notification. In particular, according to the above configuration, for a player who accidentally shoots a game ball to the right side of the game area, a slight left-handed notification is given in a mode in which the degree of recognition of the surroundings of the gaming machine is low. For a player who intentionally performs a right-handed operation, a left-handed notification may be given in a mode in which the degree of awareness of the surroundings of the gaming machine is high. With such a configuration, it is possible to prompt the game store clerk to return to the left-handed operation to the player who intentionally performs the right-handed operation.

Further, in the above case, when the number of game balls detected in the passage gate 41, the second start winning opening, or the special winning opening reaches a certain number, it may be configured to perform left-handed notification. In addition, at the passage gate 41, when a game ball is detected multiple times (for example, 5 times) within a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute), left-handed notification is performed, and at the second start winning opening and special winning opening, more than a predetermined number It may be configured to perform left-handed notification when game balls of a specific number (for example, one) or more are detected.

In addition, for example, while detecting a game ball at the passage gate 41 does not output an external signal, it is configured to output an external signal when detecting a game ball at the second start winning opening or special winning opening. may

In the second embodiment, the demonstration display is performed when a specific condition is satisfied. When it is detected that the game ball has won a prize, the execution of the demonstration display being executed may be terminated and left-handed notification may be performed.

FIG. 58-19 is a flow chart showing the first gate passage waiting process in the first special symbol process process. In the process of waiting for passage through the first gate, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not a detection signal has been input from the gate switch 21 (step S2501A). If the detection signal from the gate switch 21 is not input, the process is terminated. If the detection signal from the gate switch 21 is input, the CPU 103, if set, resets the probability variable flag indicating the probability variable state, the high base flag, and the special figure time saving flag, and the high base number counter is cleared to 0 (step S2504A). Next, the CPU 103 transmits the first jackpot start designation command (step S2505A), and sets the value of the first special figure process flag to the value corresponding to the first jackpot opening preprocessing (step S2506A).

In the second embodiment, by executing the first gate passage waiting process, when the big win symbol is derived and displayed as a result of the variation display of the first special symbol, the big win game is not started immediately, but the passing gate is executed. A game ball passes through 41 and is configured to shift to a jackpot game on condition that the gate switch 21 detects it.

FIGS. 58-20 and 58-21 are flowcharts showing the first jackpot ending process in the first special symbol process process. In the first jackpot end processing, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the jackpot end display timer is set (step S2200A), and when the jackpot end display timer is set, the process proceeds to step S2204A. When the jackpot end display timer is not set, the first jackpot flag is reset (step S2201A), and control is performed to transmit the first jackpot end designation command (step S2202A). Then, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time (jackpot end display time) during which the big win end display is being performed on the image display device 5 is set in the big win end display timer (step S2203A), and the process ends.

In step S2204A, 1 is subtracted from the value of the big hit end display timer (step S2204A). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the big-hit end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the big-hit end display time has elapsed (step S2205A). If it has not passed, the process is terminated.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (Y in step S2205A), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the type of the jackpot that ended this time is the 16R probability variable jackpot (step S2206A). It should be noted that whether or not the 16R probability variable jackpot can be determined, for example, by confirming the jackpot type stored in step S63A of the first special symbol normal processing. If it is a 16R probability variation jackpot, the CPU 103 sets a probability variation flag indicating that it is in the probability variation state and shifts to the probability variation state (high probability state) (step S2207A). Set a special drawing time saving flag indicating that and shift to KT state (step S2208A). Then, the process proceeds to step S2223A. In the case of a 16R probability variable jackpot, the high base flag is not set, so that the game is controlled to a high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state).

If it is not the 16R probability variable jackpot, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the type of the jackpot that ended this time is the 6R probability variable jackpot (step S2209A). It should be noted that whether or not the 6R probability variable jackpot can be determined by, for example, confirming the jackpot type stored in step S63A of the first special symbol normal processing. If it is a 6R probability variable jackpot, the CPU 103 sets a probability variable flag and shifts to a probability variable state (high probability state) (step S2212A), sets a high base flag and shifts to a high base state (step S2213A), Furthermore, it shifts to the KT state by setting the special figure time saving flag (step S2214A). Then, the process proceeds to step S2223A. Therefore, in the case of a 6R probability variable jackpot, the game is controlled to a high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state).

In the case of a 6R probability variable jackpot, only the high base flag is set and the high base number counter is not set. In this case, since the high base number counter is reset to 0 when the jackpot game is started (see step S2504A of the first gate passage waiting process), the value of the high base number counter remains 0. Therefore, after the end of the jackpot game based on the 6R probability variable jackpot, it is controlled to a high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state), and since the value of the high base number counter is 0 in the subsequent variation display, It is determined as Y in step S2010A of the first special symbol stop processing, and the subtraction processing of the high base number counter in step S2011A is not performed. Then, the high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state) is maintained until the next big win occurs.

If it is not a 6R probability variable jackpot (that is, if it is a 6R normal jackpot), the CPU 103 sets the high base flag and shifts to the high base state (step S2219A), and sets the special figure time saving flag to the KT state. Transition (step S2220A). Also, the CPU 103 sets the high base count counter to "50" (step S2221A). Then, the process proceeds to step S2223A. Therefore, in the case of a 6R normal jackpot, it is controlled to a low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol normal process (step S2223A).

FIG. 58-22 is a flow chart showing the first small winning ending process in the first special symbol process process. In the first small-hit end processing, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the small-hit end display timer is set (step S2300A), and when the small-hit end display timer is set, the process proceeds to step S2304A. When the small hit end display timer is not set, the first small hit flag is reset (step S2301A), and control is performed to transmit the small hit end designation command (step S2302A). Then, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time (small hit end display time) during which the small win end display is performed on the image display device 5 is set to the small win end display timer (step S2303A), and the process is executed. finish.

In step S2304A, 1 is subtracted from the value of the small hit end display timer (step S2304A). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the small-hit end display timer is 0, ie, whether or not the small-hit end display time has elapsed (step S2305A). If it has not passed, the process is terminated.

If the small hit end display time has passed (Y of step S2305A), the CPU 103 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol normal process (step S2309A).

FIG. 58-23 is a flow chart showing the second special symbol normal process in the second special symbol process process. The state in which the second special symbol normal process is executed is when the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the second special symbol normal process. In addition, when the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the second special symbol normal processing, it means that the second special symbol is not displayed in the second special symbol display device 4B. It is neither during the second jackpot game (opening the special variable winning ball device 7 for a predetermined number of times) nor during the small winning game (opening the special variable winning ball device 17).

In the second special symbol normal process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first confirms the value of the second reserved memory number (step S51B). Specifically, the count value of the second reserved storage number counter is checked.

If the second pending memory number is 0, a second customer waiting demonstration display designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step S52B).

If the second reserved memory number is not 0, the game control microcomputer 100 reads each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved memory number=1 in the second reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 102, (Step S53B), the value of the second reserved storage number is decremented by 1 (the count value of the second reserved storage number counter is decremented by 1), and the contents of each storage area are shifted (step S54B). That is, each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number=n (n=2, 3, 4) in the second reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 102 is changed to the second reserved memory number=n− Store in the storage area corresponding to 1. Therefore, the order in which each random number stored in each storage area corresponding to each second reserved memory number is extracted always matches the order of the second reserved memory number = 1, 2, 3, 4. It's like That is, in this example, the contents of each storage area are shifted each time the variable display start condition is satisfied, so the order in which each random number value is extracted can be specified.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 performs control to transmit a setting value command indicating the setting value set in the RAM 102 to the effect control board 12 (step S55B). In this example, the setting value command is transmitted each time the variable display is started by executing the processing of step S55B. A set value command is also sent when

Thereafter, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a background designation command corresponding to the current game state to the effect control CPU 120 (step S56B). In addition, the method of transmitting a specific background designation command is the same as the process shown in step S56A of the first special symbol normal process.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the first special symbol is in the middle of a big hit variation (step S57B). Concretely, when the first big win flag indicating that the big win will be achieved is set based on the variation display of the first special symbol, it is determined that the first special symbol is in the midst of the big win variation. When it is determined that the first special symbol is in the middle of the big hit fluctuation, the process proceeds to step S69B without performing the processing after step S58B. Thus, when the variation of the second special symbol is started during the variation of the big hit of the first special symbol, it is forcibly lost regardless of whether or not the judgment value of the big hit is stored.

It should be noted that the method of forcibly detaching is not limited to the one described above. For example, in step S57B, when the first special symbol is in the midst of a big hit change, a process of setting a random value (fixed value) as a hit determination random number is performed, and by moving to step S59B, any time at the time of starting winning Regardless of whether or not the random number for the hit determination has been obtained, the game may be forcibly lost.

Further, for example, when the first special symbol is in the middle of the big hit fluctuation in step S57B, without performing the processing of steps S58B to S63B, a random number value (fixed value) is set as a hit determination random number and a small value is set. By performing the hit determination, it may be forcibly lost regardless of which random number for the hit determination was acquired at the time of the start winning.

If the first special symbol is not in the middle of the big hit variation, the game control microcomputer 100 reads the hit determination random number from the second random number storage buffer (step S58B), and executes the big hit determination module (step S59B). The big-hit determination module is a program that determines that a big-hit will be made when the hit-judgment random number matches a predetermined big-hit determination value. When it is determined to be a big win (step S60B), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a second big win flag indicating that a big win will be made based on the variable display of the second special symbol (step S61B). . Based on the hit type determination random number, it is determined whether the jackpot type is a 16R probability variable jackpot, a 9R probability variable jackpot, a 2R probability variable jackpot, or a 2R normal jackpot (step S62B), and the jackpot type is stored (step S63B). ), and the process proceeds to step S69B.

Further, when the game control microcomputer 100 does not determine a big hit in step S60B, the game control microcomputer 100 executes a small hit determination module (step S64B). The small-hit determination module is a program that determines a small-hit if the random number for the hit determination (random number for the small-hit determination may be used) matches a predetermined small-hit determination value. When it is determined to be a small hit (step S65B), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a second small hit flag indicating a small hit based on the variable display of the second special symbol ( step S66B). Further, the game control microcomputer 100 determines a small hit type based on the hit type determination random number (step S67B), and stores the small hit type (step S68B). In addition, in this example, when executing the variable display of the second special symbol, the small hit type is determined as the small hit B or the small hit C (see FIG. 58-5 (B)). Then, the process proceeds to step S69B.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the value of the high base number counter is "0" (step S69B), and if it is "0", the process proceeds to step S75B. If the value of the high base number counter is not "0", that is, if it is in the low probability/first KT state, the game control microcomputer 100 subtracts "1" from the value of the high base number counter (step S70B), It is determined whether or not it has become "0" (step S71B). If the value of the high base number counter does not become "0", the process proceeds to step S75B. When the value of the high base frequency counter becomes "0", the game control microcomputer 100 resets the high base flag indicating the high base state (step S72B) and shortens the variable display of the special symbol. The special figure time saving flag indicating that it is under control is reset (step S73B). In addition, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a lighting extension flag (state extension flag) (step S74B). Then, the process proceeds to step S75B.

Then, in step S75B, the value of the second special figure process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the second variation pattern setting process (step S75B). Although not shown, the symbols to be stopped are determined immediately before step S75B.

In step S59B, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit by using either the non-probability-variable big-hit determination table or the probability-variable big-hit determination table in consideration of the gaming state.

The second variation pattern setting process is similar to the first variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 58-16. That is, in the first variation pattern setting process shown in FIGS. 58-16, if "first" is read as "second", the second variation pattern process will be explained. However, in the second variation pattern setting process, the CPU 103 first performs the same process as in step S1700A, and confirms whether or not the special figure time saving flag is set. If the special figure time saving flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 100 is a variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern, non-shown in FIG. 58-7 (C) Select the second special symbol variation pattern table for KT. If the special figure time saving flag is set (that is, if it is in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 100 is whether or not the probability variation flag and the high base flag are set, and depending on the number of variations, variation As the variation pattern table for determining the pattern, any one of the second special symbol variation pattern table for KT shown in FIGS. 58-7(D) to 58-8(I) is selected. For example, if the probability variation flag is off and the high base flag is on (low probability / if the 1st KT state), if it is the first variation, the second special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 58-7 (D) is selected, and if it is the 2nd to 49th variation, the second special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 58-7 (E) is selected. Select the special symbol variation pattern table. Also, for example, if both the probability variation flag and the high base flag are on (high probability/1st KT state), the second special symbol variation shown in FIG. 58-8 (G) if the first variation A pattern table is selected, and if it is after the second variation, the second special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 58-8 (H) is selected. Also, for example, if the probability variation flag is on and the high base flag is off (high probability/second KT state), the second special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 58-8 (I) is selected.

The second special symbol variation process is the same as the first special symbol variation process shown in FIGS. 58-17. That is, in the first special symbol variation process shown in FIGS. 58-17, if "first" is read as "second", the second special symbol variation process will be described.

Also in the second special symbol variation process, the same processes as steps S1124A to S1126A of the first special symbol variation process are executed, and the first special symbol display device 4A derives and displays the big winning symbol or the small winning symbol. If there is, control is performed to transmit the second compulsory symbol determination designation command to the effect control CPU 120, and control is performed so that the variable display of the second special symbol is compulsorily missed. With such a configuration, in the normal state after the end of the first KT state (after the end of the time saving state), the remaining second reserved memory can be digested, and the occurrence of a big hit at an unintended timing when the player is absent. can be suppressed.

In addition, a variable winning ball device for the first special symbol is provided below the winning ball device 6A (first start winning hole), and a winning ball device for the second special symbol ( A game machine configured to provide a starting winning hole which is not a variable winning ball device, and configured to shift to a normal state via a time saving state of a first special pattern after the end of a second KT state (small winning RUSH). , As described above, a configuration may be applied in which the variable display of the second special symbol is forced out. In this case, since the variation efficiency of the first special symbol increases, the frequency of occurrence of small hits based on the variation display of the first special symbol also increases. To further suppress the occurrence of a big hit at an unintended timing in the absence of a player by increasing the frequency of playing, suppressing the occurrence of the variable display of the second special pattern based on the second reserved memory in the normal state. can be done.

FIG. 58-24 is a flow chart showing the second special symbol stop process in the second special symbol process process. In the second special symbol stop process, first, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the lighting extension flag is set (step S2010B). If the lighting extension flag has been set, the CPU 103 resets the lighting extension flag that has been set (step S2011B). In addition, the CPU 103 performs control to end lighting of the right-handed lamp 132 (step S2012B), and performs control to transmit a right-handed lighting end designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step S2013B).

Next, the CPU 103 causes the second special symbol display device 4B to derive and display the stop symbol of the second special symbol (step S2014B). Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second big hit flag is set (step S2015B). When the second jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the special figure time saving flag is set (step S2016B). If the special figure time saving flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the KT state), the process proceeds to step S2018B as it is.

If the special figure time saving flag is set (that is, if it is in the KT state), the CPU 103 sets the big hit signal output flag (step S2017B). In the second embodiment, information output processing (step S23) is executed based on the fact that the jackpot signal output flag is set in step S2017B, external output of the jackpot signal 1 to the hall computer is started, and jackpot signal 2 external output is not in progress, the external output of the jackpot signal 2 to the hall computer is started.

Next, the CPU 103 sets a timer before opening the big winning opening (step S2018B), sets round 1 opening pattern data corresponding to the jackpot type (step S2019B), and sets "1" to the round number counter (step S2019B). S2020B).

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to start lighting the right-handed lamp 132 (step S2021B), and performs control to transmit a right-handed lighting start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step S2022B).

And CPU103 sets the value of a 2nd special figure process flag to the value corresponding to a 2nd gate passage waiting process (step S2023B).

By executing the processes of steps S2021B and S2022B, in this example, lighting of the right-handed lamp 132 is started when a big hit is achieved in the variation display of the second special symbol. That is, in this example, since the special variable winning ball device 7 (big winning hole) is provided on the right side of the game area, it is more advantageous for the player to perform the right-handed operation during the big win game. The strike lamp 132 is lit.

When the second big hit flag is not set (N of step S2015B), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second small hit flag is set (step S2024B). When the 2nd small hit flag is set, control which transmits the small hit start specification command vis-a-vis production control CPU120 is done (step S2025B).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the special figure time saving flag is set (step S2026B). If the special figure time saving flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the KT state), the CPU 103 performs control to start lighting the right hitting lamp 132 (step S2027B), and hits right with respect to the effect control CPU 120 Control for transmitting a lighting start designation command is performed (step S2028B).

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the second special figure process flag to a value corresponding to the second small hit opening preprocessing (step S2029B).

By executing the processes of steps S2027B and S2028B, in this example, lighting of the right-handed lamp 132 is started when a small hit occurs in the variation display of the second special symbol. That is, in this example, since the special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning hole) is provided on the right side of the game area, it is advantageous for the player to perform the right-handed operation during the small winning game. The right strike lamp 132 is lit.

However, in this example, even if a small hit is obtained in the variable display of the second special symbol, the right-handed lamp 132 should already be on during the KT state. Therefore, in this example, by performing the determination processing of step S2026B, when the second special symbol fluctuation display during the KT state becomes a small hit, the lighting of the right-handed lamp 132 is overlapped and started. Processing such as sending a right-handed lighting start designation command is not performed.

If the second small hit flag is not set (N of step S2024B), CPU 103 sets the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol normal process (step S2030B).

FIG. 58-25 is a flowchart showing second gate passage waiting processing in the second special symbol process processing. In the process of waiting for passage through the second gate, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not a detection signal has been input from the gate switch 21 (step S2501B). If the detection signal from the gate switch 21 is not input, the process is terminated. If the detection signal from the gate switch 21 is input, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the special figure time saving flag is set (step S2502B). If the special figure time saving flag is set (that is, if it is in the KT state), the process proceeds to step S2504B as it is.

If the special figure time saving flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the KT state), the CPU 103 sets the big hit signal output flag (step S2503B). In the second embodiment, information output processing (step S23) is executed based on the fact that the jackpot signal output flag is set in step S2503B, external output of the jackpot signal 1 to the hall computer is started, and jackpot signal 2 external output is not in progress, the external output of the jackpot signal 2 to the hall computer is started.

Next, if the CPU 103 is set, the probability variation flag, the high base flag, and the special figure time saving flag are reset, and the value of the high base frequency counter is cleared to 0 (step S2504B). Next, the CPU 103 transmits a second jackpot start designation command (step S2505B), and sets the value of the second special figure process flag to a value corresponding to the second jackpot opening preprocessing (step S2506B).

In the second embodiment, the second gate passage waiting process is executed, so that the big win game is not started immediately when the big win symbol is derived and displayed as a result of the variation display of the second special symbol, but the passing gate is executed. A game ball passes through 41 and is configured to shift to a jackpot game on condition that the gate switch 21 detects it.

FIGS. 58-26 and 58-27 are flowcharts showing the second jackpot ending process in the second special symbol process process. In the second jackpot end processing, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the jackpot end display timer is set (step S2200B), and when the jackpot end display timer is set, the process proceeds to step S2204B. When the jackpot end display timer is not set, the second jackpot flag is reset (step S2201B), and control is performed to transmit the second jackpot end designation command (step S2202B). Then, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time (jackpot end display time) during which the big win end display is performed on the image display device 5 is set in the big win end display timer (step S2203B), and the process is terminated.

In step S2204B, 1 is subtracted from the value of the big hit end display timer (step S2204B). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the big-hit end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the big-hit end display time has elapsed (step S2205B). If it has not passed, the process is terminated.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (Y in step S2205B), the CPU 103 confirms whether the type of the jackpot that ended this time is the 16R probability variable jackpot or the 2R probability variable jackpot (step S2206B). Whether or not the 16R probability variable big hit or the 2R probability variable big hit can be determined by, for example, confirming the big hit type stored in step S63B of the second special symbol normal processing. If it is a 16R probability variable jackpot or a 2R probability variable jackpot, the CPU 103 sets the probability variable flag and shifts to the probability variable state (high probability state) (step S2207B), sets the special figure time saving flag and shifts to the KT state ( step S2208B). Then, the process moves to step S2223B. In the case of a 16R probability variable jackpot or a 2R probability variable jackpot, since the high base flag is not set, the game is controlled to a high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state).

If it is neither the 16R probability variable jackpot nor the 2R probability variable jackpot, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the type of the jackpot that ended this time is the 9R probability variable jackpot (step S2209B). It should be noted that whether or not the 9R probability variable jackpot can be determined by, for example, confirming the jackpot type stored in step S63B of the second special symbol normal processing. If it is a 9R probability variable jackpot, the CPU 103 sets the probability variable flag and shifts to the probability variable state (high probability state) (step S2212B), sets the high base flag and shifts to the high base state (step S2213B), Furthermore, it shifts to the KT state by setting the special figure time saving flag (step S2214B). Then, the process moves to step S2223B. Therefore, when the 9R probability variable jackpot is achieved, the game is controlled to a high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state).

Incidentally, in the case of a 9R probability variable jackpot, only the high base flag is set, and the high base number counter is not set. In this case, since the high base number counter is reset to 0 when the jackpot game is started (see step S2504B of the second gate passage waiting process), the value of the high base number counter remains 0. Therefore, after the end of the jackpot game based on the 9R probability variable jackpot, it is controlled to a high probability/high base state (high probability/1st KT state), and since the value of the high base number counter is 0 in the subsequent variation display, In the second special symbol stop processing, it is determined as Y in step S2010B, and the subtraction processing of the high base number counter in step S2011B is not performed. Then, the high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state) is maintained until the next big win occurs.

If it is not a 9R probability variable jackpot (that is, if it is a 2R normal jackpot), the CPU 103 sets the high base flag and shifts to the high base state (step S2219B), and sets the special figure time saving flag to the KT state. Transition (step S2220B). Also, the CPU 103 sets the high base number counter to "50" (step S2221B). Then, the process moves to step S2223B. Therefore, in the case of a 2R normal jackpot, it is controlled to a low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol normal process (step S2223B).

FIG. 58-28 is a flow chart showing the second small winning ending process in the second special symbol process process. In the second small-hit end processing, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the small-hit end display timer is set (step S2300B), and when the small-hit end display timer is set, the process proceeds to step S2304B. When the small hit end display timer is not set, the second small hit flag is reset (step S2301B), and control is performed to transmit the small hit end designation command (step S2302B). Then, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time (small hit end display time) during which the small win end display is performed on the image display device 5 is set in the small win end display timer (step S2303B), and the process is executed. finish.

In step S2304B, 1 is subtracted from the value of the small hit end display timer (step S2304B). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the small-hit end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the small-hit end display time has elapsed (step S2305B). If it has not passed, the process is terminated.

If the small hit end display time has passed (Y of step S2305B), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the special figure time saving flag is set (step S2306B). If the special figure time saving flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the KT state), the CPU 103 performs control to end the lighting of the right hitting lamp 132 (step S2307B), and hits right with respect to the effect control CPU 120 Control is performed to transmit a lighting end designation command (step S2308B).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol normal process (step S2309B).

Here, transition of the game state in the second embodiment will be described. FIGS. 58-29 are explanatory diagrams for explaining how the game state transitions in the second embodiment. First, in the second embodiment, in the low-probability/low-base state (normal state (non-KT state)), the player aims at the left side of the game area and shoots the game ball (left hit). Therefore, in the normal state, the starting winning to the first starting winning opening mainly occurs, and the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly executed. Further, since the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly executed, when a big win occurs in the low probability/low base state, a 16R probability variable big win, a 6R probability variable big win, or a 6R normal big win mainly occurs.

As shown in FIG. 58-29, when a 16R probability variable jackpot occurs in the low probability/low base state, after the jackpot game is completed, the state shifts to a high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state), The high probability/low base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps S2206A-S2208A). In addition, when a 6R variable probability big hit occurs in the low probability/low base state, after the big win game ends, the state is shifted to the high probability/high base state (high probability/1st KT state) until the next big hit occurs. The high probability/high base state is maintained (see steps S2209A, S2212A-S2214A). In addition, when a 6R normal jackpot occurs in the low probability/low base state, after the jackpot game ends, the transition is made to a low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state), and whether the next jackpot will occur. The low-probability/high-base state is maintained until 50 times of fluctuation display is completed (see steps S2219A to S2221A).

After transitioning to the KT state (high-probability/high-base state, low-probability/high-base state, high-probability/low-base state), in the second embodiment, the player moves to the right of the game area. Aim and shoot the game ball (right hitting). Therefore, in the KT state, the start winning to the second start winning opening is mainly generated, and the variable display of the second special symbol is mainly executed. Further, since the variable display of the second special symbol is mainly executed, when a big win occurs in the KT state, a 16R probability variable big win, a 9R probability variable big win, a 2R probability variable big win, or a 2R normal big win occurs.

As shown in FIG. 58-29, when a 16R probability variable jackpot or a 2R probability variable jackpot occurs in a high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state), the high probability/low base state after the jackpot game ends. (high probability/second KT state), and the high probability/low base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps S2206B to S2208B). In addition, when a 9R probability variable jackpot occurs in a high probability/high base state (high probability/1st KT state), the state shifts to a high probability/high base state (high probability/1st KT state) after the end of the jackpot game. , the high probability/high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps S2209B, S2212B-S2214B). It should be noted that, in the second embodiment, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the total probability of the 9R probability variation jackpot is 50% (see FIG. 58-4), so once the high probability/ When the high base state is reached, the high probability/high base state loops at a rate of 50%. In addition, when a 2R normal jackpot occurs in a high probability/high base state (high probability/1st KT state), the state shifts to a low probability/high base state (low probability/1st KT state) after the end of the jackpot game. , the low-probability/high-base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs or the 50-time variation display is completed (see steps S2219B to S2221B).

As shown in FIG. 58-29, when a 16R probability variable jackpot or a 2R probability variable jackpot occurs in a low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state), the high probability/low base state after the jackpot game ends. (high probability/second KT state), and the high probability/low base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps S2206B to S2208B). In addition, when a 9R probability variable jackpot occurs in a low probability/high base state (low probability/1st KT state), the game transitions to a high probability/high base state (high probability/1st KT state) after the end of the jackpot game. , the high probability/high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps S2209B, S2212B-S2214B). In addition, when a 2R normal jackpot occurs in a low probability/high base state (low probability/1st KT state), the state shifts to a low probability/high base state (low probability/1st KT state) after the end of the jackpot game. , the low-probability/high-base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs or the 50-time variation display is completed (see steps S2219B to S2221B). In the second embodiment, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of the 2R normal jackpot is 35% (see FIGS. 58-4 (D) and (E)). , once the low-probability/high-base state is reached, the low-probability/high-base state loops at a rate of 35%. In addition, after the 6R normal jackpot or 2R normal jackpot occurs and the low probability/high base state is reached, if the next jackpot does not occur and 50 times of fluctuation display is completed, as shown in Fig. 58-29 As shown, it transitions to the low probability/low base state (normal state (non-KT state)) (see steps S2010A-S2014A).

As shown in FIG. 58-29, when a 16R probability variable jackpot or a 2R probability variable jackpot occurs in a high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state), the high probability/low base state after the jackpot game ends. (high probability/second KT state), and the high probability/low base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps S2206B to S2208B). In addition, in the second embodiment, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of the 16R probability variable big hit or the 2R probability variable big hit is increased when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. Since it is 15% (see FIGS. 58-4(D) and (E)), once the high-probability/low-base state is reached, the high-probability/low-base state loops at a rate of 15%. In addition, when a 9R probability variable jackpot occurs in a high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state), the state shifts to a high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state) after the end of the jackpot game. , the high probability/high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps S2209B, S2212B-S2214B). In addition, when a 2R normal jackpot occurs in the high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state), after the jackpot game ends, the state is shifted to the low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state). , the low-probability/high-base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs or the 50-time variation display is completed (see steps S2219B to S2221B).

58-29, low probability / low base state (normal state (non-KT state)) explained the case where the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, but the variation of the second special symbol at a low rate It is also possible that a display is performed. In this case, when a 16R variable probability big hit or a 2R probability variable big win occurs, the state shifts to a high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state). In addition, when the 9R probability variable jackpot occurs, the state shifts to a high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state). In addition, when the 2R normal jackpot occurs, it shifts to the low-probability/high base state (low-probability/1st KT state), and until the next jackpot occurs or 50 times of fluctuation display is completed, the low-probability/high probability The base state will be maintained.

Also, in FIGS. 58-29, the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state) has been described, but the variable display of the first special symbol is performed at a low rate. may be executed. In this case, when the 16R probability variable jackpot occurs, the state shifts to a high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state). In addition, when the 6R probability variable jackpot occurs, the state shifts to a high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state). In addition, when the 6R normal jackpot occurs, it shifts to the low probability/high base state (low probability/1st KT state), and until the next jackpot occurs or 50 times of fluctuation display is completed, the low probability/high probability is reached. The base state will be maintained.

Also, in FIGS. 58-29, the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state) has been described, but the variable display of the first special symbol is performed at a low rate. may be executed. In this case, when the 16R probability variable jackpot occurs, the state shifts to a high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state). In addition, when the 6R probability variable jackpot occurs, the state shifts to a high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state). In addition, when the 6R normal jackpot occurs, it shifts to the low probability/high base state (low probability/1st KT state), and until the next jackpot occurs or 50 times of fluctuation display is completed, the low probability/high probability is reached. The base state will be maintained.

Also, in FIGS. 58-29, the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state) has been described, but the variable display of the first special symbol is performed at a low rate. may be executed. In this case, when the 16R probability variable jackpot occurs, the state shifts to a high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state). In addition, when the 6R probability variable jackpot occurs, the state shifts to a high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state). In addition, when the 6R normal jackpot occurs, it shifts to the low probability/high base state (low probability/1st KT state), and until the next jackpot occurs or 50 times of fluctuation display is completed, the low probability/high probability is reached. The base state will be maintained.

Next, the normal symbol process processing (step S29) executed by the game control microcomputer 100 will be described. FIGS. 58-30 are flowcharts showing an example of normal symbol process processing. In the normal symbol process process, when the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) detects that the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 and the gate switch 21 is turned on (step S5111), Control is performed to transmit a gate passage designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step S5112). Then, the CPU 103 executes gate switch passage processing (step S5113).

In the second embodiment, by executing the processing of steps S5111 to S5113, when passage of the game ball to the passage gate 41 is detected, a gate passage specification command is transmitted. In the second embodiment, the passage gate 41 is configured as a dual-purpose gate and also plays the role of the operation area, but after the big win symbols are stopped and displayed, it is in the gate passage waiting state before starting the big win game. Regardless of whether or not the gate passage designation command is transmitted.

Then, the CPU 103 executes one of the processes shown in steps S5100 to S5104 according to the value of the normal symbol process flag.

It should be noted that in the second embodiment, regardless of whether or not it is in the gate passage waiting state, when the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 41 is detected in step S5111, the gate switch passage processing of step S5113 is executed. Although the variation display of the normal symbols is executed, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, only when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 when not waiting for passage of the gate, the variable display of the normal symbols is executed, and in the state of waiting for passage of the gate, even if the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal symbols are displayed. may be configured so as not to execute the variable display.

In the second embodiment, the passage gate 41 is used as a gate for both the normal starting area and the operating area. Since it is executed before the normal symbol process processing (see step S26 in FIG. 5), the game of the passing gate 41 as the normal starting region is executed after the processing for detecting the passage of the game ball through the passing gate 41 as the operating region. Sphere passage detection processing is performed. Therefore, the processing for starting the big win game can be executed quickly.

Gate switch passage processing (step S5113): The CPU 103 sets the count value (gate passage storage number) of the gate passage storage counter (counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed through the passage gate 41) to the maximum value (in this example, " 4”) is reached. If the maximum value has not been reached, the count value of the gate passage memory counter is incremented by one. It should be noted that the LED of the normal figure holding indicator 25C is lit according to the value of the gate passage storage counter. Then, the CPU 103 extracts the value of the normal symbol per determination random number and stores it in a storage area (normal symbol determination buffer) corresponding to the value of the gate passage memory number.

Normal design normal processing (step S5100): CPU103 is in a state where the fluctuation of the normal design can be started (for example, when the value of the normal design process flag is a value indicating step S5100, specifically, the normal design When the variable winning ball device 6B is not in the opening/closing operation based on the fact that the normal symbol is not variably displayed on the display device 20 and the symbol is derived and displayed by hitting the normal symbol display device 20), the gate passage is stored. Check the value of a number. Specifically, the count value of the gate passage storage number counter is confirmed. If the gate passing memory number is not 0, it is determined whether or not to win (whether or not the stop pattern of the normal pattern is to be a winning pattern). Then, the normal pattern process timer is set for the normal pattern fluctuation time, and the timer is started. Then, the value of the normal design process flag is normally updated to the value (specifically "1") indicating the design variation process (step S5101).

Normal symbol variation processing (step S5101): The CPU 103 confirms whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out, and if timed out, sets the normal symbol stop symbol display time to the normal symbol process timer and starts the timer. Then, the value of the normal design process flag is normally updated to the value (specifically "2") indicating the design stop processing (step S5102).

Normal design stop processing (step S5102): The CPU 103 confirms whether or not the normal design process timer has timed out, and if timed out, it confirms whether the stop design of the normal design is a winning design. If it is not a winning design (if it is a missing design), the value of the normal design process flag is normally updated to a value (specifically "0") indicating normal design processing (step S5100). On the other hand, if the stop pattern of the normal pattern is a hit pattern, the time before opening the normal electric accessary product is set to the normal pattern process timer, and the timer is started. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is normally updated to the value (specifically "3") indicating the electric accessary product opening preprocessing (step S5103).

Ordinary electric accessory opening preprocessing (step S5103): The CPU 103 checks whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out, and if it has timed out, sets the ordinary electric accessory operating time to the normal symbol process timer, and sets the timer. to start opening the variable winning ball device 6B. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically "4") indicating normal electric accessary product operation processing (step S5104).

Ordinary electric accessary product operation processing (step S5104): The CPU 103 measures the ordinary symbol process timer, and when the ordinary symbol process timer times out, the variable winning ball device 6B is closed. Then, the value of the normal design process flag is normally updated to a value (specifically "0") indicating normal design processing (step S5100).

FIG. 58-31 is a flowchart showing normal symbol normal processing (step S5100). In the normal symbol normal process, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the number of gate passage memories is 0 by confirming the count value of the gate passage memory number counter (step S5121). If the number of gate passages stored is 0 (Y in step S5121), the process ends. If the gate passing memory number is not 0 (N of step S5121), the CPU 103 reads out the random number value for normal symbol per determination stored in the saving area corresponding to the gate passing memory number=1 (step S5122). Then, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the gate passage storage number counter by 1, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step S5123). That is, the random number value for determining per normal symbol stored in the storage area corresponding to the gate passing storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) is stored in the storage area corresponding to the gate passing storage number = n-1 Store. Therefore, the order in which the random numbers for judging normal symbols stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the respective gate passing memory numbers are extracted is always the gate passing memory number=1, 2, 3, 4 order. are designed to match.

Next, the CPU 103 performs lottery processing based on random numbers (random number values for normal symbol hit determination) using a normal symbol determination table for determining whether or not normal symbol hits are determined, and whether or not normal symbol hits are determined. is determined (step S5127). In the second embodiment, in step S5127, the CPU 103 uniformly sets 99/100 It is determined to be a normal pattern with a probability of .

In step S5127, when the read normal symbol winning determination random number value is within the winning range (when winning), the CPU 103 sets a winning symbol as the display result (step S5128), and proceeds to step S5130. Also, in step S5127, if the read normal symbol hit determination random number value is not within the hit range (if it is lost), the CPU 103 sets a lost symbol as the display result (step S5129), and proceeds to step S5130.

In step S5130, if the high base flag is set, the CPU 103 normally sets 0.2 second as the normal design fluctuation time in the design process timer (Y in step S5130, S5131). Also, if the high base flag is not set, that is, if it is the normal state or the second KT state, 1.0 second is set to the normal design process timer as the normal design fluctuation time (N of step S5130, S5132).

Then, the game control microcomputer 100 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag to a value (specifically "1") indicating normal symbol variation processing (step S5101) (step S5133).

FIG. 58-32 is a flowchart showing normal symbol stop processing (step S5102). In the normal design stop processing, the CPU 103 normally decrements the value of the design process timer by -1 (step S3701). Then, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the value of the normal symbol process timer has become 0, that is, whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out (step S3702). If the normal symbol process timer has not timed out (N of step S3702), the process is terminated as it is.

When the normal symbol process timer has timed out, that is, when the normal symbol stop symbol display time has elapsed (Y in step S3702), the CPU 103 determines whether the normal symbol stop symbol is a winning symbol (step S5127). (step S3703). It should be noted that whether or not the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol is confirmed by setting a normal symbol winning determination flag, for example, when the winning is determined in step S5127, and whether or not the flag is set. can be done.

When it is determined that the stop symbol of the normal symbol is not a winning symbol but a losing symbol (N in step S3703), the CPU 103 sets the value of the normal symbol process flag to a value indicating normal symbol normal processing (step S5100) ( Specifically, it is updated to "0") (step S3708).

In step S3703, when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol (Y in step S3703), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the high base flag is set (step S3704). That is, when it is in the first KT state, 0.1 second is set to the normal symbol process timer as the time before opening the normal electric accessory (step S3706). Also, if the high base flag is not set, that is, if it is in the normal state or the second KT state, 2.6 seconds is set in the normal symbol process timer as the time before opening the normal electric accessory (step S3705). .

Next, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special figure process flag to a value (specifically "3") corresponding to the normal electric accessary product opening preprocessing (step S5103) (step S3707).

FIG. 58-33 is a flowchart showing normal electric accessary product opening preprocessing (step S5103). In the normal electric accessary product opening pretreatment, the CPU 103 normally -1 the value of the symbol process timer (step S3801). Then, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the value of the normal symbol process timer has become 0, that is, whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out (step S3802). If the normal symbol process timer has not timed out (N of step S3802), the process is terminated as it is.

When the normal pattern process timer times out, that is, when the time before opening the normal electric accessory has passed (Y in step S3802), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the high base flag is set (step S3803). , If it is set, that is, if it is in the first KT state, 5.5 seconds is set to the normal symbol process timer as the normal electric accessory opening time (step S3805). Also, if the high base flag is not set, that is, if it is in the normal state or the second KT state, 0.2 seconds is set to the normal symbol process timer as the normal electric accessory opening time (step S3804).

Thus, in the second embodiment, 5.5 seconds is set as the normal electric accessory opening time in the first KT state, and 0.2 seconds is set as the normal electric accessory opening time in the normal state or the second KT state. By setting, the first KT state makes it easier to start winning in the second start winning port than in the normal state or the second KT state. Therefore, in the first KT state, game balls are less likely to reach the special variable winning ball device 17 provided downstream of the variable winning ball device 6B than in the normal state or the second KT state.

It should be noted that the control method for making it easier to start winning in the second start winning opening when the gaming state is the first KT state is not limited to that shown in the second embodiment. For example, in the first KT state, the variable winning ball device 6B is opened more times than in the normal state or the second KT state (for example, in the normal state or the second KT state, the variable winning ball device The number of opening times of the variable winning ball device 6B may be set to 2 times in the first KT state, while the number of opening times of the variable winning ball device 6B is set to 1 time. By doing so, in the first KT state, by increasing the number of times the variable winning ball device 6B is opened, it is possible to make it easier to start winning in the second starting winning hole.

Further, for example, in the case of the first KT state, compared with the case of the normal state or the second KT state, the above-described control to lengthen the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B and the variable winning ball device 6B may be executed in combination with control for increasing the number of openings of .

Next, the CPU 103 controls the variable winning ball device 6B to open (step S3806). Specifically, the solenoid 81 is driven to open the variable winning ball device 6B.

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special figure process flag to a value (specifically "4") corresponding to the normal electric auditors product operation process (step S5104) (step S3807).

(Setting suggestion production)
In the second embodiment, the effect control board 12 (sub side) specifies the setting value based on the setting value command (effect control command) transmitted from the main board 11 (main side), and suggests the setting value. Determine the presence or absence and type of setting suggestion effect.

FIG. 58-34 is a diagram showing an example of a set value suggestion effect determination table for determining the presence or absence and type of setting suggestion effect. As shown in FIG. 58-34, in the setting value suggesting effect determination table, there are set value suggesting effect none, set value suggesting effect A, set value suggesting effect B, setting value suggesting effect C, setting value suggesting effect D, set value Judgment values are assigned to the suggestive effect E and the set value suggestive effect F, respectively.

The setting value suggesting effect A is, for example, an effect executed by displaying a predetermined character image in a blue display color on the image display device 5. As shown in FIG. Highest execution rate in some cases. Also, the set value suggesting effect B is, for example, an effect executed by displaying a predetermined character image in a green display color on the image display device 5. As shown in FIG. , the execution ratio is the highest. Further, the set value suggesting effect C is, for example, an effect executed by displaying a predetermined character image in a yellow display color on the image display device 5. As shown in FIG. , the execution ratio is the highest. Also, the set value suggesting effect D is, for example, an effect executed by displaying a predetermined character image in an orange display color on the image display device 5. As shown in FIG. , the execution ratio is the highest. Also, the setting value suggesting effect E is, for example, an effect executed by displaying a predetermined character image in a red display color on the image display device 5. As shown in FIG. , the execution ratio is the highest. Further, the set value suggesting effect F is, for example, an effect executed by displaying a predetermined character image in a rainbow display color on the image display device 5. As shown in FIGS. 6” has the highest execution ratio.

Next, an effect mode of the setting value suggestion effect will be described. FIGS. 58-35 are explanatory diagrams for explaining an effect mode of the setting value suggestion effect. In this example, it is possible to execute the set value suggesting effect in the variable display of the decorative symbols that are lost. As shown in FIG. 58-35 (A), when the image display device 5 is executing the variable display of the left, middle, and right decorative patterns, when it comes time to execute the set value suggesting effect, FIG. 58-35 (B1 ) to (B3), the setting value suggesting effect is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 58-35 (B1) to (B3), the setting value suggestion effect is executed by displaying predetermined character images CH1, CH2 and CH3 on the image display device 5. FIG. In this case, for example, when the set value suggesting effect A is executed, as shown in FIG. A value suggesting rendition is performed. Further, for example, when the set value suggesting effect C is executed, as shown in FIG. Suggestion production is executed. Further, for example, when the set value suggesting effect E is executed, as shown in FIG. Suggestion production is executed.

In the example shown in FIGS. 58-35, the case where the set value suggestion effect A, the set value suggestion effect C, and the set value suggestion effect E are executed is shown, but for example, when the set value suggestion effect B is executed , a predetermined character image is displayed in a green display color, a predetermined character image is displayed in an orange display color when the set value suggestion effect D is executed, and a rainbow color is displayed when the set value suggestion effect F is executed. A predetermined character image is displayed in a color display color.

In this example, which set value is currently set for the player depends on whether a character image of a different display color is displayed during the variable display of the decorative pattern to be lost and whether the set value suggestion effect is executed. can give hope to

(Small hit RUSH continuation suggestion production)
In the second embodiment, the effect control board 12 (sub side), in the second KT state based on the effect control command (for example, high accuracy / second KT background designation command) transmitted from the main board 11 (main side) It is determined whether or not there is, and if it is in the second KT state, the presence or absence and type of small hit RUSH continuation suggestion performance suggesting that the second KT state (small hit RUSH) continues is determined.

FIGS. 58-36 are explanatory diagrams for explaining a specific example of the small winning RUSH continuation suggestion effect determination table. As shown in Figure 58-36, in the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect determination table, there is no small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A, and the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect B are determined respectively. value is assigned. The small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A is, for example, an effect executed by displaying a predetermined effect image in a blue display color on the image display device 5 . Further, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect B is, for example, an effect executed by displaying a predetermined effect image in a red display color on the image display device 5 .

As shown in FIG. 58-36, in this example, the execution ratio of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is the highest when the setting value is "1", and the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect when the setting value is "2" When the execution ratio is the next highest, and the set value is "3", the execution ratio of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion performance is the next highest, and when the set value is "4", the execution ratio of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion performance. is the next highest, the execution ratio of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion performance is the next highest when the set value is “5”, and the execution ratio of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion performance is the highest when the set value is “6”. getting low.

Further, as shown in FIG. 58-36, the execution ratio of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A is the highest when the setting value is "1", and the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect B when the setting value is "6". has the highest execution ratio.

In this example, the probability of a big hit is lowest when the set value is "1" and the probability of a big hit is highest when the set value is "6". Since the second KT state may end as a trigger, the setting value "1" is the setting state in which the second KT state is most likely to continue (the degree of expectation for continuation is high), and the setting value "6" It can be said that the setting state in which the second KT state is most difficult to continue (the degree of continuation expectation is low) is the case where there is. Therefore, in this example, when the set value is "1", the execution ratio of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is the highest, and when the set value is "6", the execution ratio of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is the lowest. Therefore, by executing the small winning RUSH continuation suggestion performance, it is possible to heighten expectations for the continuation of the second KT state (small winning RUSH).

As described above, the degree of expectation for continuation of the second KT state (small hit RUSH) is the degree of expectation that the control period to the second KT state will become longer without the occurrence of a big win.

Further, in this example, since the execution ratio of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A is the highest when the set value is "1", especially by executing the small win RUSH continuation suggestion effect A, It is possible to further increase expectations for the continuation of the second KT state (small hit RUSH).

Next, the effect mode of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect will be described. FIGS. 58-37 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the effect mode of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect. In this example, it is possible to execute a small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect in the variable display of the decorative pattern that is to be lost during the second KT state (during the small hit RUSH).

In this example, when in the second KT state, as shown in FIG. 58-37(A), for example, a character display Im4 such as "small win RUSH" is displayed on the image display device 5, and the second KT state is displayed. It is recognizably displayed that it is inside. Then, as shown in FIG. 58-37 (A), when executing the variable display of the left, middle and right decorative patterns on the image display device 5 during the second KT state, the execution timing of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect Then, as shown in FIGS. 58-37 (B1) to (B3), a small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 58-37 (B1) and (B2), the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed by displaying predetermined effect images Im5 and Im6 on the image display device 5. FIG. In this example, a case where images of racing cars are displayed as the predetermined effect images Im5 and Im6 is shown. In this case, for example, when executing the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A, as shown in FIG. A small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed. Further, for example, when executing the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect B, as shown in FIG. Small hit RUSH continuation suggestion production is executed.

In this example, during the variable display of the decoration pattern to be lost in the second KT state, by executing the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect or by displaying the effect image of any display color, the small win RUSH continuation suggestion Depending on whether or not the performance is executed, the player can have expectations for the continuation of the second KT state (small win RUSH).

(Right shot notification)
Next, the notification of hitting to the right in the second embodiment will be described. In the second embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 58-38, for example, a right-handed informing LED 37 is provided on the right side of the image display device 5 for prompting a right-handed operation. This right-handed notification LED 37 is generated by the production control board 12 (sub-side) based on the production control command (right-handed lighting end command, right-handed lighting end designation command) transmitted from the main board 11 (main side) Lighting is controlled.

In this example, regardless of whether the big win is achieved by the variable display of the first special symbol or the big win is achieved by the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol, when the jackpot game is in progress. 58-38 (1), the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) turns on the right-handed lamp 132 (see steps S2021A and S2021B). In addition, based on the reception of the right-handed lighting start designation command, as shown in FIG. reference). Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 58-38(1), the effect control CPU 120 displays a right-handed display Im7 on the display screen of the image display device 5 (see step S624).

In addition, in this example, when a small hit is achieved in the variable display of the second special symbol, during the small winning game, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, Then, the right-handed lamp 132 is turned on by the CPU 103 (see step S2027B). Also, based on the reception of the right-handed lighting start designation command, as shown in FIG. 58-38 (2), the right-handed notification LED 37 is lit by the effect control CPU 120 (steps S2028B, S634). . However, unlike during the jackpot game, the right-handed display Im7 is not displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 58-38(2).

On the other hand, in this example, when a small hit is achieved in the variable display of the first special symbol, as shown in FIG. The notification LED 37 is not lit, and the display of the right hitting display Im7 on the display screen of the image display device 5 is also not performed.

(Effects of Second Embodiment, etc.)
As described above, according to the second embodiment, the first identification information (eg For example, the variable display of the first special symbol) can be executed, and the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) is based on the game medium entering the second start area (for example, the second start winning opening) ) can be executed. In addition, a variable means (for example, a special variable winning A ball device 17) is provided. In addition, after the variable display of either the first identification information or the second identification information is executed, an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player and a special state (for example, a special state that is less advantageous than the advantageous state) For example, it can be controlled to either a small winning game state), and the variable means is controlled to the first state when it is controlled to the special state. In addition, the first starting area is provided so that a game medium that moves along a predetermined path (for example, a left area of the game area) among the movement paths in which the game medium can move can enter, and the variable means is one of the movement paths. A game medium that moves along a specific path (for example, a right area of the game area) is provided so as to be able to enter. In addition, it is possible to execute specific notification (for example, right-handed notification shown in FIGS. 58-38 (1) and (2)) for promoting the shooting of game media to a specific path, and variable display of the first identification information is executed, the specific notification is not executed (see, for example, FIG. 58-38 (3)). Therefore, it is possible to make an appropriate notification about the acceleration of the shooting of game media.

Specifically, as shown in the second embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel, and the small hit type on the side of the first special symbol. is configured so that the winning ratio (advantage) to the special winning opening is lower than the small winning type on the second special symbol side, and when the small winning is achieved in the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, the second When the variable display of the special symbol is forcibly deviated and stopped, if the right hitting notification is executed for the small hit on the side of the first special symbol with a low winning ratio (advantage), it is practically In this case, the player hits the game ball in vain even though the player can hardly expect to win a prize in the special prize winning hole, and rather disadvantageous launch promotion notification is performed, which is not preferable. Therefore, in this example, while executing the right-handed notification for the small hit on the second special symbol side, by not executing the right-handed notification for the small hit on the first special symbol side. , it is possible to suppress the occurrence of disadvantages due to the player's wasteful hitting, and it is possible to realize appropriate notification.

Further, according to the second embodiment, the first reserved storage means (for example, the first reserved storage buffer) capable of storing the information regarding the variable display of the first identification information as reserved storage, and the variable display of the second identification information. A second pending storage means (eg, a second pending storage buffer) capable of storing information relating to the display as pending storage. Further, when a specific display result (for example, a jackpot pattern) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display of the first identification information or a display result of the variable display of the second identification information, an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) is entered. In addition to being controllable, when a special display result (for example, a small winning pattern) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display of the first identification information or a display result of the variable display of the second identification information, a special state (for example, Small hit game state) can be controlled. Further, it is possible to control to a special state (for example, KT state) in which the display result of the variable display of the second identification information increases the frequency of the special display result. Further, when the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed in parallel, based on the fact that the special display result is derived and displayed as the display result of one of the variable displays, As the display result of the other variable display, a predetermined display result (for example, a lost pattern) different from the specific display result and the special display result is derived and displayed. Therefore, the variable display can be forcibly ended, and the reserved memory can be consumed smoothly.

In addition, according to the second embodiment, it is possible to give a predetermined value when it is controlled to a special state (for example, 10 prize balls are paid out based on the winning of game balls into the special winning opening). , it is possible to give a value higher than a predetermined value when controlled in an advantageous state (for example, 15 prize balls are paid out based on the winning of game balls into the big winning opening). Further, as the specific notification, the first specific notification (for example, lighting of the right-handed lamp 132 and the right-handed notification LED 37 shown in FIGS. 58-38 (1) and (2)) and the visibility than the first specific notification 58-38(1) (for example, display of right-handed display Im7 shown in FIG. 58-38(1)). Also, when controlled to the advantageous state, the first specific notification and the second specific notification are executed (see FIG. 58-38 (1)), and after the variable display of the second identification information is executed, the special state is controlled. When it does, the first specific notification is executed and the second specific notification is not executed (see FIG. 58-38 (2)). Therefore, it is possible to realize the notification corresponding to the value that can be given.

Further, according to the second embodiment, it is possible to control to a plurality of types of special states (for example, small hits A to C). Further, when the control is performed to the special state after the variable display of the first identification information is performed, it is more advantageous than when the control is performed to the special state after the variable display of the second identification information is performed. It is controlled to a special state with a low degree (for example, a small hit A). Further, when the special state is controlled after the variable display of the second identification information is executed, the specific notification is executed (see FIGS. 58-38 (2) and (3)). Therefore, it is possible to realize appropriate notification in consideration of the player's advantage.

Further, according to the second embodiment, it is possible to execute a variable display effect (for example, variable display of decorative symbols) corresponding to at least the variable display of the first identification information. In addition, it is possible to execute a variable display effect in a common mode when it is controlled to a special state and when it is not controlled to a special state (for example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and a small hit is obtained , forcibly stop and display non-reach out-of-order symbols). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the player's recognizability of the control to the special state after the variable display of the first identification information is executed. In addition, it is possible to smoothly digest the reserved memory stored in the second reserved storage means.

Further, according to the second embodiment, a delay means for delaying the movement of the game medium (for example, a regulation piece provided in the variable winning ball device 6B) is provided on the upstream side of the variable means in the specific path. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the timing at which the control to the special state is executed after the variable display of the second identification information is executed in the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to strengthen the attack countermeasures against the gaming machine.

Note that the delay means is not limited to the mode shown in this example. For example, on the upstream side of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 provided on the right side of the game area, a passage member is provided as a delay means for moving the game ball so as to meander left and right. You may

In addition, according to the second embodiment, the game control means for controlling the progress of the game (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103)) and the production based on the information from the game control means It is provided with production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) that controls. In addition, the game control means controls execution of notification by notification means (for example, right-handed lamp 132) that performs predetermined notification. Moreover, the effect control means executes specific notification (for example, lighting of the right-handed notification LED 37) in response to notification by the notification means. Therefore, appropriate notification can be realized while reducing the processing load of the effect control means.

In this example, regardless of whether the variable display of the first special symbol is executed or the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the right hitting notification is executed during the big win game. Although a case is shown, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, a special variable winning ball device (left big winning hole) is provided on the left side of the game area, and a special variable winning ball device (right big winning hole) is also provided on the right side of the game area. When a big win is achieved by the variation display of the pattern, the left big prize winning port is opened during the big win game, and when a big win is achieved by the variation display of the second special pattern, the right big prize winning port is opened during the big win game. When applied to a gaming machine configured as above, when a big hit is achieved by the variable display of the second special symbol, while executing the right-handed notification during the big win game, the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. It may be configured not to execute the right hitting notification during the big winning game when the big winning is achieved. Further, in the case of such a configuration, when a big win is achieved in the variable display of the first special symbol, it may be constituted so as to execute left-handed information during the big win game. In other words, the specific notification executing means may be configured to execute the specific notification when the variable means (in this example, the right big winning hole) is controlled to be in an advantageous state of the type to be controlled. With such a configuration, when a big hit is achieved by the variable display of the first special symbol, the player is prevented from erroneously performing a right-handed operation by executing a left-handed notice during the big-hit game. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of disadvantages for the player.

In addition, in this example, since the variable winning ball device 6B (second start winning opening) is provided on the right side of the game area, the case where the right hitting notification is executed even during the KT state is shown, but such a case is shown. It is not limited to any form. For example, when applied to a gaming machine in which the second start winning opening is provided on the left side of the game area, it is configured not to execute the right-handed notification during the KT state, the high base state, or the time saving state. good too.

In addition, in this example, in addition to turning on the right hitting lamp 132 and the right hitting notification LED 37 only during the jackpot game, the right hitting indication Im7 is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 to execute the right hitting notification. Although a case is shown, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, even during the second KT state (during the small winning RUSH), when executing the first variation display after the end of the big winning game, in addition to the lighting of the right hitting lamp 132 and the right hitting notification LED 37 The display screen of the image display device 5 may be configured to display a right-hand hitting display Im7 to execute right-hand hitting notification. Alternatively, in this case, for example, in the ending period at the end of the jackpot game, in addition to lighting the right hitting lamp 132 and the right hitting notification LED 37, the right hitting display Im7 is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5. It may be configured to execute right hitting notification.

Further, in this example, the right-handed display displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 is not limited to the mode shown in this example. For example, in addition to the relatively large right-handed display Im7 as shown in FIG. By, you may comprise right-handed information so that it can be performed.

In addition, the way of small hit control is not limited to the mode shown in this example. For example, a plurality of special variable winning ball devices are provided, and the special variable winning ball devices (special winning openings) to be opened are different depending on the type of the small win, and the variable display of the first special symbol indicates the small win. It may be configured such that the selection ratio of the small hit type is different between when it becomes and when it becomes a small hit by the variable display of the second special symbol. In this case, when executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the small winning type released by the special variable winning ball device with a small number of winning balls (or the small winning type with a low winning rate) is likely to be selected. , when executing the variable display of the second special symbol, the small winning type opened by the special variable winning ball device with a large number of winning balls (or the small winning type of the open mode with a high winning rate) is likely to be selected. can be configured to

In addition, in this example, when a small hit occurs in the variation display of the second special symbol, right-handed notification is performed during the small winning game (see FIG. 58-38 (2)), and the variation display of the first special symbol is performed. In the case where a small hit occurs, the case where the right hitting notification is not performed during the small hit game (see FIG. 58-38 (3)) is shown, but when a small hit occurs in the fluctuation display of the second special symbol It may be configured so that there is a case where the right-handed information is not performed even in the case. For example, in a normal state and in a situation where a left-handed operation should be performed, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed and a small hit occurs, the right-handed information is not given during the small-hit game. You may

Further, according to the second embodiment, when a specific display result (for example, a jackpot pattern) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, control is performed to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player. It is possible. In addition, when a special display result (for example, a small winning pattern) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, it is possible to control to a special state (for example, a small winning game state) different from the advantageous state. is. In addition, the display result of the variable display is determined using the determination value for determining the display result of the variable display (for example, the determination value for determining the big hit and the determination value for determining the small hit). In addition, it is controllable to a non-specific state (eg, non-variable probability state) and a specific state (eg, variable probability state) that is more likely to be controlled to an advantageous state than the non-specific state. In addition, the determination value includes a specific determination value (for example, a determination value for judging a big hit) for determining to derive and display a specific display result as the display result of the variable display, and a special display result as the display result of the variable display. A special determination value (for example, a determination value for small hit determination) for determining to derive and display is included. In addition, it is possible to set any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values “1” to “6”) having different numbers of specific determination values. In addition, the number of special determination values is common regardless of the setting value, and is common when being controlled to a non-specific state and when being controlled to a specific state (FIGS. 58-2 and 58 -3). Therefore, appropriate playability can be realized.

Specifically, if the set values change the lottery probability and type distribution other than the jackpot winning probability, the difference in the degree of advantage (difference in ball output performance) depending on the set value will become too noticeable, and gambling will increase excessively. There is Therefore, in the second embodiment, by making the number of special determination values common regardless of the setting value (making the probability of winning a small hit common), it is possible to prevent the difference in the degree of advantage from becoming excessively large depending on the setting value. It prevents gambling from becoming excessively high.

Further, according to the second embodiment, the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information can be executed in parallel (for example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol display can be executed in parallel). In addition, it is possible to control to a special state (for example, KT state) in which the display result of the variable display of the second identification information increases the frequency of special display results (for example, small winning symbols). Therefore, in a game machine that can be controlled to a special state, it is possible to realize appropriate playability.

Further, according to the second embodiment, the special states are a first special state (eg, first KT state) and a second special state (eg, second KT state) having a higher advantage than the first special state. can be controlled to Therefore, in a game machine that can be controlled to the second special state, it is possible to realize appropriate playability.

Further, according to the second embodiment, it is possible to execute a special suggestive effect corresponding to the advantage of the special state (for example, a small hit RUSH continuation suggestive effect shown in FIGS. 58-37). Therefore, the interest in the game can be improved by suggesting the advantage of the special state.

Further, according to the second embodiment, as the display result of the variable display, there is a predetermined display result (for example, lost pattern) different from the specific display result (for example, big hit pattern) and the special display result (for example, small hit pattern). A setting value suggesting effect that suggests a setting value (eg, the setting value suggesting effect shown in FIGS. 58-35) can be executed when the derived display variable display is executed. Therefore, by executing the set value suggesting effect, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

In addition, in this example, the case where the small winning RUSH continuation suggestive effect and the set value suggestive effect are executed in the variation display of losing is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, it may be configured to execute a small winning RUSH continuation suggesting effect or a set value suggesting effect during a big winning game or a small winning game, and various modes are conceivable.

Further, according to the second embodiment, it is possible to control to a plurality of types of special states (for example, small hits A to C). In addition, the type of special state is determined using a special type determination value (for example, a small hit type determination value) for determining the type of special state. Also, the number of special type determination values is common regardless of the set value (see FIG. 58-5). Therefore, it is possible to realize more appropriate playability.

Specifically, in the second embodiment, by making the number of special type determination values common regardless of the set value (by making the distribution of small hit types common), the difference in the degree of advantage depending on the set value is excessive. It prevents the gambling property from becoming excessively high.

In addition, in this example, as shown in FIG. 58-5, regardless of the setting value "1" to "6", the allocation of the small hit type is the same, but such It is not limited to any form. For example, it may be configured such that the determination ratio of the small hit type is changed according to which one of the set values "1" to "6", so that the set value makes a difference in the degree of advantage.

Further, according to the second embodiment, it is possible to control a plurality of advantageous states (for example, 16R variable probability big hit, 9R probability variable big hit, 6R probability variable big hit, 6R probability variable big hit, 2R probability variable big hit, 2R normal big hit). Also, the type of the advantageous state is determined using the advantage type determination value (for example, the jackpot type determination value) for determining the type of the advantageous state. Also, the number of advantageous type determination values is common regardless of the set value (see FIG. 58-4). Therefore, it is possible to realize more appropriate playability.

Specifically, in the second embodiment, by making the number of advantageous type determination values common regardless of the set value (by making the jackpot type distribution common), the difference in the degree of advantage depending on the set value is excessive. It prevents it from becoming large and prevents gambling from becoming excessively high.

In addition, in this example, as shown in FIG. 58-4, regardless of whether the setting value "1" to "6", the allocation of the jackpot type is the same, but such It is not limited to modes. For example, it is also possible to vary the determination ratio of the jackpot type depending on which of the set values "1" to "6" is set, so that the set value makes a difference in the degree of advantage.

Further, according to the second embodiment, the variable display mode is determined using the variable display mode determination value (for example, the variation pattern determination value) for determining the variable display mode. Also, the number of variable display mode determination values is common regardless of the setting value (see FIG. 58-9). Therefore, it is possible to realize more appropriate playability.

Specifically, in the second embodiment, the number of variable display mode determination values is made common regardless of the set value (the distribution of variation patterns is made common), so that the difference in the degree of advantage depending on the set value is excessive. It prevents the gambling property from becoming excessively high.

In particular, if the selection ratio of the variation pattern differs depending on the set value, the period from one small win control to the next small win control will change, and even if the small win winning probability is common, it is advantageous in elements other than the big win lottery. The degree (difference in ball output performance) is greatly different, which is not preferable. I have to.

In addition, in this example, as shown in Figure 58-9, regardless of which of the setting values "1" to "6", the allocation of the fluctuation pattern is the same, but such It is not limited to modes. For example, by varying the determination ratio of the variation pattern according to which of the set values "1" to "6" and providing a difference in the variation time, the variation efficiency can be varied depending on the set value. It may be configured such that the degree of advantage differs depending on the value.

Further, according to the second embodiment, when a specific display result (for example, a jackpot pattern) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, control is performed to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player. It is possible. In addition, when a special display result (for example, a small winning pattern) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, it is possible to control to a special state (for example, a small winning game state) different from the advantageous state. is. In addition, the display result of the variable display is determined using the determination value for determining the display result of the variable display (for example, the determination value for determining the big hit and the determination value for determining the small hit). In addition, the determination value includes a specific determination value (for example, a determination value for judging a big hit) for determining to derive and display a specific display result as the display result of the variable display, and a special display result as the display result of the variable display. A special judgment value for determining to derive and display (for example, a judgment value for judging a small hit), and a predetermined display result different from the specific display result and the special display result as the display result of the variable display. and a predetermined judgment value (for example, a judgment value for discrepancy judgment). In addition, it is possible to set any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values “1” to “6”) having different numbers of specific determination values. Also, the number of special determination values is common regardless of the set values (see FIGS. 58-2 and 58-3). Also, the predetermined determination value is included in the determination values corresponding to all set values, and the number of predetermined determination values varies depending on the set values (see FIGS. 58-2 and 58-3). Therefore, it is possible to increase the difficulty of estimating the setting value and improve the interest in the game.

Further, according to the second embodiment, it is possible to control to a non-specific state (eg, non-variable probability state) and a specific state (eg, variable probability state) that is more likely to be controlled to an advantageous state than the non-specific state. Also, the predetermined judgment value is included in judgment values corresponding to specific states of all set values (see FIGS. 58-2 and 58-3). Therefore, it is possible to increase the difficulty of estimating the set value during the specific state.

Further, according to the second embodiment, the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information can be executed in parallel (for example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be executed in parallel with the variable display of Further, the number of special determination values corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information is greater than the number of special determination values corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information, and the variable display of the second identification information during the specific state The corresponding decision values include predetermined decision values (see FIGS. 58-2 and 58-3). Therefore, it is possible to increase the difficulty of estimating the setting value using the display result of the variable display of the second identification information during the specific state.

Further, according to the second embodiment, it is possible to control to a special state (for example, KT state) in which the display result of the variable display of the second identification information increases the frequency of the special display result. Also, when a variable display is executed in which a predetermined display result (for example, a lost pattern) is derived and displayed by being controlled to a special state, a setting value suggestion effect (for example, the setting shown in FIGS. 58-35) is executed. value suggestion performance) can be executed. Therefore, by executing the set value suggesting effect, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

Further, according to the second embodiment, it is possible to variably display the first identification information (eg, first special symbol) and variably display the second identification information (eg, second special symbol). Further, when a specific display result (for example, a big win pattern) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, it is possible to control to an advantageous state (for example, a big win game state) advantageous to the player. In addition, when a special display result (for example, a small winning pattern) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, it is possible to control to a special state (for example, a small winning game state) different from the advantageous state. is. In addition, the display result of the variable display is determined using the determination value for determining the display result of the variable display (for example, the determination value for determining the big hit and the determination value for determining the small hit). In addition, the determination value includes a specific determination value (for example, a determination value for judging a big hit) for determining to derive and display a specific display result as the display result of the variable display, and a special display result as the display result of the variable display. A special determination value (for example, a determination value for small hit determination) for determining to derive and display is included. In addition, it is possible to set any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values “1” to “6”) having different numbers of specific determination values. In addition, the number of special determination values among the determination values corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information is common regardless of the set value (see FIG. 58-3), and the determination corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information The number of special determination values differs between the value and the determination value corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information (see FIGS. 58-2 and 58-3). Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the monotony of the game while realizing an appropriate playability.

(Pachinko machine production example A)
Next, Examples 1 to 4 as an effect example A executed in the pachinko game machine 1 having a setting function capable of setting the set values described in the first embodiment or the second embodiment. explain. In effect embodiment A (embodiments 1 to 4), setting suggestions that suggest setting values are given priority and executed.

(Example 1)
First, the effect control process executed to realize the setting suggestion effect in the first embodiment of the effect embodiment A will be described.

FIG. 59-1 is a flow chart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variation start command reception flag is set (step S271). If the first fluctuation start command reception flag is set (step S271; Y), the buffer number "1-0" ~ "1- 4” are shifted upward by one buffer number (step S272). It should be noted that the contents of buffer number "1-0" cannot be shifted because there is no place to shift them, so they are erased.

Specifically, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-1" of the first special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-0" Then, the various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2" of the first special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-1", Various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-3" of the 1 special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2", and the first special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "1-4" of the reserved storage are shifted so as to be associated with the buffer numbers "1-3" and stored.

If the first fluctuation start command reception flag is not set in step S271 (step S271; N), it is determined whether or not the second fluctuation start command reception flag is set (step S273). If the second fluctuation start command reception flag is not set (step S273; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated, and if the second fluctuation start command reception flag is set (step S273; Y) , Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure reservation storage in the start winning command buffer (not shown) It is shifted upward by one (step S274). It should be noted that the contents of the buffer number "2-0" are erased because they cannot be shifted because there is no place to shift them.

Specifically, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-1" of the second special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-0" Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-2" of the second special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-1", Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-3" of the 2 special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-2", and the second special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-4" of the reserved storage are shifted so as to be associated with the buffer number "2-3" and stored.

After executing step S272 or step S274, the effect control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (step S275).

Next, the display result (stop design) of the decorative design is determined according to the data stored in the display result designating command storage area (that is, the received display result designating command) (step S276). In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines the stop pattern of the decorative pattern corresponding to the display result specified by the display result specifying command, and stores the data indicating the stop pattern of the determined decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display result storage area. do.

In addition, in the first embodiment, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to the non-probable variable jackpot A, the effect control CPU 120, for example, determines that 3 symbols are even numbers as the stop symbols. A combination of decoration patterns (jackpot pattern) is determined. Further, when the received variable display result designation command is the third variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variable jackpot B, a plurality of combinations of odd-numbered symbols other than "7" (for example, "111", (combination of decorative patterns such as "333", "555", "999"). Further, when the received variable display result specifying command is the fourth variable display result specifying command corresponding to the probability variable jackpot C, a combination of decoration patterns (jackpot pattern) in which the three patterns are "7" as the stop pattern. decide. Further, when the received variable display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command corresponding to the variable probability big hit C, the stop symbols are "334" and "778" which are the same chance numbers as the small hit. decide from within. In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command corresponding to the small hit, the stop symbols are "334" and "778" which are the same chance numbers as the probability variable big hit C. decide from within. Further, when the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command corresponding to the loss, the decorative symbols in which the three symbols are not aligned as the stop symbols are combinations other than the above-described chance symbols. (losing pattern) is determined.

In determining these stop symbols, the effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, random numbers for determining the stop symbols, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating combinations of decorative symbols and numerical values are associated with each other. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol may be determined. That is, the stop symbol may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to a numerical value matching the extracted random number.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect determining process shown in FIG. 59-2, and determines whether or not to execute the variable display effect in the variable display (step S277).

(Effect during variable display)
The effect during the variable display includes, as a result of effect, an advantageous state suggestion result that suggests control to the jackpot game state, a setting suggestion result that suggests the setting of the set value performed by the CPU 103 in the set value change process, It is an effect (predetermined effect) that can be either. In the first embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a ready-to-win notice (pre-announcement effect) that suggests the possibility of a big hit when the variable display mode becomes a ready-to-win, as an effect in which the effect results indicate an advantageous state. . Further, as an effect in which the effect result is a setting suggestion result, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion that suggests which of the setting values 1 to 6 the setting value is. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in which both the ready-to-win notice and the setting suggestion can be executed when the effect result can be either the advantageous state suggesting result or the setting suggesting result. When possible, it is possible to give priority to the ready-to-reach notice in which the performance result is the advantageous state suggestion result over the setting suggestion in which the performance result is the setting suggestion result.

As shown in FIG. 59-3, the effect during variable display has a plurality of types of effect patterns (effect modes) of patterns PT-1 to PT-9. When the execution is determined, which of the patterns PT-1 to PT-9 is the basis of which the variable display effect is to be executed, that is, which of the patterns PT-1 to PT-9 is the effect mode. It is determined by lottery whether or not to execute the effect during variable display based on.

As shown in FIGS. 59-5 (A) to (C), the effect during variable display starts at the timing when a predetermined period has passed after the start of the variable display of the pattern (timing before the variable display mode becomes ready-to-win). Then, a plurality of (e.g., eight) images Z1 showing the paraglider on which the passenger is riding fade in from the left side of the display area of the image display device 5 and move toward the right side of the display area, The effect during variable display ends by fading out to the right side of the display area. In addition, while the plurality of images Z1 are moving toward the right side, an image Z2 may be displayed showing that a predetermined number of gliders are destroyed and dropped. Or reach is suggested.

Specifically, in the case of pattern PT-1, one body breaks and falls, in the case of pattern PT-2, two bodies break and fall, and in the case of pattern PT-3, three bodies break and fall. In the case of pattern PT-4, 4 bodies will break and fall, in the case of pattern PT-5, 5 bodies will break and fall, and in the case of pattern PT-6, 6 bodies will break and fall. , in the case of pattern PT-7, 7 bodies are destroyed and fall, and in the case of patterns PT-8 and PT-9, 8 bodies are destroyed and dropped.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 59-5(B) and 59-6(A), the patterns PT-1 to PT-8 all have the same timing at which the paraglider is destroyed, and each pattern PT-1 to A number of paragliders corresponding to PT-8 are destroyed all at once (or a predetermined number of them may be fine). On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 59-6(B), pattern PT-9 is a pattern in which a total of eight paragliders fall like pattern PT-8. 8 is different. Specifically, 7 paragliders are destroyed at the same timing as pattern PT-7, but the remaining 1 body is destroyed at the 2nd timing after the 1st timing when the other 7 bodies are destroyed. .

The production period of such a variable display production is executed based on which of the patterns PT-1 to PT-9, that is, the ready-to-reach notice in which the production result is an advantageous state suggestion result or the production result is a set suggestion result Regardless of which of the setting suggestions is to become and a non-common mode effect that can specify whether the effect result is an advantageous state suggestion result or a setting suggestion result (for example, the number of images Z2 corresponding to the effect pattern is displayed on the image display device 5, and a non-common effect period during which the effect of moving downward in the display area of No. 5) is executed.

In addition, in the background where the images Z1 and Z2 are displayed as an effect during the variable display, the decorative patterns are variably displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R, but the decorative patterns are displayed in a smaller size than usual. Small symbols may be variably displayed at predetermined locations. Also, during the execution period of the effect during variable display, another notice effect or the like different from the effect during variable display may be executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 59-3, among the patterns PT-1 to PT-9, the set value is 1 for the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 in which the number of paragliders destroyed is 1 to 7. For patterns PT-8 and PT-9, which are specific patterns (specific modes) corresponding to the setting suggestion that suggests which one of ~ 6, and the number of paragliders destroyed is 8, It is a special pattern (special mode) corresponding to a reach notice that suggests the possibility of becoming a reach. In other words, during the variable display effect, the effect mode in the common effect period is the same, but the suggested target differs depending on the difference in the effect mode (the number of paragliders to be destroyed) in the non-common effect period, and 1 to 7 paragliders are displayed. If it is destroyed, it will be a setting suggestion, and if 8 bodies are destroyed, it will be a reach notice.

Specifically, patterns PT-1 and PT-3 suggest the possibility that the set values are odd numbers (eg, 1, 3, 5), and patterns PT-2 and PT-4 suggest that the set values are even numbers. (eg, 2, 4, 6). 6 suggests that the setting value may be an even intermediate setting or higher (e.g., 4 or 6), and pattern PT-7 suggests that the setting value may be the highest setting (e.g., 6). .

Patterns PT-1 to PT-4 are determined at a high rate when the set value is any one of 1 to 4 (low setting), so that any of set values 5 and 6 (high setting) is determined. The first specific pattern {setting suggestion (low), first specific mode} with a low expectation that the The second specific pattern {setting suggestion (high);

In the first embodiment, setting values 1 to 4 are set low and setting values 5 and 6 are high, but setting values 1 to 3 may be low and setting values 4 to 6 may be high. , the setting values 1 and 2 may be set to low, the setting values 3 and 4 to intermediate settings, and the setting values 5 and 6 to high settings, and the performance pattern execution ratio may be set.

On the other hand, pattern PT-8 suggests that the variable display of the pattern may be more than reach (for example, normal reach or super reach), and pattern PT-9 suggests the possibility that the variable display of the pattern will be super reach. Suggest.

Regarding pattern PT-8, the first special pattern with low expectation of super reach by being determined at a high rate when the variable display mode of the pattern is normal reach {reach notice (low), first specific aspect}, and for pattern PT-9, the second special pattern {reach advance notice (high), second special mode}.

In this way, the effect control CPU 120 is a special mode (for example, patterns PT-8 and PT-9) that suggests control to the jackpot gaming state and a specific mode (for example, pattern PT-9) that suggests settings. 1 to PT-7) can be executed during variable display based on one of a plurality of types of presentation modes, and a reach notice (predetermined special mode presentation) based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 If setting suggestion (predetermined effect of a specific aspect) based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7 can be executed, ready-to-win notice can be executed with priority over setting suggestion.

In the first embodiment, pattern PT-8 and pattern PT-9 are determined when the variation pattern is normal reach or super reach regardless of whether the variable display result is a big hit or not. Since the variation pattern is determined at a higher rate when the variable display result is a loss than when the result is a big hit, the pattern PT-8 is a super reach, that is, the degree of expectation for a big hit is the pattern. While it is a lower pattern than PT-9, the super reach variation pattern is determined at a higher rate when the variable display result is a big hit than when it is a loss, so the pattern PT-9 is , Super Reach, that is, a pattern with a higher expectation for a big hit than the pattern PT-8.

In addition, in the present embodiment 1, in the effect during the variable display, the number of paragliders destroyed indicates the possibility of a big hit or which set value is set. It is not limited to this, and a big hit or high setting may be suggested by the appearance of a predetermined number (e.g., eight) or more paragliders without destroying the paragliders. Furthermore, if it is possible to suggest the possibility of a big hit and to suggest which setting value is set, the production mode can be changed in various ways, such as the number of appearances of characters, the type of characters that appear, etc. It may be possible to suggest a big hit or a set value by means of.

In addition, in the setting suggestion (high) based on any of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 and the reach notice (high) based on pattern PT-9, the last paraglider among the numbers corresponding to each pattern is destroyed. By outputting a specific sound or illuminating the game effect lamp 9 or the like when falling, it may be possible to notify that a big hit or a pattern with a high degree of expectation is set.

As shown in FIG. 59-2, in the variable display effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first identifies the variable display result and the variation pattern (step S291). The variable display result is a variable display result designation command for designating the variable display result (loss, non-probability variable big win A, probability variable big win B, probability variable big win C, small win) transmitted from the main board 11 at the start of the variable display. can be specified by the variable display result designation command stored in the variable display result designation command storage area for storing the . Further, the variation pattern can be specified by the variation pattern designation command stored in the variation pattern designation command storage area, as described above.

Then, along with extracting the random number for determining the reach notice type determination, using the production (reach notice) type determination table A shown in FIG. A lottery is conducted to determine the type of ready-to-win announcement in the case of doing so (step S292).

In the production (reach notice) type determination table A shown in FIG. , and 60 decision values are assigned to pattern PT-9. In other words, when the variation pattern is super reach, PT-9 is won at a higher rate than when the variation pattern is other than super reach.

When the variation pattern is normal reach, 20 judgment values are assigned to non-execution, 60 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-8, and 20 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-9. there is In other words, when the variation pattern is normal reach, PT-8 is won at a higher rate than when the variation pattern is other than normal reach.

Also, when the variation pattern is a non-reach or small hit variation pattern, 100 determination values are assigned to non-execution, and no determination value is assigned to patterns PT-8 and PT-9. That is, if the variation pattern is a non-reach or small hit variation pattern, the reach notice is not won.

By setting the judgment value in this way, when the variation pattern is normal reach, the pattern PT-8 is likely to win at a higher rate than when the variation pattern is normal reach, and when the variation pattern is super reach, The pattern PT-9 is more likely to be won at a higher rate than the cases other than the super reach fluctuation pattern.

Therefore, when the production based on the pattern PT-8 appears, it is more likely to be a normal reach fluctuation pattern than the super reach fluctuation pattern, and when the production based on the pattern PT-9 appears, it is super than the normal reach fluctuation pattern. It is highly likely that it is a reach fluctuation pattern. In other words, the pattern PT-8 is determined to be a reach fluctuation pattern, but there is a high possibility that it will be a normal reach, so it is a reach notice (low) with a low jackpot expectation, and the pattern PT-9 is a super reach fluctuation pattern. Because there is a high possibility that it will be, it is a pattern of reach notice (high) with high expectations for big hits.

Returning to FIG. 59-2, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is won as a result of performing a lottery for the presence or absence of the reach notice and the type in step S292. Determine (step S293). When it is determined that the pattern PT-9 has been won, the execution of the reach announcement based on the pattern PT-9 is determined with priority over the setting suggestions based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 (step S294). , the process proceeds to step S304.

If it is determined in step S292 that the pattern PT-9 is not won, that is, if the reach notice is not executed or if the pattern PT-8 is won, the reach notice is not executed or the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low )} is won, the setting values stored in the RAM 102 are read out to specify the current setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1 (step S295). Next, a setting suggestion type determination random number is extracted, and at the same time, using the effect (setting suggestion) type determination table B corresponding to the setting value specified in step S295, whether or not setting suggestion is executed in the effect during variable display is determined. , and the type of setting suggestion to be executed (step S296).

In the effect (setting suggestion) type determination table B shown in FIG. 59-4(B), when the setting value is 1, 30 judgment values are assigned to non-execution, and 25 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-1. , 10 decision values are assigned to pattern PT-2, 25 decision values are assigned to pattern PT-3, 5 decision values are assigned to pattern PT-4, and pattern Four decision values are assigned to PT-5, one decision value is assigned to pattern PT-6, and one decision value is not assigned to pattern PT-7. When the set value is 2, 30 determination values are assigned to non-execution, 10 determination values are assigned to pattern PT-1, 25 determination values are assigned to pattern PT-2, Five judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-3, 25 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-4, one judgment value is assigned to pattern PT-5, and four judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-6. A decision value is assigned, and no decision value is assigned to pattern PT-7. When the set value is 3, 30 determination values are assigned to non-execution, 20 determination values are assigned to pattern PT-1, 5 determination values are assigned to pattern PT-2, 20 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-3, 5 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-4, 15 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-5, and 5 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-6. A decision value is assigned, and no decision value is assigned to pattern PT-7. When the set value is 4, 30 determination values are assigned to non-execution, 5 determination values are assigned to pattern PT-1, 20 determination values are assigned to pattern PT-2, 5 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-3, 20 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-4, 5 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-5, and 15 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-6. A decision value is assigned, and no decision value is assigned to pattern PT-7. When the set value is 5, 30 determination values are assigned to non-execution, 5 determination values are assigned to pattern PT-1, 10 determination values are assigned to pattern PT-2, 5 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-3, 10 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-4, 25 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-5, and 15 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-6. A decision value is assigned, and no decision value is assigned to pattern PT-7. When the set value is 6, 30 determination values are assigned to non-execution, 10 determination values are assigned to pattern PT-1, 5 determination values are assigned to pattern PT-2, 10 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-3, 5 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-4, 10 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-5, and 25 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-6. Determination values are assigned, and five determination values are assigned to pattern PT-7.

By setting the judgment value in this way, when the set value is an odd number of 1 or 3, patterns PT-1 and PT-3 are won at a higher rate than when the set value is other than 1 or 3. If the set value is an even number 2 or 4, patterns PT-2 and PT-4 are likely to be won at a higher rate than when the set value is other than 2 or 4, and if the set value is 5 , pattern PT-5 is likely to win at a higher rate than when the set value is other than 5, and when the set value is 6, pattern PT-6 wins at a higher rate than when the set value is other than 6. It's getting easier. In addition, since the pattern PT-7 may be won only when the set value is 6, the set value of 6 is confirmed when a setting suggestion based on the pattern PT-7 appears.

Therefore, if the pattern PT-1 to PT-4 where the number of paragliders destroyed is 4 or less is likely to appear, there is a high possibility that the setting value is one of 1 to 4, and the paraglider will be destroyed. If an effect based on patterns PT-5 to PT-7 in which the number of characters displayed is 5 or more is likely to appear, there is a high possibility that the set value is either 5 or 6. In other words, patterns PT-1 to PT-4 are set as high setting (setting value 5 or 6) with a low possibility of setting suggestion (low), and patterns PT-5 to PT-7 are high setting (setting value 5 or 6). 6) is set as a setting suggestion (high) with a high possibility.

In the first embodiment, the random number for determining the reach announcement type and the random number for determining the setting suggestion type are random numbers in the range of 1 to 100, and any value in the range of 1 to 100 is extracted. That is, the number of determination values of each determination random number is 100 in the range of 1 to 100, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the range of each determination random number may be determined as appropriate. Just do it. In addition, each determination random number counter for generating these determination random numbers is set in the RAM 122, and each determination random number counter is updated for each timer interrupt in random number update processing.

Returning to FIG. 59-2, the effect control CPU 120 performs the lottery for the presence or absence of the setting suggestion and the type in step S296. has won (step S297). If it is determined that any one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 has been won, and if non-execution of reach announcement is won in step S293, any of the winning patterns PT-5 to PT-7 univocally determines the execution of the setting suggestion (high) based on, and when the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is won in step S293, the winning patterns PT-5 to PT-7 Execution of the setting suggestion (high) based on any of them is determined with priority over reach notice (low) based on the pattern PT-8 (step S298), and the process proceeds to step S304.

In step S297, if any of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {suggestion to set (high)} was not won, that is, if the suggestion to set was not executed or any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 was won is based on the non-execution of the setting suggestion or the winning of any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 in step S297, whether or not the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is winning in step S293 (step S300).

If it is determined in step S300 that the pattern PT-8 {ready notice (low)} has been won, if non-execution of setting suggestion is won in step S297, reach notice (low) based on pattern PT-8 If any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} is won in step S297, reach notice based on the winning pattern PT-8 ( (Low) is determined with priority over the setting suggestions (Low) based on the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 (step S301), and the process proceeds to step S304.

If it is determined in step S300 that the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} has not been won, whether any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} has been won is determined (step S302), and if any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 is won, execution of the setting suggestion (low) based on the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 is determined, and the process proceeds to step S304. move on. Also, if none of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 have been won, that is, if the non-execution of both the reach notice and the setting suggestion is won, the variable display is being performed without determining the execution of the variable display effect. Terminate the effect determination process.

In step S304, the effect type (any of patterns PT-1 to PT-9) determined in any one of steps S294, S298, S301, and S303 is stored in a predetermined area of RAM 122 (step S304), A variable-display effect execution determination flag indicating that execution of the variable-display effect has been determined is set (step S305), and the variable-display effect determination process is terminated.

Returning to FIG. 59-1, after the effect determination process during variable display in step S277, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the effect execution determination flag during variable display is set in step S278, that is, the variable display in step S277. It is determined whether execution of any one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-9 during variable display is determined in the middle effect determination process.

When the variable-display effect execution determination flag is set, the process proceeds to step S279, and sets a period until the start of the variable-display effect start in the variable-display effect start waiting timer (step S279). The effect execution determination flag is cleared (step S280), and the process proceeds to step S281. On the other hand, when the effect execution determination flag during variable display is not set, the process proceeds to step S281 without going through steps S279 and S280.

As for the period until the start of the effect during variable display, in the first embodiment, the timing at which the paraglider appears is the start timing of the effect during variable display. Since the effect during variable display is specified based on and is set to start the effect during variable display, the period until the start timing of effect during variable display is set to the timer for waiting to start the effect during variable display. The present invention is not limited to this. When the start timing is set, a period shorter than the period until the effect during variable display is started may be set in the variable display effect start waiting timer.

In step S281, the effect control CPU 120 selects the effect control pattern (process table) corresponding to the variation pattern designation command. Then, the process timer in process data 1 of the selected process table is started (step S282).

The process table contains display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling lighting of each LED, and control data for controlling sounds output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound control execution data, operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and stick controller 31A, etc. are arranged in chronological order in association with each process data n (numbers 1 to N). there is

Next, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device (image display as a component for effect) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The device 5, various lamps as performance parts, speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) are controlled (step S283). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image corresponding to the variation pattern on the image display device 5 . It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 in order to control lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. Also, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In addition, in the present embodiment 1, the effect control CPU120 controls to perform the variable display of the decoration pattern by the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern designation command one-to-one, but the effect control CPU120 is the variation pattern A variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of variation patterns corresponding to the designated command.

Then, a variable display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variation pattern designation command (step S284). Also, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (step S285). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the effect control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the left, middle, and right decorative patterns to the VRAM every time the predetermined time elapses, and the display control unit 123 writes to the VRAM. A signal corresponding to the obtained image data is output to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby realizing variable display (fluctuation) of the decoration pattern. Next, the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S172) (step S286).

Thus, in the present embodiment 1, the effect control CPU 120, when executing the variable display of the symbols based on the reach variation pattern, after the start of the variable display before the variable display mode becomes the reach mode At performance timing, it is possible to execute either a reach notice or a setting suggestion as a performance during variable display, and when determining whether or not to execute the performance during variable display, the performance result is the result of suggesting an advantageous state. It is possible to execute the (special mode effect) with priority over the setting suggestion (specific mode effect) in which the effect result is the setting suggestion result.

Specifically, as shown in the effect determination process during variable display in FIG. take precedence over

That is, the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution of the reach notice (high) based on the pattern PT-9 at a rate of 60% when the variation pattern is super reach in the reach notice lottery (step S294), Reach notice (high) will be executed (prioritized) at a higher rate than setting suggestions. On the other hand, if the fluctuation pattern is normal reach, the execution of reach notice (high) based on pattern PT-9 is determined only at a rate of 20%, but reach notice (low) based on pattern PT-8 is 60%. Therefore, even if the setting suggestion lottery is executed in step S296 based on the reach announcement (low) winning, the setting suggestion based on patterns PT-5 to PT-7 is performed in step S297. If (high) is not won, it will be decided to execute reach notice (low) based on pattern PT-8 in step S301, so reach notice is executed at a higher rate than setting suggestions (priority) will do.

In addition, the reach notice includes reach notice (low) and reach notice (high) that suggests that the ratio of control to a big hit is higher than the reach notice (low), and the effect control CPU 120 has a pattern PT -9 and the setting suggestions based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 are executable, the reach prediction (high) based on the pattern PT-9 is set to the pattern PT- 1 to PT-7 (step S294). On the other hand, when both the reach notice (low) based on the pattern PT-8 and the setting suggestion based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 can be executed, any of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 setting suggestion (high) based on pattern PT-8 can be given priority over reach notice (low) based on pattern PT-8 (step S298). By doing so, it is possible to prevent the decrease in interest caused by the effect during the variable display due to excessive priority given to the advance notice and the restriction on the execution of the setting suggestion.

In addition, the setting suggestion includes a setting suggestion (low) and a setting suggestion (high) that suggests that the setting suggestion (low) is likely to be higher than the setting suggestion (low). -When both setting suggestion (high) based on any of -5 to PT-7 and reach notice based on any of patterns PT-8 to PT-9 are executable, patterns PT-5 to PT-7 The setting suggestion (high) based on the pattern PT-8 is given priority over the reach notice (low) based on the pattern PT-8 (step S298). On the other hand, when both the setting suggestion (low) based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 and the reach notice based on any of the patterns PT-8 to PT-9 can be executed, the pattern PT-8 It is possible to give priority to setting suggestions (low) based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 (step S301). Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest due to the effect during the variable display due to excessive priority given to the setting suggestion and the restriction on the execution of the ready-to-win announcement.

In this way, the effect control CPU 120 executes the reach notice with priority over the setting suggestion. For more information, Reach Warning High precedes Setting Suggestion High, Setting Reach Warning High precedes Reach Warning Low, and Reach Warning Low precedes Setting Suggestion ( low). That is, the priority of execution of each effect pattern is set to have a relationship of "prediction of reach (high)>suggestion of setting (high)>prediction of reach (low)>suggestion of setting (low)".

In the first embodiment, it is sufficient that the execution ratio of the ready-to-win announcement is set to be higher than the execution ratio of the setting suggestion. That is, the effect during variable display is a effect executed during the variable display period of the pattern, and the ready-to-reach notice suggests the possibility that the variable display result will be a big hit, whereas the setting suggestion is at least It suggests which set value is not changed during the operating period. In addition, it is not preferable for the game arcade that setting suggestions are frequently made and the player can easily guess what the set value is. Therefore, in the super reach fluctuation pattern and when the variable display effect is executed when the set value is high, it is preferable for the player to suggest either, but the set value may be suggested at another timing. However, since the suggestion of a big win can be made only during the variable display, it is preferable for the player that the ready-to-win notice appears at a higher rate than the set suggestion.

In addition, since the variable display production is a production that is executed only during the variable display period of the pattern based on the super reach fluctuation pattern or the normal reach fluctuation pattern, which has a higher expectation for big hits than the non-reach fluctuation pattern, the variable display mode is a reach. In this case, the player's expectation for the big win is higher than in the case where the reach is not achieved. Therefore, if the setting suggestion is executed with priority over the reach notice, particularly in the case of the jackpot reach fluctuation pattern, the player's expectation for the jackpot will decrease, and the production will become inappropriate. It is possible to prevent the presentation from becoming inappropriate by executing the notice with priority over the setting suggestion.

In addition, in the first embodiment, as a tendency of the effect during variable display, if the reach notice is executed with priority over the setting suggestion, for example, it is a non-reach or normal reach fluctuation pattern and a high In some circumstances, such as setting, the execution rate may be set such that the setting suggestion is executed with priority over the reach announcement.

In addition, in the first embodiment, the lottery for the reach notice and the lottery for the setting suggestion are executed separately, and the lottery for the reach notice is preferentially executed (before) the lottery for the setting suggestion. Although it was exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and if the execution ratio of the ready-to-win announcement becomes higher than the execution ratio of the setting suggestion, the setting suggestion lottery may be performed prior to the ready-to-reach announcement lottery. , the order is arbitrary. In addition, if the number of determination values in the effect type determination tables A and B is set so that the execution ratio of the reach notice is higher than the execution ratio of the setting suggestion, It is not limited to what is described.

In addition, in the present embodiment 1, as an effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display, a setting suggestion that suggests a setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is exemplified, but the present invention. is not limited to this, and the setting suggestion may indicate whether or not the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 has changed since the pachinko game machine 1 was started last time.

In the first embodiment, the case where both the ready-to-reach notice (predetermined effect of the special mode) and the setting suggestion (predetermined effect of the specific mode) are executable means, for example, the suggestion about the display result of one variable display. Any timing may be used as long as it is the timing at which the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be suggested. Specifically, if the reach notice suggests the display result of the variable display, the reach notice can be executed at any timing during the execution period of the variable display, and the variable display corresponding to the pending memory If the display result is suggested, the reach notice can be executed at any timing during the period over a plurality of variable displays until the variable display corresponding to the reserved storage is executed and during the execution period of the variable display. . In addition, since the setting suggestion is not changed during the business period, the setting suggestion can be executed at any timing during one business period.

In addition, when both reach notice (predetermined effect of special mode) and setting suggestion (predetermined effect of specific mode) can be executed, reach notice can be executed with priority over setting suggestion. The lottery is executed with priority over the lottery of the setting suggestion, and the execution of the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or PT-9 is preceded by the execution of the setting suggestion based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 and executing reach announcements based on patterns PT-8 and PT-9 at a higher rate than setting suggestions based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7. It should be noted that executing the reach notice at a higher rate than the setting suggestion includes executing the reach notice at a rate of 100% and not executing the setting suggestion, that is, the execution rate of the reach notice is 100%.

Further, in the first embodiment, the number of destroyed paragliders suggests the possibility of a big hit or a set value, that is, the variable display effect that is executed when both the reach notice and the setting suggestion are executable. , the effect result is either an advantageous state suggestion result or a setting suggestion result, but the present invention is not limited to this, and both the reach notice and the setting suggestion are executed when both can be executed. Both the advantageous state suggesting result and the setting suggesting result may be included as the effect during variable display.

That is, in the first embodiment, the effect during variable display has a common common effect period between the reach notice and the setting suggestion, but the reach notice and the setting suggestion have different production modes (the common effect period It does not have a corresponding period) may be a separate production (specifically, the reach announcement is a suggestion using a character, the setting suggestion is a suggestion by a paraglider, etc.). Then, even when the ready-to-win announcement and the setting suggestion with different presentation modes are executed together in the same period (at the same timing), the ready-to-win announcement may be executed with priority over the setting suggestion.

(Modification 1 of Embodiment 1)
Next, Modified Example 1 in Example 1 of Effect Example A will be described with reference to FIG. 59-7. 59-7, (A) is a flow chart showing the processing for determining effect during variable display as Modified Example 1, and (B) is a diagram showing execution ratios of ready-to-win notice and setting suggestion.

In the first embodiment, the lottery for whether or not to execute the reach notice and the type is given priority over the lottery for whether or not to execute the setting suggestion and the type, so that the reach notice is executed with priority over the setting suggestion. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and lottery for ready-to-win notice and setting suggestion may be performed using one effect type determination table C (not shown).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 59-7(A), in the variable display effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first identifies the variable display result and the variation pattern (step S311). Next, a random number for determining the effect type is extracted, and whether or not the effect during variable display (prediction of reach/suggestion of setting) is executed using a table C (not shown) for determining the type of effect (notice of reach/suggestion of setting), A lottery is conducted to determine the type of reach notice or setting suggestion to be executed (step S312).

Although not shown, the effect (prediction of reach/suggestion of setting) type determination table C (not shown) sets the determination ratio of the effect patterns PT-1 to PT-9 according to the type of variation pattern and the number of set values. ing. That is, the determination ratio of the production patterns PT-1 to PT-9 varies depending on the type of variation pattern and the setting values 1 to 6, but the execution ratio of reach notice and setting suggestion shown in FIG. 59-7 (B) As shown in the trend chart, as a whole, the reach notice is determined (prioritized) at a higher rate than the setting suggestion. (eg, 50% reach notice, 40% setting suggestion, and 10% non-execution are determined).

Also, for example, if the fluctuation pattern is super reach, reach notice (high) is higher than reach notice (low) (for example, reach notice (high) 40%, reach notice (low) 10%) is preferably determined by Also, if the setting values are high setting values 5 and 6, the ratio of setting suggestion (high) to setting suggestion (low) is higher than setting suggestion (high) (for example, setting suggestion (high) is 35%, setting suggestion (low) is 5 %). In other words, the effect control CPU 120 is the ratio of reach notice (high) > setting suggestion (high) > reach notice (low) > setting suggestion (low) of the effect based on any of the patterns PT1 to PT-9 Decide to execute.

Further, in the first embodiment and modified example 1, the execution ratio of reach notice and setting suggestion is exemplified based on the variation pattern and setting value, but the present invention is not limited to this, Depending on the variation pattern, the set value, and the result of the variable display, the execution ratio of the reach notice and the setting suggestion may be different. In detail, regardless of whether the variation pattern is a super reach or a normal reach variation pattern, when a big hit occurs, the reach notice is given priority over the setting suggestion at a higher rate than when the loss occurs. is preferred.

Further, in the first embodiment and the modified example 1, when both the advantageous state suggestion result and the setting suggestion result can be executed as the effect result, either the ready-to-reach notice or the setting suggestion is executed as the effect during the variable display. Although the possible forms have been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and when both the advantageous state suggestion result and the setting suggestion result can be executed as the effect result, the effect result of the effect during variable display is It is also possible to make it possible to execute a specific effect that is a specific result that is both an advantageous state suggestion result and a setting suggestion result.

As the specific effect, for example, a specific image suggesting both the big win and the highest setting (set value 6) (for example, as shown in FIG. 59-5, when the paraglider image Z1 is displayed, the character (e.g., displaying an image in which a paraglider appears), or displaying an image in which the display mode of the paraglider (e.g., color, size, movement speed, trajectory, etc.) is different from the normal mode. may be displayed, the background color may be changed, or an effect image may be displayed. Alternatively, a special effect sound may be output in accordance with the image display of the paraglider, or a light emitting body may emit light in a special light emission mode.

Further, in the first embodiment and the modified example 1, when the effect result is either the advantageous state suggestion result or the setting suggestion result, that is, either the reach notice or the setting suggestion can be executed as the effect during the variable display. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and while it is possible to execute either the reach notice or the setting suggestion in the variable display effect, the reach notice and the setting suggestion can be made variable. Each of them may be independently executable at a performance timing different from the presentation during display.

Specifically, for example, a ready-to-reach notice in a manner different from the ready-to-reach notice shown in FIG. On the other hand, setting suggestions in a manner different from the setting suggestions shown in FIG. It may be executable.

(Example 2)
In Example 1 of Effect Example A, a form was exemplified in which the effect during variable display can be executed only once during one variable display, but the present invention is not limited to this, and during one variable display. It is also possible to make it possible to execute the effect during variable display multiple times.

For example, as shown in FIG. 59-8(A) as the second embodiment, the first period is between the start timing of the variable display and the start timing of the reach effect of the normal reach for the variation pattern of the normal reach and the super reach. Effect during variable display can be executed in a second period after the first period.

Since the variable display time for the non-reach and small hit variation patterns is short to execute the variable display effect two or more times, in the second embodiment, the variation pattern of the normal reach and the super reach is the target of the variable display effect. However, non-reach and small hit variation patterns may be included as targets for execution of effects during variable display.

In addition, in the second embodiment, in the above-described effect determination processing during variable display, whether or not to execute effect during variable display is determined according to the variation pattern using the effect execution determination table during variable display shown in FIG. determined by different percentages. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 59-8(B), when the variation pattern is the normal reach, the variable-display effect execution determination table stores 40 out of 100 variable-display effect execution determination random numbers. are assigned to the execution of the effect during variable display, and 60 are assigned to non-execution of the effect during variable display. Further, when the variation pattern is super reach, 60 of the 100 variable-display effect execution determination random numbers are assigned to the execution of the variable-display effect execution in the variable-display effect execution determination table. are assigned to non-execution of effects during variable display.

It should be noted that, in the second embodiment, when execution of the effect during variable display is determined, the effect during variable display is executed in both the first period and the second period shown in FIG. 59-8(A).

When the execution of the effect during variable display is determined when the variation pattern is normal reach or super reach, as shown in FIGS. Execution of setting suggestion and ready-to-reach notice is determined at different ratios between the effect during variable display and the effect during variable display executed during the second period. In the same period, regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the execution ratio of the setting suggestion and the ready-to-win notice is set to be the same.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 59-10, when the execution of the effect during variable display is determined when the variation pattern is normal reach, the effect type during variable display (effect pattern) is determined to be one of patterns PT-1 to PT-7 (setting suggestion (low) or setting suggestion (high)) at a rate of 60% regardless of the setting value set in pachinko machine 1. , pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 (expectation (low) or expectation (high)) at a rate of 40%. In addition, as shown in FIG. 59-11, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the second period is patterned at a rate of 40% regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1. PT-1 to PT-7 (setting suggestion (low) or setting suggestion (high)) was determined, and pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 (expectation (low) or expectation) at a rate of 60% (high)).

Here, as shown in FIGS. 59-10 and 59-11, focusing on the case where the variation pattern is normal reach, when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, in the first period The effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed is determined to be one of patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 59%, and pattern PT- at a rate of 1% 5 to PT-7 {Suggestion setting (high)}, 35% decided pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)}, 5% pattern PT-9 {reach advance notice (high)}. In addition, the production type (production pattern) of the production during variable display to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 38%, and 2%. Determined to be one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 55%, decided to pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 5% Pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined.

When the set value set in the pachinko machine 1 is 2, the effect type (effect pattern) during the variable display to be executed in the first period is set to patterns PT-1 to PT at a rate of 58.8%. -4 determined to be one of {setting suggestion (low)}, 1.2% determined to be one of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)}, 35% The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 5%. Also, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 37.8%, 2.2% decided to pattern PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)}, 55% decided to pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)}, 5 % to determine the pattern PT-9 {reach advance notice (high)}.

When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the effect type (effect pattern) during the variable display to be executed in the first period is set to patterns PT-1 to PT at a rate of 58.5%. -4 determined to be one of {setting suggestion (low)}, at a rate of 1.5% decided to be one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)}, at a rate of 35% The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 5%. Also, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 37.5%, At a rate of 2.5%, one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 is determined {setting suggestion (high)}, and at a rate of 55%, the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined, and 5 % to determine the pattern PT-9 {reach advance notice (high)}.

When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 4, the effect type (effect pattern) during the variable display to be executed in the first period is set to patterns PT-1 to PT-4 at a rate of 58%. Determined to be one of {setting suggestion (low)}, 2% of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 determined to be {setting suggestion (high)}, 35% of pattern PT-8 {Reach advance notice (low)} is decided, and pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 5%. In addition, the production type (production pattern) of the production during variable display to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 37%, and 3%. Determined to be one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 55%, decided to pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 5% Pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined.

When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 5, the effect type (effect pattern) during the variable display to be executed in the first period is set to patterns PT-1 to PT at a rate of 56.5%. -4 determined to be one of {setting suggestion (low)}, 3.5% determined to be one of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)}, 35% The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 5%. Also, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 35.5%, At a rate of 4.5%, one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined, and at a rate of 55%, the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined, and 5 % to determine the pattern PT-9 {reach advance notice (high)}.

When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 6, the effect type (effect pattern) during the variable display to be executed in the first period is set to patterns PT-1 to PT-4 at a rate of 55%. One of {setting suggestion (low)} is determined, 5% of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 are determined to be {setting suggestion (high)}, and 35% of pattern PT-8 {Reach advance notice (low)} is decided, and pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 5%. In addition, the production type (production pattern) of the production during variable display to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 34%, and 6%. Determined to be one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 55%, decided to pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 5% Pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 59-12 and 59-13, when the variation pattern is super reach, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, it is executed in the first period. The production type (production pattern) of the production during variable display is determined to be one of patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 59%, and pattern PT-5 at a rate of 1%. ~ PT-7 decided to {setting suggestion (high)}, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 15%, pattern PT-9 {reach notice at a rate of 25% (high)}. In addition, the production type (production pattern) of the production during variable display to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 38%, and 2%. Determined to be one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 5%, decided to pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 55% Pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined.

When the set value set in the pachinko machine 1 is 2, the effect type (effect pattern) during the variable display to be executed in the first period is set to patterns PT-1 to PT at a rate of 58.8%. -4 determined to be one of {setting suggestion (low)}, at a rate of 1.2% decided to be one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)}, at a rate of 15% Pattern PT-8 {reach advance notice (low)} is decided, and pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 25%. Also, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 37.8%, 2.2% determined to be one of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)}, 5% determined to pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)}, 55 % to determine the pattern PT-9 {reach advance notice (high)}.

When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the effect type (effect pattern) during the variable display to be executed in the first period is set to patterns PT-1 to PT at a rate of 58.5%. -4 decided to {setting suggestion (low)}, at a rate of 1.5% decided to one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)}, at a rate of 15% Pattern PT-8 {reach advance notice (low)} is decided, and pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 25%. Also, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 37.5%, At a rate of 2.5%, one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 is determined {setting suggestion (high)}, and at a rate of 5%, the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined, and 55 % to determine the pattern PT-9 {reach advance notice (high)}.

When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 4, the effect type (effect pattern) during the variable display to be executed in the first period is set to patterns PT-1 to PT-4 at a rate of 58%. Determined as one of {setting suggestion (low)}, 2% of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 determined as {setting suggestion (high)}, 15% of pattern PT-8 {Reach advance notice (low)} is decided, and pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 25%. In addition, the production type (production pattern) of the production during variable display to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 37%, and 3%. Determined to be one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 5%, decided to pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 55% Pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined.

When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 5, the effect type (effect pattern) during the variable display to be executed in the first period is set to patterns PT-1 to PT at a rate of 56.5%. -4 determined to be one of {setting suggestion (low)}, 3.5% determined to be one of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)}, 15% Pattern PT-8 {reach advance notice (low)} is decided, and pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 25%. Also, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 35.5%, At a rate of 4.5%, one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined, and at a rate of 5%, the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined, and 55 % to determine the pattern PT-9 {reach advance notice (high)}.

When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 6, the effect type (effect pattern) during the variable display to be executed in the first period is set to patterns PT-1 to PT-4 at a rate of 55%. One of {setting suggestion (low)} is determined, 5% of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 are determined to be {setting suggestion (high)}, and 15% of pattern PT-8 {Reach advance notice (low)} is decided, and pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 25%. In addition, the production type (production pattern) of the production during variable display to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 34%, and 6%. Determined to be one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 5%, decided to pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 55% Pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined.

As described above, in the second embodiment, when execution of the effect during variable display is determined, pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 {reach The rate (60%) at which the execution of notice (low) or reach notice (high)} is determined is pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 {reach It is set higher than the percentage (40%) at which execution of advance notice (low) or reach advance notice (high)} is determined.

Therefore, as the effect during variable display is repeatedly executed, it becomes easier to execute the ready-to-reach notice, which is a result of suggesting an advantageous state. It is possible to heighten expectations for a big hit.

In particular, as shown in FIGS. 59-10 to 59-13, for the effect type of the effect during variable display executed in the first period, one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (low) Or setting suggestion (high)} is set higher than the rate at which pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 {reach notice (low) or reach notice (high)} is determined Then, regarding the effect type of the variable display effect executed in the second period, the pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 {reach notice (low) or reach notice (high)} is determined to be executed. Any one of PT-1 to PT-7 {suggestion to set (low) or suggestion to set (high)} is set higher than the determined rate.

That is, the patterns PT-8 and PT-9 corresponding to the reach announcement are determined at a higher rate in the second period than in the first period, and the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 corresponding to the setting suggestion are determined in the second period. By being determined at a lower rate than the first period in the period, the setting suggestion is executed at a higher rate than the reach notice in the first period, and the reach notice is executed at a higher rate than the setting suggestion in the second period. .

For this reason, for example, after the reach notice (high) is executed as the effect during the variable display in the first period, the reach notice (low) is executed as the effect during the variable display in the second period, that is, during the variable display As the effect is repeatedly executed, the reach notice is executed so that the expectation of the reach notice is lowered (so-called downfall), or the reach notice (high) is executed at the first time, so that the variable display Since the player can predict that there is a high possibility that the variable display will be super reachable before the reach notice is executed twice, the player's expectation for the variable display being super reachable is reduced. It is designed so that it can be suppressed.

Further, in the second embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 59-10 to 59-13, the effect during variable display executed in the second period is more favorable than the effect during variable display executed in the first period. However, the rate at which any one of pattern PT-5 to pattern PT-8 {suggestion of setting (high)} is determined as the effect type is set high. That is, as the effect during variable display is executed, the effect during variable display is more likely to be executed in pattern PT-9, so the game for the effect during variable display being executed in pattern PT-5 to pattern PT-8. It can sustain people's expectations.

In the second embodiment, when execution of the effect during variable display is determined, the effect during variable display is executed twice in the first period and the second period, but the present invention is this. However, when it is decided to execute the effect during variable display, the effect during variable display may be executed three times or more. In the case where the effect during variable display is executed three times or more in this way, by setting the determination ratio of the effect type so that the pattern PT-9 is likely to be determined each time the effect during variable display is executed, It may be possible to maintain the technician's sense of expectation for a longer period of time.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 59-10 to 59-13, the effect during variable display executed in the first period and the effect during variable display executed in the second period have pattern PT- as the effect type. 1 to PT-7 {Suggestion of setting (low) or suggestion of setting (high)} are determined at different rates, so the effect during variable display executed in the first period and the effect during the second period are executed. It is difficult for setting suggestions to be executed continuously during the variable display effect. In other words, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest in the game due to monotony of the effect during variable display due to execution of setting suggestions in both of these two effects during variable display.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 59-10 to 59-13, the effect during variable display executed in the first period and the effect during variable display executed in the second period have pattern PT- as the effect type. 8 and PT-9 {reach notice (low) or reach notice (high)} are determined differently, so the variable display effect executed in the first period and the second period are executed It is difficult to continuously execute the reach notice with the effect during variable display. In other words, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to monotony of the effect during the variable display due to execution of the ready-to-win announcement in both of these two effects during the variable display.

Further, in the second embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 59-10 to 59-13, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the first period and the variable display effect in the second period. In the case of executing, the form in which the rate at which the ready-to-win notice is executed as the effect during the variable display is different has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect control CPU 120 is controlled in the first period In the case of executing the effect during variable display and the case of executing the effect during variable display in the second period, the rate at which the ready-to-win announcement is executed as the effect during variable display may be the same. By doing so, when the effect during the variable display is executed in the first period and the second period, the ready-to-reach notice is executed as the effect during the variable display in the first period and the second period. , the player can be expected in the same way.

In addition, in the second embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 59-10 to 59-13, regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, if the variable display in advance notice effect is executed in the same period Although the rate at which the reach notice is determined to be executed is the same as the effect during variable display, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the notice effect during variable display executed during the same period , the rate at which the execution of the ready-to-win notice is determined as the effect during variable display may differ according to the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁By doing so, according to the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the rate at which the ready-to-win notice is executed as the effect during the variable display changes in the first period and the second period, so that the variable display It is possible to prevent the middle production from becoming monotonous.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment 2, as shown in FIGS. 59-9 to 59-13, focusing on the effect during variable display executed in the first period, the ratio of determining the execution of the setting suggestion (pattern PT-1 to Regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the rate of determining the execution of any pattern PT-7) is set to 60%, which is the same rate, and the rate of determining the reach notice (pattern PT-8 or pattern PT9 execution ratio) is set to 40%, which is the same ratio regardless of the set value set in the pachinko game machine. Similarly, focusing on the effect during variable display executed in the second period, the ratio of determining the execution of the setting suggestion (the ratio of determining the execution of any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7) It is set to 40%, which is the same ratio regardless of the set value, and the ratio that determines the reach notice (the ratio that determines the execution of pattern PT-8 or pattern PT9) is set in the pachinko machine. It is set to 60%, which is the same ratio regardless of the set value.

Therefore, even if the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 1 to 6, the effect during variable display executed during the first period (the effect during variable display for the first time) always Setting suggestions are executed at a rate of 60% and reach notices are executed at a rate of 40%, and the variable display effect executed in the second period (second variable display effect) is always set at a rate of 40%. Since the suggestion is executed and the ready-to-win announcement is executed at a rate of 60%, the player can be made to expect the execution of the setting suggestion in the same way.

In addition, in the second embodiment, since the effect during variable display can be executed a plurality of times in one variable display, there are more opportunities to provide reach notices and setting suggestions in one variable display, which improves interest. .

More specifically, when only the reach notice can be executed independently in relation to the display result of one variable display, the setting suggestion is performed at a timing other than during the variable display (for example, the ending of the jackpot game state or the variable display However, when the player is playing the game, it is during the execution period of the variable display that the player pays the most attention. Therefore, in the effect during variable display in which both the reach notice and the setting suggestion can be executed, it is possible not only to execute the setting suggestion during the execution period of the variable display that the player pays the most attention to, but also as in the second embodiment. As described above, by enabling the effect during variable display to be executed a plurality of times in one variable display, it is possible to not only increase the chances of executing setting suggestions, but also to increase the chances of executing setting suggestions. If it is executed at a rate higher than , it is possible to execute the setting suggestion and the ready-to-win announcement in a well-balanced manner without hindering the execution of the ready-to-win announcement even in the variation pattern of the big win.

In addition, in the second embodiment, when it is decided to execute the effect during variable display, either the reach notice or the setting suggestion is executed in both the first period and the second period. The invention is not limited to this, and non-execution of neither the reach notice nor the setting suggestion may be determined in at least one of the first period and the second period.

In the case where non-execution can be determined in this way, even if the execution ratio of the setting suggestion is set to be the same in the first period and the second period, the execution ratio of the reach notice must be different between the first period and the second period. can let Further, even if the execution ratio of the reach announcement is set to be the same between the first period and the second period, the execution ratio of the setting suggestion can be made different between the first period and the second period.

(Example 3)
In the second embodiment of the performance embodiment A, the performance during variable display can be executed twice during one variable display, and if the performance during variable display is the same number of times, the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 Regardless, the form which determines the execution of the reach notice and the execution of the setting suggestion at the same ratio is exemplified. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIGS. In the case of making it possible to execute times, the execution of the reach notice and the execution of the setting suggestion are determined at different ratios according to the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 even if the same number of variable display performances are performed. You may

Incidentally, when execution of the effect during variable display is determined, as shown in FIGS. Execution of the setting suggestion and the reach notice is determined at the same ratio with the effect during the variable display executed in .

Here, as shown in FIGS. 59-15 and 59-16, focusing on the case where the variation pattern is normal reach, if the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, in the first period The production type (production pattern) of the production during variable display to be executed is determined as pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 64%, and pattern PT5 to pattern PT at a rate of 1%. -8 {Suggestion of setting (high)}, 30% decided to pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)}, 5% to pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} decide. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the second period is determined at a rate of 63% to pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)}, and a rate of 2%. Determined as pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)}, 30% determined pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)}, 5% determined pattern PT-9 {reach advance notice (high)}.

When the setting value set in the pachinko machine 1 is 2, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the first period is pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-1 at a rate of 58.8%. Determined to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)}, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 1.2%, pattern PT-8 {reach at a rate of 35% advance notice (low)}, and pattern PT-9 {reach advance notice (high)} at a rate of 5%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the second period is determined to pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 57.8%; Pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 2%, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 35%, pattern PT at a rate of 5% -9 {reach notice (high)} is determined.

When the setting value set in the pachinko machine 1 is 3, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the first period is set to pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-1 at a rate of 53.5%. PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} was determined, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was determined at a rate of 1.5%, pattern PT-8 {reach advance notice (low)}, and pattern PT-9 {reach advance notice (high)} at a rate of 5%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the second period is determined to pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 52.5%; Pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 5%, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 40%, pattern PT at a rate of 5% -9 {reach notice (high)} is determined.

When the setting value set in the pachinko machine 1 is 4, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the first period is changed from pattern PT-1 to pattern PT- at a rate of 48%. 4 {Suggestion of setting (low)}, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {suggestion of setting (high)} at a rate of 2%, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low) at a rate of 45% }, and the pattern PT-9 {reach advance notice (high)} at a rate of 5%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the second period is determined at a rate of 47% to pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)}, and a rate of 3%. decided to pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)}, decided to pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 45%, and pattern PT-9 {reach at a rate of 5% advance notice (high)}.

When the setting value set in the pachinko machine 1 is 5, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-1 at a rate of 41.5%. PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} was determined, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was determined at a rate of 3.5%, pattern PT-8 {reach advance notice (low)}, and pattern PT-9 {reach advance notice (high)} at a rate of 5%. 4. Effect types (effect patterns) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the second period are determined as pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {suggestion of setting (low)} at a rate of 41.5%; Pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 5%, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 50%, pattern PT at a rate of 5% -9 {reach notice (high)} is determined.

When the setting value set in the pachinko machine 1 is 6, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the first period is set to pattern PT-1 to pattern PT- at a rate of 35%. 4 {Suggestion of setting (low)}, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {suggestion of setting (high)} at a rate of 5%, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low) at a rate of 55% }, and the pattern PT-9 {reach advance notice (high)} at a rate of 5%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the second period is determined to pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 34%, and a rate of 6%. decided to pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)}, decided to pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 55%, and pattern PT-9 {reach at a rate of 5% advance notice (high)}.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 59-17 and 59-18, when paying attention to the case where the variation pattern is super reach, when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, in the first period The effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed is determined to be one of pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 64%, and pattern PT5 at a rate of 1%. ~ Pattern PT-8 {Suggestion of setting (high)} is determined, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 17.5%, pattern PT at a rate of 17.5% -9 {reach notice (high)} is determined. Also, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 63%; At a rate of 5%, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined at a rate of 5%, and at a rate of 30% Pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined.

When the setting value set in the pachinko machine 1 is 2, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the first period is pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-1 at a rate of 58.8%. PT-4 {Suggestion to set (low)}, 1.2% of the pattern PT-5 to PT-8 {Suggestion of setting (high)}, 20% Pattern PT-8 {reach advance notice (low)} is decided, and pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 20%. Also, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 57.8%. , Pattern PT5 ~ Pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 2.2%, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 5%, 35 % to determine the pattern PT-9 {reach advance notice (high)}.

When the setting value set in the pachinko machine 1 is 3, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the first period is set to pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-1 at a rate of 53.5%. PT-4 {Suggestion to set (Low)}, and 1.5% of patterns PT5 to PT-8 {Suggestion to set (High)}, 22.5% Pattern PT-8 {reach advance notice (low)} is decided at a rate of 22.5%, and pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 22.5%. Also, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 52.5%. , Pattern PT5 ~ pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} determined at a rate of 2.5%, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} determined at a rate of 5%, 40 % to determine the pattern PT-9 {reach advance notice (high)}.

When the setting value set in the pachinko machine 1 is 4, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the first period is changed from pattern PT-1 to pattern PT- at a rate of 48%. 4 {Suggestion of setting (low)}, 2% determined to be one of pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {suggestion of setting (high)}, 25% of pattern PT-8 {Reach advance notice (low)} is decided, and pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 25%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 47%; At a rate of 5%, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined at a rate of 5%, and at a rate of 45% Pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined.

When the setting value set in the pachinko machine 1 is 5, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-1 at a rate of 41.5%. PT-4 {Suggestion to set (Low)}, 3.5% decided to pattern PT5 to PT-8 {Suggestion to set (High)}, 27.5% At a rate of 27.5%, pattern PT-8 {reach advance notice (low)} is decided, and pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 27.5%. Also, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 40.5%. , Pattern PT5 ~ pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} determined at a rate of 4.5%, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} determined at a rate of 5%, 50 % to determine the pattern PT-9 {reach advance notice (high)}.

When the setting value set in the pachinko machine 1 is 6, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the first period is changed from pattern PT-1 to pattern PT- at a rate of 35%. 4 {Suggestion of setting (low)}, 5% of patterns PT5 to PT-8 {Suggestion of setting (high)}, 30% of pattern PT-8 {Reach advance notice (low)} is decided, and pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 30%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 34%; At a rate of 5%, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined at a rate of 5%, and at a rate of 55% Pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined.

As described above, in the third embodiment, when execution of the effect during variable display is determined, the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any of 1 to 6, during the first period Patterns PT-1 to PT-7 {suggestion of set value (low) or suggestion of setting (high)} are determined as the effect type of the effect during the variable display executed in the second period and the variable display executed in the second period. The rate at which patterns PT-1 to PT-7 {set value suggestion (low) or setting suggestion (high)} are determined as the effect type of the medium effect is set to be the same. Therefore, regardless of whether the setting suggestion is executed in the first period or the second period, the player can expect the setting suggestion result in the same way.

In addition, the rate at which pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 {reach notice (low) or reach notice (high)} is determined as the effect type of the effect during variable display executed in the first period and in the second period The rate at which pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 {reach notice (low) or reach notice (high)} is determined is set to be the same as the effect type of the effect during variable display that is executed in response. Therefore, regardless of whether the ready-to-win announcement is executed in the first period or the second period, the player can expect the advantageous state suggestion result in the same way.

On the other hand, when the effect during variable display is executed in the first period or the second period, the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is the first setting value (for example, setting value 1) and the second setting value. The rate at which patterns PT-1 to PT-7 {suggestion of setting value (low) or suggestion of setting value (high)} are determined as the effect type differs depending on when the setting value (for example, setting value 6) is set. , 1st setting value or 2nd setting value, the setting suggestion appearance situation in the first period or the second period changes, so that the performance during variable display can be suppressed from being monotonous.

In addition, in the variable display effect executed in the first period and the variable display effect executed in the second period, a pattern is used as the effect type each time the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 increases. The ratio of PT-1 to PT-7 {set value suggestion (low) or set value suggestion (high)} is reduced, pattern PT-8 and pattern PT-9 {reach notice (low) and reach notice ( high)} is determined. Therefore, when the pachinko game machine 1 is set with high setting values (for example, 5, 6), the setting suggestions are higher than when the pachinko game machine 1 is set with low setting values (for example, 1 to 4). is difficult to execute, it is difficult for a player who recognizes the effect during variable display to specify the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加

Further, as in the second embodiment, in the third embodiment as well, the pattern PT-9 is used as the effect type for the during-variable-display effect executed in the second period rather than the during-variable-display effect executed in the first period. The rate at which {suggestion of setting (high)} is determined is set high. In other words, as the effect during variable display is repeatedly executed, it becomes easier to execute the ready-to-reach notice based on the pattern PT-9, so that the player's expectation for the effect during the variable display being executed in the pattern PT-9 is maintained. can be made

In addition, in the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 59-14, even if the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any of 1 to 6, during the variable display executed in the first period The rate at which patterns PT-1 to PT-7 {set value suggestion (low) or set value suggestion (high)} are determined is the same between the effect and the effect during variable display executed in the second period, Pattern PT-8 and pattern PT-9 {reach notice (low) and reach notice (high)} are determined in the same form, but the present invention is not limited to this. , even if the set values set in the pachinko game machine 1 are the same, the pattern PT-1 is obtained between the effect during variable display executed in the first period and the effect during variable display executed in the second period. ~ PT-7 {Set value suggestion (low) or set value suggestion (high)} may be different, pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 {reach notice (low) or reach notice (high)} may be determined differently.

In the third embodiment, the effects during variable display are the same when the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in the first period and the effect during variable display in the second period. Although the mode of executing the setting suggestion is exemplified by the ratio, the present invention is not limited to this. The setting suggestion may be executed at a different rate as the effect during the variable display depending on whether the effect during the variable display is executed. By doing so, the ratio (appearance rate) at which setting suggestions are executed changes between when the effect during variable display is executed in the first period and when the effect during variable display is executed in the second period. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the effect from becoming monotonous during variable display.

In addition, in the present embodiment 3, as shown in FIG. 59-14, the effect during variable display performed by the effect control CPU 120 during the first period (the effect during variable display for the first time) and the variable display performed during the second period When the ready-to-win announcement is executed as a middle effect (second variable display-in-time effect), a form of executing the ready-to-win announcement at a different rate according to the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is exemplified in the same number of times. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When the reach notice is executed as (second variable display effect), the reach notice is given at the same rate regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 if the same number of variable display effect is performed. may be executed. By doing so, if the performance during variable display is the same number of times, the rate at which the ready-to-win notice is executed (appearance situation) does not change according to the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1. , the player can be made to expect the execution of the ready-to-win notice without change between the performance during variable display executed in the first period and the performance during variable display executed in the second period.

(Example 4)
In Example 2 and Example 3 of Example A, it is possible to execute the effect during variable display twice during one variable display. Although the form of determining which one of the reach notice and the setting suggestion is executed based on the fluctuation pattern and the setting value in each has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and for the first period, the fluctuation pattern irrespective of whether to execute reach notice or setting suggestion based on the set value, while for the second period, execute any reach notice or setting suggestion based on the fluctuation pattern and the set value In other words, it may be determined whether the effect to be executed in the first period or the second period is executed according to different criteria.

For example, as shown in FIGS. 59-19 as a fourth embodiment, the first period and the first period between the start timing of the variable display and the start timing of the normal reach effect are targeted for the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach and the super reach. A performance during variable display can be executed in a second period after one period. Since the variable display time for non-reach and small hit variation patterns is short to execute the effect during variable display two or more times, in the fourth embodiment, the variation patterns of normal reach and super reach are the targets for execution of the effect during variable display. is limited to

In addition, in the fourth embodiment, in the above-described variable display effect determination process, if the variation pattern is normal reach or super reach, the type of variable display effect is determined based on the set value for the first period, For the second period, a process of determining the type of effect during variable display is executed based on the variation pattern. 59-20, the processing for determining effect during variable display in the fourth embodiment will be described below.

As shown in FIG. 59-20, in the effect determination process during variable display, the effect control CPU 120 first identifies a variation pattern (step S311). The variation pattern can be specified by the variation pattern designation command stored in the variation pattern designation command storage area, as described above. Next, it is determined whether the specified variation pattern is normal reach or super reach (step S312), and in the case of normal reach or super reach, the process proceeds to 313, and if it is other than normal reach or super reach, that is, non-reach or small hit variation pattern In the case of , the processing for determining the effect during variable display is terminated because it is not subject to the effect during variable display.

If the variation pattern is normal reach or super reach in step S312, the setting values stored in the RAM 102 are read to specify the current setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (step S313). Next, based on the setting value specified in step S313, whether or not to execute the effect during variable display in the first period and the effect type (effect pattern) in the case of execution are determined in a variable display effect execution determination table (not shown). (common to normal reach and super reach) is used for determination (step S314).

As shown in FIG. 59-21 (A), in step S314, the effect control CPU 120 uses a variable display effect execution determination table common to normal reach or super reach for the variation pattern, and uses reach notice, setting suggestion, non Decide on one of the runs. Specifically, when the set value is 1, the effect control CPU 120 determines execution of reach notice (low) at a rate of 40%, determines setting suggestion at a rate of 40%, and non-execution at a rate of 10%. Decide on a percentage. Further, in the case of the setting value 6, execution of the reach notice (low) is determined at a rate of 40%, setting suggestion is determined at a rate of 55%, and non-execution is determined at a rate of 5%. Although the execution ratio corresponding to the setting values 2 to 5 is omitted here, the reach notice is determined by a common execution ratio regardless of the setting value 1 to 6, and the setting suggestion is set It is set such that the larger the value, the higher the setting suggestion execution ratio and the setting suggestion (high) execution ratio.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 59-22, focusing on the variable display effect type determination ratio in the first period, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the first period The production type (production pattern) of the production during variable display to be executed at the rate of 20% is decided to be non-execution, and the ratio of 39% is decided to be pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)}. Then, patterns PT5 to PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} are determined at a rate of 1%, and pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined at a rate of 40%.

40. When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the type of effect (effect pattern) during the variable display to be executed in the first period is determined to be non-execution at a rate of 18%; Patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestions (low)} are determined at a rate of 8%, patterns PT5 to PT-8 {setting suggestions (high)} are determined at a rate of 1.2%, The pattern PT-8 {reach advance notice (low)} is determined at a rate of 40%.

43. When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the type of effect (effect pattern) during the variable display to be executed in the first period is determined to be non-execution at a rate of 15%; Patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestions (low)} are determined at a rate of 5%, patterns PT5 to PT-8 {setting suggestions (high)} are determined at a rate of 1.5%, The pattern PT-8 {reach advance notice (low)} is determined at a rate of 40%.

When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 4, the type of effect (effect pattern) during the variable display to be executed in the first period is determined to be non-execution at a rate of 12.5%, Patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {suggestion of setting (low)} are determined at a rate of 45.5%, patterns PT5 to PT-8 {suggestion of setting (high)} are determined at a rate of 2%, The pattern PT-8 {reach advance notice (low)} is determined at a rate of 40%.

45. When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 5, the type of effect (effect pattern) during the variable display to be executed in the first period is determined to be non-execution at a rate of 10%; Patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestions (low)} are determined at a rate of 5%, patterns PT5 to PT-8 {setting suggestions (high)} are determined at a rate of 3.5%, At a rate of 40%, the pattern PT-8 {reach advance notice (low)} is determined.

When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 6, the effect type (effect pattern) during the variable display to be executed in the first period is determined to be non-execution at a rate of 5%, and 50%. pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 5%, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 40% determines the pattern PT-8 {reach advance notice (low)}.

Returning to FIG. 59-20, in step S314, it is determined whether or not execution of the effect during variable display in the first period is determined (step S315). If execution is determined, the determined effect type (pattern PT-1 to PT-9) is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (step S316), and a variable display effect execution determination flag indicating that the execution of the variable display effect in the first period is determined is set ( Step S317), and proceeds to step S318. If execution is not determined in step S315, that is, if non-execution is determined, the process proceeds to step S318.

Next, in step S318, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variation pattern is normal reach (step S318), and if it is determined as normal reach, based on the specified variation pattern and set value, Whether or not to execute the effect during variable display in the second period and the type of effect (effect pattern) to be executed in the second period are determined using an effect execution determination table during variable display (for normal reach) (not shown) (step S319).

As shown in FIG. 59-21(B), in step S319, the effect control CPU 120 uses the effect execution determination table during variable display for normal reach, and determines any of reach notice, setting suggestion, and non-execution. . Specifically, in the case of the set value 1, the effect control CPU 120 determines execution of the reach notice (low) at a rate of 60%, determines setting suggestion at a rate of 35%, and non-execution at a rate of 5%. Decide on a percentage. Further, in the case of the setting value 6, execution of the reach notice (low) is determined at a rate of 60%, setting suggestion is determined at a rate of 35%, and non-execution is determined at a rate of 5%. Although the execution ratio corresponding to the setting values 2 to 5 is omitted here, the reach notice and setting suggestion are determined by a common execution ratio regardless of the setting value 1 to 6, and the setting suggestion ( High) is set so that the higher the set value, the higher the execution ratio.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 59-23, focusing on the case of normal reach for the determination ratio of the notice effect type during variable display in the second period, when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1 determines that the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the first period is not executed at a rate of 5%, and pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion ( Decided to pattern PT5 ~ pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 2%, decided to pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 55%, At a rate of 5%, the pattern PT-9 {reach advance notice (high)} is determined.

32. When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the first period is determined to be non-execution at a rate of 5%; Patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestions (low)} are determined at a rate of 8%, patterns PT5 to PT-8 {setting suggestions (high)} are determined at a rate of 2.2%, The pattern PT-8 {reach advance notice (low)} is determined at a rate of 55%, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined at a rate of 5%.

32. When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the type of effect (effect pattern) during the variable display to be executed in the first period is determined to be non-execution at a rate of 5%; Patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestions (low)} are determined at a rate of 5%, patterns PT5 to PT-8 {setting suggestions (high)} are determined at a rate of 2.5%, The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined at a rate of 55%, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined at a rate of 5%.

When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 4, the effect type (effect pattern) during the variable display to be executed in the first period is determined to be non-execution at a rate of 5%, and 32%. pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 3%, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 55% , the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined at a rate of 5%.

30. When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 5, the type of effect (effect pattern) during the variable display to be executed in the first period is determined to be non-execution at a rate of 5%; Patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestions (low)} are determined at a rate of 5%, patterns PT5 to PT-8 {setting suggestions (high)} are determined at a rate of 4.5%, The pattern PT-8 {reach advance notice (low)} is determined at a rate of 55%, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined at a rate of 5%.

When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 6, the effect type (effect pattern) during the variable display to be executed in the first period is determined to be non-execution at a rate of 5%, and 29%. pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 6%, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 55% , the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined at a rate of 5%.

Further, when it is determined in step S318 that the variation pattern is not normal reach, that is, super reach, based on the specified variation pattern and the set value, whether or not the effect during variable display is executed in the second period, The effect type (effect pattern) to be executed is determined using a variable display effect execution determination table (for super ready-to-win) (not shown) (step S320).

As shown in FIG. 59-21(C), in step S320, the effect control CPU 120 uses the effect execution determination table during variable display for super reach, and determines any of reach notice, setting suggestion, or non-execution. do. Specifically, in the case of the set value 1 and the set value 6, the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution of the reach notice (low) at a rate of 60%, determines the setting suggestion at a rate of 40%, and does not execute do not decide Although the execution ratio corresponding to the setting values 2 to 5 is omitted here, the reach notice and setting suggestion are determined by a common execution ratio regardless of the setting value 1 to 6, and the setting suggestion ( High) is set so that the higher the set value, the higher the execution ratio.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 59-23, focusing on the case of super ready-to-win with respect to the determination ratio of the notice effect type during variable display in the second period, the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1. In the case, the production type (production pattern) of the production during the variable display to be executed in the first period is determined as pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 36%, and 4% Decided to pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate, decided to pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 5%, and pattern PT-9 {at a rate of 55% reach notice (high)}.

When the setting value set in the pachinko machine 1 is 2, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the first period is pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-1 at a rate of 35.8%. PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} was determined, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was determined at a rate of 4.2%, pattern PT-8 {reach Advance notice (low)} is determined, and pattern PT-9 {Reach advance notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 55%.

When the setting value set in the pachinko machine 1 is 3, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the first period is pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-1 at a rate of 35.5%. Determined to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)}, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 4.5%, pattern PT-8 {reach Advance notice (low)} is determined, and pattern PT-9 {Reach advance notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 55%.

When the setting value set in the pachinko machine 1 is 4, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the first period is set to pattern PT-1 to pattern PT- at a rate of 35%. 4 {Suggestion of setting (low)}, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {suggestion of setting (high)} at a rate of 5%, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low) at a rate of 5% }, and the pattern PT-9 {reach advance notice (high)} at a rate of 55%.

When the setting value set in the pachinko machine 1 is 5, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the first period is set to pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-1 at a rate of 33.5%. PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} was determined, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was determined at a rate of 6.5%, pattern PT-8 {reach advance notice (low)}, and pattern PT-9 {reach advance notice (high)} at a rate of 55%.

When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 6, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the first period is changed from pattern PT-1 to pattern PT- at a rate of 32%. 4 {Suggestion of setting (low)}, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {suggestion of setting (high)} at a rate of 8%, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low) at a rate of 5% }, and the pattern PT-9 {reach advance notice (high)} at a rate of 55%.

Returning to FIG. 59-20, it is determined in step S319 or step S320 whether or not execution of the effect during variable display in the second period is determined (step S321), and if execution is determined, the determined effect type (pattern PT-1 to PT-9) is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (step S322), and a variable-display effect execution decision flag indicating that execution of the variable-display effect in the second period is determined is set. Then (step S323), the effect during variable display is terminated. If execution is not determined in step S321, that is, if non-execution is determined, the effect during variable display is terminated.

As described above, in the fourth embodiment, when the effect during variable display is executed in the first period of the plurality of times, regardless of whether the variation pattern is normal reach or super reach, the set value is 1 to 6, and when the effect during variable display is executed in the second period, it is determined whether the variation pattern is normal reach or super reach. Determine reach warnings or setting suggestions based on separate decision tables. In other words, since the determination criteria for whether to execute the reach notice or the setting suggestion are different between the first period and the second period, it is possible to suppress monotony of the effect during the variable display.

In addition, since the execution ratio of the setting suggestion in the first period is higher than the execution ratio of the setting suggestion in the second period, the setting suggestion is likely to be executed in the first period, while the reach announcement is made in the second period Since it is easier to execute, setting suggestions are not likely to be executed in both the first period and the second period, even though it becomes normal reach or super reach in the second period, and Since the reach advance notice is executed in the first period and the setting suggestion is likely to be executed in the second period, the setting suggestion and the reach notice can be executed in a well-balanced manner.

In addition, since the execution ratio of the reach notice in the second period is higher than the execution ratio of the reach notice in the first period, the variable display is performed by executing the reach notice in both the first period and the second period. It is possible to suppress the middle production from becoming monotonous. However, as shown in FIGS. 59-22 to 59-24, focusing on each setting value, when executing the variable display effect in the first period, regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 Execution of the reach notice is determined at the same ratio (40%), and when the effect during variable display is executed in the second period, the reach notice is executed regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1. It is determined by the same ratio (60%). For this reason, regardless of the setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1, the effect during the variable display executed in the first period and the effect during the variable display executed in the second period are different from the execution of the ready-to-win notice. The player's attention can be drawn in the same way.

Also, even if the setting value is high (for example, setting value 5, 6, etc.), in the case of normal reach or super reach, not only is the reach notice more likely to be executed than the setting suggestion in the second period, but the super reach In this case, since the reach notice (high) is likely to be executed, it is possible to suppress the player's expectation for the big win from being lowered.

Furthermore, even if the execution of the setting suggestion is decided in the second period, the setting suggestion (high) is more likely to be executed than when the setting suggestion is decided in the first period, so the setting suggestion in the super reach is executed, the player's expectations for the high setting can be heightened.

In addition, in the first period, when the setting value is 1, execution of the reach notice and setting suggestion is determined at the same ratio, whereas when the setting value is 6, that is, when the setting values are 1, 2, The higher the order of 3, 4, 5, and 6, the higher the execution of the setting suggestions than the reach notice. easier to predict.

In addition, in the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 59-21, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in the first period (the effect during variable display for the first time) and in the second period. Although the execution of the ready-to-reach notice is determined at a different rate between when the effect during variable display (the effect during variable display for the second time) is executed is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. The effect control CPU 120 may determine the execution of the ready-to-win notice at the same ratio between when the effect during variable display is executed in the first period and when the effect during variable display is executed in the second period. . By doing so, it is possible to make the player expect the execution of the ready-to-win announcement in the same manner in the first variable-display effect and the second variable-display effect.

In addition, in the present embodiment 4, as shown in FIG. 59-21, if the effect during variable display is the same number of times, regardless of the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the ready-to-win notice is executed at the same rate. Although the mode of determination is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the effect during the variable display of the same number of times, execution of the reach notice according to the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be determined in different proportions. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the execution of the same effect type in the first variable display effect and the second variable display effect, so that the variable display effect is monotonous. can be prevented from becoming

(Modification 2 of Examples 2 to 4)
In Examples 2 to 4 of the production example A, the production during variable display can be executed twice during one variable display, and the variation pattern of normal reach and super reach is targeted, and normal reach is changed from the start timing of variable display. Although the form in which the effect during variable display can be executed in the first period up to the start timing of the ready-to-win effect and the second period after the first period has been exemplified, the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the effect during variable display may be executed three times or more during one variable display. In addition, by temporarily stopping the decoration pattern during the variable display of the decoration pattern and then restarting the variable display, one variable display is pseudo-variably displayed a plurality of times. It may be executed at the timing according to the re-variation of the decorative pattern in the variation pattern accompanied by the pseudo-continuous effect that looks like.

For example, as shown in FIG. 59-25 as a modified example 2, for all fluctuation patterns of non-reach/small hit, normal reach and super reach, from the start timing of variable display to the start timing of normal reach reach production a first period before the temporary stop of the first decoration pattern, a second period after the first period and corresponding to a re-variable display period after the first temporary stop of the decoration pattern, The effect during variable display can be executed in the third period which is after the second period and corresponds to the re-variable display period after the temporary stop of the decoration pattern for the third time.

In addition, in this modification 2, the first period is exemplified before the temporary stop of the first decoration pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first period is the first period. Executed according to the re-variable display at the temporary stop of the decorative pattern, the second period is executed according to the re-variable display at the second temporary stop of the decorative pattern, and the third period is executed according to the third temporary stop of the decorative pattern. It may be executed according to the re-variable display.

In this modification 2, in the above-described effect determination process during variable display, for the first period, regardless of which variation pattern, any one of the set values 1 to 6 set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 , and for the second period and the third period, variable display based on the set value only when the variation pattern is normal reach or super reach A process for determining the type of presentation is executed.

Specifically, in the first period, the effect control CPU 120 determines execution of the setting suggestion at a rate of 100% regardless of the variation pattern (does not determine execution of the reach notice). It should be noted that the higher the set value is in the order of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6, the higher the setting suggestion (high) execution ratio. In the second period, only when the variation pattern is normal reach or super reach, execution of reach notice is determined at a rate of 40%, and execution of setting suggestion is determined at a rate of 60%. It should be noted that the higher the set value is in the order of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6, the higher the setting suggestion (high) execution ratio. In the third period, only when the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach, execution of reach notice is decided at a rate of 100%, and execution of setting suggestion is not decided. It should be noted that the higher the set value is in the order of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6, the higher the setting suggestion (high) execution ratio.

In addition, while the ratio of determining the setting suggestion in the second period and the third period is set to be lower than the ratio of determining the setting suggestion in the first period, the reach notice is determined in the first period By setting the ratio of determining the reach notice in the second period and the third period to be higher than the ratio, as the effect during variable display is repeatedly executed, the reach notice is more likely to be executed than the setting suggestion. Become.

As described above, in the present modification 2, when the effect during variable display is executed in the first period, one of the effect patterns PT-1 to PT-7 corresponding to the setting suggestion is determined, and the second period or the second period is performed. When executing the effect during variable display in three periods, one of the effect patterns PT-1 to PT-9 is determined based on at least the variation pattern. In other words, since the determination criteria for the performance control CPU 120 to determine the performance mode of the predetermined performance are different between the first period, the second period, and the third period, it is possible to prevent the performance during variable display from becoming monotonous.

Specifically, the variation pattern accompanied by the pseudo-continuous effect is a variation pattern in which the degree of expectation for a big hit increases as the number of times of re-variable display increases in the order of 1, 2, 3, and so on. Therefore, in the first period corresponding to the first re-variable display, there is a high possibility that the fluctuation pattern is not super reach, so the setting suggestion is executed with priority over the reach notice, and the second re-variable In the second period corresponding to the display, there is a high possibility that the fluctuation pattern is not non-reach, but there is also the possibility of normal reach, so the setting suggestion is prioritized over the reach notice, and the third re-variable In the third period corresponding to the display, there is a high possibility that the fluctuation pattern is super reach, so the reach notice is executed with priority over the setting suggestion.

In this way, in the case of a variation pattern involving one or two pseudo-continuous performances, it is possible to suggest settings while suppressing the decrease in the reliability of the ready-to-win announcement due to frequent occurrence of the ready-to-win announcement. On the other hand, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's expectation for the big win due to frequent occurrence of setting suggestion in the case of the variation pattern accompanied by three pseudo-continuous performances.

In addition, in the second modification, in the first period in which the reliability of the jackpot is the lowest, the execution of the setting suggestion is determined according to the set value regardless of the fluctuation pattern, rather than the reach notice, so the setting suggestion is preferable. On the other hand, in the second and third periods in which the reliability of the jackpot is higher than in the first period, the reach notice is set according to whether the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach. Since the decision is made with priority, the player's expectation for the big win can be favorably increased.

In addition, in this modified example 2, in the first period, the execution of the setting suggestion is determined at a rate of 100%, but in the first period, the execution of the setting suggestion is determined at a higher rate than the reach notice. If there is, it does not have to be the one that determines the execution of setting suggestions at a rate of 100%. Also, in the second period, the execution of the setting suggestion is determined at a higher rate than the reach notice, but the reach notice may be decided at a higher rate than the setting suggestion. Also, in the third period, the execution of the reach notice is exemplified at a rate of 100%, but in the third period, if the execution of the reach notice is determined at a higher rate than the setting suggestion, the reach notice It does not have to be a 100% decision on execution.

Further, in this modification 2, in the first period, regardless of the fluctuation pattern, the execution of the setting suggestion is determined according to the set value with priority over the reach notice, and in the second period and the third period, the fluctuation pattern Although the execution of the reach notice is determined according to whether it is normal reach or super reach with priority over the setting suggestion, the present invention is not limited to this, the first period and the second period , regardless of the fluctuation pattern, the execution of the setting suggestion is determined according to the set value with priority over the reach notice, and in the third period, the reach notice is executed according to whether the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach may be determined with priority over the setting suggestion.

In addition, in the present modification 2, in the first period, the execution of the setting suggestion is determined according to the setting value with priority over the reach notice, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of In the first number of times (e.g., the first period or the second period), at least if the setting suggestion or reach notice is determined according to the setting value, the setting suggestion or according to the setting value and the fluctuation pattern You may make it determine reach notice.

In addition, in the present modification 2, in the second period and the third period, according to the setting value and the variation pattern, the execution of the reach notice is exemplified prior to the setting suggestion, but the present invention is to this It is not limited, and in the second number of times (for example, the second period or the third period) after the first number of times among the plurality of times, the setting suggestion or reach notice is determined at least according to the fluctuation pattern. If there is, the setting suggestion or the reach notice may be determined according to the setting value and the variation pattern.

Further, in Embodiments 2 to 4, as an effect during the variable display executed in the first period, the setting suggestion is determined by making the rate at which the execution of the setting suggestion is determined higher than the rate at which the ready-to-reach notice is determined. Although a form in which execution is determined with priority is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. As for the effect, the setting suggestion may be preferentially determined according to the order of the processing for determining the effect type.

Further, in Embodiments 2 to 4, as the effect during the variable display executed in the second period, the rate at which the execution of the reach notice is determined is set higher than the rate at which the setting suggestion is determined. Although a form in which execution is determined with priority is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. As an effect, execution of the ready-to-win announcement may be preferentially determined according to the order of processing for determining the effect type.

As described above, production example A has been described with reference to the drawings, but the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and any changes or additions within the scope of the present invention are included in the present invention. .

For example, in the production example A, the form in which the production during the variable display can be executed multiple times in one variable display was illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the reach notice and the setting suggestion are made in a plurality of times. It may be executable across variable displays.

Specifically, the CPU 103 suspends and stores information (for example, display results (including jackpot types), random numbers for determining variation patterns, etc.) related to variable display whose execution is suspended when a starting prize is generated. , and the display result and the fluctuation pattern are prefetched and determined based on the extracted random value, and the determination result is transmitted to the effect control board 12 as the effect control command at the time of starting winning, so that the effect control CPU 120 If it is possible to execute a pre-reading notice effect that predicts the reliability of the big hit in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended), the variable display (target fluctuation) based on the pending memory that is the target of the pre-reading notice A reach notice or a setting suggestion may be executed as a pre-read notice for the target change over a plurality of times of variable display until the start.

In addition, in the production example A, the production control CPU 120 variably displays a plurality of images Z1 showing the paraglider displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 in the variable display production at predetermined timings. A form of executing the process of changing the number of images Z1 corresponding to the production patterns PT-1 to PT-9 determined in the middle production determination process to the image Z2 indicating that the images will be destroyed and dropped has been exemplified, but the present invention has been described. is not limited to this, and when the player's operation of the push button 31B (or the stick controller 31A may be used) is detected by the push sensor 35B, the image Z2 changes at the timing corresponding to the operation. You can let it run.

Further, when the effect control CPU 120 changes to the image Z2 at the timing corresponding to the operation by the player in the variable display effect as described above, the operation of the push button 31B by the player during the operation valid period of the push button 31B is performed. An operation prompting image (for example, a character image or a button image that says “Continue hitting!”) may be displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 as an operation prompting effect.

Further, when the push sensor 35B detects a specific action of operating the push button 31B during the operation effective period of the push button 31B, the effect control CPU 120 displays an operation prompting image prompting the player to operate the push button 31B. Regardless of whether or not the push button 31B is being operated, an effect of changing the image Z1 to the image Z2 (destroying and dropping the paraglider) can be executed according to the operation of the push button 31B, and the operation of the push button 31B was not detected. In some cases, the paraglider may be faded out without being destroyed, that is, the effect during variable display may be ended without performing reach notice or setting suggestion.

By doing so, a player who knows the specific action can execute the effect of changing the image Z1 to the image Z2 at a desired timing by performing the specific action, so that the amusement of the game can be improved. .

Note that an operation prompting image prompting the player to operate the push button 31B is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 as an operation prompting effect to prompt the player to operate the push button 31B during the operation effective period of the push button 31B. is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. Even if the operation promoting effect is executed by emitting light from a light-emitting part built in or around the push button 31B provided at a position different from the display area of the image display device 5 that the player pays attention to. good. By doing so, only the player who knows the specific action or the player who has noticed the light emission can see the ready-to-win notice and the setting suggestion, so that the interest in the game is improved.

In addition, in the production example A, as a predetermined production in which the production result is an advantageous state suggestion result, a form is illustrated in which a ready-to-reach notice that suggests the possibility of becoming a ready-to-win situation is applied, but the present invention is not limited to this. In addition, the predetermined effects that result in the indication of an advantageous state include a stop symbol notice suggesting which pattern the variable display will stop at, a character notice that a character will appear, and a step in which the notice image changes step by step. Various advance notice effects can be applied as long as they are suggestive effects suggesting the possibility of a big hit, such as an advance notice, a group notice in which a group of predetermined characters cross the display area, and the like.

In production example A, the production during variable display has a common production period common to the reach notice and the setting suggestion, but the production mode differs between the reach notice and the setting suggestion (corresponding to the common production period It may be a separate production (specifically, the reach notice is suggested using a character, the setting suggestion is suggested by a paraglider, etc.). Then, even when the ready-to-win announcement and the setting suggestion with different presentation modes are executed together in the same period (at the same timing), the ready-to-win announcement may be executed with priority over the setting suggestion.

For example, the first effect image corresponding to the advance notice and the second effect image corresponding to the setting suggestion different from the first effect image are displayed together in the display area of the image display device 5 in the same period (at the same timing). In this case, the visibility of the first effect image can be improved by, for example, making the display area of the first effect image larger than the display area of the second effect image, or by differentiating the display mode such as the emission color, brightness, contrast, etc. is made higher than the visibility of the second effect image, it is possible to execute the reach notice with priority over the setting suggestion.

In addition, when the effect control CPU 120 can draw an image in a plurality of drawing layers, for example, the first effect image corresponding to the reach notice is drawn in the first drawing layer among the plurality of drawing layers, and the setting When the second effect image corresponding to the suggestion is drawn on the second drawing layer which is lower than the first drawing layer, the image drawn on the first drawing layer and the second drawing layer on the image display device 5 are drawn. When the first effect image is overlapped and displayed on the second effect image, the visibility of the first effect image becomes higher than the visibility of the second effect image. By doing so, it is also possible to execute the reach notice with priority over the setting suggestion. Furthermore, when the second effect image is drawn on the upper first drawing layer and the first effect image is drawn on the lower second drawing layer, the opacity of the second effect image is set higher than the opacity of the first effect image. By lowering the transmittance of the second effect image (making the transmittance of the second effect image higher than the transmittance of the first effect image), it is also possible to execute the ready-to-win notice with priority over the setting suggestion.

Further, by making the sound modes such as the volume and quality of the sound effects output from the speakers 8L and 8R different between the reach notice and the setting suggestion, the audibility of the sound effect corresponding to the reach notice is the sound effect corresponding to the setting suggestion. , that is, the sound effect corresponding to the reach announcement may be more audible than the sound effect corresponding to the setting suggestion. As a method of enhancing the audibility of the sound effect corresponding to the reach notice, for example, not only increasing the volume of the sound effect, but also decreasing the volume of other sounds such as BGM to increase the audibility. good too. It should be noted that there are cases where the sound effect corresponding to the reach notice is output but the sound effect corresponding to the setting suggestion is not output.

Furthermore, when the production control CPU 120 has a plurality of reproduction channels (for example, reproduction channels 0 to 31) and can execute control to output the production sound from the speakers 8L and 8R using any one of the reproduction channels , for example, the first effect sound corresponding to the ready-to-win notice can be reproduced on the first reproduction channel, and the second effect sound corresponding to the setting suggestion can be reproduced on the second reproduction channel different from the first reproduction channel. In addition, when the first effect sound and the second effect sound are reproduced from different reproduction channels (the first reproduction channel and the second reproduction channel) at the same timing, the first effect sound reproduced on the first reproduction channel The audibility of the first effect sound is made higher than the audibility of the second effect sound by making the volume and sound quality different from (improving) the volume and sound quality of the second effect sound reproduced on the second reproduction channel, It is also possible to execute the reach notice with priority over the setting suggestion.

In addition, by changing the light emission mode such as the color, lighting mode, and brightness of the game effect lamp 9 between the ready-to-win notice and the setting suggestion, the visibility of the light-emitting mode corresponding to the ready-to-win notice is changed to the visual recognition of the sound effect corresponding to the setting suggestion. In other words, the light emission mode corresponding to the reach advance notice may be made more visible than the light emission mode corresponding to the setting suggestion. In addition, the light is turned on in response to the reach notice, but the light is turned off in response to the setting suggestion.

In other words, executing the reach notice with priority over the setting suggestion means that the effect result is either the advantageous state suggestion result or the setting suggestion result, as explained in the above-mentioned production examples A1 to 4 and the modified examples 1 and 2. In addition to increasing the execution ratio of reach notice in the case of priority is also given to Furthermore, executing the ready-to-win notice with priority over the setting suggestion means that the execution ratio, display, sound , light, and movement of movable bodies.

Further, in the production example A, the setting suggestion exemplified a mode of suggesting which of the setting values 1 to 6 is set as a suggestion regarding the setting in the CPU 103, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the suggestion regarding the setting in the CPU 103 may be, for example, a suggestion of the possibility that the setting value has been changed or the possibility that the setting value has not been changed (deferred).

Also, in the production embodiment A, the mode in which the jackpot game state is applied as an example of an advantageous state advantageous to the player is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the prize balls are paid out more than the normal state. High base state (time saving state) where conditions are likely to be established, high probability game state (high probability state) with high probability of becoming a jackpot game state, high probability low base state (latent probability variable state), special reach state (for example , super reach, etc.), including a state where the variation pattern is a variation pattern based on a big hit variation pattern.

Further, in the production embodiment A, the pachinko game machine 1 is illustrated as an example of the game machine, but the present invention is not limited to this. The number of balls enclosed in a circulative manner and lent out in response to a player's request for lending and the number of prize balls awarded according to winning are added, while the number of game balls used in the game is subtracted. The present invention can also be applied to a so-called enclosed game machine in which the contents are stored. In addition, since scores and points are given to the player instead of the game balls in these enclosed type game machines, the given scores and points correspond to the game value.

Further, in production example A, a spherical game ball (pachinko ball) was applied as an example of the game medium, but the game medium is not limited to spherical game media. It may be a medium.

(Pachinko machine production example B)
Next, a description will be given of an effect example B executed in the pachinko game machine 1 having a setting function capable of setting the set values described in the first embodiment or the second embodiment. In the production example B, it is possible to execute the announcement production to announce/suggest that the display result will be a big hit (that the display result will be controlled to a big win game state) during the execution of the variable display, and the appearance rate can be appropriately adjusted. be done. It should be noted that, in order to simplify the explanation, it is assumed that three levels of 1 to 3 are provided as the setting values in the production example B. FIG.

Whether or not the advance notice effect is executed is determined depending on whether or not the display result is a big hit in the variable display start setting process of step S171 shown in FIG. 8 when starting the variable display. In the pachinko game machine 1 whose setting can be changed, the larger the set value, the higher the probability of winning a big hit. Notice effects (especially highly reliable notice effects that will result in a big hit) are easier to execute when the display result is a big hit. The higher the value, the higher the appearance rate and reliability of the advance notice effect. In this embodiment, the reliability means the reliability of the big win, and means the ratio of the big win when the announcement effect is executed.

Therefore, there is a possibility that the occurrence rate or reliability of the announcement effect may differ from what is intended due to fluctuations due to the set values, or the reliability may change, which may confuse the player. Therefore, in effect embodiment B, by adjusting (changing) the execution ratio of the advance notice effect according to the set value, at least one of the appearance rate of the notice effect and the reliability is adjusted within the same or substantially the same range. is doing. As a result, the appearance rate and reliability of the notice effect can be set as intended, and the player can be prevented from being confused by the notice effect. In addition, it is possible to prevent setting values from being unreasonably suggested depending on the execution frequency of the advance notice effect.

It should be noted that, when adjusting the appearance rate and reliability of the advance notice effect, it may be difficult to completely match the ratio after the decimal point. Therefore, the invention according to the effect embodiment B includes not only the same appearance rate and reliability of the advance notice effects, but also those adjusted within substantially the same range. It should be noted that the same effect as in the case of being the same can be obtained as long as they are within substantially the same range. The term “substantially the same range” may be within a predetermined range, such as within a predetermined error range (for example, plus or minus 5%, etc.), or the appearance rate or reliability of the advance notice effect as perceived by the player. may be within substantially the same range such that they are felt to be the same.

FIG. 60-1 is a diagram showing an example of the execution ratio, appearance rate, and reliability of the notice X as the notice effect in the effect embodiment B. FIG. FIG. 60-1(A) shows an example in which the appearance rate and reliability of advance notice X are not adjusted. In this embodiment, three levels of "1" to "3" are provided as set values. As shown in FIG. 60-1 (A), in this embodiment, the jackpot probability a is "1/300" for the set value "1", "1/250" for the set value "2", and the set value In the case of "3", it is "1/200". The execution ratio b of the notice X at the time of the big hit is "50/100" regardless of the set value. Therefore, the ratio of execution of the notice X to the big hit (percentage of the total variation) A (= jackpot probability a x execution ratio b) is ``1/600'' when the setting value is ``1'', and the setting value is ``2''. is "1/500" in the case of , and "1/400" in the case of the set value "3".

In addition, the probability of losing c (= 1-jackpot probability a) is "299/300" when the setting value is "1", "249/250" when the setting value is "2", and "199" when the setting value is "3". /200”. The execution ratio d of the advance notice X at the time of losing is "1/100". Therefore, the ratio (percentage of all variations) B (=probability of failure c×execution ratio d) at which the advance notice X is executed and becomes a failure is approximately “1/100” at any set value.

The appearance rate C (=A+B) of the notice X in all fluctuations is "7/600" when the setting value is "1", "6/500" when the setting value is "2", and "5" when the setting value is "3". /400”. In addition, the reliability D (=A/C) of the notice X is "1/7" (approximately 14%) for the set value "1" and "1/6" (approximately 17%) for the set value "2". ), and when the set value is "3", it is "1/5" (20%).

In this way, when the execution ratio of the announcement effect (notice X) is the same regardless of the setting value and without adjustment, the higher the set value, the higher the appearance rate and reliability of the announcement effect. In particular, when the reliability is based on the set value "2", an error of about plus or minus 3% occurs.

FIG. 60-1(B) shows an example in which the appearance rate and reliability of the notice X are adjusted to be the same. In the example shown in FIG. 60-1(B), unlike the example shown in FIG. When the set value is "2", it is "50/100", and when the set value is "3", it is "40/100". In addition, the execution ratio d of the notice X at the time of failure is "3/299" for the setting value "1", "2.5/249" for the setting value "2", and "2" for the setting value "3". /199”.

By doing so, the appearance rate C of the notice X in all fluctuations is "6/500" regardless of the set value. Also, the reliability D of the advance notice X is "1/6" regardless of the set value. As a result, it is possible to prevent the appearance rate and reliability of the announcement effect from changing according to the set value, resulting in an unintended ratio, and to suitably execute the announcement effect. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by the announcement effect.

In this embodiment, the appearance rate and reliability of the notice X as the notice effect are adjusted to be the same or within substantially the same range regardless of the set values. Such adjustments are made for highly reliable notice effects and special notice effects that are featured (that is, some notice effects), and for other notice effects, without adjusting the execution ratio, depending on the set value The appearance rate and reliability may be changed. That is, the other notice effects may be executed at the same execution ratio regardless of the set value. By doing this, compared to the case where the appearance rate and reliability are adjusted for all the notice effects, the burden of adjusting the appearance rate and reliability is generated, and the processing burden of deciding whether or not to execute the notice effects. increase can be prevented.

In the example shown in FIG. 60-1(B), the execution ratio d of the notice X at the time of failure is different, but even if it is the same as shown in FIG. 60-1(A), the notice X The rate B of execution and failure is approximately the same "1/100" regardless of the setting value, and the appearance rate C of the notice X is also approximately the same (approximately 1.17% to 1.25%). , the execution ratio d of the advance notice X at the time of failure may be the same regardless of the set value.

In this case, by adjusting only the execution ratio b of the notice X at the time of the big win, the appearance rate C and the reliability D of the notice X can be made within the same or substantially the same range. In this way, by sharing the execution ratio of the notice effect at the time of loss, which accounts for most of all fluctuations, there is no need to determine the set value for each change of loss and make the execution ratio different, so the notice effect can reduce the control burden for executing

FIG. 60-1(C) shows an example in which the rate of appearance of notice X is adjusted to be the same. In the example shown in FIG. 60-1(C), unlike the example shown in FIG. , "2/149" for the set value "2", and "1.5/199" for the set value "3". The execution ratio b of the notice X at the time of the big hit remains "50/100" regardless of the set value.

By doing so, the appearance rate C of the notice X in all fluctuations is "6/500" regardless of the set value. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the execution frequency of the notice effect, and from suggesting the set value unnecessarily. In addition, it is possible to make the occupancy rate of the advance notice X in the case of a big win common, and to maintain a suitable rate of appearance at the time of the big win.

In this case, the appearance rate C of the notice X is common regardless of the set value, but as shown in FIG. Become. By doing so, it is possible to provide playability according to the set value. In addition, as the number of appearances of the notice X increases, the reliability can be estimated, and the set value can be estimated. Incidentally, by matching the appearance rate, the reliability corresponding to the set value may change relatively greatly (about plus or minus 10%), such as 30% to 50%. This makes it easier to guess the set value.

FIG. 60-1(D) shows an example in which the reliability of the notice X is adjusted to be the same. In the example shown in FIG. 60-1 (D), unlike the example shown in FIG. ”, “2.5/249” for the set value “2”, and “2.5/199” for the set value “3”. The execution ratio b of the notice X at the time of the big hit remains "50/100" regardless of the set value.

By doing so, the reliability D of the notice X becomes "1/6" regardless of the set value. By doing so, the same reliability can be notified by the notice X regardless of the set value. In addition, it is possible to make the occupancy rate of the advance notice X in the case of a big win common, and to maintain a suitable rate of appearance at the time of the big win.

In this case, the reliability D of the notice X is common regardless of the setting value, but as shown in FIG. Become. By doing so, it is possible to provide playability according to the set value. In addition, as the number of appearances of the notice X increases, the set value can be estimated, so an improvement in the operation rate of the pachinko game machine 1 can be expected.

In FIG. 60-1(D), by varying the execution ratio of the notice X at the time of failure according to the set value, the reliability of the notice X is adjusted to be the same regardless of the set value. However, by making the execution ratio of the notice X at the time of losing the same regardless of the set value, and by varying the execution ratio of the notice X at the time of the big hit according to the set value, the reliability of the notice X is the same regardless of the set value. It may be adjusted so that In this way, by sharing the execution ratio of the notice effect at the time of loss, which accounts for most of all fluctuations, there is no need to determine the set value for each change of loss and make the execution ratio different, so the notice effect can reduce the control burden for executing

The big hit probability a shown in FIGS. 60-1(A) to 60-1(D) and the adjustment examples of the notice execution ratios b and d are just examples. In order to make at least one of the appearance rate C and the reliability D the same (substantially the same) regardless of the set values, it is necessary to make the appearance rate C and the reliability D the same (substantially the same) regardless of the set values. Moreover, at least one of the notice execution ratios b and d should be changed according to the set value. That is, when the appearance rate C is set to be the same (substantially the same), the execution rate of the notice is adjusted so that the appearance rate C=a×b+(1−a)×d is the same (substantially the same) regardless of the setting value. At least one of b and d should be adjusted. In addition, when the reliability D of the announcement effect is set to be the same (substantially the same), the reliability D of the announcement effect is equal (a×b)/(a×b+(1−a)×d) regardless of the setting value. At least one of the advance notice execution ratios b and d may be adjusted so that the same (substantially the same) are obtained.

In the execution ratio shown in FIG. 60-1, the execution ratio according to the jackpot type was not considered, but when there are multiple jackpot types, the execution ratio of the notice effect (notice X) is changed according to the jackpot type. can be different. For example, the jackpot probability a is the same as that shown in FIG. 60-1, and there are normal jackpots and probability variable jackpots as jackpot types, and when the jackpot hits either jackpot type at an even ratio (50%) explain.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 60-2(A), the normal jackpot probability a1 and the variable probability jackpot probability a2 are each half of the jackpot probability a in FIG. 60-1. In this example, the execution ratio b1 of the notice X at the time of the normal jackpot is "60/100" when the setting value is "1", "50/100" when the setting value is "2", and "3" when the setting value is "3". In this case, it is "40/100". Therefore, the ratio (percentage of all variations) A1 (=probability of normal jackpot a1×execution ratio b1) of execution of advance notice X to the normal jackpot is “1/1000” regardless of the set value.

Further, as shown in FIG. 60-2(A), the execution ratio b2 of the notice X at the time of the probability variable jackpot is 50/100 (unadjusted) regardless of the set value. Therefore, the ratio of the probability variable jackpot when the notice X is executed (percentage of all fluctuations) A2 (= probability variable jackpot probability a2 × execution ratio b2) is set to “1/1200” for the set value “1” 2", it is "1/1000", and the setting value is "3", it is "1/800". Then, the ratio (percentage of total variation) A (=A1+A2) that becomes a big hit when the notice X is executed is "44/24000" when the setting value is "1" and "48/24000" when the setting value is "2". ”, and “54/24000” when the set value is “3”.

Then, as shown in FIG. 60-2(B), the execution ratio d of the notice X at the time of failure is "196/(299×80)" for the setting value "1" and " 192/(249×96)”, and “186/(199×120)” for the set value “3”. Therefore, the ratio of failure due to the execution of advance notice X (percentage of all fluctuations) is "196/24000" for the setting value "1", "192/24000" for the setting value "2", and "192/24000" for the setting value "2". 3" is "186/24000".

As a result, as shown in FIG. 60-2(D), the appearance rate C (=A+B) of the advance notice X in all fluctuations is "1/100" regardless of the set value. In this way, when there are a plurality of jackpot types, by varying the execution ratio of the notice effect for each jackpot type, the appearance rate of the notice effect is adjusted within the same or substantially the same range regardless of the set value. can be By doing so, while the execution ratio of the notice effect is within the same or substantially the same range, when the notice effect is executed, the ratio of which jackpot type will be different depending on the setting value. Execution of the advance notice effect leads to expectation of a specific jackpot (for example, variable probability jackpot).

In the example shown in FIG. 60-2, the appearance rate of the notice X is adjusted to be the same (substantially the same) by varying the execution ratio of the notice X at the time of the normal jackpot. The appearance rate C of the notice X may be adjusted to be the same (substantially the same) by varying the time execution rate. That is, at least one of the announcement execution ratios b1 and b2 and d should be adjusted so that the appearance rate C=a1×b1+a2×b2+c×d of the announcement X is the same (substantially the same).

Further, the reliability D of the notice X may be the same (substantially the same) by varying the execution ratio of the notice X according to the jackpot type. In this case, regardless of the setting value, the reliability D of the advance notice effect D=(a1×b1+a2×b2)/(a1×b1+a2×b2+((1−a1−a2)×d) is the same (substantially the same). At least one of the execution ratios b1 and b2 of the notice and d may be adjusted as follows.By doing so, the notice effect is executed while the reliability of the notice effect is the same or substantially the same range. In this case, since the ratio of which type of jackpot is to be won differs depending on the set value, it is expected that a specific jackpot (for example, variable probability jackpot) will be achieved by executing the advance notice performance according to the set value.

Further, for some of the advance notice effects among the advance notice effects, the execution ratio of the specific jackpot type may be executed at the same execution ratio regardless of the set value. For example, there are normal big wins and variable probability big wins (distribution of 50% of the big win types) as the big win types, and a notice Y for notifying that the big wins will be the variable probability big wins may be executed as the advance notice effect. In this case, as shown in FIG. 60-3, in the case of a normal jackpot or a loss, the execution ratio of the notice Y is 0/100 (0%) regardless of the set value. On the other hand, the execution ratio b2 of the notice Y at the time of the variable probability big hit is "60/100" for the set value "1", "50/100" for the set value "2", and "40/100" for the set value "3". 100”. The jackpot probability is similar to the example shown in FIG. 60-1. Therefore, the appearance rate of the advance notice Y of all fluctuations is "1/1000" regardless of the set value. By doing so, the advance notice Y for notifying that the probability variable big win will be achieved can be executed at the same appearance rate regardless of the set value. In addition, it is possible to foresee that the variable probability big hit will occur regardless of the set value. In addition, since the advance notice Y is not executed regardless of the set value when a normal jackpot is won, the processing load can be reduced. Although not shown, the notice Y is executed only at the time of the variable probability big hit, so the reliability is 100%.

A foretelling effect for foretelling the possibility of a variable probability big hit may be executed when the game is lost. For example, in the case of executing the advance notice Z, which gives notice of a variable probability big hit, as the notice effect, as shown in FIG. /100 (0%). On the other hand, the execution ratio b2 of the notice Z at the time of the probability variable jackpot is the same as the execution ratio of the notice Y shown in FIG. /1000”. Then, the execution ratio d of the notice Z at the time of failure is "3/2990" for the set value "1", "2.5/2490" for the set value "2", and "2" for the set value "3". /1990”. The rate B at which the advance notice Y is executed and results in a loss is "1/1000" in any set value.

By doing so, the appearance rate C of the advance notice Z in all fluctuations is "2/1000" regardless of the set value. Also, the reliability D of the advance notice Z is "1/2" regardless of the set value. As a result, it is possible to prevent the appearance rate and reliability of the notice Z from changing according to the set value, resulting in an unintended rate, and in the case of a big win, a notice of a probability variable big win. Z can be performed favorably. In addition, since the advance notice Z is not executed regardless of the set value when a normal jackpot is won, the processing load can be reduced. Either the appearance rate or the reliability of the advance notice Z may differ depending on the set value.

Next, an example of the effect operation of the advance notice effect will be described. The lower arrows in FIG. 60-5(A) indicate that variable display of decorative patterns is executed in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of the image display device 5. indicates that there is When it is decided to execute the notice X as the notice effect, the character image CHα as shown in FIG. is executed. This allows the player to recognize that there is a high possibility of being controlled in an advantageous state. In particular, when the reliability is adjusted within the same or substantially the same range regardless of the set value, the player can recognize that there is a high possibility of being controlled in an advantageous state without being conscious of the set value. .

After that, as shown in FIG. 60-5(C), the decorative design showing the number 7 stops in the decorative design display areas 5L and 5R, and reach is established. Then, as shown in FIG. 60-5(D), the characters "Super Reach!" are displayed, and for example, as shown in FIG. be started. During the ready-to-win performance of super-ready-to-win, for example, as shown in FIG.

Then, for example, immediately before the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. be. As a result, the player comes to expect a variable probability big win. In particular, in the case of the notice Y, it is confirmed that the probability variable jackpot will be achieved, so the interest is improved.

In addition, when both the notice Y and the notice Z are made executable, the effect is to give notice/suggestion that both of them will result in a variable probability big hit. It is preferable to make some presentation modes such as contents different.

After that, when the display result is a big hit, a message indicating that the friendly character has won is displayed as shown in FIG. A decorative pattern is derived and displayed. The effect mode of the advance notice effect shown in FIG. 60-5 is only an example, and any effect effect may be used as long as it can suggest/predict that a big win or a variable probability big win will occur.

(Modification of Production Example B)
Various modifications and applications are possible for the production embodiment B described above, and further features may be added. In addition, not all of the configurations described in the production embodiment B are essential configurations, and some of them may be missing. In addition, other features such as production example A may be combined as appropriate.

Although three stages of 1 to 3 are provided as set values in the production embodiment B, the set values may be two stages or less or four stages or more (for example, six stages). Also, the larger the set value, the more advantageous the probability of a big win for the player. However, the smaller the set value, the more advantageous the probability of a big win for the player. Also, the big-hit probability according to the setting value shown in FIG. 60-1 etc. is also an example, and the step-by-step big-hit probability according to the setting value is sufficient.

In production example B, the execution ratio of the advance notice production is set so that at least one of the appearance rate and reliability of the advance notice production for all set values (set values 1 to 3) is the same or within substantially the same range. I was trying to change (adjust) according to the situation, but among the multiple types of setting values, at least one of the appearance rate and reliability of the advance notice effect of some setting values is the same or almost the same range. You may For example, even if at least one of the appearance rate and reliability of the advance notice effects of the first setting value (for example, setting value 1) and the second setting value (for example, setting value 2) is set to be the same or within substantially the same range. good. Also, when the set values are in six stages, at least one of the appearance rate and reliability of the advance notice effect of the first set value group (for example, set values 1 to 3) is set to be the same or within substantially the same range. , at least one of the appearance rate and reliability of the advance notice effects of the second set value group (eg, set values 4 to 6) may be set to be the same or substantially within the same range.

In production example B, as the specific production, the appearance rate and reliability of at least a part of the advance notice production are set to be the same or within substantially the same range regardless of the set values, but the specific production is controlled to be in an advantageous state. It may be another production that suggests that. For example, when determining the type of ready-to-win effect and the number of pseudo-runs on the side of the effect control board 12, by varying the determination ratio of the type of ready-to-win effect and the number of pseudo-runs according to the set value, First, the appearance rate and reliability of each ready-to-win effect and the appearance rate and reliability of each pseudo-run number may be controlled to be the same or within substantially the same range regardless of the set values.

Further, when determining whether or not to execute the notice effect, a table in which a different execution ratio is assigned for each set value may be used to decide whether to execute the notice effect. A table serving as a reference may be provided, a table corresponding to the set value may be generated by calculating a parameter corresponding to the set value in the table, and whether or not to execute the notice effect may be determined using the generated table.

The execution ratio, appearance rate, and reliability of the advance notice effects shown in FIGS. 60-1 to 60-4 are examples, and can be changed as appropriate without departing from the gist of the present invention. Further, as the advance notice effect, a notice effect other than the advance notice effect shown in the effect embodiment B may be executable. In such other notice effects, the appearance rate and reliability may be the same or within approximately the same range regardless of the set values, and in some or all of the other notice effects, the set values The rate of occurrence and the degree of reliability may be changed according to the set values assuming the same execution ratio regardless of the number. For example, among the notice effects, the notice effects with relatively high reliability are set so that the appearance rate and reliability are the same or within approximately the same range regardless of the setting value, and the reliability is relatively low or the appearance rate is low. A high advance notice effect may be executed at the same rate regardless of the set value. By doing so, compared to the case where the appearance rate and reliability are the same or within substantially the same range regardless of the set values for all the notice effects, the control burden related to the determination of whether or not to execute the notice effects is reduced. can be mitigated.

In addition, for a specific notice effect out of multiple types of notice effects, it is executed even if some setting values are lost, and if it is other setting values, it is not executed (or is executed). difficult). For example, a specific announcement effect with a high degree of reliability (such as a jackpot probability of 90% or more) is not executed at the time of loss in the case of a low setting value (for example, 1 to 3 in the case of 6 stages), and a high setting value (such as In the case of 4 to 6) in the case of 6 steps, it may be possible to execute at the time of failure. By doing so, it is possible to execute an unexpected performance by failing despite the execution of the specific advance notice performance, and to suggest/notify that the set value is high.

In the diagrams shown in FIGS. 60-1 and 60-2, the execution ratio of the notice X is shown as the notice effect. ) may be determined. In this case, even when determining the type of notice effect, the execution ratio of each notice effect is set to the set value so that the appearance rate and reliability of each notice effect are the same or within approximately the same range regardless of the set value. It can be different according to your needs.

In production example B, whether or not to execute the notice is determined regardless of the variation pattern at the time of loss, but depending on the variation pattern (whether or not there is reach and type, whether or not there is pseudo-run and number of times) at the time of loss , the execution ratio of the advance notice effect may be varied.

In production example B, the probability of a big hit in the variable probability state was not taken into consideration, but even in the variable probability state, the appearance rate and reliability of the announcement performance may be adjusted to the same or substantially the same range regardless of the set values. . Also, depending on the game state, the appearance rate and reliability of the advance notice effect may be adjusted to be the same or within substantially the same range regardless of the set values. For example, in a probability variable state (high probability state) where the probability of hitting a big hit is high and the announcement effect is easy to execute (high probability state), the appearance rate and reliability of the announcement effect are adjusted to the same or approximately the same range regardless of the set value, In the normal state (low-probability state), such adjustment may not be performed. In addition, between different game states, the appearance rate and reliability of the notice effect (specific notice effect) may differ, or may be adjusted to be the same or substantially the same range. For example, if the background is shared between the high-precision high base state and the low-precision high-base state to make it indistinguishable, a notice effect (a specific notice effect ) may be adjusted to the same or substantially the same range. Furthermore, regardless of the set values, the appearance rate and reliability of the notice effect (specific notice effect) may be adjusted to be the same or within substantially the same range. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the game state from being recognized as visually indistinguishable due to the appearance rate and reliability of the announcement effect.

In the production example B, when there are normal jackpots and variable probability jackpots as the jackpot types, the appearance rate and reliability of the notice effects are adjusted to the same or substantially the same range according to the jackpot types regardless of the set values. had become The difference between the jackpot types may be the size of the number of rounds of the jackpot, or the difference in the length of the time-saving state or probability variable state controlled to the jackpot gaming state.

When a small win is provided as a display result and the advance notice performance is executed even in the case of a small win, the execution ratio of the notice performance at the time of the big win and at the time of loss is changed according to the set value as in the performance embodiment B. In addition, by varying the execution ratio of the notice effect at the time of the small hit according to the set value, even if the appearance rate and reliability of the notice effect are adjusted to the same or approximately the same range regardless of the set value good. For example, in a gaming machine in which a specific area is provided in a winning opening opened in a small winning game state and controlled to a big winning game state based on passing through the specific area in the small winning game state, advance notice of a small winning is made. Since it can be said that the advance notice effect will be a notice of a big win, the appearance rate and reliability of the notice effect for predicting a small win may be adjusted to be the same or substantially within the same range regardless of the set values. In this case, when changing the small hit probability according to the set value, by changing the execution ratio of the notice effect in consideration of the small hit probability according to the set value, the appearance rate and reliability of the notice effect You can adjust the degree. Specifically, considering the big hit probability, small win probability, and loss probability according to the set value, by changing the execution ratio of the notice effect at the time of the big hit, small win, and loss according to the set value, The appearance rate and reliability of the advance notice effect may be adjusted to be the same or within substantially the same range regardless of the set values.

If it is possible to execute a notice effect in each of the multiple fluctuations of the pseudo-run, the appearance rate and reliability will be adjusted to the same or approximately the same range regardless of the setting value only for the notice effect in the final change of the pseudo-run. You may By doing so, it is possible to easily design the advance notice effect and reduce the processing load, compared to the case of adjusting the appearance rate and reliability for all variations of pseudo-runs.

In the effect embodiment B, only the big hit probability is changed by the set value, but the effect mode and the execution rate of the effect may be changed according to the set value on the effect control board 12 side. For example, even if the variation pattern is the same, a different ready-to-win effect or an effect during variable display such as a pseudo-run may be executed based on the set value. By doing so, the effect mode can suggest a set value according to the execution ratio of the effect.

(Explanation related to associating multiple embodiments)
As described above, various embodiments (examples and modifications) have been described, but the configuration according to each embodiment may be appropriately combined with part or all of each configuration related to other embodiments. . Configurations that are combined in this way or individual configurations that are not combined may be appropriately combined with part or all of each configuration related to other embodiments.

For example, the configuration according to the modification C (configuration in which the big hit flag and the small hit flag are stored in a common storage area) and / or the configuration according to the modification D (configuration for sharing the timer update process), the modification You may combine with the structure which concerns on B (the structure which restores the specific command which processed the numerical data by the production|presentation control side). By doing so, it is possible to further reduce the pressure on the capacitance on the main side.

In addition, the configuration according to the modification C (the configuration in which the big-hit flag and the small-hit flag are stored in a common storage area) is changed to the configuration of the second embodiment (a pachinko game that has a setting function and can be controlled to the KT state). It may be combined with machine 1). Specifically, in the pachinko game machine 1 that has a setting function and can be controlled to the KT state, the capacity of the main side (main board 11) is squeezed by having the setting function. Hits occur more frequently. Therefore, the configuration according to Modification C is more effective when applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment. That is, even if the capacity of the main side (main board 11) is squeezed by the provision of the setting function and the occurrence frequency of small hits is high, each time a small hit flag different from the big hit flag is set to LD (load). ), it is possible to reduce the number of LD instructions, etc., and reduce the pressure on the capacity of the main side.

Also, the configuration according to Modification D (configuration for sharing timer update processing) may be combined with the configuration of the second embodiment (pachinko machine 1 having a setting function and capable of being controlled to the KT state). Specifically, in the pachinko game machine 1 that has a setting function and can be controlled to the KT state, the capacity of the main side (main board 11) is squeezed by having the setting function. Hits occur more frequently. Therefore, the configuration according to Modification D is more effective when applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment. That is, the capacity of the main side (main board 11) is squeezed by the provision of the setting function, and the frequency of occurrence of small wins is high, so even if the frequency of calling subroutines related to small wins is high, it is used in the subroutine. Since the timer value is updated by one timer update process, the compression efficiency of the process is improved, and the pressure on the capacity of the main side can be reduced.

Also, the configuration of Modification C and the configuration of Modification D may be combined with the configuration of the first embodiment or the second embodiment (pachinko game machine 1 having a setting function). In this way, by combining Modification C and Modification D, it is possible to reduce the pressure on the main side capacity of the game machine due to the provision of the setting function.

(Description of the problem-solving means of the present invention, etc.)
Various embodiments have been described above, and the above-described embodiments include gaming machines described in the following means.

The gaming machine described in means A1 is
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
A plurality of set values including advantageous set values and unfavorable set values with different probabilities of being controlled to at least the advantageous state (for example, from 1, which is the most disadvantageous set value for the player, to the most advantageous set value for the player). a setting means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the setting value change processing shown in FIG. 31) that can be set to any setting value among the values up to a certain value of 6);
Judgment random number generating means (for example, random number circuit 104 or game control counter setting unit 154) capable of generating a judgment random number for judging whether or not to control to the advantageous state,
Based on the judgment random number value generated by the judgment random number generation means and the advantageous state judgment value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means, whether or not to control to the advantageous state Advantageous state determination means for determining the (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 39),
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process shown in FIG. 5) that can be controlled to the advantageous state based on the fact that the advantageous state determination means has determined to control to the advantageous state;
with
Since the number of the advantageous state determination values differs depending on the set value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state differs (for example, as shown in FIGS. 13 to 22, a big hit The part where the probability of being controlled to the big hit game state differs due to the different number of judgment values),
The advantageous state determination value is a common numerical range (for example, a common numerical range of jackpot determination values in the range of 1020 to 1237) that can be set by the setting means in a predetermined numerical range. ) is at least set and
The advantageous state determination value of the advantageous set value is a non-common numerical range not set in the common numerical range and the advantageous state determination value of the disadvantageous set value (for example, 1238 to each setting Non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, which is the range up to the value according to the value)
The common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are set to be continuous numerical ranges from a predetermined reference value (for example, as shown in FIGS. The part that is set as a continuous numerical range with 1020 as the jackpot reference value regardless of whether it is a variable state)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control in an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of means A2 is the gaming machine according to means A1,
A storage means (for example, a RAM 102) capable of storing setting value information capable of specifying the setting value set by the setting means,
The advantageous state determination means reads the set value information stored in the storage means each time it determines whether or not to control to the advantageous state (for example, the CPU 103 performs the special symbol normal processing step shown in FIG. 39). part for executing the processing of S550), the advantageous state determination value included in the non-common numerical range corresponding to the set value specified from the read set value information, together with the advantageous state determination value included in the common numerical range, Set as an advantageous state judgment value for judging whether or not the judgment random number value generated by the judgment random number generation means matches (for example, the CPU 103 processes step S556 of the special symbol normal processing , the part that sets the display result determination table according to the setting value read in the process of step S550)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the advantageous condition determination value corresponding to the set value is repeatedly set each time the advantageous condition determination means determines whether or not to control to the advantageous condition. It is possible to prevent inappropriate judgments from being made.

The gaming machine of means A3 is the gaming machine according to means A2,
The storage means can store the set value information read from the storage means by the advantageous state determination means as determined used set value information (for example, the CPU 103 can store the special symbol normal processing step shown in FIG. 39). In the process of S566, the set value set in the process of step S550 is updated and stored as the determined used set value),
A collation capable of collating whether or not the set value information stored in the storage means is the same as the determined used set value information stored in the immediately preceding determination by the advantageous state determination means at predetermined intervals. It is characterized by further comprising means (for example, in the process of step S552 shown in FIG. 39, the CPU 103 compares the setting value specified in the process of step S550 with the determined used setting value).
According to this feature, it can be specified that an inappropriate advantageous condition determination value is set by inappropriate set value information.

The gaming machine of means A4 is the gaming machine according to means A3,
The collation means performs collation every time the advantageous state determination means determines whether or not to control to the advantageous state as the predetermined period (for example, as shown in FIG. 39, the CPU 103 executes variable display). part that executes the processing of step S552 every time)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, each time it is determined whether or not to control to an advantageous state by the advantageous state determining means, verification is performed, so that it is possible to more accurately identify that an inappropriate advantageous state determination value is set.

The gaming machine of means A5 is the gaming machine according to means A3 or means A4,
Error notification means (for example, effect control CPU 120 that can execute error notification that the set value information is abnormal when the result of collation of the collation means is not the same) Thus, the image display device 5 is provided with a portion for displaying a notification image corresponding to an error.
According to this feature, it is possible to make those around the gaming machine recognize that the setting value information is abnormal, and to promptly take measures against the abnormal setting value information.

The gaming machine of means A6 is the gaming machine according to means A5,
The game control means controls the game to a game disabled state in which the game is disabled when the result of the verification by the verification means is not the same, and outputs error notification information indicating that the set value information is abnormal. output to the error notification means (for example, as shown in FIG. 39, when the CPU 103 determines that the set value and the determined used set value do not match as a result of the comparison in step S552, the loop processing is performed) part and step S554 to execute the process and send an error designation command to the effect control board 12),
The error notification means can execute the error notification based on the output of the error notification information by the game control means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 receives an error designation command from the CPU 103 in the error notification process. is received, and when an error designation command is received, an error notification is executed according to the received error designation command)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent an inappropriate game from being executed due to determination based on inappropriate set value information.

The gaming machine of means A7 is the gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A6,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of performing variable display,
The advantageous state determination means determines whether or not to control to the advantageous state for each variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 39, the CPU 103 uses a variable display result determination module to determine The part that determines the variable display result),
Reservation storage means (for example, the CPU 103 is shown in FIG. 37 as a step in the start winning judgment process) capable of storing the judgment random number value generated by the judgment random number generation means as a reservation memory. a part that executes the processing of S510);
Prior to the determination by the advantageous state determining means, whether or not it is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state can be determined in advance based on the reserved storage. part that executes numerical judgment processing),
further comprising
The pre-determination means performs the pre-determination by executing a process common to the advantageous state determination means for determining whether or not to control to the advantageous state (for example, when the CPU 103 wins The part that determines the variable display result using the variable display result determination module in the random value determination process)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, part of the processing of the advantageous state determination means and the advance determination means can be shared, so that the processing load can be reduced.

The gaming machine of means A8 is the gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A7,
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a small winning game state) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous state,
a storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of storing setting value information capable of specifying the setting value set by the setting means;
Based on the judgment random number value generated by the judgment random number generation means and the special state judgment value corresponding to the setting value set by the setting means, whether or not to control to the special state Special state determination means for determining the (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 39),
further comprising
The game control means can be controlled to the special state based on the determination by the special state determination means to control to the special state (for example, based on the fact that the variable display result has become a small hit) The part that updates the value of the figure process flag to 8 ″ and controls to the small hit game state),
The special state determination value is a common value continuous from a special reference value different from the predetermined reference value in a range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range, regardless of the setting value set by the setting means. The same number is set so as to be a numerical range (for example, as shown in FIG. 19, regardless of the set value, 32767 is the small hit reference value, and the range from 32767 to 33094 is the small hit judgment value The part set as a common numerical range),
The special state determination means determines whether or not to control to the special state based on the special state determination value included in the common numerical range regardless of the setting value set by the setting means. Each time, the set value information stored in the storage means is read, and a special state determination value included in the common numerical range corresponding to the set value specified from the read set value information is set (for example, FIG. 19 to 22, when the fluctuation special figure is the first special design, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is in the range of 32767 to 33094 regardless of the set value, and the fluctuation special figure is the second special If it is a pattern, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is in the range of 32767 to 33421 regardless of the setting value, but the CPU 103 always reads the setting value from the RAM 102 when executing the variable display, and the read setting The part that sets the display result determination table according to the value and determines whether the variable display result is a small hit)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control to the special state, and when the advantageous state determination means sets the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the set value specified from the set value information. In this case, the processing for setting the advantageous state determination value and the special state determination value corresponding to the set values specified from these set value information can be shared, so the capacity of the processing program can be reduced.

The gaming machine of means A9 is the gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A8,
For the setting value with the lowest probability of being controlled to the advantageous state, the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value is not set (for example, as shown in FIGS. 19 to 22, the pachinko game machine 1 If the set value is 1, the part where the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is not set)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, with respect to the most disadvantageous set value for the player, only the common numerical range of the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range may be targeted to determine whether or not to control to an advantageous state. It is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control in an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of means A10 is the gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A9,
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
A plurality of set values including advantageous set values and unfavorable set values with different probabilities of being controlled to at least the advantageous state (for example, from 1, which is the most disadvantageous set value for the player, to the most advantageous set value for the player). a setting means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the setting value change processing shown in FIG. 31) that can be set to any setting value among the values up to a certain value of 6);
Judgment random number generating means (for example, random number circuit 104 and game control counter setting unit 207SG154) capable of generating a judgment random number for judging whether or not to control to the advantageous state,
Based on the judgment random number value generated by the judgment random number generation means and the advantageous state judgment value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means, whether or not to control to the advantageous state Advantageous state determination means for determining the (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 39),
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process shown in FIG. 6) that can be controlled to the advantageous state based on the fact that the advantageous state determination means has determined to control to the advantageous state;
with
Since the number of the advantageous state determination values differs depending on the set value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state differs (for example, as shown in FIGS. 13 to 22, a big hit Part where the probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state differs due to the different number of judgment values),
The advantageous state determination value is a common numerical range (for example, a common numerical range of jackpot determination values in the range of 1020 to 1237) that can be set by the setting means in a predetermined numerical range. ) is at least set and
The advantageous state determination value of the advantageous set value is a non-common numerical range not set in the common numerical range and the advantageous state determination value of the disadvantageous set value (for example, 1238 to each setting Non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, which is the range up to the value according to the value)
The common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are set to be continuous numerical ranges from a predetermined reference value (for example, as shown in FIGS. The part that is set as a continuous numerical range with 1020 as the jackpot reference value regardless of whether it is a variable state)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control in an advantageous state.
Further, for example, when the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value are provided over a plurality of numerical ranges, the random value for determination generated by the random value generation means for determination and the advantageous state determination While it is necessary to make multiple determinations of whether or not to control to an advantageous state based on each numerical range of values, in the present invention, the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value are determined as predetermined criteria. Since it is set so as to be a continuous numerical range from the value, the advantageous state determination means generates a common numerical value range and a non-common numerical value of the random number value for judgment generated by the random number value generation means for judgment and the advantageous state judgment value To reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control to an advantageous state because it is only necessary to execute the determination once whether to control to an advantageous state based on a continuous numerical range including the range. can be done.

The gaming machine of means A11 is the gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A10,
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
A plurality of set values including advantageous set values and unfavorable set values with different probabilities of being controlled to at least the advantageous state (for example, from 1, which is the most disadvantageous set value for the player, to the most advantageous set value for the player). a setting means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the setting value change processing shown in FIG. 31) that can be set to any setting value among the values up to a certain value of 6);
Judgment random number generation means (for example, random number circuit 104 and game control counter setting unit that can generate a judgment random number for judging whether to control to the advantageous state and whether to control to the special state 154) and
Based on the judgment random number value generated by the judgment random number generation means and the advantageous state judgment value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means, whether or not to control to the advantageous state Advantageous state determination means for determining the (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 39),
It is possible to control to the advantageous state based on the determination by the advantageous state determination means to control to the advantageous state, and the probability of determining that the control to the advantageous state is determined is the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the set value. A game control that can be controlled to a normal state corresponding to a normal number that is a number or a special state corresponding to a special number that is the number of the advantageous state determination value increased with respect to the normal number based on becoming the advantageous state. Means (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 6),
with
Since the number of the advantageous state determination values differs depending on the set value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state differs (for example, as shown in FIGS. 13 to 22, a big hit Part where the probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state differs due to the different number of judgment values),
The advantageous state determination value is a common numerical range (for example, a common numerical range of jackpot determination values in the range of 1020 to 1237) that can be set by the setting means in a predetermined numerical range. ) is at least set and
The advantageous state determination value of the advantageous set value is a non-common numerical range not set in the common numerical range and the advantageous state determination value of the disadvantageous set value (for example, 1238 to each setting Non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, which is the range up to the value according to the value)
The common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are set so as to be continuous numerical ranges from a predetermined reference value (for example, as shown in FIG. 19, when the set value is 2, 1020 is The part where the range from 1020 as the reference value to 1253, which is the maximum value of the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, is set as a continuous numerical range),
The advantageous state determination value is set so as to be a continuous numerical range from the predetermined reference value within the predetermined numerical range, regardless of whether the normal state or the special state (for example, As shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, the jackpot numerical range is set as a continuous numerical range with 1020 as the jackpot reference value regardless of whether it is a normal state or a variable probability state)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control in an advantageous state.
Further, for example, when the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value are provided over a plurality of numerical ranges, the random value for determination generated by the random value generation means for determination and the advantageous state determination While it is necessary to make multiple determinations of whether or not to control to an advantageous state based on each numerical range of values, in the present invention, the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value are determined as predetermined criteria. Since it is set to be a continuous numerical range from the value To reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control to an advantageous state because it is only necessary to execute the determination once whether to control to an advantageous state based on a continuous numerical range including the range. can be done.
Further, for example, whether or not the random number value for judgment generated by the random number value generation means for judgment is a value between the minimum value and the maximum value of the advantageous state judgment value (the random number value for judgment is the advantageous state judgment value (whether the value is within the numerical range of or not), one of the minimum value and the maximum value of the advantageous state determination value is the predetermined reference value. The state determination means determines whether or not to control to an advantageous state only by specifying the value of the minimum value or the maximum value which is not the predetermined reference value depending on whether the state is the normal state or the special state. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control to an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of means A12 is the gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A11,
It is possible to perform variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol), and an advantageous state for the player (for example, A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled between a jackpot game state) and a special state (for example, a small win game state) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous state,
A plurality of set values including advantageous set values and unfavorable set values with different probabilities of being controlled to at least the advantageous state (for example, from 1, which is the most disadvantageous set value for the player, to the most advantageous set value for the player). a setting means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the setting value change processing shown in FIG. 31) that can be set to any setting value among the values up to a certain value of 6);
Judgment random number generation means (for example, random number circuit 104 and game control counter setting unit that can generate a judgment random number for judging whether to control to the advantageous state and whether to control to the special state 154) and
Based on the judgment random number value generated by the judgment random number generation means and the advantageous state judgment value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means, whether or not to control to the advantageous state Advantageous state determination means for determining the (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 39),
Based on the judgment random number value generated by the judgment random number generation means and the special state judgment value corresponding to the setting value set by the setting means, whether or not to control to the special state Special state determination means for determining the (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 39),
Controllable to the advantageous state when the advantageous state determining means determines to control to the advantageous state, and controllable to the special state when the special state determining means determines to control to the special state Game control means (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 6),
with
Since the number of the advantageous state determination values differs depending on the set value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state differs (for example, as shown in FIGS. 13 to 22, a big hit Part where the probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state differs due to the different number of judgment values),
The advantageous state determination value is a common first common numerical value range (for example, a range of 1020 to 1237) that is common among the plurality of stages of set values that can be set by the setting means within a predetermined numerical range. numeric range) is set at least, and
The advantageous state determination value of the advantageous set value is a non-common numerical range (for example, 1238 to It is set including a non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, which is a range up to the value according to each set value),
The first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are set to be continuous numerical ranges from the first reference value (for example, as shown in FIG. 19, when the set value is 2, A portion where the range from 1020 to 1253, which is the maximum value of the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, is set as a continuous numerical range with 1020 as the jackpot reference value),
As the special state determination value, from a second reference value different from the first reference value in a range different from the first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range, regardless of the setting value set by the setting means The same number is set so as to be a continuous second common numerical range (for example, as shown in FIG. 19, the range from 32767 to 33094 with 32767 as the small hit reference value regardless of the set value is set as the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value)
The special state determination means determines whether or not to control to the special state with a first special state determination value corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information when executing the variable display of the first identification information (for example, , As shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, if the variable special figure is the first special symbol, whether or not to control to a small hit game state with 328 determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value or not), and when executing variable display of the second identification information, it is determined whether or not to control to the special state with a second special state determination value corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information (for example, , As shown in FIGS. 21 and 22, when the variable special figure is the first special symbol, whether or not to control to the small hit game state with 655 determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value part that determines whether
Although the number of the first special state determination value and the number of the second special state determination value are different, they are set so as to be in a continuous numerical range from the common second reference value (for example, in FIGS. 19 to 22 As shown, when the fluctuation special figure is the first special symbol, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is 328, and when the fluctuation special figure is the second special design, the small hit judgment The number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the value is 655, but the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is set as a small hit reference value of 32767, which is a common value regardless of the fluctuation special figure)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether to control to the advantageous state and the processing load to determine whether to control to the special state.
Further, for example, when the first common numerical value range and the non-common numerical value range of the advantageous state determination value are provided over a plurality of numerical ranges, the random value for determination generated by the random value generation means for determination and the advantageous state determination value While it is necessary to determine whether or not to control to an advantageous state based on each numerical range of the state determination value multiple times, in the present invention, the first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value is set to be in a continuous numerical range from the first reference value, the advantageous state determination means generates the first Based on the continuous numerical range including the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range, the determination of whether or not to control to the advantageous state only needs to be performed once. The processing load to be performed can be reduced.
Further, for example, whether or not the judgment random number generated by the judgment random number generating means is a value between the minimum value and the maximum value of the special state judgment value (the judgment random number is the special state judgment value is a value within the numerical range of ), one of the minimum value and the maximum value of the special state determination value becomes the second reference value, The special state determination means can determine whether or not to control to a special state only by specifying the value of the minimum value and the maximum value that is not the second reference value according to the fluctuation special figure. It is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control to the special state.

The gaming machine of means A13 is the gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A12,
A game machine (e.g., a pachinko game machine 1) capable of controlling an advantageous state (e.g., big win game state) advantageous to a player and a special state (e.g., small win game state) more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous state. and
A plurality of set values including advantageous set values and unfavorable set values with different probabilities of being controlled to at least the advantageous state (for example, from 1, which is the most disadvantageous set value for the player, to the most advantageous set value for the player). a setting means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the setting value change processing shown in FIG. 31) that can be set to any setting value among the values up to a certain value of 6);
Judgment random number generation means (for example, random number circuit 104 and game control counter setting unit that can generate a judgment random number for judging whether to control to the advantageous state and whether to control to the special state 154) and
Based on the judgment random number value generated by the judgment random number generation means and the advantageous state judgment value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means, whether or not to control to the advantageous state Advantageous state determination means for determining the (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 39),
Based on the judgment random number value generated by the judgment random number generation means and the special state judgment value corresponding to the setting value set by the setting means, whether or not to control to the special state Special state determination means for determining the (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 39),
Controllable to the advantageous state based on the determination by the advantageous state determining means to control to the advantageous state, and the special state based on the determination by the special state determining means to control to the special state Controllable game control means (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 6),
with
Since the number of the advantageous state determination values differs depending on the set value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state differs (for example, as shown in FIGS. 13 to 22, a big hit The part where the probability of being controlled to the big hit game state differs due to the different number of judgment values),
The advantageous state determination value is a common first common numerical value range (for example, a range of 1020 to 1237) that is common among the plurality of stages of set values that can be set by the setting means within a predetermined numerical range. numeric range) is set at least, and
The advantageous state determination value of the advantageous set value is a non-common numerical range (for example, 1238 to It is set including a non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, which is a range up to the value according to each set value),
The first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are set to be continuous numerical ranges from the first reference value (for example, as shown in FIG. 19, when the set value is 2, A portion where the range from 1020 to 1253, which is the maximum value of the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, is set as a continuous numerical range with 1020 as the jackpot reference value),
The special state determination value is continuous from a second reference value different from the first reference value in a range different from the range of the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the set value with the highest probability of being controlled to the advantageous state. Regardless of the setting value set by the setting means, the same number is set so as to be the second common numerical range (for example, as shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, the numerical range of the small hit is In a range different from the numerical range of the big hit determination value when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 6, if the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, 3267 to 3267 with 32767 as the small hit reference value. It is set as a continuous numerical range of 33094, and is set as a continuous numerical range of 3267 to 33421 with 32767 as a small hit reference value always if the fluctuation special pattern is the second special pattern)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether to control to the advantageous state and the processing load to determine whether to control to the special state.
In particular, since the numerical range of the special condition judgment value does not change due to the numerical range of the advantageous condition judgment value that changes according to the set value, the special condition judgment value can always be specified in the same range, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control to the special state.
Further, for example, when the first common numerical value range and the non-common numerical value range of the advantageous state determination value are provided over a plurality of numerical ranges, the random value for determination generated by the random value generation means for determination and the advantageous state determination value While it is necessary to determine whether or not to control to an advantageous state based on each numerical range of the state determination value multiple times, in the present invention, the first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value is set to be in a continuous numerical range from the first reference value, the advantageous state determination means generates the first Based on the continuous numerical range including the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range, the determination of whether or not to control to the advantageous state only needs to be performed once. The processing load to be performed can be reduced.
Also, for example, if the common numerical range of the special state judgment value is provided over multiple numerical ranges, each numerical range of the judgment random number generated by the judgment random number generation means and the special state judgment value On the other hand, in the present invention, the common numerical range of the special state determination value is set to be a continuous numerical range from the second reference value. Therefore, the special state determination means determines whether or not to control to an advantageous state based on the random number value for determination generated by the random value generation means for determination and the common numerical range of the special state determination value. Since it only needs to be executed once, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control to the special state.

The gaming machine of means A14 is the gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A13,
A game machine (e.g., a pachinko game machine 1) capable of controlling an advantageous state (e.g., big win game state) advantageous to a player and a special state (e.g., small win game state) more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous state. and
A plurality of set values including an advantage judgment value and a disadvantage judgment value with different probabilities of being controlled to at least the above-mentioned advantageous state (for example, from 1, which is the most unfavorable set value for the player, to the most advantageous set value for the player) a setting means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the setting value change processing shown in FIG. 31) that can be set to any setting value among the values up to a certain value of 6);
Judgment random number generation means (for example, random number circuit 104 and game control counter setting unit that can generate a judgment random number for judging whether to control to the advantageous state and whether to control to the special state 154) and
Based on the judgment random number value generated by the judgment random number generation means and the advantageous state judgment value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means, whether or not to control to the advantageous state Advantageous state determination means for determining the (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 39),
Based on the judgment random number value generated by the judgment random number generation means and the special state judgment value corresponding to the setting value set by the setting means, whether or not to control to the special state Special state determination means for determining the (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 39),
Controllable to the advantageous state based on the determination by the advantageous state determining means to control to the advantageous state, and the special state based on the determination by the special state determining means to control to the special state , and the probability of being determined to be controlled to the advantageous state is the normal state corresponding to the normal number, which is the number of advantageous state determination values corresponding to the set value (for example, the normal state or the time saving state) or the advantageous A game control means (for example, CPU 103 that can be controlled to a special state (for example, variable probability state) corresponding to a special number that is the number of advantageous state determination values increased with respect to the normal number based on the state. 6 for executing the special symbol process);
with
Since the number of the advantageous state determination values differs depending on the set value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state differs (for example, as shown in FIGS. 13 to 22, a big hit Part where the probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state differs due to the different number of judgment values),
The advantageous state determination value is a common first common numerical value range (for example, a range of 1020 to 1237) that is common among the plurality of stages of set values that can be set by the setting means within a predetermined numerical range. numeric range) is set at least, and
The advantageous state determination value of the advantageous set value is a non-common numerical range (for example, 1238 to It is set including a non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, which is a range up to the value according to each set value),
The first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are set to be continuous numerical ranges from the first reference value (for example, as shown in FIG. 19, when the set value is 2, A portion where the range from 1020 to 1253, which is the maximum value of the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, is set as a continuous numerical range with 1020 as the jackpot reference value),
The advantageous state determination value is set so as to be a continuous numerical range from the first reference value in the predetermined numerical range, regardless of whether the normal state or the special state (for example, , As shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, the jackpot numerical range is set as a continuous numerical range with 1020 as the jackpot reference value regardless of whether it is a normal state or a probability variable state),
The special state determination value is a second reference different from the first reference value in a range different from the range of the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the special state at the set value with the highest probability of being controlled to the advantageous state. The same number is set regardless of whether the setting value set by the setting means and the normal state or the special state is set so that the second common numerical range is continuous from the value (for example, As shown in FIGS. 19 to 22, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is 1020 to 1346 or 1020 to 1674, which is the numerical range of the big hit determination value when 6 is set as the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1. In a range different from the numerical range of , if the variable special figure is the first special symbol, regardless of whether the set value or game state is the normal state, the time saving state, or the probability variable state, always 32767 as a small hit reference value It is set as a continuous numerical range of 3267 to 33094, and if the variable special pattern is the second special pattern, the set value and game state are normal state, time saving state, probability variable state Always 32767 regardless of whether Part set as a continuous numerical range of 3267 to 33421 as a small hit reference value)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether to control to the advantageous state and the processing load to determine whether to control to the special state.
In particular, since the numerical range of the special state determination value does not change due to the numerical range of the advantageous state determination value that changes according to the set value, the special state determination means does not change according to the set value. Accordingly, the numerical range of the special state determination value can always be specified within the same range, so the processing load for determining whether or not to control to the special state can be reduced.
Furthermore, since the numerical range of the special state determination value does not change according to the set value, the special state determination means always sets the numerical range of the special state determination value regardless of the set value. Since it suffices to specify the same numerical range, the processing load for determining whether or not to control to the special state can be reduced.
Further, for example, when the first common numerical value range and the non-common numerical value range of the advantageous state determination value are provided over a plurality of numerical ranges, the random value for determination generated by the random value generation means for determination and the advantageous state determination value While it is necessary to determine whether or not to control to an advantageous state based on each numerical range of the state determination value multiple times, in the present invention, the first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value is set to be in a continuous numerical range from the first reference value, the advantageous condition determination means generates a common value for the judgment random number value generated by the judgment random value generation means and the advantageous condition judgment value. A process of determining whether or not to control to an advantageous state because it is only necessary to execute the determination once to determine whether to control to an advantageous state based on the continuous numerical range including the range and the non-common numerical range. load can be reduced.
Further, for example, when the second common numerical value range of the special state determination value is provided over a plurality of numerical ranges, each numerical value of the judgment random number generated by the judgment random number generation means and the special state judgment value While it is necessary to determine whether or not to control to a special state based on the range a plurality of times, in the present invention, the second common numerical range of the special state determination value is a continuous numerical range from the second reference value. Therefore, the special state determination means controls to an advantageous state based on the second common numerical value range of the special state determination value and the random number value for determination generated by the random value generation means for determination. Since it is only necessary to perform the determination of whether or not to be in the special state only once, the processing load for determining whether or not to control to the special state can be reduced.

The gaming machine of means A15 is the gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A14,
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
A plurality of set values including advantageous set values and unfavorable set values with different probabilities of being controlled to at least the advantageous state (for example, from 1, which is the most disadvantageous set value for the player, to the most advantageous set value for the player). a setting means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the setting value change processing shown in FIG. 31) that can be set to any setting value among the values up to a certain value of 6);
Judgment random number generating means (for example, random number circuit 104 or game control counter setting unit 154) capable of generating a judgment random number for judging whether or not to control to the advantageous state,
Based on the judgment random number value generated by the judgment random number generation means and the advantageous state judgment value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means, whether or not to control to the advantageous state Advantageous state determination means for determining the (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 39),
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process shown in FIG. 6) that can be controlled to the advantageous state based on the fact that the advantageous state determination means has determined to control to the advantageous state;
with
Since the number of the advantageous state determination values differs depending on the set value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state differs (for example, as shown in FIGS. 13 to 22, a big hit Part where the probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state differs due to the different number of judgment values),
The advantageous state determination value is a common numerical range (for example, a common numerical range of jackpot determination values in the range of 1020 to 1237) that can be set by the setting means in a predetermined numerical range. ) is at least set and
The advantageous state determination value of the advantageous set value is a non-common numerical range (for example, 1238 to each set value ( 2 to 6 values excluding 1) is set including a non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, which is a range up to the value according to
The common numerical range is set to be a continuous numerical range from a predetermined reference value (for example, as shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, 1020 is the big hit reference value, and the range of 1020 to 1237 is the big hit determination the portion set to a common numeric range of values),
The non-common numerical range is set to be a continuous numerical range from a specific reference value different from the predetermined reference value in a range different from the common numerical range (for example, shown in FIGS. 45 and 46 So, when the set value is 2 to 6, with 60000 as the reference value, the range from 60000 to the value according to the set value is set to the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, a common numerical range and a non-common numerical range are set as the numerical range of the advantageous state determination value, and only the non-common numerical range is changed to control the advantageous state for each set value. Since it is possible to vary the probabilities of the game being played, it is possible to reduce the development load of the game machine regarding the set values. In particular, in the present invention, the reference value of the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination values is set to the minimum value of the non-common numerical range and a value greater than the maximum value of the common numerical range of the advantageous state determination values. By setting the reference value of the non-common numerical range of the state judgment value to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range and a value smaller than the minimum value of the common numerical range of the advantageous state judgment value, the non-common To further reduce the development load of a game machine with respect to set values since the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of advantageous state determination values do not overlap even if the number of advantageous state determination values included in the numerical range increases. can be done.

The gaming machine of means A16 is the gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A14,
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
Any set value among a plurality of stages of set values with different probabilities of being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, from 1, which is the most unfavorable set value for the player, to 6, which is the most advantageous set value for the player) value) can be set (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the set value change process shown in FIG. 31),
Judgment random number generating means (for example, random number circuit 104 or game control counter setting unit 154) capable of generating a judgment random number for judging whether or not to control to the advantageous state,
Based on the judgment random number value generated by the judgment random number generation means and the advantageous state judgment value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means, whether or not to control to the advantageous state Advantageous state determination means for determining the (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 39),
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process shown in FIG. 6) that can be controlled to the advantageous state based on the fact that the advantageous state determination means has determined to control to the advantageous state;
with
Since the number of the advantageous state determination values differs depending on the set value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state differs (for example, as shown in FIGS. 13 to 22, a big hit Part where the probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state differs due to the different number of judgment values),
As the advantageous state determination value, in a predetermined numerical range, a common numerical range for each set value that can be set by the setting means (for example, a common numerical range of jackpot determination values in the range of 1020 to 1237); A non-common numerical range for each set value that can be set by the setting means (for example, a non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value that is a range from 1238 to a value corresponding to each set value (all values 1 to 6) ) and
The common numerical range is set to be a continuous numerical range from a predetermined reference value (for example, as shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, 1020 is the big hit reference value, and the range of 1020 to 1237 is the big hit determination the portion set to a common numeric range of values),
The non-common numerical range is set to be a continuous numerical range from a specific reference value different from the predetermined reference value in a range different from the common numerical range (for example, shown in FIGS. 45 and 46 So, when the set value is 2 to 6, with 60000 as the reference value, the range from 60000 to the value according to the set value is set to the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, a common numerical range and a non-common numerical range are set as the numerical range of the advantageous state determination value, and only the non-common numerical range is changed to control the advantageous state for each set value. Since it is possible to vary the probabilities of the game being played, it is possible to reduce the development load of the game machine regarding the set values. In particular, in the present invention, the reference value of the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination values is set to the minimum value of the non-common numerical range and a value greater than the maximum value of the common numerical range of the advantageous state determination values. By setting the reference value of the non-common numerical range of the state judgment value to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range and a value smaller than the minimum value of the common numerical range of the advantageous state judgment value, the non-common To further reduce the development load of a game machine with respect to set values since the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of advantageous state determination values do not overlap even if the number of advantageous state determination values included in the numerical range increases. can be done.

The gaming machine of means A17 is the gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A16,
A game machine (e.g., a pachinko game machine 1) capable of controlling an advantageous state (e.g., big win game state) advantageous to a player and a special state (e.g., small win game state) more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous state. and
A plurality of stages of set values including advantageous set values and unfavorable set values with different probabilities of being controlled to at least the advantageous state (for example, setting values from 1, which is the most unfavorable set value for the player, to the most advantageous set value for the player) 6), a setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value change processing shown in FIG. 31);
Judgment random number generation means (for example, random number circuit 104 and game control counter setting unit that can generate a judgment random number for judging whether to control to the advantageous state and whether to control to the special state 154) and
Based on the judgment random number value generated by the judgment random number generation means and the advantageous state judgment value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means, whether or not to control to the advantageous state Advantageous state determination means for determining the (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 39),
Based on the judgment random number value generated by the judgment random number generation means and the special state judgment value corresponding to the setting value set by the setting means, whether or not to control to the special state Special state determination means for determining the (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 39),
Controllable to the advantageous state based on the determination by the advantageous state determining means to control to the advantageous state, and the special state based on the determination by the special state determining means to control to the special state Controllable game control means (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 6),
with
Since the number of the advantageous state determination values differs depending on the set value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state differs (for example, as shown in FIGS. 13 to 22, a big hit Part where the probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state differs due to the different number of judgment values),
The advantageous state determination value has at least a common numerical range (for example, a common numerical range of jackpot determination values in the range of 1020 to 1237) common to each set value that can be set by the setting means within a predetermined numerical range. is set and
The advantageous state determination value of the advantageous set value is a non-common numerical range not set in the common numerical range and the advantageous state determination value of the disadvantageous set value (for example, 1238 to each setting Non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, which is the range up to the value according to the value)
The common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are set so as to be continuous numerical ranges from a predetermined reference value (for example, as shown in FIG. 19, when the set value is 2, 1020 is The part where the range from 1020 as the reference value to 1253, which is the maximum value of the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, is set as a continuous numerical range),
Regardless of the setting value set by the setting means, the special state determination value is set to the same number in a continuous range from the range of the advantageous state determination value (for example, as shown in FIGS. 43 and 44). So, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is set to a numerical range that includes 328 judgment values consecutively to the numerical range of the big hit judgment value, regardless of the set value)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether to control to the advantageous state and the processing load to determine whether to control to the special state.
Especially in the present invention, since the numerical range of the advantageous state determination value and the numerical range of the special state determination value are set continuously, the random number for determination generated by the random number value generation means for determination is Whether it is a value between the minimum and maximum values of the value or the special state judgment value (whether it is within the numerical range of the advantageous state judgment value or not), the random number for judgment generated by the random number generation means for judgment is the minimum value of the numerical range of the advantageous state judgment value. and the maximum value of the numerical range of the special state determination value, or the random value for determination generated by the random value generation means for determination is the maximum value of the numerical range of the advantageous state determination value and the maximum value of the numerical range of the special state judgment value. It is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether to control and the processing load for determining whether to control to a special state.

The gaming machine of means A18 is the gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A17,
It is possible to perform variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol), and an advantageous state for the player (for example, A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled between a jackpot game state) and a special state (for example, a small win game state) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous state,
A plurality of set values including advantageous set values and unfavorable set values with different probabilities of being controlled to at least the advantageous state (for example, from 1, which is the most disadvantageous set value for the player, to the most advantageous set value for the player). a setting means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the setting value change processing shown in FIG. 31) that can be set to any setting value among the values up to a certain value of 6);
Judgment random number generation means (for example, random number circuit 104 and game control counter setting unit that can generate a judgment random number for judging whether to control to the advantageous state and whether to control to the special state 154) and
Based on the judgment random number value generated by the judgment random number generation means and the advantageous state judgment value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means, whether or not to control to the advantageous state Advantageous state determination means for determining the (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 39),
Based on the judgment random number value generated by the judgment random number generation means and the special state judgment value corresponding to the setting value set by the setting means, whether or not to control to the special state Special state determination means for determining the (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 39),
Controllable to the advantageous state based on the determination by the advantageous state determining means to control to the advantageous state, and the special state based on the determination by the special state determining means to control to the special state Controllable game control means (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 6),
with
Since the number of the advantageous state determination values differs depending on the set value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state differs (for example, as shown in FIGS. 13 to 22, a big hit Part where the probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state differs due to the different number of judgment values),
The advantageous state determination value is a common first common numerical value range (for example, a range of 1020 to 1237) that is common among the plurality of stages of set values that can be set by the setting means within a predetermined numerical range. numeric range) is set at least, and
The advantageous state determination value of the advantageous set value is a non-common numerical range (for example, 1238 to It is set including a non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, which is a range up to the value according to each set value),
The first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are set to be continuous numerical ranges from the first reference value (for example, as shown in FIG. 19, when the set value is 2, A portion where the range from 1020 to 1253, which is the maximum value of the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, is set as a continuous numerical range with 1020 as the jackpot reference value),
As the special state determination value, from a second reference value different from the first reference value in a range different from the first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range, regardless of the setting value set by the setting means The same numbers are set so as to form a continuous second common numerical range,
The advantageous condition determination value is set to be a continuous numerical range from the first reference value within the predetermined numerical range (for example, as shown in FIG. 19, regardless of the set value, 32767 Part where the range from 32767 to 33094 is set as a common numerical range of the small hit determination value as the small hit reference value),
The special state determination means determines whether or not to control to the special state with a first special state determination value corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information when executing the variable display of the first identification information (for example, , As shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, if the variable special figure is the first special symbol, whether or not to control to a small hit game state with 328 determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value or not), and when executing variable display of the second identification information, it is determined whether or not to control to the special state with a second special state determination value corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information (for example, , As shown in FIGS. 21 and 22, when the variable special figure is the first special symbol, whether or not to control to the small hit game state with 655 determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value part that determines whether
Although the number of the first special state determination value and the number of the second special state determination value are different, the probability of being controlled to the most advantageous state is set so that the numerical range is continuous from the common second reference value. is set to a range different from the range of the advantageous state determination value in the value (for example, as shown in FIGS. 19 to 22, if the fluctuation special figure is the first special symbol, the numerical range of the small hit determination value The number of judgment values included in is 328, and if the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, the number of judgment values contained in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is 655, but the numerical value of the small hit judgment value The range is different from the numerical range of 1020 to 1346, which is the numerical range of the jackpot determination value in the variable probability state when 6 is set as the set value in the pachinko game machine 1. 32767 as the small hit reference value. , If the fluctuation special figure is the first special pattern, it is set to the numerical range of 32767 to 33094, and if the fluctuation special figure is the second special design, the part that is set to the numerical range of 32767 to 33421)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether to control to the advantageous state and the processing load to determine whether to control to the special state.
In particular, since the numerical range of the special state determination value does not change due to the numerical range of the advantageous state determination value that changes according to the set value, the special state determination means does not change according to the set value. Accordingly, the numerical range of the special state determination value can always be specified within the same range, so the processing load for determining whether or not to control to the special state can be reduced.
Further, for example, when the first common numerical value range and the non-common numerical value range of the advantageous state determination value are provided over a plurality of numerical ranges, the random value for determination generated by the random value generation means for determination and the advantageous state determination value While it is necessary to determine whether or not to control to an advantageous state based on each numerical range of the state determination value multiple times, in the present invention, the first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value is set to be in a continuous numerical range from the first reference value, the advantageous state determination means generates the first Based on the continuous numerical range including the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range, the determination of whether or not to control to the advantageous state only needs to be performed once. The processing load to be performed can be reduced.
Also, for example, if the common numerical range of the special state judgment value is provided over multiple numerical ranges, each numerical range of the judgment random number generated by the judgment random number generation means and the special state judgment value On the other hand, in the present invention, the common numerical range of the special state determination value is set to be a continuous numerical range from the second reference value. Therefore, the special state determination means determines whether or not to control to an advantageous state based on the random number value for determination generated by the random value generation means for determination and the common numerical range of the special state determination value. Since it only needs to be executed once, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control to the special state.
Further, for example, whether or not the random number value for judgment generated by the random number value generation means for judgment is a value between the minimum value and the maximum value of the advantageous state judgment value (the random number value for judgment is the advantageous state judgment value is within the numerical range of ), one of the minimum value and the maximum value of the advantageous state determination value is the first reference value, The advantageous state determination means determines whether or not to control to the advantageous state only by specifying the value of the minimum value or the maximum value which is not the first reference value depending on whether the state is the normal state or the special state. can be performed, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control in an advantageous state.
Further, for example, whether or not the judgment random number generated by the judgment random number generating means is a value between the minimum value and the maximum value of the special state judgment value (the judgment random number is the special state judgment value is a value within the numerical range of ), one of the minimum value and the maximum value of the special state determination value becomes the second reference value, The special state determination means can determine whether or not to control to a special state only by specifying the value of the minimum value and the maximum value that is not the second reference value according to the fluctuation special figure. It is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control to the special state.

The gaming machine of means A19 is the gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A18,
It is possible to perform variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol), and an advantageous state for the player (for example, A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled between a jackpot game state) and a special state (for example, a small win game state) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous state,
A plurality of stages of set values including advantageous set values and unfavorable set values with different probabilities of being controlled to at least the advantageous state (for example, setting values from 1, which is the most unfavorable set value for the player, to the most advantageous set value for the player) 6), a setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value change processing shown in FIG. 31);
Judgment random number generation means (for example, random number circuit 104 and game control counter setting unit that can generate a judgment random number for judging whether to control to the advantageous state and whether to control to the special state 154) and
Based on the judgment random number value generated by the judgment random number generation means and the advantageous state judgment value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means, whether or not to control to the advantageous state Advantageous state determination means for determining the (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 39),
Based on the judgment random number value generated by the judgment random number generation means and the special state judgment value corresponding to the setting value set by the setting means, whether or not to control to the special state Special state determination means for determining the (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 39),
Controllable to the advantageous state based on the determination by the advantageous state determining means to control to the advantageous state, and the special state based on the determination by the special state determining means to control to the special state , and the probability of being determined to be controlled to the advantageous state is the normal state corresponding to the normal number, which is the number of advantageous state determination values corresponding to the set value (for example, the normal state or the time saving state) or the advantageous A game control means (for example, CPU 103 that can be controlled to a special state (for example, variable probability state) corresponding to a special number that is the number of advantageous state determination values increased with respect to the normal number based on the state. 6 for executing the special symbol process);
with
Since the number of the advantageous state determination values differs depending on the set value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state differs (for example, as shown in FIGS. 13 to 22, a big hit Part where the probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state differs due to the different number of judgment values),
The advantageous state determination value is a common first common numerical value range (for example, a range of 1020 to 1237) that is common among the plurality of stages of set values that can be set by the setting means within a predetermined numerical range. numeric range) is set at least, and
The advantageous state determination value of the advantageous set value is a non-common numerical range not set in the common numerical range and the advantageous state determination value of the disadvantageous set value (for example, 1238 to each setting Non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, which is the range up to the value according to the value)
The first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are set to be continuous numerical ranges from the first reference value (for example, as shown in FIG. 19, when the set value is 2, A portion where the range from 1020 to 1253, which is the maximum value of the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, is set as a continuous numerical range with 1020 as the jackpot reference value),
As the special state determination value, from a second reference value different from the first reference value in a range different from the first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range, regardless of the setting value set by the setting means The same number is set so as to be a continuous second common numerical range (for example, as shown in FIG. 19, the range from 32767 to 33094 with 32767 as the small hit reference value regardless of the set value The part that is set as the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value),
The advantageous state determination value is set so as to be a continuous numerical range from the first reference value in the predetermined numerical range, regardless of whether the normal state or the special state (for example, , As shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, the jackpot numerical range is set as a continuous numerical range with 1020 as the jackpot reference value regardless of whether it is a normal state or a probability variable state),
The number of the special state determination values is the same number regardless of whether it is the set value set by the setting means and the normal state or the special state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 19 to 22 In addition, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is different from the numerical range of 1020 to 1346 or 1020 to 1674, which is the numerical range of the big hit determination value when 6 is set as the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1 , If the variable special figure is the first special symbol, a continuous numerical range of 3267 to 33094 with 32767 as the small hit reference value regardless of whether the set value or the game state is the normal state, the time saving state, or the probability variable state. If the variable special figure is the second special symbol, regardless of whether the set value or the game state is the normal state, the time saving state, or the probability variable state, 3267 to 33421 as a small hit reference value always 32767 part set as a continuous numerical range of ),
The number of special state determination values is the same number regardless of the setting value set by the setting means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 19 to 22, the numerical range of the small hit is is the first special symbol, regardless of the setting value to be set, it is always set as a continuous numerical range of 3267 to 33094 with a small hit reference value of 32767, and if the fluctuation special symbol is the second special symbol For example, regardless of the setting value that is set, the part that is set as a continuous numerical range of 3267 to 33421 with 32767 as the small hit reference value),
The special state determination means determines whether or not to control to the special state with a first special state determination value corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information when executing the variable display of the first identification information (for example, , As shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, if the variable special figure is the first special symbol, whether or not to control to a small hit game state with 328 determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value or not), and when executing variable display of the second identification information, it is determined whether or not to control to the special state with a second special state determination value corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information (for example, , As shown in FIGS. 21 and 22, when the variable special figure is the first special symbol, whether or not to control to the small hit game state with 655 determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value part that determines whether
Although the number of the first special state determination value and the number of the second special state determination value are different, the probability of being controlled to the most advantageous state is set so that the numerical range is continuous from the common second reference value. is set to a range different from the range of the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the special state in the value (for example, as shown in FIGS. 19 to 22, when the fluctuation special symbol is the first special symbol, The number of determination values included in the numerical range of the hit determination value is 328, and when the variation special symbol is the second special symbol, the number of determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value is 655. The numerical range of the small hit determination value is 32767 in a range different from the numerical range of 1020 to 1346, which is the numerical range of the big hit determination value in the variable probability state when 6 is set as the set value in the pachinko game machine 1. is set to a numerical range of 32767 to 33094 when the fluctuation special figure is the first special symbol, and when the fluctuation special figure is the second special symbol, the numerical range of 32767 to 33421 set part)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether to control to the advantageous state and the processing load to determine whether to control to the special state.
In particular, since the numerical range of the special state determination value does not change due to the numerical range of the advantageous state determination value that changes according to the set value, the special state determination means does not change according to the set value. Accordingly, the numerical range of the special state determination value can always be specified within the same range, so the processing load for determining whether or not to control to the special state can be reduced.
Further, for example, when the first common numerical value range and the non-common numerical value range of the advantageous state determination value are provided over a plurality of numerical ranges, the random value for determination generated by the random value generation means for determination and the advantageous state determination value While it is necessary to determine whether or not to control to an advantageous state based on each numerical range of the state determination value multiple times, in the present invention, the first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value is set to be in a continuous numerical range from the first reference value, the advantageous state determination means generates the first Based on the continuous numerical range including the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range, the determination of whether or not to control to the advantageous state only needs to be performed once. The processing load to be performed can be reduced.
Also, for example, if the common numerical range of the special state judgment value is provided over multiple numerical ranges, each numerical range of the judgment random number generated by the judgment random number generation means and the special state judgment value On the other hand, in the present invention, the common numerical range of the special state determination value is set to be a continuous numerical range from the second reference value. Therefore, the special state determination means determines whether or not to control to an advantageous state based on the random number value for determination generated by the random value generation means for determination and the common numerical range of the special state determination value. Since it only needs to be executed once, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control to the special state.
Further, for example, whether or not the random number value for judgment generated by the random number value generation means for judgment is a value between the minimum value and the maximum value of the advantageous state judgment value (the random number value for judgment is the advantageous state judgment value (whether the value is within the numerical range of or not), one of the minimum value and the maximum value of the advantageous state determination value is the predetermined reference value. The state determination means determines whether or not to control to an advantageous state only by specifying the value of the minimum value or the maximum value which is not the predetermined reference value depending on whether the state is the normal state or the special state. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control to an advantageous state.
Further, for example, whether or not the judgment random number generated by the judgment random number generating means is a value between the minimum value and the maximum value of the special state judgment value (the judgment random number is the special state judgment value is a value within the numerical range of ), one of the minimum value and the maximum value of the special state determination value becomes the second reference value, The special state determination means can determine whether or not to control to a special state only by specifying the value of the minimum value and the maximum value that is not the second reference value according to the fluctuation special figure. It is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control to the special state.

The gaming machine of means A20 is the gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A19,
A game machine (e.g., a pachinko game machine 1) capable of controlling an advantageous state (e.g., big win game state) advantageous to a player and a special state (e.g., small win game state) more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous state. and
A plurality of set values including advantageous set values and unfavorable set values with different probabilities of being controlled to at least the advantageous state (for example, from 1, which is the most disadvantageous set value for the player, to the most advantageous set value for the player). a setting means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the setting value change processing shown in FIG. 31) that can be set to any setting value among the values up to a certain value of 6);
Judgment random number generation means (for example, random number circuit 104 and game control counter setting unit that can generate a judgment random number for judging whether to control to the advantageous state and whether to control to the special state 154) and
Based on the judgment random number value generated by the judgment random number generation means and the advantageous state judgment value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means, whether or not to control to the advantageous state Advantageous state determination means for determining the (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 39),
Based on the judgment random number value generated by the judgment random number generation means and the special state judgment value corresponding to the setting value set by the setting means, whether or not to control to the special state Special state determination means for determining the (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 39),
Controllable to the advantageous state based on the determination by the advantageous state determining means to control to the advantageous state, and the special state based on the determination by the special state determining means to control to the special state Controllable game control means (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 6),
with
Since the number of the advantageous state determination values differs depending on the set value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state differs (for example, as shown in FIGS. 13 to 22, a big hit Part where the probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state differs due to the different number of judgment values),
The advantageous state determination value is a common first common numerical value range (for example, a range of 1020 to 1237) that is common among the plurality of stages of set values that can be set by the setting means within a predetermined numerical range. numeric range) is set at least, and
The advantageous state determination value of the advantageous set value is a non-common numerical range (for example, 1238 to each set It is set including a non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, which is a range up to the value according to the value (2 to 6 values excluding 1),
The first common numerical range is set to be a continuous numerical range from the first reference value (for example, as shown in FIG. 19, when the set value is 2, 1020 is the big hit reference value. The part where the range from 1020 to 1253, which is the maximum value of the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, is set as a continuous numerical range),
The non-common numerical range is set to be a continuous numerical range from a specific reference value different from the first reference value in a range different from the first common numerical range (for example, FIG. 45 and FIG. As shown in 46, when the set value is 2 to 6, with 60000 as the reference value, the range from 60000 to the value according to the set value is set in the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value)),
Regardless of the setting value set by the setting means, the special state determination value is set in a range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value, the first reference value and the specific reference value. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is the big hit In a range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the judgment value, regardless of the setting value that is set, if the fluctuation special figure is the first special symbol, it is always set in the range of 32767 to 33094, Part that is always set in the range of 3267 to 33421 if the fluctuation special pattern is the second special pattern)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether to control to the advantageous state and the processing load to determine whether to control to the special state. Especially in the present invention, since it is determined whether or not to control to the special state based on the same numerical range of the small hit determination value, the processing load for determining whether to control to the special state can be reduced. In addition, it is possible to reduce the amount of data related to the process of determining whether or not to control to a special state.

The gaming machine of means A21 is the gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A19,
A game machine (e.g., a pachinko game machine 1) capable of controlling an advantageous state (e.g., big win game state) advantageous to a player and a special state (e.g., small win game state) more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous state. and
A setting means (for example, the CPU 103 performs the setting value change processing shown in FIG. 31) that can be set to one of a plurality of stages of setting values (for example, 1 to 6) with different probabilities of being controlled to the advantageous state. part to execute) and
Judgment random number generation means (for example, random number circuit 104 and game control counter setting unit that can generate a judgment random number for judging whether to control to the advantageous state and whether to control to the special state 154) and
Based on the judgment random number value generated by the judgment random number generation means and the advantageous state judgment value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means, whether or not to control to the advantageous state Advantageous state determination means for determining the (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 39),
Based on the judgment random number value generated by the judgment random number generation means and the special state judgment value corresponding to the setting value set by the setting means, whether or not to control to the special state Special state determination means for determining the (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 39),
Controllable to the advantageous state based on the determination by the advantageous state determining means to control to the advantageous state, and the special state based on the determination by the special state determining means to control to the special state Controllable game control means (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 6),
with
Since the number of the advantageous state determination values differs depending on the set value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state differs (for example, as shown in FIGS. 13 to 22, a big hit Part where the probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state differs due to the different number of judgment values),
As the advantageous state determination value, in a predetermined numerical range, a first common numerical range common to each set value that can be set by the setting means (for example, a common numerical range of jackpot determination values in the range of 1020 to 1237) and a non-common numerical range (for example, a range from 1238 to a value corresponding to each set value (all values 1 to 6) that is different for each set value that can be set by the setting means). numeric range) and
The common numerical range is set to be a continuous numerical range from the first reference value (for example, as shown in FIG. 19, when the set value is 2, 1020 is the big hit reference value and The part where the range up to 1253, which is the maximum value of the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, is set as a continuous numerical range),
The non-common numerical range is set to be a continuous numerical range from a specific reference value different from the first reference value in a range different from the common numerical range (for example, in FIGS. 45 and 46 As shown, when the set value is 2 to 6, with 60000 as the reference value, the range from 60000 to the value according to the set value is set in the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value),
Regardless of the setting value set by the setting means, the special state determination value is set in a range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value, the first reference value and the specific reference value. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is the big hit determination value In a range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range, regardless of the setting value that is set, if the fluctuation special figure is the first special symbol, it is always set in the range of 32767 to 33094, and the fluctuation special If the figure is the second special symbol, the part that is always set in the range of 3267 to 33421)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether to control to the advantageous state and the processing load to determine whether to control to the special state. Especially in the present invention, since it is determined whether or not to control to the special state based on the same numerical range of the small hit determination value, the processing load for determining whether to control to the special state can be reduced. In addition, it is possible to reduce the amount of data related to the process of determining whether or not to control to a special state.

The gaming machine of means B1 is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be set to one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 6) having different advantages for a player,
Game control means (for example, CPU 103) that controls the progress of the game;
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) for controlling production based on commands output from the game control means,
An extraction means (eg, S101 in FIG. 6) for extracting random values (eg, MR1 to MR3),
The game control means is
variable display can be executed based on the random value extracted from the extracting means (for example, S112 in FIG. 6);
Output a specific command (eg, random number transmission commands 1 to 4) obtained by processing the random value (eg, step Sc031 in FIG. 49) to the effect control means (eg, step Sc032 in FIG. 49, S27 in FIG. 4 ),
The production control means restores the random number value from the specific command output from the game control means (for example, step Sc042 in FIG. 50), and the production corresponding to the variable display based on the restored random number value ( For example, pre-reading notice effect) is controlled (for example, step Sc066 in FIG. 51).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to reduce pressure on the capacity of the main side as the game control means.

The gaming machine of means B2 is the gaming machine according to means B1,
The specific command is a command (for example, random value transmission commands 1 to 4) for prefetching to specify a variable display pattern for executing variable display.
According to such a configuration, the variable display pattern is specified by the sub-side as the effect control means by pre-reading without pre-reading the variable display pattern on the main side, so that the pressure on the capacity of the main side can be reduced. can.

The gaming machine of means B3 is the gaming machine according to means B1 or means B2,
The specific command is a command configured by converting the random value extracted from the extracting means from a decimal number to a hexadecimal number and dividing the converted value into a plurality of commands (for example, FIG. 11-3),
The game control means outputs the plurality of commands collectively (for example, step Sc032 in FIG. 49 and S27 in FIG. 4).
According to such a configuration, by collectively outputting a plurality of commands, the variable display pattern is specified on the sub side as the effect control means, so that the pressure on the capacity of the main side can be reduced.

The gaming machine of means B4 is the gaming machine according to means B3,
The production control means restores the random value by analyzing the plurality of commands in a predetermined order (eg, FIG. 11-3) (eg, step Sc042 in FIG. 50),
It further comprises storage means (for example, step Sc048 in FIG. 50) for storing the variable display pattern command based on the restored random number value.
According to such a configuration, since the variable display pattern is specified on the sub side using the variable display pattern command based on the random value restored on the sub side, it is possible to reduce the pressure on the capacity of the main side. .

The gaming machine of means B5 is the gaming machine according to any one of means B2 to means B4,
The game control means outputs a classification command (for example, a variation pattern distribution state designation command) that can specify the classification of the variable display pattern (for example, the category of the variation pattern table) to the effect control means (for example, in FIG. 49 step Sc022, step Sc023, and S27 of FIG. 4).
According to such a configuration, since the variable display pattern is specified on the sub side by outputting the division command capable of specifying the division of the variable display pattern, it is possible to reduce the pressure on the capacity of the main side.

The gaming machine of means B6 is the gaming machine according to any one of means B2 to means B5,
The game control means sets an advantageous state command (for example, a pattern designation command) that can specify whether or not to control to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player as a command different from the specific command. Output to the effect control means (for example, step Sc027, step Sc029, step Sc030 in FIG. 49).
According to such a configuration, the information about the most important win-or-fail result is specified on the main side and output to the sub side, so safety can be enhanced. In addition, since the variable display pattern is specified on the sub side by transmitting the advantageous state command, it is possible to reduce the pressure on the capacity of the main side.

The gaming machine of means B7 is the gaming machine according to means B5 or means B6,
The production control means sets a table for determining a variable display pattern based on the division command and the advantageous state command (for example, step Sc045 and step Sc047 in FIG. 50), and the set table and the restored random number value, the effect corresponding to the variable display is controlled (for example, step Sc048 in FIG. 50, step Sc066 in FIG. 51).
According to such a configuration, the effect corresponding to the variable display is controlled from the table set based on the classification command and the advantageous state command and the restored random number value, so the pressure on the capacity of the main side is reduced. can do.

The gaming machine of means B8 is the gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to means B7,
As an effect corresponding to the variable display, a look-ahead effect related to the variable display that triggered the transmission of the specific command is executed (for example, step Sc066 in FIG. 51).
According to such a configuration, since the variable display pattern is specified on the sub side and the look-ahead effect regarding the variable display is executed, the pressure on the capacity of the main side can be reduced.

The gaming machine of means C1 is
When a specific display result (for example, a big win pattern) is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, it is possible to control to an advantageous state (for example, a big win game state) for the player, and the specific display result is the display result of the variable display. A gaming machine that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a small winning game state) different from the advantageous state when a special display result (for example, a small winning pattern) different from the display result is derived and displayed,
a reserved storage means (for example, a first reserved storage buffer or a second reserved storage buffer) capable of storing information relating to variable display as reserved storage;
Determination means for determining whether to control to the advantageous state and whether to control to the special state based on the reserved storage (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process shown in FIG. 6);
flag information setting means (for example, CPU 103) for setting predetermined flag information according to the determination result of the determination means;
An execution means (for example, CPU 103) that executes a predetermined process according to the determination result of the determination means,
The flag information setting means sets the flag information indicating that the control is to be in the advantageous state and the flag information that is to be controlled in the special state in a common flag storage area (for example, the CPU 103 a portion that executes the processing of steps S557E, 557F, and 557C shown in ),
The execution means is characterized in that it executes a predetermined process based on the flag information set in the common flag storage area (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the process of step S557G shown in FIG. 52). .
According to this feature, compared with the case where the flag information indicating that the control is performed in an advantageous state and the flag information indicating that the control is performed in a special state are set separately, it is possible to reduce the number of LD instructions and the like. It is possible to reduce the pressure on the capacity on the main side as the control means.

Also, the gaming machine of means C2 is the gaming machine of means C1,
The flag information setting means does not simultaneously set the flag information indicating the control to the advantageous state and the flag information indicating the control to the special state (for example, when the CPU 103 sets steps S557E and 557F shown in FIG. 52). , a part that executes the processing of 557C).
According to this feature, since the flag information indicating that the control is in an advantageous state and the flag information indicating that the control is in a special state are set in the same common flag storage area, both are set at the same time. can't happen. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the risk of game machine bugs and cheating.

Further, the gaming machine of means C3 is the gaming machine of means C1 or means C2,
Pattern information storage means (for example, CPU 103 shown in FIG. 52) stores information on symbols to be derived and displayed as display results of variable display in a common pattern storage area irrespective of the type of pattern based on the determination result by the determination means. portion for executing the processing of step S557G shown).
According to this feature, since the information about the pattern is also stored in the common pattern storage area, it is possible to reduce the number of LD commands and the like as compared with the case where they are stored separately. can be reduced.

Further, the gaming machine of means C4 is one of the gaming machines of means C1 to means C3,
Prior to the determination by the determination means, determination means (for example, CPU 103 determines whether to control to the advantageous state and whether to control to the special state based on the reserved storage) a part that executes judgment processing),
The flag information setting means is characterized in that it does not set the flag information based on the judgment result by the judgment means in the common flag storage area.
According to this feature, the flag information based on the determination result (for example, look-ahead result) by the determination means is not set in the common flag storage area, so the risk of bugs and irregularities in the game machine can be reduced.

In addition, the gaming machine of means C5 is one of the gaming machines of means C1 to means C4,
The flag information setting means erases the flag information set in the common flag storage area before the decision is made by the decision means (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the processing of step S557A shown in FIG. 52). .
This feature can reduce the risk that an unintended value is set in the common flag storage area.

Further, the gaming machine of means C6 is any gaming machine of means C1 to means C5,
The determining means
After determining whether to control to the advantageous state, determine whether to control to the special state,
When it is determined to control to the advantageous state, it is not determined whether to control to the special state (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the processing of steps S557B and 557D shown in FIG. 52).
According to this feature, when it is decided to control to the advantageous state, it is not necessary to decide whether to control to the special state or not, so that the program can be compressed.

Further, the gaming machine of means C7 is any gaming machine of means C1 to means C6,
When the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed, based on the flag information set in the common flag storage area, update means (for example, special symbol stop in step S113 shown in FIG. 6) for updating the state related to the game In the process, the game state is updated based on the determination of whether the result of the variable display is a big hit or a small hit (for example, starting a big hit game or a small hit game, or ending a time saving state or a variable probability state ), but the CPU 103 has a portion) that refers to the common buffer at this time.
According to this feature, using the flag information set in the common flag storage area, it is possible to update the state related to gaming (that is, it can also be used for other processes), so the effect of compressing the main side capacity is enhanced. becomes possible.

Further, the gaming machine of means C8 is any gaming machine of means C1 to means C7,
It is possible to control to the advantageous state by performing a variable display, and control to the advantageous state based on the passage of the game medium through the specific area while being controlled to the special state (for example, 1 type 2 amusement machines with seed specs),
Any one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for the player can be set,
While the ratio of control to the advantageous state as a display result of the variable display differs depending on which set value is set, the ratio of control to the special state is the same regardless of which set value is set. (For example, the big hit probability differs according to the set value, but the small hit probability is the same).
According to this feature, it is possible to maintain the interest of the game even in a gaming machine with a high possibility that the setting value is disadvantageous (low setting). Also, even if the frequency of being controlled to a special state is high, there is no need to LD (load) a small hit flag separate from the big hit flag each time, so LD instructions etc. can be reduced. Capacity pressure can be alleviated.

The gaming machine described in means D1 is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be set to one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 6) having different advantages for a player,
Game control means (for example, CPU 103) that controls the progress of the game;
Production control means (production control CPU 120) for controlling production based on commands output from the game control means;
An extraction means (eg, S101 in FIG. 6) for extracting random values (eg, MR1 to MR3),
The game control means is
variable display can be executed based on the random value extracted from the extracting means (for example, S112 in FIG. 6);
The random value is processed (eg, step Sc031 in FIG. 49) and a specific command (eg, random value transmission commands 1 to 4) is output to the effect control means (eg, step Sc032 in FIG. 49, S27 in FIG. 5 ),
First processing executing means (for example, CPU 103) for executing the first processing (for example, special symbol variation processing in FIG. 56) according to the timer value;
Second processing execution means (for example, CPU 103) for executing the second processing (for example, special symbol stop processing in FIG. 57) according to the timer value;
A third process (for example, timer update process) and a third process execution means (for example, CPU 103),
The production control means restores the random number value from the specific command output from the game control means (for example, step Sc042 in FIG. 50), and the production corresponding to the variable display based on the restored random number value ( For example, control (for example, step Sc066 in FIG. 51),
The first process executing means executes the first process based on the timer value information updated in the third process,
The second process executing means is characterized in that it executes the second process based on the timer value information updated in the third process.
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the pressure on the capacity of the main side as the game control means.

In addition, the gaming machine of means D2 is
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
A plurality of set values including advantageous set values and unfavorable set values with different probabilities of being controlled to at least the advantageous state (for example, from 1, which is the most disadvantageous set value for the player, to the most advantageous set value for the player). a setting means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the setting value change processing shown in FIG. 31) that can be set to any setting value among the values up to a certain value of 6);
Judgment random number generating means (for example, random number circuit 104 or game control counter setting unit 154) capable of generating a judgment random number for judging whether or not to control to the advantageous state,
Based on the judgment random number value generated by the judgment random number generation means and the advantageous state judgment value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means, whether or not to control to the advantageous state Advantageous state determination means for determining the (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 39),
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process shown in FIG. 6) that can be controlled to the advantageous state based on the fact that the advantageous state determination means has determined to control to the advantageous state;
with
Since the number of the advantageous state determination values differs depending on the set value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state differs (for example, as shown in FIGS. 13 to 22, a big hit The part where the probability of being controlled to the big hit game state differs due to the different number of judgment values),
The advantageous state determination value is a common numerical range (for example, a common numerical range of jackpot determination values in the range of 1020 to 1237) that can be set by the setting means in a predetermined numerical range. ) is at least set and
The advantageous state determination value of the advantageous set value is a non-common numerical range not set in the common numerical range and the advantageous state determination value of the disadvantageous set value (for example, 1238 to each setting Non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, which is the range up to the value according to the value)
The common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are set to be continuous numerical ranges from a predetermined reference value (for example, as shown in FIGS. The part that is set as a continuous numerical range with 1020 as the jackpot reference value regardless of whether it is a probability variable state).
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control to an advantageous state, so it is possible to reduce the pressure on the capacity of the main side as the game control means.
Also, in the gaming machine of means D2,
First processing executing means (for example, CPU 103) for executing the first processing (for example, special symbol variation processing in FIG. 56) according to the timer value;
Second processing execution means (for example, CPU 103) for executing the second processing (for example, special symbol stop processing in FIG. 57) according to the timer value;
A third process (for example, timer update a third process execution means (for example, CPU 103) that executes the process);
The first process executing means executes the first process based on the timer value information updated in the third process,
A further feature may be that the second process executing means executes the second process based on information on the timer value updated in the third process.
According to this feature, it is possible to further reduce the pressure on the capacity of the main side as the game control means.

In addition, the gaming machine of means D3 is
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of performing variable display,
Advantageous state control means (for example, the CPU 103 can control an advantageous state (for example, a big win game state) that is advantageous to the player when a specific display result (for example, a big win pattern) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display. a part that executes steps S114 to S117);
When a special display result (for example, a small winning pattern) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, it can be controlled to a special state (for example, a small winning game state) different from the advantageous state. a special state control means (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes steps S118 to S120);
Display result determining means (eg, CPU 103 executes steps S59A, S64A, S59B, and S64B);
Specific state control means (for example, CPU103 steps S2207A, S2212A, a part that executes S2207B and S2212B),
The determination value includes a specific determination value (for example, a determination value for judging a big hit) for determining to derive and display the specific display result as the display result of the variable display, and the special display as the display result of the variable display. A special judgment value (for example, a judgment value for small hit judgment) for determining to derive and display the result,
A setting means (for example, the CPU 103 changes the setting value in FIG. the part that executes the processing),
The number of special determination values is common regardless of the setting value, and is common when being controlled to the non-specific state and when being controlled to the specific state (Fig. 58-2 and Fig. 58-3).
According to this feature, it is possible to realize appropriate game characteristics, and since the capacity can be compressed by sharing the number of special judgment values, the pressure on the capacity of the main side as the game control means is reduced. be able to.
Also, in the gaming machine of means D3,
First processing executing means (for example, CPU 103) for executing the first processing (for example, special symbol variation processing in FIG. 56) according to the timer value;
Second processing execution means (for example, CPU 103) for executing the second processing (for example, special symbol stop processing in FIG. 57) according to the timer value;
A third process (for example, timer update process) and a third process execution means (for example, CPU 103),
The first process executing means executes the first process based on the timer value information updated in the third process,
A further feature may be that the second process executing means executes the second process based on information on the timer value updated in the third process.
According to this feature, it is possible to further reduce the pressure on the capacity of the main side as the game control means.

In addition, the gaming machine of means D4 is
It is possible to control to an advantageous state (for example, big win game state) advantageous to the player, and set to one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values 1 to 6) with different degrees of advantage for the player. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of
Predetermined effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect in one of a plurality of types of effect modes setting suggestion based on, or a part that can execute reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or PT-9),
The effect mode of the predetermined effect includes a special mode that suggests control to the advantageous state (for example, a ready-to-reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9, which is a special pattern), and a suggestion about setting. a specific aspect (for example, a setting suggestion based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7, which are specific patterns),
The predetermined effect executing means, when both the predetermined effect of the special mode and the predetermined effect of the specific mode can be executed (for example, the timing when a predetermined period has passed since the variable display of the symbol was started (variable display mode is a timing before becoming a reach)), it is possible to execute the predetermined effect of the special mode with priority over the predetermined effect of the specific mode (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is the first embodiment shown in FIG. 59- 2, when the pattern PT-9 is won in the lottery for the ready-to-win announcement, the execution of the ready-to-win announcement (high) based on the pattern PT-9 is decided in step S294 with priority over the setting suggestions. If the setting suggestion (high) based on patterns PT-5 to PT-7 is not won even if the setting suggestion lottery is executed in step S296, reach based on pattern PT-8 in step S301 A part that prioritizes the execution of notice (low) over setting suggestion (low) based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-4, etc. / Production control CPU 120, reach notice (high)> setting suggestion Part that determines the execution of the production based on any of the patterns PT1 to PT-9 at the ratio of (high) > reach notice (low) > setting suggestion (low) (see Figure 59-7 of modification 1 )).
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the performance from being inappropriate due to the execution of the predetermined performance in the specific mode when the control is performed in the advantageous state.
Also, the gaming machine of means D4 may be applied to the gaming machines of means D1 to D3. By doing so, it is possible to appropriately realize the effect related to the set value after reducing the pressure on the capacity of the main side as the game control means.

In addition, the gaming machine of means D5 is
Any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3 or setting values 1 to 6) can be set, and an advantageous state (for example, a big hit) that is advantageous to the player at a different rate according to the set value game state) controllable gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1),
A specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect (for example, notice X, notice Y, notice Z, etc.) suggesting that the control is in the advantageous state,
The specific effect executing means determines the appearance rate of the specific effect when the set value is a first set value, and the appearance of the specific effect when the set value is a second set value different from the first set value. The specific effect is executed so that the rate and are within the same or substantially the same range (for example, FIGS. 60-1 (B), (C), and FIGS. 60-2 to 60-3). there is
According to this feature, since the specific effect can be executed with a common appearance rate regardless of the set value, the interest in the game can be improved.
Also, the game machine of means D5 may be applied to the game machines of means D1 to D3. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the pressure on the capacity of the main side as the game control means, and to appropriately execute the specific effect regardless of the set value.

Also, the gaming machine of means D6 is the gaming machine of means D1,
Said 3rd process execution means is characterized by updating a plurality of types of timer values (for example, timer values of special figure fluctuation time timer and normal figure fluctuation time timer) in said 3rd process.
According to this feature, since compression can be achieved in a plurality of processes, pressure on the capacity of the main side as game control means can be reduced.

Also, the gaming machine of means D7 is the gaming machine of means D1 or means D6,
Said game control means has a fourth process executing means (for example, CPU 103) for executing a fourth process (for example, special symbol process process of FIG. 54) capable of calling said first process and said second process respectively. death,
In the fourth process, the fourth process executing means updates the specific flag information based on the information of the timer value updated in the third process (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes step S100 in FIG. 54). ,
wherein the first process execution means and the second process execution means can execute different processes depending on whether the specific flag information updated in the fourth process has a predetermined value. Characterized by
According to this feature, since efficient compression is possible, it is possible to reduce pressure on the capacity of the main side as game control means.

The gaming machine of the means E1 is a gaming machine capable of performing a variable display, and when a specific display result (for example, a jackpot pattern) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, it is advantageous for the player. Advantageous state control means (for example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes steps S114 to S117) that can be controlled to a state (for example, a jackpot game state), and a special display result different from the specific display result as the display result of the variable display (for example, Special state control means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes steps S118 to S120) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a small winning game state) different from the advantageous state when the small winning pattern) is derived and displayed , Display result determination means for determining the display result of the variable display using the determination value for determining the display result of the variable display (eg, the determination value for determining the big hit, the determination value for determining the small hit) (for example, CPU 103 executes steps S59A, S64A, S59B, S64B), a non-specific state (e.g., non-probable variable state) and a specific state (e.g., probable variable state) that is more likely to be controlled to an advantageous state than the non-specific state Control to Possible specific state control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes steps S2207A, S2212A, S2207B, and S2212B), and the judgment value determines to derive and display the specific display result as the display result of the variable display. A specific judgment value (for example, a judgment value for judging a big hit) and a special judgment value for determining to derive and display a special display result as a display result of a variable display (for example, a judgment value for judging a small hit) and a setting means (for example, the CPU 103 can set any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values “1” to “6”) having different numbers of specific determination values (for example, the CPU 103 ), the number of special judgment values is common regardless of the set value, and when controlled to a non-specific state and when controlled to a specific state. It is characterized by being common (see FIGS. 58-2 and 58-3). According to such a configuration, appropriate playability can be realized.

The gaming machine of the means E1 is the gaming machine described in the means E2, and is capable of executing the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information in parallel (for example, the variable display of the first special symbol). and variable display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel) variable display execution means (for example, the CPU 103 performs steps S110A to S113A of the first special symbol process process (step S25A) and the second special symbol process process (Part that executes processing corresponding to steps S110A to S113A of step S25B)) and a special state (for example, a special state ( (for example, a part for the CPU 103 to execute steps S2208A, S2213A, S2214A, S2219A, S2220A, S2208B, S2213B, S2214B, S2219B, and S2220B) controllable to the KT state). may be According to such a configuration, appropriate playability can be realized in a gaming machine that can be controlled to a special state.

The gaming machine of means E3 is the gaming machine described in means E2, and the special state control means has a first special state (for example, a first KT state) as a special state and a higher advantage than the first special state. It may be configured to be controllable to a high second special state (eg, second KT state). According to such a configuration, appropriate playability can be realized in a gaming machine that can be controlled to the second special state.

The gaming machine of the means E3 is the gaming machine according to the means E2 or E3, and executes a special suggestive effect corresponding to the advantage of the special state (for example, a small winning RUSH continuation suggestive effect shown in FIGS. 58-37). Possible special suggestion effect execution means (for example, step S930 according to the process table including the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect selected in step S928 in the effect control CPU 120 and the part that executes the effect process (step S172) during variable display) It may be configured as According to such a configuration, the interest in the game can be improved by suggesting the advantage of the special state.

The gaming machine of the means E5 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means E1 to E4, and the display result of the variable display is a specific display result (for example, a big win pattern) and a special display result (for example, a small win pattern). When a variable display in which a predetermined display result (for example, a lost symbol) is derived and displayed is executed, a set value suggesting effect (for example, a set value suggesting effect shown in FIGS. 58-35) that suggests a set value is performed. Executable setting value suggesting effect execution means (for example, a portion that executes step S930 and variable display effect processing (step S172) according to a process table including the set value suggesting effect selected in step S928 in the effect control CPU 120) It may be configured as According to such a configuration, by executing the set value suggesting effect, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

The gaming machine of means E6 is a gaming machine according to any one of means E1 to means E5, and the special state control means can control a plurality of types of special states (for example, small wins A to C), Using a special type determination value for determining the type of special state (for example, small hit type determination value), special type determination means for determining the type of special state (for example, CPU103 steps S67A, S67B part that executes ), and the number of special type determination values is common regardless of the setting value (see FIG. 58-5). According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize more appropriate playability.

The gaming machine of means E7 is the gaming machine according to any one of means E1 to means E6, and the advantageous state control means controls a plurality of types of advantageous states (for example, 16R probability variable jackpot, 9R probability variable jackpot, 6R probability variable jackpot, 6R normal jackpot, 2R probability variable jackpot, 2R normal jackpot) can be controlled, and the type of advantageous state is determined using an advantage type determination value (for example, jackpot type determination value) for determining the type of advantageous state. Advantageous type determination means (for example, a portion where CPU 103 executes steps S62A and S62B) is provided, and the number of advantageous type determination values is configured to be common regardless of set values (see FIG. 58-4). good too. According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize more appropriate playability.

The gaming machine of the means E8 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means E1 to E7, and uses a variable display mode determination value (for example, a variation pattern determination value) for determining the variable display mode. Variable display mode determination means for determining the display mode (for example, the CPU 103 executes the process corresponding to step S1703A of the first variation pattern setting process (step S111A) and step S1703A of the second variation pattern setting process), The number of variable display mode determination values may be configured to be common regardless of the set values (see FIG. 58-9). According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize more appropriate playability.

The gaming machine of means F1 is
It is possible to control to an advantageous state (for example, big win game state) advantageous to the player, and set to one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values 1 to 6) with different degrees of advantage for the player. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of
Predetermined effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect in one of a plurality of types of effect modes setting suggestion based on, or a part that can execute reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or PT-9),
The effect mode of the predetermined effect includes a special mode that suggests control to the advantageous state (for example, a ready-to-reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9, which is a special pattern), and a suggestion about setting. a specific aspect (for example, a setting suggestion based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7, which are specific patterns),
The predetermined effect executing means, when both the predetermined effect of the special mode and the predetermined effect of the specific mode can be executed (for example, the timing when a predetermined period has passed since the variable display of the symbol was started (variable display mode is a timing before becoming a reach)), it is possible to execute the predetermined effect of the special mode with priority over the predetermined effect of the specific mode (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is the first embodiment shown in FIG. 59- 2, when the pattern PT-9 is won in the lottery for the ready-to-win announcement, the execution of the ready-to-win announcement (high) based on the pattern PT-9 is decided in step S294 with priority over the setting suggestion. If the setting suggestion (high) based on patterns PT-5 to PT-7 is not won even if the setting suggestion lottery is executed in step S296, reach based on pattern PT-8 in step S301 A part that prioritizes the execution of notice (low) over setting suggestion (low) based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-4, etc. / Production control CPU 120, reach notice (high)> setting suggestion Part that determines the execution of the production based on any of the patterns PT1 to PT-9 at the ratio of (high) > reach notice (low) > setting suggestion (low) (see Figure 59-7 of modification 1 ))
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the performance from being inappropriate due to the execution of the predetermined performance in the specific mode when the control is performed in the advantageous state.

The gaming machine of means F2 is the gaming machine according to means F1,
The special mode includes a first special mode (e.g., reach notice (low)) and a second special mode (e.g., reach notice (high)) and
The predetermined effect execution means is
When both the predetermined effect of the second special mode and the predetermined effect of the specific mode are executable, the predetermined effect of the second special mode is executed with priority over the predetermined effect of the specific mode (for example, , effect control CPU120, in the effect determination process during variable display shown in FIG. A portion that determines the execution of (high) with priority over setting suggestions based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7),
When both the predetermined effect of the first special mode and the predetermined effect of the specific mode can be executed, the predetermined effect of the specific mode can be executed with priority over the predetermined effect of the first special mode. (For example, when the effect control CPU 120 wins any of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 in the setting suggestion lottery in the variable display effect determination process shown in FIG. 59-2 of the first embodiment, step S298 Part that determines the execution of setting suggestion (high) based on any of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 in priority over reach notice (low) based on pattern PT-8)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the interest of the predetermined effect from deteriorating due to excessive restriction on the execution of the predetermined effect of the specific mode.

The gaming machine of means F3 is the gaming machine according to means F1 or means F2,
The specific mode includes a first specific mode (for example, setting suggestion (low)) and a second specific mode (for example, setting suggestion (high )) and
The predetermined effect execution means is
When both the predetermined effect of the second specific mode and the predetermined effect of the special mode are executable, the predetermined effect of the second specific mode is executed with priority over the predetermined effect of the special mode (for example, , the effect control CPU 120, in the effect determination process during variable display shown in FIG. A part that prioritizes the execution of setting suggestions (high) based on any of PT-5 to PT-7 over reach notice (low) based on pattern PT-8),
When both the predetermined effect of the first specific mode and the predetermined effect of the special mode are executable, the predetermined effect of the special mode can be executed with priority over the predetermined effect of the first specific mode. (For example, when the effect control CPU 120 has won the pattern PT-8 in the lottery for the ready-to-win announcement in the effect determination process during variable display shown in FIG. 59-2 of the first embodiment, the pattern PT-8 Part that determines the execution of reach notice (low) based on pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 with priority over setting suggestion (low) based on either)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the interest of the predetermined effect from deteriorating due to the execution of the predetermined effect of the special mode being excessively restricted.

The gaming machine of means F4 is the gaming machine according to any one of means F1 to means F3,
Action prompt notification means capable of executing action prompt notification prompting the player to perform an action (for example, the effect control CPU 120 performs an operation prompt effect to prompt the player to operate the push button 31B during the operation valid period of the push button 31B. executable part) and
Action detection means (for example, push sensor 35B) capable of detecting a specific action (for example, action of operating push button 31B) by the player regardless of whether or not the action promotion notification by the action promotion notification means is being executed. When,
with
The predetermined effect execution means can execute a predetermined effect based on the detection of the specific action by the action detection means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can press the push button 31B during the operation valid period of the push button 31B. When a specific action to be operated is detected by the push sensor 35B, the image Z1 is displayed in response to the operation of the push button 31B regardless of whether or not an operation prompting image prompting the player to operate the push button 31B is displayed. A part that can execute an effect to change to the image Z2 (destroy the paraglider and make it fall).Modified example)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, a player who knows the specific action can execute the predetermined effect at a desired timing by performing the specific action, so that the game interest can be improved.

The gaming machine of means F5 is the gaming machine according to any one of means F1 to means F4,
The predetermined effect is a common effect period during which a common effect is executed regardless of whether the predetermined effect of the special mode or the predetermined effect of the specific mode is executed (for example, either a reach notice or a setting suggestion) A common effect period during which an effect is executed in which the image Z1 fades in from the left side of the display area of the image display device 5 and moves toward the right side of the display area regardless of whether there is a common effect period) and the predetermined special mode. A non-common effect period that can specify whether it is the effect or the predetermined effect of the specific mode (for example, it is possible to specify whether it is a reach notice or a setting suggestion, that is, the number of images Z2 according to the effect pattern is a non-common effect period in which the effect of moving downward in the display area of the image display device 5 is executed) (see FIG. 59-5)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by having the common effect period, it is possible to effectively increase the expectation of the player as to whether the predetermined effect of the special mode or the predetermined effect of the specific mode will be executed. You can improve your interest.

The gaming machine of means F6 is the gaming machine according to any one of means F1 to F5,
The predetermined effect execution means is capable of executing a predetermined effect of a special mode that suggests control to the advantageous state and also suggests settings (for example, it is possible to execute both the reach notice and the setting suggestion). Sometimes, a specific image suggesting both the big win and the highest setting (set value 6) is displayed (for example, when the paraglider image Z1 is displayed, an image of a moving paraglider with a character appearing, etc.) is displayed. part, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to effectively increase the player's expectation for the execution of the special mode or the predetermined effect of the special mode different from the specific mode, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of means G1 is
Any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3 or setting values 1 to 6) can be set, and an advantageous state (for example, a big hit) that is advantageous to the player at a different rate according to the set value game state) controllable gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1),
A specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect (for example, notice X, notice Y, notice Z, etc.) that suggests being controlled to the advantageous state,
The specific effect executing means determines the appearance rate of the specific effect when the set value is a first set value, and the appearance of the specific effect when the set value is a second set value different from the first set value. The specific effect is executed so that the rate and are within the same or substantially the same range (for example, FIGS. 60-1(B), (C), FIGS. 60-2 to 60-3).
According to such a configuration, the specific effect can be executed with a common appearance rate regardless of the set value, so that the interest in the game is improved.

The gaming machine of means G2 is the gaming machine according to means G1,
The specific effect executing means varies the execution ratio of the specific effect when not controlled to the advantageous state according to a set value (for example, FIGS. 60-1(B), (C), FIGS. -4) You may do so.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably adjust the appearance rate of the specific effect while maintaining the appearance rate of the specific effect when controlled to be in an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of means G3 is the gaming machine according to means G1 or means G2,
The specific effect executing means varies the execution ratio of the specific effect when controlled to the advantageous state according to a set value (for example, FIG. 60-1(B), FIGS. 60-2 to 60-4). You may do so.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably adjust the appearance rate of the specific effect.

The gaming machine of means G4 is the gaming machine according to any one of means G1 to means G3,
The ratio (for example, reliability) controlled to the advantageous state when the specific effect is executed is the same or within substantially the same range regardless of the setting value (for example, FIG. 60-1 (B), FIG. 60 -3, Fig. 60-4).
According to such a configuration, the specific effect is executed with the same appearance rate and reliability regardless of the set values, and it is suggested that the control is performed in an advantageous state, thereby improving interest.

The gaming machine of means G5 is the gaming machine according to any one of means G1 to means G4,
The ratio of controlling to the advantageous state when the specific effect is executed may be changed according to the set value (eg, FIG. 60-1(C), FIG. 60-2).
According to such a configuration, the appearance rate of the specific effect is adjusted, but the reliability is changed, so that the game property of guessing the reliability can be provided, and the interest is improved.

The gaming machine of means G6 is the gaming machine according to any one of means G1 to means G5,
There are a plurality of types of advantageous states with different degrees of advantage for the player,
The specific effect executing means may vary the execution ratio of the specific effect according to a set value for each type of the controlled advantageous state (eg, FIGS. 60-2 to 60-4).
According to such a configuration, by executing the specific effect, it is possible to anticipate a specific advantageous state according to the set value, thereby improving interest. In addition, it is possible to suggest a set value depending on the type of specific effect, which improves interest.

The gaming machine of means G7 is the gaming machine according to any one of means G1 to means G6,
There are a plurality of types of advantageous states with different degrees of advantage for the player,
The specific effect executing means may not change the execution ratio of the specific effect when controlled to the specific advantageous state regardless of the set value (for example, FIGS. 60-2 to 60-4).
According to such a configuration, by executing the specific effect, it is possible to expect a specific advantageous state regardless of the set value, which improves interest.

In addition, in a game machine with a setting function, the setting difference generally refers to the probability of a big win, and the period (time) until a big win changes as the probability of a big win changes. It is used as a word that refers to something. In the case where the execution status of an effect changes with a change in the probability of winning a big hit, the word "setting difference" is sometimes used for the execution status of the effect.

1 pachinko game machine 5 effect display device 11 main board 12 effect control board 103 CPU
120 Production control CPU

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
setting means capable of setting a set value related to the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state;
setting confirmation control means capable of controlling a setting confirmation state in which the setting value set by the setting means can be confirmed;
interrupt processing execution means for executing interrupt processing capable of executing game-related processing;
variable means for changing between a first state advantageous to the player and a second state disadvantageous to the player;
a predetermined game execution means capable of executing a predetermined game a plurality of times for changing the variable means from the second state to the first state during the advantageous state;
variable timing means for timing a change period for changing the variable means to the first state;
normal variable display means for variably displaying the normal identification information and deriving and displaying the display result based on the passage of the game medium through the predetermined area;
normal variable display timing means for timing a normal variable display period for variable display of normal identification information;
special variable display means capable of variably displaying the special identification information and displaying the result of the variable display;
stop period clocking means for timing a variable display stop period from when the variable display of the special identification information is stopped to when the variable display of the next special identification information is started;
and an external output means capable of outputting a specific signal to the outside of the game machine,
The setting confirmation control means is capable of controlling the setting confirmation state when power supply to the game machine is started and before the interrupt process is executed,
The interrupt processing is executed after the setting confirmation state ends, and after the interrupt processing is executed, the setting confirmation state is not controlled until the power supply to the game machine is stopped,
When the power supply to the game machine is stopped while the change period is being clocked, and then the power supply to the game machine is resumed and the setting confirmation state is controlled, the setting confirmation state ends. The timing of the change period is interrupted until the setting confirmation state ends, and the timing of the change period is restarted;
When the power supply to the game machine is stopped while the normal variable display period is being clocked, and then the power supply to the game machine is resumed and the setting confirmation state is controlled, the setting confirmation state is changed. The timing of the normal variable display period is interrupted until the period ends, and the timing of the normal variable display period is resumed when the setting confirmation state is finished,
When the power supply to the game machine is stopped while the variable display stop period is being clocked, and then the power supply to the game machine is restarted and the setting confirmation state is controlled, the setting confirmation state is changed. The timing of the variable display stop period is interrupted until the end of the variable display stop period, and when the setting confirmation state ends, the time measurement of the variable display stop period is resumed,
The external output means is capable of outputting the specific signal when controlled to the setting confirmation state.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images